SERVICE MANUAL RICOH MPC2051 - MPC255 MS - v01

D104/D106
SERVICE MANUAL
006369MIU
MAINFRAME
D104/D106
SERVICE MANUAL
(MAINFRAME)
D104/D106
SERVICE MANUAL
(MAINFRAME)
006369MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2011 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D104 MP C2051 LD 620C Aficio MP C2051 C9120
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 02/2011 Original Printing
D104/D016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRODUCT INFORMATION
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION .......................................................... 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................1-1
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................1-2
1.2.1 MACHINE D104/D106 .......................................................................1-2
OTHER: ................................................................................................1-4
1.3 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................1-6
1.3.2 PAPER PATH ....................................................................................1-8
With options ..........................................................................................1-8
Without options .....................................................................................1-9
1.3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ..............................................................................1-10
1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR
PRODUCTS....................................................................................................1-11
INSTALLATION
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 2-1
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ..............................................................................2-2
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS ...............................................2-2
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................2-2
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ............................................................2-3
2.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS .........................................................................2-3
2.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS .................................................................2-4
2.3 COPIER INSTALLATION............................................................................2-5
2.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ........................................2-5
2.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART.........................................................2-6
2.3.3 ACCESSORY CHECK .......................................................................2-7
2.3.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .........................................................2-9
SM i D104/D016
Tapes and Retainers ...........................................................................2-10
Developer and Toner Bottles ..............................................................2-12
Paper Trays ........................................................................................2-16
Emblem and Decals ............................................................................2-17
Initialize the Developer ........................................................................2-18
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract...........................................2-19
Settings for @Remote Service ............................................................2-20
2.3.5 MOVING THE MACHINE ................................................................2-23
2.3.6 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE...................................................2-24
Main Frame .........................................................................................2-24
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT (D331) ......................................................................2-25
2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .....................................................................2-25
2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................2-26
2.5 PAPER FEED UNIT (D425) ......................................................................2-28
2.5.1 COMPONENT CHECK ....................................................................2-28
2.6 CASTER TABLE (D488) ...........................................................................2-32
2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK ....................................................................2-32
2.7 ARDF (D366) ............................................................................................2-35
2.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK ....................................................................2-35
2.8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329)................................................2-39
2.9 SIDE TRAY (D427) ...................................................................................2-40
2.9.1 COMPONENT CHECK ....................................................................2-40
2.10 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D426) ...................................................................2-43
2.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................2-43
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................2-44
2.11 SHIFT TRAY UNIT (D428) ..................................................................2-46
2.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................2-46
2.12 INTERNAL FINISHER (D429) .............................................................2-49
2.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................2-49
Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher ..................................2-50
Internal Finisher Installation ................................................................2-52
2.13 PUNCH UNIT (D390) ..........................................................................2-55
D104/D016 ii SM
2.13.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................2-55
Removing the Internal Finisher ...........................................................2-56
Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher .........2-59
Installing the Punch and Inverter Unit .................................................2-61
Preparing the Internal Finisher ............................................................2-63
Installing the Internal Finisher .............................................................2-64
2.14 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3010 (D559) ................................................2-67
2.14.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................2-67
2.15 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C5501 (D547) ..............................2-69
2.15.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................2-69
2.16 USB2.0/SD SLOT TYPE G (D556) .....................................................2-71
2.16.1 ACCESSORY CHECK.................................................................2-71
2.16.3 TESTING THE SD CARD/USB SLOT .........................................2-75
2.17 MECHANICAL COUNTER (NA ONLY) ...............................................2-76
2.18 KEY COUNTER BRACKET ................................................................2-78
2.19 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT....................................................2-80
2.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ......................................................2-82
2.21 TRAY HEATER ...................................................................................2-85
Mainframe ...........................................................................................2-85
Tray Heater for D425 (Option) ............................................................2-85
Tray Heater for D331 (Option) ............................................................2-89
2.22 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ..................................................................2-93
2.22.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................2-93
I/F Card Slots ......................................................................................2-93
SD Card Slots .....................................................................................2-93
USB Slots ............................................................................................2-93
2.22.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE ..............................................................2-94
Overview .............................................................................................2-94
Move Exec ..........................................................................................2-95
SM iii D104/D016
Undo Exec ..........................................................................................2-95
2.22.3 POSTSCRIPT 3 ...........................................................................2-97
2.22.4 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER .....................................................2-99
2.22.5 IEEE1284 ..................................................................................2-100
2.22.6 IEEE 802.11 A/G, G (WIRELESS LAN) .....................................2-101
Installation Procedure .......................................................................2-101
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN .................................................2-102
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g, g Wireless LAN2-104
2.22.7 BLUETOOTH.............................................................................2-105
2.22.8 PICTBRIDGE .............................................................................2-106
2.22.9 BROWSER UNIT TYPE E .........................................................2-107
Installation Procedure .......................................................................2-107
2.22.10 GIGABIT ETHERNET ..............................................................2-109
2.22.11 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS .................................................2-111
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................... 3-1
3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES ...........................................................................3-1
3.2 PM PARTS SETTINGS...............................................................................3-2
3.2.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE OLD PM PARTS ....................................3-2
3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS ....................................3-3
3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK ..............................3-4
3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK ........................................................................3-4
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 4-1
4.1 BEFOREHAND ...........................................................................................4-1
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS .......................................................................................4-2
4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................................4-3
4.3.1 SCANNING ........................................................................................4-3
Scanner sub-scan magnification ...........................................................4-3
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration ..............................4-4
4.3.2 ARDF .................................................................................................4-5
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge ............4-5
ARDF sub-scan magnification ...............................................................4-6
4.3.3 REGISTRATION ................................................................................4-6
Image Area ...........................................................................................4-6
D104/D016 iv SM
Leading Edge ........................................................................................4-6
Side to Side ...........................................................................................4-6
Adjustment Standard.............................................................................4-6
Paper Registration Standard .................................................................4-7
Adjustment Procedure...........................................................................4-7
4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT ......................................................4-8
4.3.5 COLOR REGISTRATION ..................................................................4-9
Line Position Adjustment.......................................................................4-9
4.3.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION .................................................4-10
Copy Mode ..........................................................................................4-10
Printer Mode .......................................................................................4-14
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS ...............................................................................4-15
4.4.1 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE ..........................................4-15
4.4.2 FRONT DOOR.................................................................................4-16
4.4.3 ITB CLEANING UNIT COVER .........................................................4-17
4.4.4 LEFT COVER ..................................................................................4-18
4.4.5 REAR COVER .................................................................................4-18
4.4.6 REAR LOWER COVER ...................................................................4-19
4.4.7 DUST FILTER..................................................................................4-19
4.4.8 RIGHT REAR COVER .....................................................................4-20
4.4.9 OPERATION PANEL .......................................................................4-20
4.4.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT ................................4-21
4.4.11 INNER RIGHT COVER................................................................4-22
4.4.12 INNER COVER ............................................................................4-22
4.4.13 FRONT RIGHT COVER ..............................................................4-23
4.4.14 RIGHT UPPER COVER ..............................................................4-23
4.4.15 LEFT FRAME AND LEFT FRAME REAR COVER ......................4-24
4.4.16 PAPER EXIT COVER ..................................................................4-24
4.4.17 INVERTER TRAY ........................................................................4-25
4.4.18 INNER TRAY ...............................................................................4-25
4.4.19 INNER REAR COVER .................................................................4-26
4.5 SCANNER UNIT .......................................................................................4-27
4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ........................................................................4-27
4.5.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS......................................................4-29
4.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP ..........................................................................4-30
Reassembling .....................................................................................4-32
4.5.4 SCANNER MOTOR .........................................................................4-33
4.5.5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU) ........................................................4-34
SM v D104/D016
When reassembling ............................................................................4-34
4.5.6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER.....................................................4-35
4.5.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR .................................................................4-36
4.5.8 PLATEN COVER SENSOR .............................................................4-37
4.5.9 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ...............................................................4-37
Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire....................................................4-39
4.5.10 REAR SCANNER WIRE ..............................................................4-42
Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire ....................................................4-42
4.6 LASER OPTICS ........................................................................................4-44
4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION ........................................................4-44
4.6.2 LASER UNIT ...................................................................................4-44
Preparing a new laser unit ..................................................................4-44
Before removing the old laser unit.......................................................4-45
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit ......4-46
Removing the laser unit ......................................................................4-47
After installing a new laser unit ...........................................................4-48
4.6.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR .........................................................4-50
4.7 IMAGE CREATION ...................................................................................4-51
4.7.1 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT) ........4-51
When installing a new PCDU ..............................................................4-51
4.7.2 DRUM UNIT AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT .......................................4-52
New unit detection for the development unit .......................................4-54
4.7.3 TONER HOPPER UNIT ...................................................................4-55
Toner hopper unit: K, C, M ..................................................................4-55
Toner hopper unit: Y ...........................................................................4-56
When installing a new toner hopper unit .............................................4-57
4.7.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR ...............................................................4-58
4.7.5 TONER COLLECTION MOTOR ......................................................4-60
4.7.6 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE FULL SENSOR ................4-63
4.7.7 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE SET SWITCH ...................4-63
4.7.8 RFID BOARD...................................................................................4-63
4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER ..................................................................................4-65
4.8.1 ITB CLEANING UNIT ......................................................................4-65
When installing the ITB cleaning unit ..................................................4-65
4.8.2 ITB TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE FULL SENSOR .....................4-66
4.8.3 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT.............................................4-66
4.8.4 ITB UNIT MOTOR ...........................................................................4-68
4.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT ...............................................................4-69
D104/D016 vi SM
When reinstalling a new image transfer belt .......................................4-72
4.8.6 ITB CONTACT MOTOR ..................................................................4-73
4.8.7 ITB CONTACT SENSOR .................................................................4-75
4.9 PAPER TRANSFER .................................................................................4-76
4.9.1 PTR (PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER) UNIT .....................................4-76
4.9.2 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT FULL-OPEN ..........................................4-78
4.9.3 ID SENSOR BOARD .......................................................................4-78
Cleaning for ID sensors.......................................................................4-79
After installing a new ID sensor unit/board ..........................................4-80
4.9.4 PTR CONTACT MOTOR .................................................................4-80
4.9.5 PTR CONTACT SENSOR ...............................................................4-82
4.9.6 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR ...................................4-82
4.10 DRIVE UNIT ........................................................................................4-83
4.10.1 GEAR UNIT .................................................................................4-84
Adjustment after reinstalling the gear unit ...........................................4-85
4.10.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ...........................................................4-86
4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T1 .........................................................4-87
4.10.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T2 .........................................................4-88
4.10.5 DRUM MOTOR: CMY..................................................................4-88
4.10.6 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: CMY .................................................4-89
4.10.7 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: K ...........................................4-89
4.10.8 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH: K......................................................4-90
4.10.9 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR...................................................4-91
4.11 FUSING ..............................................................................................4-93
4.11.1 FUSING UNIT ..............................................................................4-93
When installing the fusing unit ............................................................4-94
4.11.2 ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE ........................................................4-94
Cleaning Requirement ........................................................................4-94
4.11.3 STRIPPER PLATE ......................................................................4-95
Cleaning Requirement ........................................................................4-96
4.11.4 EXIT GUIDE PLATE CLEANING PROCEDURE .........................4-97
4.11.5 FUSING GEAR SHAFTS LUBRICATION PROCEDURE ............4-98
4.11.6 HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMP ............................................4-99
4.11.7 HEATING ROLLER UNIT ..........................................................4-100
When reinstalling the heating roller unit ............................................4-102
4.11.8 PRESSURE ROLLER................................................................4-103
Cleaning Procedure ..........................................................................4-103
Replacement Procedure ...................................................................4-103
SM vii D104/D016
When reassembling the pressure roller .............................................4-105
4.11.9 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTATS .......................................4-105
Side Heating Roller Thermostat ........................................................4-105
Lower Heating Roller Thermostats ....................................................4-106
4.11.10 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR .........................................4-106
Cleaning Requirement ......................................................................4-107
4.11.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR .....................................4-107
Pressure Roller Thermistor: Center...................................................4-107
Pressure Roller Thermistor: End .......................................................4-109
Cleaning Requirement ......................................................................4-109
4.11.12 THERMOPILE .........................................................................4-110
When cleaning the lens of the thermopile .........................................4-111
4.11.13 CLEANING UNIT (OPTION) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..4-112
4.12 PAPER FEED ...................................................................................4-114
4.12.1 PAPER TRAY ............................................................................4-114
4.12.2 FEED ROLLER ..........................................................................4-114
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ..............................................................................4-114
When reinstalling the feed roller ........................................................4-114
4.12.3 FRICTION PAD .........................................................................4-115
When reinstalling the friction pad ......................................................4-116
4.12.4 PAPER SIZE SWITCH ..............................................................4-116
4.12.5 PAPER END SENSOR ..............................................................4-117
Paper End Sensor: T1.......................................................................4-117
Paper End Sensor: T2.......................................................................4-117
4.12.6 REGISTRATION SENSOR........................................................4-118
Cleaning the registration roller ..........................................................4-119
4.12.7 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ..........................................4-120
Vertical Transport Sensor 1 ..............................................................4-120
Vertical Transport Sensor 2 ..............................................................4-121
4.13 PAPER EXIT .....................................................................................4-123
4.13.1 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID FAN ..........................................4-123
When installing the junction gate solenoid fan ..................................4-123
4.13.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT ....................................................................4-124
4.13.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR ............................................................4-126
4.13.4 PAPER EXIT SENSOR .............................................................4-127
When installing the paper exit sensor ...............................................4-127
4.13.5 INVERTER SENSOR ................................................................4-128
4.13.6 INVERTER MOTOR ..................................................................4-129
D104/D016 viii SM
4.13.7 FUSING FRONT FAN................................................................4-130
When installing the fusing front fan ...................................................4-130
4.14 DUPLEX UNIT ..................................................................................4-131
4.14.1 DUPLEX UNIT ...........................................................................4-131
4.14.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR ...............................................4-132
4.14.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR ...........................................................4-134
4.14.4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR .................................................4-135
4.14.5 DUPLEX EXIT MOTOR .............................................................4-136
4.14.6 BY-PASS MOTOR .....................................................................4-137
4.14.7 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT ...............................................................4-138
4.14.8 BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH SENSOR ......................................4-139
4.14.9 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR .............................................4-140
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor ..............................4-141
4.14.10 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR ...........................................4-142
Reinstalling the By-pass Paper End Sensor .....................................4-142
4.14.11 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER .......................................................4-142
4.14.12 BY-PASS TRAY HP SENSOR ................................................4-143
4.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .........................................................4-144
4.15.1 BOARDS ...................................................................................4-144
4.15.2 CONTROLLER BOX COVER ....................................................4-145
4.15.3 CONTROLLER BOX .................................................................4-146
Opening the controller box ................................................................4-146
4.15.4 BCU ...........................................................................................4-147
When installing the new BCU ............................................................4-147
4.15.5 HDD ...........................................................................................4-148
After installing a new HDD ................................................................4-148
Disposal of HDD Units ......................................................................4-149
4.15.6 IPU BOARD ...............................................................................4-149
4.15.7 CONTROLLER BOX FAN .........................................................4-150
When installing the controller box fan ...............................................4-150
4.15.8 FUSING REAR FAN ..................................................................4-151
When installing the fusing rear fan ....................................................4-152
4.15.9 DRB ...........................................................................................4-152
4.15.10 SDVDB ....................................................................................4-152
4.15.11 PSU .........................................................................................4-153
4.15.12 HVPS: TTS BOARD ................................................................4-154
4.15.13 HVPS: CB BOARD ..................................................................4-154
4.15.14 CONTROLLER BOARD ..........................................................4-155
SM ix D104/D016
When installing a new controller board .............................................4-156
HDD Encryption Recovery from a Device Problem ...........................4-157
Restoring the Encryption key ............................................................4-157
Clearing the NVRAM .........................................................................4-158
4.15.15 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ................................4-159
NVRAM on the BCU..........................................................................4-159
NVRAM on the Controller ..................................................................4-160
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SP TABLES .......................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES .....................................................................5-1
SP Mode Button Summary....................................................................5-2
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............5-3
Selecting the Program Number .............................................................5-3
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ....................................................................5-4
5.1.3 REMARKS .........................................................................................5-5
Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-5
Others ...................................................................................................5-6
5.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1 ...................................................................................5-7
5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)...............................................................................5-7
5.3 MAIN SP TABLES-2 .................................................................................5-32
5.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM) ...........................................................................5-32
5.4 MAIN SP TABLES-3 .................................................................................5-63
5.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS).....................................................................5-63
5.5 MAIN SP TABLES-4 ...............................................................................5-101
5.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)...................................................................5-101
5.6 MAIN SP TABLES-5 ...............................................................................5-114
5.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) .........................................................................5-114
5.7 MAIN SP TABLES-6 ...............................................................................5-174
5.7.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) ...........................................................5-174
5.8 MAIN SP TABLES-7 ...............................................................................5-177
5.8.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ..................................................................5-177
5.9 MAIN SP TABLES-8 ...............................................................................5-209
5.9.1 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK TABLES .......................................5-209
Input Check Table .............................................................................5-209
Output Check Table ..........................................................................5-220
D104/D016 x SM
5.10 MAIN SP TABLES-9 .........................................................................5-228
5.10.1 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ......................................................5-228
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) ..................................................................5-228
5.10.2 SCANNER SP MODE................................................................5-238
SP1-xxx (System and Others) ...........................................................5-238
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-239
5.11 FIRMWARE UPDATE .......................................................................5-240
5.11.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE ...............................................................5-240
5.11.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ...............................................................5-242
5.11.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE............................................................5-243
Preparation .......................................................................................5-243
Updating Procedure ..........................................................................5-243
Error Messages .................................................................................5-245
Firmware Update Error......................................................................5-245
Recovery after Power Loss ...............................................................5-246
5.11.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL ..........5-246
5.11.5 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ............................5-247
Error Message Table.........................................................................5-247
5.11.6 JAVA VM UPDATING PROCEDURE ........................................5-249
5.11.7 APP2ME UPDATING PROCEDURE .........................................5-249
5.11.8 BROWER UNIT UPDATING PROCEDURE ..............................5-251
5.12 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE ..............................................5-253
5.13 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET ..............................................5-256
5.13.1 SOFTWARE RESET .................................................................5-256
5.13.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ................5-256
System Setting Reset........................................................................5-256
Copier Setting Reset .........................................................................5-257
5.14 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..............................................5-258
5.14.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................5-258
5.15 SD CARD APPLI MOVE ...................................................................5-259
5.15.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................5-259
5.15.2 MOVE EXEC .............................................................................5-260
5.15.3 UNDO EXEC .............................................................................5-261
5.16 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA .......................................................5-262
5.17 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD .............................................5-263
5.17.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ..........5-263
5.17.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM ............................5-264
5.18 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-265
SM xi D104/D016
5.18.1 INFORMATION LIST .................................................................5-265
5.18.2 DOWNLOAD .............................................................................5-265
5.18.3 UPLOAD ....................................................................................5-266
5.19 USING THE DEBUG LOG ................................................................5-267
5.19.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................5-267
5.19.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ........5-268
5.19.3 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ..................5-272
5.19.4 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ........................................5-272
5.20 CARD SAVE FUNCTION ..................................................................5-273
5.20.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................5-273
Card Save: ........................................................................................5-273
5.20.2 PROCEDURE ............................................................................5-274
Error Messages .................................................................................5-276
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 6-1
6.1 SC TABLES ................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS..........................................................6-1
Summary ...............................................................................................6-1
SC Code Classification .........................................................................6-2
6.1.2 SC1XX: SCANNING ..........................................................................6-4
6.1.3 SC 2XX: EXPOSURE ........................................................................6-8
6.1.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1.................................................6-14
6.1.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING - 2 .................................................6-19
6.1.6 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING .............................................6-24
6.1.7 SC6XX: DEVICE COMMUNICATION..............................................6-38
6.1.8 SC7XX: PERIPHERALS ..................................................................6-47
6.1.9 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM ...........................................................6-54
6.1.10 SC9XX: MISCELLANEOUS ........................................................6-73
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS ........................................6-77
6.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT ........................................6-77
6.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ..............................6-78
Vsg Adjustment Result ........................................................................6-81
6.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT ......................................6-82
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .................................................................6-83
6.3.1 IMAGE QUALITY .............................................................................6-83
6.3.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT......................................................6-85
Test .....................................................................................................6-85
D104/D016 xii SM
Countermeasure list for color registration errors .................................6-85
6.3.3 IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS............................6-91
6.3.4 SUB-SCAN MAGNIFICATION ERROR ...........................................6-91
Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment Procedure ..................................6-91
Motor Speed Adjustment.....................................................................6-92
6.3.5 TRAPEZOID IMAGE ADJUSTMENT...............................................6-95
Before Adjusting the Trapezoid Image ................................................6-95
Adjusting the Trapezoid Image ...........................................................6-95
6.3.6 LOUD SQUEAKING NOISE FROM PCDU ......................................6-97
Replacement Procedure .....................................................................6-98
6.3.7 LOUD NOISE FROM THE PAPER TRAY .......................................6-99
6.3.8 GRAINY IMAGE ............................................................................6-100
Possible Cause List...........................................................................6-101
Action List .........................................................................................6-104
6.3.9 TONER SUPPLY ERROR .............................................................6-110
6.3.10 PAPER JAM TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................6-111
Jam 3: Paper is not fed from Tray 1. .................................................6-111
Fixing the End Fence of the Paper Tray............................................6-113
Jam 4: Paper is not fed from Tray 2. .................................................6-114
Fixing the End Fence of the Paper Tray............................................6-117
Jam 8: Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray. ..................................6-118
Jam 11: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect paper from the tray
1. .......................................................................................................6-119
Jam 12: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect paper from Tray 2.6-121
Jam 17: Registration sensor does not detect paper. .........................6-121
Jam 51/ Jam 52: Vertical transport sensor 1/2 does not turn off. ......6-123
Jam 59: Fusing exit sensor does not turn off. ...................................6-123
6.3.11 NO FEED PAPER JAM FROM PFU ..........................................6-124
6.3.12 SETTING FOR SPECIAL PAPER 4, 5 AND 6 MODE ...............6-125
Default Settings for Special Paper Modes.........................................6-125
How to select the proper Special Paper mode ..................................6-126
Special Paper 1 to 3 ..........................................................................6-128
Special Paper 4 to 6 ..........................................................................6-129
SP Modes for Setting the Paper Type ...............................................6-129
6.4 JAM DETECTION ...................................................................................6-137
6.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ..................................................................6-137
Paper Size Code ...............................................................................6-137
6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ...........................................6-138
SM xiii D104/D016
Mainframe .........................................................................................6-138
ARDF (Original Jam) .........................................................................6-141
Sensor Locations ..............................................................................6-142
6.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................6-143
6.5.1 SENSORS .....................................................................................6-143
6.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS........................................................6-148
Power Supply Unit.............................................................................6-148
6.6 SCANNER TEST MODE ........................................................................6-149
6.6.1 SBU TEST MODE .........................................................................6-149
6.6.2 IPU TEST MODE ...........................................................................6-149
SP4-904-1 Register Access ..............................................................6-149
SP4-904-2 Image Path......................................................................6-150
ENERGY SAVING
7. ENERGY SAVING ........................................................................ 7-1
7.1 ENERGY SAVE ..........................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES ................................................................7-1
Timer Settings .......................................................................................7-1
Return to Stand-by Mode ......................................................................7-1
Recommendation ..................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS...................................................7-2
7.2 PAPER SAVE .............................................................................................7-4
7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION ...................7-4
1. Duplex: ..............................................................................................7-4
2. Combine mode: .................................................................................7-4
3. Duplex + Combine: ...........................................................................7-5
Recommendation ..................................................................................7-5
D104/D06 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES

SEE D104/D106 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES SECTION FOR DETAILED TABLE OF
CONTENTS
D104/D016 xiv SM
PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 (B331)
SEE SECTION B331 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARDF DF3030 (D366)

SEE SECTION D366 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 (D425)

1 BIN TRAY BN3060 (D426)

SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 (D427)

INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 (D428)

INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 (D429)

FAX OPTION TYPE C2551 (D555)

SM xv D104/D016
PRODUCT INFORMATION
POSITION 1
APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS
TAB
FAX OPTION TYPE C2551 (D555)
ARDF DF3030 (D366)
INSTALLATION
POSITION 2
APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
TAB
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 (D425)
PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 (D331)
POSITION 3
APPENDIX: SP MODE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 4
TAB
INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 (D429)
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
POSITION 5
TAB
TROUBLESHOOTING
POSITION 6
TAB
ENERGY SAVING
POSITION 7
BIN TRAY BN3060 (D426)

TAB
SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 (D427)

POSITION 8
TAB
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 (D428)

READ THIS FIRST
Important Safety Notices
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer

Customer Engineer
Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service
training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine.
Reference Material for Maintenance

Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the "CE Safety Guide".
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance

Shipping and Moving the Machine
Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or
more customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains, spinal
injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over.
Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper
clothing and footwear. Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories (neckties,
loose sweaters, bracelets, etc.) or casual footwear (slippers, sandals, etc.) when
lifting or moving the machine.
Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product.
Before you move the product, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the
product.
Power
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds,
then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks
or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing
belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the

machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tools
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.

For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts, could
damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)

Disconnect the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for at
least 10 minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification
or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally
and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the
machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could
lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.) other
than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part
that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to
prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries.
Use "My Ace" Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For more details,
please refer to Technical Bulletin "Silicone Oil Removal" (A024-50).
Lithium Batteries
Always replace a lithium battery on a PCB with the same type of battery prescribed
for use on that board. Replacing a lithium battery with any type other than the one
prescribed for use on the board could lead to an explosion or damage to the PCB.
Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other trash. Remove them from the
work site and dispose of them in accordance with local laws and regulations
regarding the disposal of such items.
Ozone Filters
Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in the
service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters if
they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always
make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source.
A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused
by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the plug,
not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.

Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious
injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with
plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal.
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.)
in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one of
our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with
company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.
Points to Confirm with Operators

At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine.
Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by
following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in
the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the
product, 2) service or repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been
damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should
never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the
machine.
Special Safety Instructions for Toner
Accidental Physical Exposure
Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to
avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands.
If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to
a well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek
medical attention.
If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If
there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner.
If there are signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold
water. Never use hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain
fabric.
Handling and Storing Toner
Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable.

Never store toner, developer, toner cartridges, or toner bottles (including empty toner
bottles or cartridges) in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or
an open flame.
Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages,
cartridges, and bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of
the reach of children.
Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location
that is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Toner Disposal
Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers (bottles or
cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing serious burns.
Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to
avoid spillage. Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an authorized
collection site. Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bottles in
accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Safety Instructions for this Machine

Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure
that the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open
while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically
driven components.
5. If the [Start] key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the [Start]
key starts blinking red and green ), keep hands away from the mechanical and the
electrical components as the machine starts making copies as soon as the warm-up
period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine
is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
7. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases,
and aerosols.
Health Safety Conditions

1. Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident,
it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water
as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if
replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used
NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when
exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local
regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more
than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may
lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based
optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a
location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a
qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer
engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or
service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the
Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks
of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Specifications
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
See "Appendices" for the following information:

General Specifications
Supported Paper Sizes
Software Accessories
Optional Equipment
SM 1-1 D104/D016
Machine Configuration
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.2.1 MACHINE D104/D106
Machine Call
Item Remarks
Code out
Mainframe D104/D106 [1] D104: C1.5a, D106: C1.5c
Platen cover G329 [2] One from the two;
ARDF D366 [3] [3] is standard.
Side tray D427 [4] -
1-bin tray D426 [12]

One of the following 4 choices: [10] only, [11] only,
Shift tray D428 [11]
[12] only, or [11]+[12]
Internal finisher D429 [10]
Punch unit: 2/3

D390-17 [9] Requires [10].
holes
D104/D016 1-2 SM
Machine Call
Item Remarks
Information
Code out
Product
Punch unit: 2
D390-27 Requires [10].
holes
Punch unit: 4
D390-31 Requires [10].
holes
Two-tray paper
D331 [6]
feed unit One from [6], [7], and [8];
The one-tray PFU [6] requires [8].
One-tray paper
D425 [7] If neither [6] nor [7] is installed, install [8] if
feed unit
required by the customer.
Caster Table D448 [8]
Envelope This option can be installed only in the tray 1 of

D559 [5]
Feeder the mainframe.
SM 1-3 D104/D016
OTHER:
Item Machine code Remark
USB2.0/SD Slot Type G D556 -
Card Reader Bracket D547 -
Fax Option Type C2551 D555 -
SAF memory:
Memory Unit Type B G578
Requires the Fax Option.
For NA model only: Requires the Fax

Hand Set B433
Option.
Gigabit Ethernet Type B D377-21 -
IEEE 1284 B679
Wireless LAN
D377-01, 02
(IEEE 802.11a/g)
You can only install one of these at a
Wireless LAN
D377-19 time.
(IEEE 802.11g)
Bluetooth B826
File Format Converter D377-04
Optional Counter Interface

B870 -
Unit Type A
Key Counter Bracket A674 -
Postscript3 Unit Type

D556-4, -5, -6
C2551
D556-12, -13, You can only install one of these in SD

IPDS Unit Type C2551
-14 slot 1 at a time.
Camera Direct Print Card

D546
Type I
Browser Unit Type E D430-05, 06, 07 In SD card slot 2
D104/D016 1-4 SM
Information
Product
SM 1-5 D104/D016
Overview
1.3 OVERVIEW
1.3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
D104/D016 1-6 SM
Overview
Information
Product
1. Scanner HP sensor
16. Feed roller: T1
2. 2nd carriage
17. Vertical transport roller 2
3. 1st carriage
18. Feed roller: T1
4. Original length sensor
5. Lens
20. Tray 2
6. SBU
21. Tray 1
7. Inverter roller
22. Laser unit
8. Paper exit roller
23. Drum unit
9. Junction gate
24. Development unit
10. Duplex unit
25. ITB cleaning unit
11. Fusing unit
26. ITB roller
12. PTR (Paper transfer roller) unit
27. Toner bottle
13. Registration roller
28. ITB (Image Transfer Belt) unit
29. Inner Tray
15. By-pass feed roller
SM 1-7 D104/D016
Overview
1.3.2 PAPER PATH
With options
6. By-pass tray path

1. DF path
7. Vertical transport path: Tray 2
2. Exit path: Straight feed out
8. Vertical transport path: Tray 3 (option)
3. Exit path: Side tray
9. Vertical transport path: Tray 4 (option)
4. Duplex path
10. Inverter path (option)
5. Vertical transport path: Tray 1
11. Exit path: Staple/ Shift
D104/D016 1-8 SM
Overview
Without options
Information
Product
1. DF path 5. By-pass tray path

2. Inverter path 6. Vertical transport path: Tray 2
3. Duplex path 7. Exit path
4. Vertical transport path: T1
SM 1-9 D104/D016
Overview
1.3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Scanner motor 10. Paper feed motor: T1

2. Toner supply motors 11. By-pass motor
3. ITB contact motor 12. Registration motor
4. Used toner collection motor 13. Duplex exit motor
5. Drum motor: CMY 14. PTR contact motor
6. Development motor: CMY 15. ITB unit motor
7. Development clutch: K 16. Duplex entrance motor
8. Drum/Development motor: K 17. Fusing/Paper exit motor
9. Paper feed motor: T2 18. Inverter motor
D104/D016 1-10 SM
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH
Information
Product
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
Machine D104/D106 is a successor model to Machine D038/D041. If you have experience

with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this
manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products
D104/D106 D038/D041
Security Card Standard Optional
VM Card Standard Optional
Safety shutdown
Available Not available
function
SM 1-11 D104/D016
INSTALLATION
107 ~ 108 6/14/2011 Browser Unit Type E
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Installation
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5. Do not let the machine get exposed to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,000 m (6,560 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than
5 mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
Do not leave the toner bottle in a place directly exposed to sunlight.

The toner bottle must be kept at a temperature of 35°C (95°F) or less. Be careful not
to leave the toner bottle in a hot place when transporting or storing it.
SM 2-1 D104/D016
Installation Requirements
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS
This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas.
High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be
installed in a well-ventilated room.
A: Over 100 mm (3.9")

B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 315 mm (12.4")
D: Over 400 mm (15.7")
Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above.
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.

Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:
120 V to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A
220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 10 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %
3. Do not put things on the power cord.
D104/D016 2-2 SM
Optional Unit Combinations
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
2.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS
No. Options Remarks
Installation
1 2-tray paper feed unit
One from No.1 or No.2 (No. 2 requires
2 1-tray paper feed unit
No. 3)
3 Caster table
This option can be installed only in the

4 Envelop Feeder
tray 1 of the mainframe.
5 Platen cover
One from No.5 or No.6
6 ARDF (Standard)
7 1-bin tray unit
8 Shift tray If No 10 is installed, then No 7 and/or
9 Side Tray No 8 cannot be installed.
10 Internal finisher
11 *Punch kit (4 types) No. 10 required; One of the types
12 Fax unit -
13 Memory Unit (32M)* Fax unit required
14 USB2.0/SD Slot Type G -
15 Card Reader Bracket

One from No. 15 or No. 16
16 ADF Handle Type B
17 Optional Counter Interface Unit -
18 Key Counter Bracket -
*: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)
SM 2-3 D104/D016
Optional Unit Combinations
2.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
No. Options Remarks
1 IEEE 802.11a/g
2 IEEE 1284
One from six items (I/F
3 Bluetooth
Slot)
4 File Format Converter
5 Gigabit Ethernet
6 PostScript 3 One of these (SD card
7 PictBridge slot 1)
SD card slot 2 (during

8 Browser Unit
installation only)
D104/D016 2-4 SM
Copier Installation
2.3 COPIER INSTALLATION
2.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Installation
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
[1] ARDF: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V
[2] Finisher: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V
SM 2-5 D104/D016
Copier Installation
2.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation.
*1: The shift tray should be installed first if you want to install the shift tray with the 1-bin tray
at the same time.
D104/D016 2-6 SM
Copier Installation
2.3.3 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
No. Description Q’ty Destination
Installation
1. Stamp 1 -17, -27
2. EU Safety Sheet 1
-27
3. WEEE 1
4. Certification 1 --17, -19, -21,
5. Warranty Sheet (Chinese) 1 -27, -28, -29
6. Operating Instruction – About this machine 1 -17, -29, -21,
7. Operating Instruction – Troubleshooting 1 -19
1 -27, -29, -21,

8. Operating Instruction – Quick Reference Copy Guide
-19
9. Operating Instruction – Quick Reference Printer Guide 1 -17, -27, -29,
10. Operating Instruction – Quick Reference Scanner Guide 1 -21, -19
11. Operating Instruction – Manual for This Machine 1

-27
12. Operating Instruction – Safety Information 1
13. CD-ROM Instruction – About this machine 1
14. CD-ROM Instruction – Troubleshooting 1
15. CD-ROM Instruction –Copy/Document Server Reference 1
16. CD-ROM Instruction –Facsimile Reference 1 -17, -27, -29,

-21, -19
17. CD-ROM Instruction –Printer Reference 1
18. CD-ROM Instruction –Scanner Reference 1
CD-ROM Instruction – Network and System Settings 1

19.
Reference
SM 2-7 D104/D016
Copier Installation
No. Description Q’ty Destination
20. CD-ROM Instruction – Security Reference 1
-27, -29, -21,

21. PostScript 3 Supplement
-19
22. Printer Driver CD-ROM 1 -29
23. Scanner Driver & Utility CD-ROM 1
24. Clear Cover 1 -17, -27, -29
25. SD Card (Java VM) 1
1 -17, -27, -29,

26. Inverter Tray
-21, -19
1 -17, -27, -29,

27. Handle Cover
-21, -19
1 -17, -27, -29,

28. Decal - Paper Size
-21, -19
1 -27, -29, -21,

29. Sheet: Data: Display: Plain
-19
D104/D016 2-8 SM
Copier Installation
2.3.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Remove the tapes from the development units before you turn the main switch on.
The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tapes.
Installation
Put the machine on the paper tray unit first if you install an optional paper tray unit at the
same time. Then install the machine and other options.
Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the
future if you transport the machine to another location.
Hold the handles [A] and grips [B] when lifting or moving the machine.
Do not hold the right bottom frame [C] of the machine when lifting or moving the machine.
If you do so, the right bottom frame [C] of the machine may be bent.
SM 2-9 D104/D016
Copier Installation
Tapes and Retainers
1. Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine.
2. Open the DF left cover [A], and then remove all the tapes and retainer on the ADF if the
ADF has been installed.
3. Open the ADF unit, and then remove all the tapes and plastic package.
Keep the SD card for the Java VM and the decal sheet for the tray number and paper
size. These items will be used in the later step.
4. Pull out the tray 1 and 2 [A], and then remove all the tapes and retainers in the tray 1 and
2.
D104/D016 2-10 SM
Copier Installation
Installation
5. Remove the scanner unit stay [A].
6. Keep the scanner unit stay in the cutout [B] in the inner tray.
For the EU models, the scanner unit stay cannot be inserted in the cutout on the
inner tray. You must bring this stay back to your depot.
7. Install the inverter tray [A] (hooks).
8. Open the duplex unit [A].

9. Remove the sheet of paper [B] from the fusing unit.
SM 2-11 D104/D016
Copier Installation
10. Open the paper transfer unit [A].

11. Remove the front and rear stoppers [B] with a red tag.
12. Close the duplex unit.
13. Attach the handle cover [A] to the front side of the duplex unit.
Developer and Toner Bottles
1. Open the front door [A], and then remove the PCDU toner collection bottle [B].
D104/D016 2-12 SM
Copier Installation
Installation
2. Remove the ITB lock lever [A] from the PCDU toner collection bottle.
Keep this lever for the later step.
3. Remove four tapes [A] from the four development units.
4. Remove the all tapes [A] from the toner hopper units.
The toner hopper cover [B] can be removed with tape [C].
Make sure that the all toner hopper covers are removed, when removing all
tapes.
SM 2-13 D104/D016
Copier Installation
5. Check if the toner hopper shutter [A] is fully closed.
If the toner hopper shutter is not fully closed and the inlet [B] of the toner hopper
unit is visible, the toner bottle cannot be installed properly.
6. Attach the ITB lock lever [A] to the ITB contact arm [B].
The arrow mark on the top of the ITB lock lever should be pointed to the machine.
This lock lever will not be removed once it is attached to the ITB contact arm.
7. Press the ITB lock lever [C] and turn it down as shown above.
8. Reinstall the PCDU toner collection bottle.
9. Take out the toner bottle package [A] from the toner bottle box [B].
10. Unpack the toner bottle package, and then remove the tape [C].
D104/D016 2-14 SM
Copier Installation
11. Shake each toner bottle five or six times.
Installation
12. Slide the toner bottles [A] in toner bottle cartridges.
Each toner bottle has unique projections [B]. This prevents the toner bottle from
being loaded in a wrong toner hopper unit.
13. Push the toner bottle, and then turn each one to the right (clockwise).
14. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1).

15. Insert the SD Card (Java VM) provided in the accessories into SD slot 2 [B].
16. Reattach the SD card slot cover ( x 1).
17. Switch the machine on.
18. On the operation panel, remove the bottom blank keytop and replace it with the keytop
provided.
SM 2-15 D104/D016
Copier Installation
19. Attach the decal to the copier.

20. Close the front door.
Paper Trays
1. Pull each paper tray [A] out. Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the
paper size.
To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully. Then push down the green
lock at the rear inside the tray.
D104/D016 2-16 SM
Copier Installation
Emblem and Decals
Installation
1. Attach the correct emblem [A] and the cover [B] to the front door [C] of the machine, if the
emblem is not attached.
If you want to change the emblem that has been already attached, remove the
panel with an object (not a sharp object) as shown [D], and then install the
correct emblem.
2. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [E].
Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or
the optional LCT. Keep these decals for use with these optional units.
SM 2-17 D104/D016
Copier Installation
Initialize the Developer

1. Make sure that the platen or ARDF is closed and the main power is turned off.
2. Plug in the machine.
3. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the initialization
procedure. The Start button LED turns green when this procedure has finished.
4. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
5. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) for each mode (Copy mode, Printer
600 x 600 dpi, Printer 1800 x 600 dpi, and Printer 1200 x 1200 dpi) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (User tools > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Put the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
6. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
7. Open the front cover.
8. Remove the instruction guide sheet [A], and make sure the SMC report [B] is stored as
shown above. Then replace the instruction guide sheet.
D104/D016 2-18 SM
Copier Installation
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a
service contract.
Installation
You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance
with the contract ( SP5045-001).
Counting method
SP No. Function Default
Specifies if the counting method used in

meter charge mode is based on
SP5-045-001 developments or prints. NOTE: You can set "0": Developments
this one time only. You cannot change the
setting after you have set it for the first time.
A3/11" x 17" double counting
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for

SP5-104-001 A3/11" x 17" paper. When you have to "No": Single counting
change this setting, contact your supervisor.
Service Tel. No. Setting
5812-002 programs the service station fax

number. The number is printed on the
SP5-812-001
counter list when the meter charge mode is
through 004
selected. This lets the user fax the counter
data to the service station.
SM 2-19 D104/D016
Copier Installation
Settings for @Remote Service
Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For
details, ask the @Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5811-003) must be
correctly programmed.
6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
ID2 (SP5811-003) and the serial number (SP5811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
Proxy server IP address (SP5816-063)
Proxy server Port number (SP5816-064)
Proxy User ID (SP5816-065)
Proxy Password (SP5816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and
then enter [OK] with SP5816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
Communication error (proxy

3 Check the network condition.
enabled)

disabled)
5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or Check Proxy user name and password.
D104/D016 2-20 SM
Copier Installation
password)
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below

8 Other error
Installation
this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when
it has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5816-207.
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.

enabled)

disabled)
Proxy error (Illegal user name or

5 Check Proxy user name and password.
password)
See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below

8 Other error
this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
8. Exit the SP mode.
SM 2-21 D104/D016
Copier Installation
SP5816-208 Error Codes
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
Obtain a Request Number

Inquiry, registration attempted
-12002 before attempting the
without acquiring Request No.
Inquiry or Registration.
-12003 Attempted registration without Perform Confirmation

execution of a confirmation and before attempting the
no previous registration. Registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal Check ID2 of the

entries for certification and ID2. mainframe.
-12005 @Remote communication is

Make sure that "Remote
prohibited. The device has an
Operation Error, Service" in User Tools is
Embedded RC gate-related
Incorrect Setting set to "Do not prohibit".
problem.
-12006 A confirmation request was

made after the confirmation Execute registration.
had been already completed.
-12007 The request number used at

registration was different from Check Request No.
the one used at confirmation.
-12008 Update certification failed Check the mainframe

because mainframe was in condition. If the mainframe
use. is in use, try again later.
-2385 Other error
-2387 Not supported at the Service

Error Caused by Center
Response from
-2389 Database out of service
GW URL
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for the same Check the registration
D104/D016 2-22 SM
Copier Installation
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
mainframe condition of the mainframe
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 External RCG not managed
Installation
-2394 Mainframe not managed
Box ID for external RCG is

-2395
illegal.
Mainframe ID for external RCG

-2396
is illegal.
Check the ID2 of the

-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
mainframe.
Incorrect request number

-2398 Check the Request No.
format
2.3.5 MOVING THE MACHINE

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor.
See the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a
longer distance.
Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit.
SM 2-23 D104/D016
Copier Installation
2.3.6 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE
Main Frame
1. Do SP 4806-001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents
dust from falling into the machine during transportation.
2. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with
a sheet of paper and tape.
3. Do one of the following:
Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
After you move the machine, Make sure you do the "Auto Color Registration" as
follows. This optimizes color registration.
Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3).
Then do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a" (SP2-111-1).
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A
message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP
2-194-10 to -12.
Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to prevent
color registration errors.
D104/D016 2-24 SM
Paper Feed Unit (D331)
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT (D331)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
Installation
No. Description Q’ty
1 Paper Feed Unit 1
2 Screw - M4 x 10 4
3 Securing Bracket 2
SM 2-25 D104/D016
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and
locked, unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main
machine.
You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when
lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
1. Remove the strips of tape.
2. Set the copier [A] on the paper tray unit [B].
When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the cable [C].
3. Remove the connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1).

4. Connect the cable [B] to the copier, as shown.
5. Attach a securing bracket [C] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M3 x
D104/D016 2-26 SM
8 each).
6. Re-install the connector cover.
Installation
7. Remove the 1st and 2nd paper trays [A] and secure the paper tray unit with two screws
(M4 x 10) [B].
8. Reinstall all the paper trays.
9. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal and paper size decal to each handle of
the trays.
The paper tray number and size decal sheet is in the accessory box of the main
machine.
10. Rotate the adjuster [A] until the machine cannot be pushed across the floor.
11. Load paper into the paper trays and select the proper paper size.
12. Turn on the main switch.
13. Adjust the registration for each tray ( Image Adjustment).
For tray 3, use SP1002-004
For tray 4, use SP1002-005
14. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
SM 2-27 D104/D016
2.5 PAPER FEED UNIT (D425)
2.5.1 COMPONENT CHECK

1 Paper Feed Unit 1
2 Securing bracket 2
3 Screw (M4 x 10) 4
D104/D016 2-28 SM
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the
installation procedure.
Installation
You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when
lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be
damaged.
The one-tray paper feed unit must be installed on the caster table (D448). Prepare
the caster table first before installing this unit.
1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit.

2. Remove the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding.
3. Put the paper tray unit on the caster table (D448).
For details about the installation of the caster table, see the “Caster Table
(D488)” installation procedure.
SM 2-29 D104/D016
4. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine.

5. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [C].
Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
6. Remove the rear connector cover [A] of the main machine (rivet screw x 1).
7. Connect the harness [B] to the main machine.
8. Reinstall the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1).
9. Remove tray 1 and 2 of the machine.
10. Fasten the screws (M4 x 10) [C].
D104/D016 2-30 SM
11. Reinstall all trays.

12. Attach the securing brackets [D] (M4 x 10; x 1 each).
13. Load paper into the paper feed unit.
14. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
15. Adjust the registration for each tray ( Image Adjustment).
Installation
Use SP1002-004
16. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality.
SM 2-31 D104/D016
Caster Table (D488)
2.6 CASTER TABLE (D488)
1 Caster Table 1
2 Pin 2
3 Step Screw 2
D104/D016 2-32 SM
Caster Table (D488)

1. Put the caster table on a flat place.
Installation
2. Install the two pins in the screw holes.
Use the screw holes [A] and [C] if the mainframe is directly installed on the caster
table.
Use the screw holes [B] and [C] if the one-tray paper feed unit (D425) is installed on
the caster table.
3. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine, if the copier is to be installed on the
caster table.
SM 2-33 D104/D016
Caster Table (D488)
Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
4. Lift the copier or one-tray paper feed unit [C], and then install it on the caster table [D].
5. Pull out tray 2 of the mainframe or the tray of the one-tray paper feed unit.
6. Secure the machine or one-tray paper feed unit to the caster table (step screw x 2)
7. Reinstall the tray in the mainframe or one-tray paper feed unit.
8. Adjust the five leveling adjustors of the caster table.
D104/D016 2-34 SM
ARDF (D366)
2.7 ARDF (D366)

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
Installation
1 ARDF 1
2 Stamp Cartridge 1
3 Knob Screw 2
4 Stud Screw 2
5 Attention Decal – Top Cover 1
SM 2-35 D104/D016
ARDF (D366)
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine.
3. Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over
the stud screws.
4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C].
D104/D016 2-36 SM
ARDF (D366)
Installation
6. Install the stamp cartridge [A] in the ARDF.
7. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
8. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [B] on the exposure glass.
9. Close the ARDF.
10. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.
SM 2-37 D104/D016
ARDF (D366)
11. Attach the decal [A] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language that you want.
12. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF
operation.
13. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and
image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew (see
"Image Adjustment" in the "Replacements and Adjustments" chapter).
D104/D016 2-38 SM
Platen Cover Installation (G329)
2.8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329)
Installation
1. Install the stud screws [A] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown.
2. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the heads of the stud screws, and slide the
platen cover [C] to the left.
SM 2-39 D104/D016
Side Tray (D427)
2.9 SIDE TRAY (D427)

1 Side Tray Paper Exit Unit 1
2 Side Tray 1
3 Decal: Push 1
4 Decal: Door Push 1
5 Screw: M3x8 1
6 Tray Stopper 1
D104/D016 2-40 SM
Side Tray (D427)
1. Remove all tapes on the side tray.
Installation
3. Remove the right upper cover [B] ( x 2).
4. Close the side tray paper exit unit [A], and then connect the harness [B] to the machine.
5. Install the side tray paper exit unit ( x 2: removed in step 3).
SM 2-41 D104/D016
Side Tray (D427)
6. Install the side tray [A].

7. Lift the side tray, and then install the tray stopper [B] ( x 1: M3x8).
8. Attach the ‘Push door’ decal [A] to the top front edge of the duplex unit cover.
9. Close the duplex unit, and then attach the ‘Push’ decal [A] to the duplex unit cover.
11. Check the side tray operation.
D104/D016 2-42 SM
1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)
2.10 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D426)

Installation
1 Tray 1
2 1-Bin Tray Unit 1
3 Screw: Blue (M3 x 6) 1
4 Screw (M3 x 8) 1
5 Tray Support Bar 1
SM 2-43 D104/D016
If both the shift tray unit and the 1-bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the
same time, install the shift tray unit first. Installing the shift tray unit after the 1-bin tray
unit may be difficult.
1. Remove all tapes.
2. Remove the inverter tray [A] (hook).

3. Open the right door [B] of the machine.
4. Remove the front right cover [C] ( x 1).
5. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( x 1).
D104/D016 2-44 SM
Installation
6. Remove the connector cover [A] with a small flat screwdriver.
7. Remove the left frame cover [B] ( x 1).
8. Install the 1-bin tray unit [A] ( x 1: M3x6 blue, x 1).
9. Install the tray [A] (with the tray support bar) in the machine.
10. Attach the tray support cover [B] ( x 2: M3x8 in the accessories and one screw
removed in step 7).
11. Reassemble the machine.
12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine, and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
SM 2-45 D104/D016
Shift Tray Unit (D428)
2.11 SHIFT TRAY UNIT (D428)

1 Shift Tray Unit 1
D104/D016 2-46 SM
Installation
If both the shift tray unit and the 1-bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the
same time, install the shift tray unit first. Installing the shift tray unit after the 1-bin tray
unit may be difficult.
1. Remove all tapes.
2. Remove the inverter tray [A] (hook).

3. Remove the output tray [B] ( x 2).
4. Put the shift tray [A] in the machine, and then connect the harness to the connector [B] on
the inner rear frame.
If the shift tray is difficult to install in the mainframe, remove the paper exit cover
[C] first ( x 1).
SM 2-47 D104/D016
5. Install the shift tray [A] fully in the machine ( x 2).

6. Reinstall the inverter tray.
8. Check the shift tray unit operation.
D104/D016 2-48 SM
Internal Finisher (D429)
2.12 INTERNAL FINISHER (D429)
This procedure explains how to install the internal finisher, without installing the punch unit at
the same time.
Installation
1 Internal Finisher 1
2 Inverter Unit 1
3 Inner Bottom Plate 1
4 Screw: M3x10 3
5 Screw: M3x6 12
6 Guide Rail 1
7 Inverter Cover 1
8 Left Cover 1
SM 2-49 D104/D016
Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher

1. Remove all tapes from the internal finisher.
2. Remove the inverter tray [A].

3. Open the front door [B].
4. Remove the PCDU toner collection bottle [A].

5. Hold down the ITB lock lever [B] and turn it in the arrow direction.
6. Remove the inner right cover [A] ( x 2).
D104/D016 2-50 SM
7. Open the duplex unit [A], and then remove the front right cover [B] ( x 1).
Installation
8. Remove the following:
Inner tray [A] ( x 2)
Left frame rear cover [B] ( x 2)
Left frame cover [C] ( x 1)
Paper exit cover [D] ( x 1)
Inner rear cover [E] ( x 1)
9. Install the inner bottom plate [A] ( x 6).
10. Attach the left cover [A] ( x 2: M3x6, one screw removed in step 8).
SM 2-51 D104/D016
Internal Finisher Installation
If the punch unit (D390) is to be installed with this finisher (D429) at the same time,
skip this procedure below, and then refer to the installation procedure of "Punch Unit
(D390)".
1. Insert the inverter unit [A] in the machine.
2. Insert two joint pins [A] into the two holes in the inner rear bracket.
3. Fully attach the front side [B] of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe
after inserting the two joint pins ( x 1: M3x6).
Insert the two joint pins before attaching the front side of the inverter unit to the
paper exit unit of the mainframe. Otherwise, paper jams may occur between the
paper exit unit and inverter unit.
D104/D016 2-52 SM
Installation
4. Install the guide rail [A] ( x 2: M3x6).
5. Attach the inverter cover [A] ( x 3: M3x10).
6. Install the internal finisher [A] from the left side of the machine.
SM 2-53 D104/D016
7. Insert the rear rail pins [A] into the frame of the machine ( x 1: M3x6).
8. Push the internal finisher [A] and connect the cable [B] to the power socket of the
machine.
11. Check the internal finisher operation.
D104/D016 2-54 SM
Punch Unit (D390)
2.13 PUNCH UNIT (D390)

Installation
1 Punch Unit 1
2 Output Tray Lower Cover 1
3 Drawer Connector 1
4 Bracket 1
5 Left Frame Cover 1
6 Punch Cover 1
SM 2-55 D104/D016
Punch Unit (D390)

If the internal finisher has not already been installed, skip the "Removing the Internal
Finisher" section, and go to the "Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal
Finisher" section. Also do "Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher" in the "Internal
Finisher (D429)" section.
If the internal finisher has already been installed, you must remove it first. Start from the
"Removing the Internal Finisher" section.
Removing the Internal Finisher

1. Open the front door.
2. Open the right door [A], and then remove the front right cover [B] ( x 1).
3. Disconnect the cable [A] from the power socket of the machine, and then pull out the
internal finisher [B].
D104/D016 2-56 SM
Punch Unit (D390)
Installation
4. Remove the internal finisher [A] ( x 1: M3x6).
5. Remove the inverter cover [A] ( x 3: M3x10).
6. Remove the guide rail [A] ( x 2: M3x6).
SM 2-57 D104/D016
Punch Unit (D390)
7. Pull the inverter unit [A] toward the front side ( x 1: M3x6).
8. Remove the inverter unit [A] from the machine.
D104/D016 2-58 SM
Punch Unit (D390)
Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher
Installation
1. Remove the inverter right bracket [A] from the inverter unit ( x 4).
2. To remove screw [B], open guide plate [C].
3. Remove the positioning pin bracket [A] from the inverter right bracket ( x 2).
4. Attach the inverter right bracket [A] to the punch unit [B] ( x 1: M3x6).
SM 2-59 D104/D016
Punch Unit (D390)
5. Slide the inverter small guide [A] to the front side (arrow direction), and then remove it
( x 1).
6. Remove all the tapes on the punch unit.
If all the tapes are not removed, SC763 may occur.
7. Attach the inverter unit [A] to the punch unit [B], and then secure the inverter unit with the
punch unit ( x 4 removed in step 1).
8. Attach the drawer connector [A] of the punch unit to the rear bracket of the inverter unit
D104/D016 2-60 SM
Punch Unit (D390)
( x 2 removed in step 3).

9. Attach the clamp [B] to the rear bracket of the inverter unit.
Installing the Punch and Inverter Unit
Installation
1. Install the punch and inverter unit [A] in the mainframe.
2. Insert the two joint pins [A] (this picture does not show the two joint pins) into the two
holes in the inner rear bracket.
3. Fully attach the front side [B] of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe
after inserting two joint pins ( x 1: M3x6).
Insert the two joint pins before attaching the front side of the inverter unit to the
paper exit unit of the mainframe. Otherwise, paper jams may occur between the
paper exit unit and inverter unit.
SM 2-61 D104/D016
Punch Unit (D390)
4. Remove the stopper [A] from the guide rail, and then attach with the screw holes [B]
(these screw holes must be used when the internal finisher is installed with the punch
unit).
5. Install the guide rail [A] on the front edge of the inner bottom plate ( x 2).
6. Install the punch cover [A] ( x 3: M3x6).
D104/D016 2-62 SM
Punch Unit (D390)
Preparing the Internal Finisher
Installation
1. Remove the left rear cover [A] and the rear cover [B] of the internal finisher ( x2
each).
2. Attach the drawer connector [A] to the rear bracket of the finisher.
3. Connect the harnesses [B] to the connectors [C] on the main board.
Black harness connector to CN16
Gray harness connector to CN17
4. Reinstall the rear cover (removed in step 1) ( x 2).
SM 2-63 D104/D016
Punch Unit (D390)
Installing the Internal Finisher
1. Install the internal finisher [A] in the mainframe ( x 1).
2. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2).
3. Attach the bracket [A] ( x 2); this bracket is for the internal finisher when used with the
punch unit.
D104/D016 2-64 SM
Punch Unit (D390)
Installation
4. Remove the output tray lower cover [A]; this cover is for the internal finisher without the
punch unit ( x 3).
5. Attach the output tray lower cover [A]; this cover is for the internal finisher when used
with the punch unit ( x 3).
Note
SM 2-65 D104/D016
Punch Unit (D390)
The two projections [A] on the output tray lower cover (this plate is actually attached to
the output tray lower cover) must be inserted along the two guide rails [B] inside the
output tray unit.
Push the slide plate [A] to check if the output tray lower cover is correctly installed.
The left side picture shows the correct result and the right side picture shows the
incorrect result.
6. Attach the left frame cover [A] ( x 2).

7. Push the internal finisher in the mainframe.
8. Connect the I/F cable [B] of the finisher to the inlet of the mainframe.
D104/D016 2-66 SM
Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559)
2.14 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3010 (D559)

Installation
1 Envelope Feeder 1
SM 2-67 D104/D016
Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559)
This tray can be only installed in tray 1 of the copier. Do not install this tray in trays
other than tray 1. Otherwise, paper jam or other paper problem may occur.
1. Remove all tapes and red tag from the envelope feeder.
2. Pull paper tray 1 [A] part of the way out.

3. Remove two screws from both tray guides.
4. Pull out paper tray 1 [A].
5. Install the envelope feeder [A] into tray 1 of the main machine.
6. Secure two screws at both tray guides.
7. Close the tray 1, and then turn on the machine.
D104/D016 2-68 SM
Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)
2.15 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C5501 (D547)

Installation
1 Screw: M3 x 8 1
2 Screw: M3 x 14*1 1
3 Screw: M3 x 25 1
4 Tapping Screw: M3 x 10 2
5 Upper Tray 1
6 Lower Tray 1
7 Tray Bracket 3
8 Clamp 5
*1: Not used in this machine
SM 2-69 D104/D016
Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)
1. Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover.

2. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover ( [C] x 2: M3x10, [D] x 1:
M3x25).
For this model, use the screw holes marked "3" on the table bracket.
3. Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket ( x 2: M3x8).

4. Attach the upper tray [B] to the tray bracket ( x 1: M3x8).
5. Use the clamps as necessary to clamp the cable of the card read/writer device.
The smart card reader must be placed on this card reader tray. If not, some antenna
or transmitter in the main machine may be interrupted.
D104/D016 2-70 SM
USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556)
2.16 USB2.0/SD SLOT TYPE G (D556)

Installation
1 USB2.0/SD Slot 1
2 Ground Plate 1
3 USB Cable 1
4 Screw: M3 x 6 blue 1
5 Screw: M3 x 8 4
6 Decal 1
7 Clamp 1
8 PDF Direct Card*1 1
*1: If the PostScript 3 option is used in this machine, this card is not necessary.
1. Connect the USB cable [B] to the USB slot [A] in the USB2.0/SD Slot unit.
2. Attach the ground plate [C] to the bracket of the USB2.0/SD Slot ( x 1: M3x6 blue).
SM 2-71 D104/D016
3. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 8).
4. Remove the scanner left cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Remove the left frame cover [B] ( x 2).
6. Remove the part [A] on the scanner left cover.
7. Make four holes in the scanner left cover with a screwdriver as shown [A].
Smooth the four holes in the scanner left cover as shown [B].
D104/D016 2-72 SM
Installation
8. Route the USB cable [A] through the gaps in the left scanner cover.
9. Secure the USB2.0/SD Slot [B] with the left scanner cover as shown above ( x 4:
M3x8).
Use the screw holes [C] as shown above.
10. Attach the scanner left cover [A] to the mainframe ( x 2).
11. Connect the USB cable [B] to USB-A (this is the USB slot closest to the front side of the
machine) as shown above.
Make sure that the USB cable is inserted in USB-A (front side).
SM 2-73 D104/D016
12. Attach the clamp [A] to the left middle area of the rear cover.
13. Wind the USB cable [B] two or three times not to interrupt the other slots, and then clamp
the cable loops ( x 1).
If PostScript 3 is already installed, go to step 23. If not, follow the steps from 14 to
22.
14. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1), and move the SD card from SD slot 1 to SD slot 2.
15. Insert the PDF direct card in SD slot 1.
16. Plug in and turn on the mainframe.
17. Enter the System SP mode.
18. Move security applications (HDD Encryption unit and Data Overwrite Security Unit) from
the SD card in SD slot 2 to the SD card in SD slot 1 with SP5-873-001 "Move Exec"
( p.2-94 "SD Card Appli Move").
19. Enter the Scanner SP mode, and then change the setting of SP1013-001 from "0" to "1".
20. Enter the Printer SP mode, and then change the setting of SP1110-001 from "0" to "1".
21. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the machine.
22. Remove the SD card in slot 2, and then attach the SD slot cover ( x 1).
Keep this card in the safe place ( p.2-94).
23. Turn on the mainframe.
24. Check the operation of the USB2.0/SD Slot.
D104/D016 2-74 SM
25. Attach the decal [A] to the USB2.0/SD Slot as shown above.
2.16.3 TESTING THE SD CARD/USB SLOT

1. Insert an SD card or USB memory device in the slot.
You can connect only one removable memory device at a time.
2. Close the media slot cover.
Installation
If you leave the cover open, static electricity conducted through an inserted SD card
could cause the machine to malfunction.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the [Clear Modes] key.
4. Place an original on the exposure glass.
5. Press [Store File].
6. Press [Store to Memory Device].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [Start] key.
When writing is complete, a confirmation message appears.
9. Press [Exit].
10. Remove the memory device from the media slot.
Do not remove the memory device while writing is in process.
SM 2-75 D104/D016
Mechanical Counter (NA Only)
2.17 MECHANICAL COUNTER (NA ONLY)
This counter is supplied as a spare part.

1. Rear cover ( p.4-18)
2. Rear lower cover ( p.4-19)
3. Controller box cover ( p.4-145)
4. Remove the cutout [A] in the rear lower cover with nippers.
5. Attach the mechanical counter [A] to the bracket [B] and connect the harness to each
mechanical counter as shown above.
The one [C] of two harnesses is not used in this model.
D104/D016 2-76 SM
Mechanical Counter (NA Only)
Installation
6. Attach the mechanical counter bracket [A] to the frame ( x 2).
7. Connect the mechanical counter harness [C] to the mechanical counter [D] and the BCU
(CN218) [E], and route the harness as shown above ( x 5)
9. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch.
11. Set SP5987-001 to "1: ON".
12. Exit the SP mode, and then turn the machine off and on.
SM 2-77 D104/D016
Key Counter Bracket
2.18 KEY COUNTER BRACKET
After the key counter bracket is installed in the mainframe, the following options cannot be
used at the same time.
Internal Finisher Type C2550 (D429)
Handset (B433)
1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert
the key counter holder [C].
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
3. Install the key counter cover [D] ( x 2).
5. Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover.
D104/D016 2-78 SM
Key Counter Bracket
Installation
6. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket, and attach the key counter to the
scanner left cover.
7. Connect the key counter cable [A] to the connector [B].

SM 2-79 D104/D016
Key Counter Interface Unit
2.19 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT

2. Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover.

5. Attach the clamp [A] to the DRB bracket.

6. Install the key counter interface board [B] on the DRB bracket ( x 4).
7. Connect and route the key counter cable [A] to the connector on the key counter
interface board as shown above (ground screw x 1, x 6).
8. Connect and route the harness [B] to the connector on the key counter interface board
D104/D016 2-80 SM
Key Counter Interface Unit
and connector CN216 [C] on the BCU ( x 5)
Installation
9. Pull the key counter cable through from the cutout and connect it to the connector [A] of
the key counter unit.
SM 2-81 D104/D016
Anti-Condensation Heater
2.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
This heater is supplied as a spare part.

2. Open the ARDF or platen cover.
3. Glass cover [A] (stepped screw x 4)
4. Disconnect the DF I/F cable [A].

5. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 2)
D104/D016 2-82 SM
Installation
6. ARDF exposure glass [A]
Position the white marker [B] at the rear-left corner when you reattach the ARDF
exposure glass.
7. Rear scale [A] (stepped screw x 3)
8. Exposure glass [A] with left scale.
Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure
glass.
SM 2-83 D104/D016
9. Move the scanner carriage fully across to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [A]
at the rear of the machine.
10. Put the connector of the heater [B] through the cutout [C].
11. Move the scanner carriage to the left side as shown above by rotating the scanner motor
at the rear of the machine.
12. Install the heater in the scanner unit ( x 1).
13. Secure the cable cover [A] and the left side of the heater ( x 1).
14. Attach a clamp as shown above.

15. Connect the harness [A] of the heater to the connector [B] in the frame of the machine.
D104/D016 2-84 SM
Tray Heater
2.21 TRAY HEATER
Mainframe
Installation
This heater is supplied as a spare part.
1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

2. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Connect the connector [B] of the heater to the connector of the main machine.
4. Install the heater [C] inside the machine ( x 1).
Tray Heater for D425 (Option)
1. Remove the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1) of the mainframe.
2. Disconnect the harness [B].
SM 2-85 D104/D016
Tray Heater
3. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe ( x 5).

4. Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit.
5. Remove the securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the paper
feed unit ( x 2).
6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

7. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1)
D104/D016 2-86 SM
Tray Heater
Installation
8. Connect the heater harness [A] of the heater to the relay harness [B].
9. Insert the heater harness [A] into the tube [B], and push the tube against the rear frame
of the paper feed unit as shown above.
Make sure that the tube is in contact with the rear frame [C].
10. Route the relay harness [A] as shown above ( x 5).
Make sure that the connector [A] is placed securely as shown above.
Make sure that the edge of the tube [B] is placed as shown above.
11. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit ( x 2) and securing brackets ( x1
each)
SM 2-87 D104/D016
Tray Heater
12. Remove the connector cap [A] from the tray heater harness.
13. Connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness [C] of the mainframe.
Do not connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness of the mainframe
before installing the securing bracket [D]. Otherwise, the securing bracket may
pinch the relay harness.
14. Clamp the harness [A] as shown above ( x 1).

15. Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe ( x 5).
16. Reinstall all the tray cassettes.
D104/D016 2-88 SM
Tray Heater
Tray Heater for D331 (Option)
Installation
1. Remove the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1) of the mainframe.
3. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe ( x 5).

4. Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit.
5. Remove the securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then rear cover [B] of the paper
feed unit ( x 2).
SM 2-89 D104/D016
Tray Heater
6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

7. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
8. Connect heater harness [A] of the heater to the relay harness [B].
9. Remove the harness guide [A] ( x 1), and move it in the blue arrow direction as shown
above.
D104/D016 2-90 SM
Tray Heater
Installation
10. Insert the heater harness [A] into the tube [B], and push the tube against the rear frame
of the paper feed unit as shown above.
Make sure that the tube is contact with the rear frame [C].
11. Route the relay harness as shown above ( x 6).
Make sure that the edge of the tube [A] is placed as shown above.
The clamp [B] is not used.
12. Reinstall the harness guide.
13. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit ( x 2) and securing brackets ( x1
each).
SM 2-91 D104/D016
Tray Heater
14. Remove the connector cap [A] from the tray heater harness.
15. Connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness [C] of the mainframe.
Do not connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness of the mainframe
before installing the securing bracket [D]. Otherwise, the securing bracket may
pinch the relay harness.
16. Clamp the harness [A] as shown above ( x 1).

17. Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe ( x 5).
18. Reinstall all the tray cassettes.
D104/D016 2-92 SM
Controller Options
2.22 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
2.22.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slot applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All
Installation
Connections" at the end of this section).
I/F Card Slots

I/F slot [A] is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be installed):
IEEE1284, IEEE802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth, File Format Converter.
I/F slot [B] is used only for Gigabit Ethernet.
SD Card Slots
Slot 1 is used for Security Card by default. Merge multiple SD cars in one SD card If the
following optional applications are to be installed in this machine; PostScript 3, PictBridge
and/or IPDS.
Slot 2 is used for VM card (App2Me) by default or for service only (for example, updating
the firmware). If the Browser Unit is to be installed in this machine, remove the VM card
from the SD slot 2, and then use the SD slot 2 for installing the Browser Unit. Reinstall
the VM card in the SD slot 2 after completing the installation of the Browser Unit.
USB Slots
Left-side USB slot [C]: Used for connecting a digital camera (only works if PictBridge is
installed).
Right-side USB slot [D]: Used when installing the optional USB2.0/SD card slot
SM 2-93 D104/D016
Controller Options
2.22.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
The PostScript3 application and fonts cannot be moved to another SD card.

However, other applications can be moved onto the PostScript3 SD card.
Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs
from one SD card to another SD card.
Slot 1 is used to store application programs. But there are four possible applications
(PostScript 3, Security Card (DataOverwriteSecurity and HDD Encryption Unit), PictBridge,
IPDS). You cannot run application programs from Slot 2. However you can move application
programs from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure.
Make sure that the target SD card has enough space.
1. Enter SP5873 "SD Card Appli Move".
2. Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 2 to the SD Card in Slot 1.
Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.

Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an
SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you
copy the application program from one card to another card.
Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is
not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
Keep the SD card in the place after you copy the application program from one card to
another card. This is done for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
D104/D016 2-94 SM
Controller Options
SD Card Storage:
1. Hold down the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it in the arrow direction.
2. Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 4), and then keep the SD card in the place [C]
after you copy the application program from one card to another card.
You cannot copy PostScript application to another SD card. You have to copy the other
application (PictBridge, Security Card or IPDS) to the SD card that stores the PostScript
Installation
application.
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original
SD card to another SD card.
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card
on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code
44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied to this
SD card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2.The application
program is copied from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the
original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card
on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code
44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
SM 2-95 D104/D016
Controller Options
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back into
this card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1.The application
program is copied back from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the
machine.
12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at
the end of this section).
D104/D016 2-96 SM
Controller Options
2.22.3 POSTSCRIPT 3
The PostScript3 application and fonts cannot be moved to another SD card.

However, other applications can be moved onto the PostScript3 SD card.
Installation
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1).
2. Remove the Security Card [B] from the SD slot 1 and VM card [C] from the SD slot 2.
3. Turn the SD-card label face of the Security Card [A] to the front of the machine. Then
push it [A] slowly into SD slot 2 [B] until you hear a click.
4. Turn the SD-card label face of the PostScript3 [B] to the front of the machine. Then push
it slowly into slot 1 [B] until you hear a click.
5. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then execute "Move Exec" with
SP5-873-001.
For details, see "SD Card Appli Move".
6. Turn off the machine after completing the "Move Exec".
7. Remove the Security Card from the SD slot 2, and then keep the Security Card in the
SM 2-97 D104/D016
Controller Options
place for the SD card storage ( p.2-94 "SD Card Appli Move").
8. Reinstall the VM card in the SD slot 2.
9. Attach the SD slot cover ( x 1).
10. Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door.
D104/D016 2-98 SM
Controller Options
2.22.4 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER
Installation
1. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter [B] into the I/F-slot and then fasten it with screws.
3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below.
SP No. Title Setting
SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1"
SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0"
5. Check the operation.

SM 2-99 D104/D016
Controller Options
2.22.5 IEEE1284
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g
(Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
1. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the I/F-slot.
D104/D016 2-100 SM
Controller Options
2.22.6 IEEE 802.11 A/G, G (WIRELESS LAN)
Installation Procedure
Installation
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g
1. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] from the I/F-slot ( x 2).

2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the I/F-slot.
4. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them at the
front left and rear left of the machine.
5. Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the front left of the machine.
SM 2-101 D104/D016
Controller Options
6. Attach "ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) [C] to the rear right of the machine.
"ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna.

Do not attach them at the wrong places.
7. Attach the clamps as shown above.
8. Wire the cables and clamp them ( x 7).
Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the
covers.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment
that generates strong magnetic fields.
Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
Installing Various Hardware Combinations
Refer to the above picture when installing the USB2.0/SD.
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for
IEEE 802.11 a/g, g. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.

1. Press the "User Tools/Counter" key.
2. On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless
LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings".
4. Press "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either "802.11 Ad hoc", "Ad hoc" or "Infrastructure".
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
D104/D016 2-102 SM
Controller Options
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.

Range: 1 to 14 (default: 11)
The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to
protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side
Installation
in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects "Active" or "Inactive" ("Inactive" is default.).
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then select the
transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default:
Auto). This setting should match the distance between the closest machine or access
point. This depends on which mode is selected.
For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest
PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the distance between the
machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps: 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps: 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps: 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps: 400 m (437 yd.)
10. Press "Return to Default" to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press "Yes" to initialize the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key
SM 2-103 D104/D016
Controller Options
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g, g Wireless LAN
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11 a/g, g.
SP No. Name Function
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the

5840-006 Channel MAX
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings

5840-007 Channel MIN
allowed for your country.
5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
Used to confirm
WEP Key the current WEP
key setting.
Used to show
the maximum
length of the
WEP Mode
string that can be
used for the
WEP Key entry.
D104/D016 2-104 SM
Controller Options
2.22.7 BLUETOOTH
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g
Installation
1. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [A] (Knob-screw x 2) into the slot.

3. Insert the Bluetooth card [B] into the Bluetooth card adaptor.
4. Install the Bluetooth card adaptor on the Bluetooth board.
5. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth board.
SM 2-105 D104/D016
Controller Options
2.22.8 PICTBRIDGE
You must install the PictBridge option in SD Card slot 1. However, the Postscript3
option, Security Card and IPDS unit option are also installed in SD Card slot 1. You
must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the PpostScript3,
Security Card or IPDS unit option installed and you want to install the PictBridge unit.
1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1).

2. Remove the VM card [B] from the SD slot 2.
3. Turn the SD card label face of the PictBridge [A] to the front of the machine. Then push it
slowly into SD slot 2 until you hear a click.
4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then execute "Move Exec" with
SP5-873-001.
For details, see "SD Card Appli Move".
5. Turn off the machine after completing the "Move Exec".
D104/D016 2-106 SM
Rev. 06/14/2011 Controller Options
6. Remove the PictBridge from the SD slot 2, and then keep the PictBridge card in the place
for the SD card storage ( p.2-94 "SD Card Appli Move").
Installation
⇒ 2.22.9 BROWSER UNIT TYPE E
Installation Procedure
1. For models which have the VM card, do the following. Then continue with step 3:
- Press “User tools” button to enter the User Tools mode.
- Press “Extended Feature Settings” on the LCD.
- Press “Extended Feature Settings” on the LCD again.
- Press “Start up” tab.
- Stop all SDK applications with touching application lines.
- Exit UP mode, turn off the machine and unplug the power cord
- Remove the slot cover for SD cards [A].
- Remove the SD card (VM/JAVA) from SD slot 2 [B].
2. Turn off the machine and unplug the main machine power cord.
3. Turn the Browser SD card label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into
the slot until you hear a click.
5. Push the “User Tools” key.
If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, steps 6 and 7 are required.
Otherwise, skip to step 8.
6. Push the “Login/Logout” key.
7. Login with the administrator user name and password.
8. Touch “Extended Feature Settings” twice on the LCD.
SM 2-107 D104/D016
Controller Options Rev. 06/14/2011
9. Touch “Install” on the LCD.

10. Touch “SD card”.
11. Touch the “Browser” line.
12. Under “Install to”, touch “Machine HDD” and touch “Next”.
13. When you see “Ready to Install”, check the information on the screen to confirm your
previous selection.
14. Touch “OK”. You will see “Installing the extended feature… Please wait.” and then
“Completed”.
15. Touch “Exit” to go back to the setting screen.
16. Touch “Change Allocation”.
17. Touch “Browser” line.
18. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Browser Unit. By default, this
function is assigned to the “Other Functions” key (bottom key of the function keys).
19. Touch “OK”.
20. Touch “Exit” twice to go back to the copy screen.
21. Turn off the main power switch.
22. Install the function key for “Browser Unit” to the place you chose in step 18.
23. Turn on the main power switch.
24. When the reaches the Ready condition, press the key that you installed in step 22.
Note: A message will be displayed confirming that the Browser Option was successfully
installed.
26. Remove the SD card from slot 2.
27. Reinstall the JAVA card in slot 2.
28. Attach the slot cover.
29. Ask the customer to keep the SD card in a safe place after you have installed the
application program from the card to the HDD. This is because:
- The SD card is the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
- You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
D104/D016 2-108 SM
Controller Options
2.22.10 GIGABIT ETHERNET
Installation
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 8)
2. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] from the I/F-slot ( x 1).

3. Remove the controller bracket [B] ( x 2).
4. Install the Gigabit Ethernet board [A] in the connector [B] on the controller board.
SM 2-109 D104/D016
Controller Options
5. Secure the GigabitEthernet board [A] to the controller box ( x 2).

6. Reassemble the controller bracket ( x 2) and rear cover ( x 8).
7. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the LAN cable [B] as shown above, and connect the LAN
cable to the machine.
8. Make sure that the machine can recognize this option (see "Check All Connections" at
D104/D016 2-110 SM
Controller Options
2.22.11 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch.
2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page
Installation
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
SM 2-111 D104/D016
None
Maintenance Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES

Preventive Maintenance Items
Other Yield Parts
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 3-1 D104/D016
PM Parts Settings
3.2 PM PARTS SETTINGS
3.2.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE OLD PM PARTS

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset
the PM counters automatically. In the case of developer, the developer initialization will
also be done automatically.
Item SP
Black: 3902-001
Cyan: 3902-002
Development Unit
Magenta: 3902-003
Yellow: 3902-004
Black: 3902-009
Cyan: 3902-010
Drum Unit
Magenta: 3902-011
Yellow: 3902-012
ITB Unit 3902-013
Fusing Unit 3902-014
Heating Roller Unit 3902-016
ITB Cleaning Unit 3902-017
PTR Unit 3902-018
PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 3902-019*1
ITB Toner Collection Bottle 3902-020*1
D104/D016 3-2 SM
PM Parts Settings
*1: Only if the toner collection bottle is replaced before the machine detects near-full.
For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset
PM counters.
Development unit
PCU/ ITB Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full)
3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values.
Maintenance
Preventive
3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-803. If the PM
counter for a unit was not reset, then reset that counter with SP 7-804.
4. Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7-853.
5. Make sure that the counters for the previous units (SP7-906) on the new SMC logging
data list (from step 2 above) are equal to the counters (SP7-803) for these units on the
previous SMC logging data list (the list that was output in the "Before removing the old
parts" section).
6. Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7-950.
SM 3-3 D104/D016
PM Parts Settings
3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK

1. Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning).
2. Enter the user tools mode.
3. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration (ACC)" for the copier mode & printer mode as
follows:
Print the ACC test pattern (User Tools > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
Put the printout on the exposure glass.
Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart. This ensures the precise ACC
adjustment.
Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD. Then, the machine starts the ACC.
4. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode.
5. Do the "Forced line position adjustment" as follows.
First do SP2-111-3 (Mode c).
Then do SP2-111-1 (Mode a).
message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to
-12.
3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK

Check if the sample image has been copied normally.
D104/D016 3-4 SM
79 06/15/2011 Updated Cleaning for ID Sensors.
Beforehand
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 BEFOREHAND
Installing options, please do the following:

If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the
lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the
network cable.
Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands
before you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-1 D104/D016
Special Tools
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Q’ty
B645 5010 SD Card 1
G021 9350 Loop-back Connector - Parallel 1
C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1
A257 9300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
B679 5100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1
A184 9501 Optics Adjustment Tool (2 pcs/set) 1
5203 9502 Silicon Grease G-501 1
D104/D016 4-2 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
4.3.1 SCANNING
Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment
before you do the following scanner adjustments.
Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification
Replacement
Adjustment
and
A: Sub-scan magnification
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 if necessary.
Standard: ±1.0%.
SM 4-3 D104/D016
Image Adjustment
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
A: Leading Edge Registration

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if
necessary.
Standard: 0 ± 2 mm for the leading edge registration, 0 ± 2 mm for the side-to-side
registration.
SP mode
Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001
Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001
D104/D016 4-4 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge
A: Leading edge registration, B: Side-to-Side registration

Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed
and
stations.
2. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the
following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 4.2 ± 3.0 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 ± 3.0 mm for the side-to-side
registration. Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Registration (1st side) ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 Side-to-Side Registration (2nd side) ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-005 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-006 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge) ± 5.0 mm
SM 4-5 D104/D016
Image Adjustment
ARDF sub-scan magnification

1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary.
Standard: ±5.0%
Reduction mode: ±5.0%
Enlargement mode: ±5.0%
4.3.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
A = 4.2 mm, B = 2.25 mm, C = 3.25

Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown
below.
Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-002) to
adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and duplex unit.
Adjustment Standard
Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Side to side (main-scan direction): 2.25 ± 1.75 mm
D104/D016 4-6 SM
Image Adjustment
Paper Registration Standard

The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within the following
tolerance.
Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 9 mm
Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: Trimming Area) with SP2-109-003.
Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some
pages of the "Trimming Area" for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge
and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
Replacement
Adjustment
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
and
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
SM 4-7 D104/D016
Image Adjustment
4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan)
cannot be adjusted within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after
adjusting the erase margin C and D, and then adjust the erase margin A and B.
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
3. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -010 if necessary.
Leading edge: 1.5 to 5.0 mm,
Side-to-side: 0.5 to 4.0 mm,
Trailing edge: 0.5 to 0.6 mm
D104/D016 4-8 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3.5 COLOR REGISTRATION
Line Position Adjustment

The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best
color prints.
Do the following if color registration shifts:
Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment.
1. First do SP2-111-3.
2. Then do SP2-111-1.
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message
is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-007 (0: Completed
successfully, 1: Failed).
You should also do the line position adjustment at these times:
1. After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position
Replacement
Adjustment
adjustment if you install the machine at the user location.) if the machine is
and
pre-installed at the workshop and moved to the user location,
2. When you remove the PCDU
3. When you remove or replace the image transfer belt, image transfer belt unit or laser
optical housing unit
SM 4-9 D104/D016
Image Adjustment
4.3.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION
The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output.
You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements.
Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can
adjust the gamma data for the following:
Highlight
Middle
Shadow areas
IDmax.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
Copy Mode
- Photo Mode -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that

ID max: the density of level 10
1 (K, C, M, and Y) matches that of level 10 on

the C-4 chart.
For adjusting ID max: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Middle (Middle ID) the density of level 6 matches
2 (K, C, M, and Y) that of level 6 on the C-4

chart.
For adjusting Middle: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Shadow (High ID) the density of level 8 matches

chart.
For adjusting Shadow: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)
D104/D016 4-10 SM
Image Adjustment
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard

dirty background does not
Highlight (Low ID) show on the copy and the
4 (K, C, M, and Y) density of level 3 is slightly

lighter than that of level 3 on
the C-4 chart.
For adjusting Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

the color balance of black
K Highlight (Low ID)
scale levels 3 through 5 in the
(C,M, and Y)
copy is seen as gray (no C,
5 <on the full color
M, or Y should be visible). If
copy>
the black scale contains C,
Replacement
Adjustment
M, or Y, do steps 1 to 4 again.
and
For adjusting K Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

ID max: (K, C, M, the density of level 10
1 and Y) matches that of level 10 on

the C-4 chart.
For adjusting ID max: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Middle (Middle ID) the density of level 6 matches

chart.
For adjusting Middle: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)
Shadow (High ID) Adjust the offset value so that

3
(K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 8 matches
SM 4-11 D104/D016
Image Adjustment
that of level 8 on the C-4

chart.
For adjusting Shadow: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

dirty background does not
Highlight (Low ID) show on the copy and the
4 (K, C, M, and Y) density of level 3 is slightly

lighter than that of level 3 on
the C-4 chart.
For adjusting Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color -
Adjust the offset value so

that the density of level 10
ID max: (K)
1 matches that of level 10 on
the C-4 chart.
For adjusting K ID max: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Middle (Middle ID) that the density of level 6
2 (K) matches that of level 6 on

the C-4 chart.
For adjusting K Middle: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Shadow (High ID) that the density of level 8
3 (K) matches that of level 8 on

the C-4 chart.
For adjusting K Shadow: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)
D104/D016 4-12 SM
Image Adjustment

that dirty background does
Highlight (Low ID) not show on the copy and
4 (K) the density of level 3 is

slightly lighter than that of
level 3 on the C-4 chart.
For adjusting K Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)
Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust "shadow" as
shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed
clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of "shadow" again until it is.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-13 D104/D016
Image Adjustment
Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
1200 x 1200 photo mode
1200 x 1200 text mode
600 x 600 text mode
K C M Y
Highlight SP1-104-1 SP1-104-21 SP1-104-41 SP1-104-61

Shadow SP1-104-2 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-62
Middle SP1-104-3 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-63
IDmax SP1-104-4 SP1-104-24 SP1-104-44 SP1-104-64
- Adjustment Procedure -
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select "Printer SP".
5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.
6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image
quality for these settings.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4
test chart.
Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Shadow", "Middle", "Highlight".
8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.
D104/D016 4-14 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS
4.4.1 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE

If you replace this toner collection bottle after the machine detects that it is full or near-full, the
machine automatically resets the PM counter for the PCDU toner collection bottle after
replacement.
But, if you replace a bottle that is not full or near-full, then you must reset the PM counter for
this unit. To do this, set SP 3902 019 to 1 before you start to work on the machine.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the front door [A].
2. PCDU toner collection bottle [A] (lock x 2)
SM 4-15 D104/D016
Exterior Covers
4.4.2 FRONT DOOR

2. PCDU toner collection bottle ( p.4-15)
3. Release the belt [A].
4. Front door [A] ( x 2, pin x 2)
D104/D016 4-16 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.3 ITB CLEANING UNIT COVER
1. Open the ITB cleaning unit cover [A] ( x 2).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Release the tab [A], and then remove the ITB cleaning unit cover [B].
SM 4-17 D104/D016
Exterior Covers
4.4.4 LEFT COVER
1. Left cover [A] ( x 10)
4.4.5 REAR COVER
D104/D016 4-18 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.6 REAR LOWER COVER
1. Rear lower cover [A] ( x 5)
4.4.7 DUST FILTER
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Dust filter cover [A] (hooks)
2. Dust filter [B]
SM 4-19 D104/D016
Exterior Covers
4.4.8 RIGHT REAR COVER


3. Right rear cover [B] ( x 5)
4.4.9 OPERATION PANEL
1. Remove six screws on the operation panel [A].

2. Slide the operation panel to the front side.
D104/D016 4-20 SM
Exterior Covers
3. Disconnect the harness [A].

4. Operation panel [B]
4.4.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT
It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel at the following times:

When you replace the operation panel.
When you replace the controller board.
When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly
Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only.
1. Press , press "1", "1", "9", "3", and then press 5 times to open the
Self-Diagnostics menu.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press"1").
3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark when " " shows.

5. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.
6. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the calibration
settings.
SM 4-21 D104/D016
Exterior Covers
4.4.11 INNER RIGHT COVER

2. Press the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it up clockwise as shown above.
3. Inner right cover [B] ( x 2)
4.4.12 INNER COVER

2. Inner right cover ( p.4-22)
3. Inner cover [A] ( x 4)
D104/D016 4-22 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.13 FRONT RIGHT COVER

1. Open the duplex unit.
Replacement
4. Remove the front right cover [A] with the operation panel [B] lifted up ( x 1).
Adjustment
and
4.4.14 RIGHT UPPER COVER
1. Right upper cover [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-23 D104/D016
Exterior Covers
4.4.15 LEFT FRAME AND LEFT FRAME REAR COVER
1. Left frame cover [A] ( x 1)

2. Left frame rear cover [B] ( x 2)
4.4.16 PAPER EXIT COVER
1. Inverter tray [A]

2. Paper exit cover [B] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-24 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.17 INVERTER TRAY
1. Inverter tray [A] (hooks)
4.4.18 INNER TRAY
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Inner tray [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-25 D104/D016
Exterior Covers
4.4.19 INNER REAR COVER

1. Left frame cover ( p.4-24 "Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover")
2. Paper exit cover ( p.4-24)
3. Inner tray ( p.4-25)
4. Inner rear cover [A] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-26 SM
Scanner Unit
4.5 SCANNER UNIT
4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS

2. Open the ARDF or platen cover.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Glass cover [A] ( x 4)
4. Disconnect the DF I/F cable [A] and

5. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 2)
SM 4-27 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
6. ARDF exposure glass [A]
Position the white marker [B] at the rear-left corner when you reattach the ARDF
exposure glass.
7. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)
8. Exposure glass [A] with left scale
Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure
glass.
D104/D016 4-28 SM
Scanner Unit
4.5.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

1. Exposure glass with left scale ( p.4-27)
2. SBU cover [A] ( x 6)
Replacement
The three screws [B] do not need to be fully removed. Just loosen them to
Adjustment
remove the SBU cover.
and
3. Original length sensors [A] (hooks, x1, x 1 each))
SM 4-29 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
4.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP

2. Operation panel ( p.4-20)
3. Exposure glass ( p.4-27)
4. Scanner rear cover [A] ( x 1)
5. Disconnect the connector [A] from the lamp stabilizer [B].
6. Move the carriage unit [A] to the cutout position [B].
D104/D016 4-30 SM
Scanner Unit
7. Cable guide [A] (hooks)
Keep the cable guide for reassembling.

8. Adjustor clamp [B] ( x 1)
9. Pulley [C]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
10. Release the cable clamp [A] (one hook under the cable clamp) at the rear edge of the
exposure lamp.
11. Hold down the snap [B], and then slide the exposure lamp [C] to the front side.
12. Exposure lamp [A]
SM 4-31 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
Reassembling
Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide the adjustor clamp [A] to adjust the cable slack.
[B]: Good
[C]: Not good
D104/D016 4-32 SM
Scanner Unit
4.5.4 SCANNER MOTOR

2. Scanner motor assembly [A] ( x 2, spring x 1, x 1, timing belt x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2, ground plate [B] x 1)
Make sure that the ground plate [B] is attached when installing the scanner
motor in the scanner motor bracket.
Do the scanner image adjustment after replacing the scanner motor ( p.4-3
"Image Adjustment").
SM 4-33 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
4.5.5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)

2. Original length sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x1, x 1 each)
3. Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, ground screw x 1, x 2)
When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning" (p.4-3 "Image
Adjustment").
SP4–010 (LE Regist Adjust): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning" (p.4-3 "Image
Adjustment").
SP4–011 (S-to-S Regist Adjustment): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning" (p.4-3 "Image
Adjustment").
SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of
outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different.
D104/D016 4-34 SM
Scanner Unit
4.5.6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

2. Exposure lamp stabilizer assembly [A] ( x 2, x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-35 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
4.5.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR

1. Rear Cover ( p.4-18)
2. Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30 "Exposure Lamp")
3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [B]
clockwise.
4. Remove the mylar [A].

5. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks).
D104/D016 4-36 SM
Scanner Unit
4.5.8 PLATEN COVER SENSOR

1. Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30 "Exposure Lamp")
2. Holder bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. Platen cover sensor [B] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
4.5.9 FRONT SCANNER WIRE
and
4. Scanner left cover [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-37 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
5. Scanner left stay [A] ( x 3)

6. Scanner front frame [B] ( x 5)
7. Take aside the connector bracket [A] ( x 2).

8. Scanner rear frame [B] ( x 8, x all, x all)
9. Scanner motor assembly ( p.4-33)
10. Rear scanner drive pulley [A] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-38 SM
Scanner Unit
11. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

12. Loosen the front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1)
13. Front scanner wire
Replacement
Adjustment
14. Move the shaft [C] in the red arrow direction ( x 1: at front), and remove the scanner
and
drive pulley [D] ( x 1).
Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the
ring) through the notch.
3. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times. Wind
the left end clockwise three times.
SM 4-39 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
The two green marks [C] come together when you have done this. Stick the wire
to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of
installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [A] ( x 1, x 1).
Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Insert the left end into the slit [B]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [C]
and the rear track of the movable pulley [D].
6. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [A]. The end should go via the rear
track of the right pulley [B] and the rear track of the movable pulley [C].
D104/D016 4-40 SM
Scanner Unit
Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time.
7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley.

8. Insert a scanner positioning pin [A] through the 2nd carriage hole [B] and the left holes
Replacement
Adjustment
[C] in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [D] through the 1st carriage
and
hole [E] and the right holes in the front rail [F].
9. Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail.
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [G].
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the
positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.
SM 4-41 D104/D016
Scanner Unit
4.5.10 REAR SCANNER WIRE

4. Scanner left cover ( p.4-37 "Front Scanner Wire")
5. Scanner front frame ( p.4-37 "Front Scanner Wire")
6. Scanner left stay ( p.4-37 "Front Scanner Wire")
7. Scanner rear frame ( p.4-37 "Front Scanner Wire")
8. Follow steps 10 through 14 in the p.4-37 "Front Scanner Wire". You can remove the rear
scanner wire with the same manner for replacing the front scanner wire.
Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the left end (with the ball) [B] through the drive pulley notch. Pass the right end (with
the ring) through the drive pulley hole.
3. Wind the left end [B] clockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times. Wind the
right end counterclockwise three times.
The two green marks [C] come together when you do this. Attach the wire to the
pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of
installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Install the wire.
D104/D016 4-42 SM
Scanner Unit
The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be
the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a
mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three windings
must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must face the rear.
6. Do steps 7 through 13 from the "Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire" (p.4-37 "Front
Scanner Wire").
Replacement
Adjustment
and
When removing the rear scanner wire, removing the timing pulley [A] is required
before moving the shaft ( x 1).
SM 4-43 D104/D016
Laser Optics
4.6 LASER OPTICS
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION

The caution decal is placed as shown below.
Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power
outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This copier
uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 648 - 663 nm and an output of 9
mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
4.6.2 LASER UNIT
Before installing a new laser unit, remove the polygon motor holder bracket and the
tag from the new unit.
Preparing a new laser unit
D104/D016 4-44 SM
Laser Optics
1. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser unit ( x 4)
2. Polygon motor holder bracket [B] with a red tag ( x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Install the three screws [C] (removed in step 2) in the laser unit.
4. Reinstall the polygon mirror motor cover [A] ( x 4).
Before removing the old laser unit

Do the following settings before removing the laser unit. These are adjustments for skew
adjustment motors in the laser unit.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
3. Execute SP2-220-001 to clear the Mirror-No.2 positioning motor setting for Cyan.
4. Execute SP2-220-002 to clear the Mirror-No.2 positioning motor setting for Magenta.
5. Execute SP2-220-003 to clear the Mirror-No.2 positioning motor setting for Yellow.
7. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
SM 4-45 D104/D016
Laser Optics
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit

If you did not do the procedure in ‘Before removing the laser unit’ before removing the laser
unit, you must do the following.
1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
2. Remove the left cover (see the following "Removing the laser unit").
3. Disconnect the harness [A] of the skew correction motor.

4. Do steps 1 to 7 of "Before removing the laser unit".
5. Connect the harness [A] and reinstall the left cover.
D104/D016 4-46 SM
Laser Optics
Removing the laser unit
1. Left cover [A] ( x 10)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. ITB cleaning unit [A] ( x 2)
3. Ventilation rear fan holder [A] ( x 2, x 1)

4. Ventilation front fan holder [B] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
SM 4-47 D104/D016
Laser Optics
5. Remove the laser unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 3)
After installing a new laser unit

Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser unit.
1. Open the front door of the machine.
3. Check that the settings of SP2-119-001, -002 and -003 are "0". If these settings are not
"0", execute "Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit" described
above.
If this step is not correctly done, an image problem may occur on printouts.
4. Input the SP settings on the sheet provided with a new LD unit.

SP2-101-001 to -004: Color Registration: Main Scan for each color
SP2-101-013 to -016: Color Registration: Sub Scan for each color
SP2-102-001, -003, -004, -006, -007, -009, -010, -012: Main Magnification for each
color and line speed
SP2-104-001 to -004: :LD Initial Power Adjustment for each color
The printed values [A] are different for each laser unit.
D104/D016 4-48 SM
Laser Optics
5. Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003).
6. Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 ± 1 mm. If not, change the standard
value for the main scan magnification adjustment.
7. Select "0" with SP2-109-003 after printing the "1-dot trimming pattern.
8. Do the line position adjustment.
First do SP2-111-003.
Then do SP2-111-001.
message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-010
to -012.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-49 D104/D016
Laser Optics
4.6.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

1. Laser unit ( p.4-44)
2. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 1)

4. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
After installing the laser optics housing unit:
Do the "Line Pos. Adjust Execute:Mode c" (SP2-111-003).
Then do the "Line Pos. Adjust Execute:Mode a" (SP2-111-001).
To check if SP 2-111-001 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP2-194-010 to -012.
D104/D016 4-50 SM
Image Creation
4.7 IMAGE CREATION
4.7.1 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT)
Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Hold down the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it in the arrow direction.
4. PCDU [B] ( x 2 each)
When installing a new PCDU
Remove the cover [A] on the toner inlet and pull out the tape [B] from the new development
unit before installing a new PCDU in the machine.
SM 4-51 D104/D016
Image Creation
4.7.2 DRUM UNIT AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

The new drum unit has a front cover. When you attach the new drum unit to the development
unit, remove the front cover first.
Use it for installing the new drum unit and development unit.
1. If you install a new drum unit only, set SP 3902-xxx to "1".
Black: 3902-009
Cyan: 3902-010
Magenta: 3902-011
Yellow: 3902-012
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the drum unit
automatically, after you turn the power on again.
2. If you install a new development unit only, set SP 3902-xxx to "1".
Black: 3902-001
Cyan: 3902-002
Magenta: 3902-003
Yellow: 3902-004
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the development
unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.
3. Turn the machine power off.
4. PCDU ( p.4-51)
5. Front cover [A] ( x 2)
D104/D016 4-52 SM
Image Creation
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. Drum unit [A] and development unit [B] ( x 1)
When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance
mylar [A] with a vacuum cleaner.
SM 4-53 D104/D016
Image Creation
8. Remove the connector [A] with a small flat tool [B].
Keep this connector [A] for the new drum unit.

9. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure.
10. Execute the drum phase adjustment with SP1902-001 twice.
New unit detection for the development unit

When a new development unit is installed in the machine, the machine will automatically
reset the PM counters for the development unit and drum unit, even if the drum unit was not
changed. To avoid resetting both counters after you install a new development unit only,
make sure that step 2 in the procedure above is done before installing.
D104/D016 4-54 SM
Image Creation
4.7.3 TONER HOPPER UNIT
Toner hopper unit: K, C, M

3. Inner cover ( p.4-22)
4. PCDU ( p.4-51)
Remove the corresponding color PCDU. For example, if you remove the toner
hopper unit: K, remove the black PCDU.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Toner supply drive gear [A] (hook x 1)
6. Toner hopper unit: K, C, M [B] ( x 2, x 1 for K and M; 2 for C , x 1 each)
7. Place the toner hopper unit [A] on sheets of paper.
SM 4-55 D104/D016
Image Creation
Toner hopper unit: Y

4. PCDU ( p.4-51)
5. Gear cover [A] ( x 2, x 2)

6. Toner supply drive gear (hook x 1)
7. Toner hopper unit: Y [B] ( x 2, x 1 each)
8. Place the toner hopper unit [A] on sheets of paper.
D104/D016 4-56 SM
Image Creation
When installing a new toner hopper unit

Developer must be added to the new toner hopper. Some developer (8 g) is provided with
each new toner hopper unit. Pour this into the toner hopper unit before reattaching the inner
cover.
1. Slowly open the toner hopper shutter [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Do not try to open the toner hopper shutter fully at one try. This shutter comes off
easily without the inner cover. If the toner hopper shutter has come off, reattach
it.
2. Pour the developer (8 g) into the inlet [B] of the toner hopper unit.
3. Close the toner hopper shutter.
SM 4-57 D104/D016
Image Creation
4.7.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR

5. Toner supply drive gear [A] (hook x 1)

6. Pull the toner supply drive shaft [B].
7. Take aside the toner supply gear unit [A] ( x 3).
D104/D016 4-58 SM
Image Creation
NOTE
When removing the toner supply gear unit for Yellow, one of screws on the toner
supply gear unit is difficult to see.
1) Remove the left cover ( p.4-18).
Replacement
Adjustment
2) Check the screw position [A] as shown above.
and
8. Release the clamp [A], and then disconnect the harness [B].
9. Toner supply motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
SM 4-59 D104/D016
Image Creation
NOTE
Apply “Silicon Grease G501” to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of
grease is as shown below.
The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size.
4.7.5 TONER COLLECTION MOTOR

3. PCDU: Yellow ( p.4-51)
4. Ventilation Fan: Front ( "Removing the laser unit" under p.4-44 "Laser Unit")
5. Disconnect two harnesses [A].
D104/D016 4-60 SM
Image Creation
6. Toner collection motor assembly [A] ( x 2, x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. Gears [A] ( x 1)
8. Toner collection motor [A] ( x 2)
NOTE
SM 4-61 D104/D016
Image Creation
D104/D016 4-62 SM
Image Creation
4.7.6 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE FULL SENSOR

1. Toner collection motor assembly ( p.4-60 "Toner Collection Motor")
2. PCDU toner collection bottle full sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks)
4.7.7 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE SET SWITCH
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Toner collection motor assembly ( p.4-60 "Toner Collection Motor")
2. PCDU toner collection bottle set switch [A] (hooks, x 1) and
4.7.8 RFID BOARD

1. All toner hopper units ( p.4-55)
SM 4-63 D104/D016
Image Creation
3. Toner supply drive shafts [A]
4. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)
5. RFID board [A] ( x 3, x 1)
D104/D016 4-64 SM
Image Transfer
4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER
4.8.1 ITB CLEANING UNIT

If you replace the cleaning unit or toner collection bottle after the machine detects that it is full
or near-full, the machine automatically resets the PM counter for the bottle after replacement.
But, if you replace a bottle that is not full or near-full, then you must reset the PM counter for
this unit. To do this, set SPs 3902-017 and -020 to 1 before you turn off the power switch.
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the units automatically, after you
turn the power on again.
SP 3902-017 is for the ITB cleaning unit and SP 3902-020 is for the ITB toner collection
bottle.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the ITB cleaning unit cover [A] ( x 2).
2. ITB cleaning unit [A] ( x 2)
When installing the ITB cleaning unit

Secure the front side [B] first with a screw. This [B] is the positioning screw.
SM 4-65 D104/D016
Image Transfer
4.8.2 ITB TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE FULL SENSOR

1. Left cover ( p.4-18)
2. Bottle full sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

3. ITB toner collection bottle full sensor [B] (hooks)
4.8.3 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT

1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-65)
2. PCU toner collection bottle ( p.4-15)
3. Unlock the ITB lock lever ( p.4-22 "Inner Right Cover").
4. Duplex unit ( p.4-131)
5. Release the arm [A] ( x 1).

6. Pull the lever [B] to open the paper transfer unit.
7. Harness cover [C] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-66 SM
Image Transfer
8. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the ITB unit fully [B] ( x 2, x 1).
9. Remove the ITB unit motor after pulling out the ITB unit from the machine. ( "Next
procedure")
If it takes much time to reinstall the ITB unit after removing it from the machine, close
the paper transfer unit to prevent the drum units from being exposed to light.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-67 D104/D016
Image Transfer
4.8.4 ITB UNIT MOTOR

2. ITB unit ( p.4-66)
3. ITB unit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
D104/D016 4-68 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT

2. ITB unit ( p.4-66)
3. ITB unit motor ( p.4-68)
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Two stays [A] ( x 2 each)
and
5. Front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front) ( x 1: M3x10)
6. Rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear) ( x 1: M3x10)
SM 4-69 D104/D016
Image Transfer
7. Handle [A] ( x 2: M3x10)
8. Guide bracket [A]
9. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown.
D104/D016 4-70 SM
Image Transfer
10. Front guide pin bracket [A] ( x 1)

11. Press roller bracket [B] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
12. Attach the handle [A], which was removed in step 7, to the projection [B] on the rear left
side ( x 1).
This handle will be used as a stand in later steps.
13. Stand the ITB unit [A] as shown above.

14. Image transfer belt [B]
SM 4-71 D104/D016
Image Transfer
When reinstalling a new image transfer belt

Reset the PM counter
There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for
example) in the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims.
There are two rims (width [C]: about 5 mm) at the front and rear edges inside the
image transfer belt.
This belt must be installed the correct way around. When you reinstall the image transfer
belt unit, install it with the white mark [A] on the belt at the rear side of the unit.
D104/D016 4-72 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.6 ITB CONTACT MOTOR

1. Pull out all the toner bottles.
2. Inverter tray ( p.4-25)
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Take aside the ITB contact motor unit [A] ( x 2)
and
5. Disconnect two harnesses [A], and then remove the ITB contact motor unit ( x 1)
6. Gears [A] ( x 1)
7. ITB contact motor [B] ( x 2)
SM 4-73 D104/D016
Image Transfer
NOTE
D104/D016 4-74 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.7 ITB CONTACT SENSOR

1. ITB contact motor unit ( p.4-73 "ITB Contact Motor")
2. ITB contact sensor [A] (hooks)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-75 D104/D016
Paper Transfer
4.9 PAPER TRANSFER
4.9.1 PTR (PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER) UNIT

If you install a new PTR unit, then set SP 3902-018 to "1" before you start this procedure.
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer
unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.
2. Open the paper transfer unit [A].
If the paper transfer unit cannot be opened, keep your hand supporting the PTR unit
as shown above and release very carefully the front tension lever [A] of the PTR unit.
In this case, the PTR unit open lever [B] does not work to open the PTR unit.
The spring tension of the tension lever is very strong. Be very careful to release
the tension lever. Otherwise, your hand or fingers may be injured.
D104/D016 4-76 SM
Paper Transfer
3. Remove the PTR unit [A], releasing the two locks [B].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Remove the two springs [A].
Keep these two springs from the old PTR unit and install them in the new PTR unit.
SM 4-77 D104/D016
Paper Transfer
4.9.2 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT FULL-OPEN

2. Release the arm [A] ( x 1).

3. Open the paper transfer unit [B] fully.
4.9.3 ID SENSOR BOARD

2. Open the paper transfer unit fully ( p.4-78 "Paper Transfer Unit Full-Open").
3. ID sensor cover [A] ( x 2)
D104/D016 4-78 SM
Rev. 06/15/2011 Paper Transfer
4. ID sensor board [A] ( x 6, , x 1, x 1)
If the black spacer [B] is stuck to the sensor board as shown above, remove all
black spacers. These black spacers should be used when a new ID sensor
board is installed.
Replacement
Adjustment
Cleaning for ID sensors
and
ID sensors require cleaning maintenance every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor
cleaning.
1. PCDU: K ( p.4-51)
2. ITB unit ( p.4-66)
3. Clean the ID sensors [A].

⇒ Use a cloth moistened with water to clean the ID sensors.
Never use alcohol because this may damage the board.

Do not use a dry cloth. Otherwise, the ID sensors may get more dirty due to
static electricity.
SM 4-79 D104/D016
Paper Transfer
After installing a new ID sensor unit/board

Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit/board.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
3. Input all correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with the SP modes referring to the
barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit/board.
For example, input "0.98" with SP3-362-013.

4.9.4 PTR CONTACT MOTOR

2. Open the paper transfer unit ( p.4-76 "PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit").
5. Disconnect the two harnesses [A] ( x 1).

6. Interlock switch bracket [B] ( x 3, x all)
D104/D016 4-80 SM
Paper Transfer
7. Spring [A]
Do not forget to reinstall the spring [A] when reassembling. Otherwise, SC400
may occur.
8. PTR contact motor bracket [B] ( x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
9. Gear [A] ( x 1, bearing x 1)
10. PTR contact motor [B] ( x 2, x 3)
NOTE
Apply “Silicon Grease G501“ to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of
SM 4-81 D104/D016
Paper Transfer
4.9.5 PTR CONTACT SENSOR

1. PTR contact motor bracket ( p.4-80 "PTR Contact Motor")
2. PTR contact sensor [A] (hooks, x 2, x 1)
4.9.6 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR

1. Right rear cover ( p.4-20)
2. Temperature and humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
D104/D016 4-82 SM
Drive Unit
4.10 DRIVE UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
and
The drawing above shows the drive unit layout.
1. ITB unit motor

6. Drum/Development motor: K
2. Fusing/paper exit motor
7. Paper feed motor: T1
3. Drum motor: CMY
8. Paper feed motor: T2
4. Development motor: CMY
9. Registration motor
5. Development clutch: K
There are some motors and clutches that are not shown in the above drawing:
Duplex inverter motor Duplex Exit Motor

Duplex Entrance Motor By-pass Motor
SM 4-83 D104/D016
Drive Unit
4.10.1 GEAR UNIT

3. Open the controller box ( p.4-146 "Controller Box")
4. Remove all connectors and clamps (blue arrows) on the HVPS: CB board [A].
5. Pull all the PCDUs to the front side. ( p.4-51)
6. Gear unit [A] ( x all, x all: blue arrows, x 8)

The short screwdriver (190 mm or less in total length) is required to remove the
screw [B].
D104/D016 4-84 SM
Drive Unit
Adjustment after reinstalling the gear unit

Do the following procedures after reinstalling the gear unit.
2. Enter "System SP" in the SP mode.
3. Do "Drum Phase Adj." with SP1902-001.
4. Check the result of the Drum Phase Adjustment with SP1902-002.
0: Success, 2: Failure due to no sampling data,
3: Failure due to insufficient number of pattern detections
When the result of this adjustment is "2" or "3":
Check that the all PCDUs are correctly set and that the ITB unit is correctly set.
Do "Drum Phase Adj." again after checking the PCDUs and ITB unit.
When the result is still "2" or "3" after checking the PCDUs and image transfer belt
unit:
Check that the gear unit is installed correctly.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-85 D104/D016
Drive Unit
4.10.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR

4. Registration motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)

The short screwdriver (190 mm or less in total length) is required to remove the
screw [B]
The picture below shows how to remove the screw [C] of the gear unit. The
controller box should be closed at this time.
D104/D016 4-86 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T1

4. Paper feed motor: T1 [A] ( x 1, x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the paper feed motor
and
T1.
SM 4-87 D104/D016
Drive Unit
4.10.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T2

2. Paper feed motor: T2 [A] ( x 1, x 2)
4.10.5 DRUM MOTOR: CMY
Do not remove the PCDUs when you replace the drum motor-CMY.
4. Drum motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1)
D104/D016 4-88 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.6 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: CMY

Replacement
4. Development motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1)
Adjustment
and
4.10.7 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: K
4. Drum/Development motor: K [A] ( x 3, x 1)
SM 4-89 D104/D016
Drive Unit
4.10.8 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH: K

4. Drum/Development Motor: K ( p.4-89)
5. Remove the bracket with the development clutch: K [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

6. Remove the development clutch: K [B] from the bracket.
D104/D016 4-90 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.9 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR

Replacement
4. Loosen the stay [A] ( x 1, hook [B] x 1)
Adjustment
and
The hook [B] is installed as shown above. Do not pull the stay by force, or the
hook might be broken.
5. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
SM 4-91 D104/D016
Drive Unit
The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the fusing/paper exit
motor.
D104/D016 4-92 SM
Fusing
4.11 FUSING
4.11.1 FUSING UNIT
Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning
any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Open the paper transfer unit [A]
3. Release the lock levers [B].
4. Hold the fusing unit handles [C], and then pull out the fusing unit.
If the fusing unit is stuck to the PTR unit and cannot be removed from the machine, keep your
hand supporting the PTR unit as shown above and release very carefully the front tension
lever [A] of the PTR unit. In this case, the PTR unit open lever [B] does not work to open the
PTR unit.
The spring tension of the tension lever is very strong. Be very careful to release the
tension lever. Otherwise, your hand or fingers may be injured.
SM 4-93 D104/D016
Fusing
When installing the fusing unit

Make sure that the both lock levers [B] are locked before closing the duplex unit. Otherwise,
these lock levers [B] can be broken.
4.11.2 ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE

1. Fusing unit ( p.4-93)
2. Entrance Guide Plate [A] ( x 2)
Cleaning Requirement
The entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the
entrance guide plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points.
D104/D016 4-94 SM
Fusing
4.11.3 STRIPPER PLATE

Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Open the exit guide plate [A].
SM 4-95 D104/D016
Fusing
4. Remove the e-rings [A] at the front and rear side, and then springs [B] at the front and
rear side.
5. Turn the stripper plate [A], and then remove it.
The stripper plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the stripper
plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points.
D104/D016 4-96 SM
Fusing
4.11.4 EXIT GUIDE PLATE CLEANING PROCEDURE

The exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval.
2. Open the exit guide plate [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Clean the exit guide plate [A] with a cloth moistened with alcohol.
SM 4-97 D104/D016
Fusing
4.11.5 FUSING GEAR SHAFTS LUBRICATION PROCEDURE

The fusing gear shafts require cleaning maintenance (if it is dirty) at every 60 K interval.
2. Fusing upper cover ( p.4-95)
3. Rear stay [A] ( x 2)

4. Fusing idle gears [B]
5. Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the gear shafts [A] of the fusing unit. The appropriate amount
of grease is as shown above. The flat screwdriver [B] in the photo is a small size.
D104/D016 4-98 SM
Fusing
4.11.6 HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMP

2. Fusing upper cover ( p.4-95 "Stripper Plate")
3. Remove the cords [A] from the rear stay ( x 2).
Replacement
4. Rear lamp stay [B] ( x 2)
Adjustment
5. Remove the cords [C] from the front stay ( x 2).
and
6. Front lamp stay [D] ( x 2)
7. Heating roller fusing lamp [A]
SM 4-99 D104/D016
Fusing
4.11.7 HEATING ROLLER UNIT

3. Heating roller fusing lamp ( p.4-99)
4. Terminal base [A] ( x 3)
5. Thermostat base [A] ( x 2)

6. Left frame [B] ( x 4)
Some cables are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Do not put any tension
to the connected cables during this procedure.
D104/D016 4-100 SM
Fusing
7. Slide the front and rear flanges [A] to the outer sides to detach both flanges from the front
and rear heating roller brackets.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
8. Hold the both flange at the front and rear side of the heating roller unit [A], and then pull
the heating roller unit [A].
SM 4-101 D104/D016
Fusing
When reinstalling the heating roller unit
Make sure that the flange with mark “F” [A] is placed to the front side of the fusing unit when
reinstalling the heating roller unit.
D104/D016 4-102 SM
Fusing
4.11.8 PRESSURE ROLLER
Cleaning Procedure
The pressure roller requires cleaning maintenance (if it is dirty) at every 60 K interval.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Open the exit guide plate [A]
4. Clean the pressure roller [B] with a dry cloth.
Clean the both ends [C] of the pressure roller as well as the center area.
Replacement Procedure
1. Heating roller unit ( p.4-100)
2. Bearing [A] at the front end of the pressure roller (C-ring x 1)
SM 4-103 D104/D016
Fusing
3. Rear stay [A] ( x 2)

4. Pressure lever [B] (spring x 1)
5. Pressure roller gear [C] (C-ring x 1)
6. Bearing [D] at the rear end of the pressure roller
7. Pressure roller [A]
D104/D016 4-104 SM
Fusing
When reassembling the pressure roller

When replacing the pressure roller, you have to apply lubricant to the following places.
Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the front edge [A] and rear edge [B] of the pressure roller as
shown above.
4.11.9 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTATS
Replacement
Adjustment
Side Heating Roller Thermostat
and
2. Side heating roller thermostat [A] ( x 2)
Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if

you do this.
SM 4-105 D104/D016
Fusing
Lower Heating Roller Thermostats

1. Heating roller unit ( p.4-100)
1. Lower heating roller thermostats [A] ( x 2 each)
Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if

you do this.
4.11.10 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR

2. Heating roller thermistor bracket [A] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-106 SM
Fusing
3. Heating roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
The heating roller thermistor requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the
heating roller thermistor with a dry cloth.
4.11.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
Pressure Roller Thermistor: Center
and
3. Thermistor center assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 4-107 D104/D016
Fusing
4. Pressure roller thermistor: Center [A] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-108 SM
Fusing
Pressure Roller Thermistor: End

3. Thermistor end assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Pressure roller thermistor: End [A] ( x 1)
The pressure roller thermistors (center and end) require cleaning maintenance at every 60 K
interval. Clean the pressure roller thermistors (center and end) with a dry cloth.
SM 4-109 D104/D016
Fusing
4.11.12 THERMOPILE
2. Thermopile base [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3. Thermopile [A] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-110 SM
Fusing
When cleaning the lens of the thermopile
Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down.
Otherwise, you may get a serious burn.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Clean the thermopile lens [A] with a dry cloth.
SM 4-111 D104/D016
Fusing
4.11.13 CLEANING UNIT (OPTION) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Top right frame [A] ( x 2)
4. Install the cleaning unit [A] in the fusing unit.
D104/D016 4-112 SM
Fusing
5. Secure the cleaning unit [A] ( x 2)

6. Reassemble the fusing unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-113 D104/D016
Paper Feed
4.12 PAPER FEED
4.12.1 PAPER TRAY
1. Pull paper tray 1 or 2 [A] part of the way out.

2. Remove two screws from both tray guides.
3. Pull out paper tray 1 or 2 [A].
4.12.2 FEED ROLLER
Tray 1 and Tray 2

1. Paper tray 1 or 2 ( p.4-114)
2. Press down the bottom plate [A].

3. Slide the feed roller shaft [B] to the rear side ( x 1).
4. Feed roller [C] (hook x 1)
When reinstalling the feed roller

Do not touch the feed roller with your bare hands when replacing it. If you do, clean the feed
roller with a damp cloth or alcohol.
D104/D016 4-114 SM
Paper Feed
4.12.3 FRICTION PAD

1. Paper tray 1 or 2 ( p.4-114)
2. Feed roller ( p.4-114)
3. Remove the coupling gear [A] (pin x 1, spring x 1, x 1).
Replacement
4. Slide the feed roller shaft to the front side, and then remove it.
Adjustment
and
5. Friction pad [A] (hooks, spring x 1)
SM 4-115 D104/D016
Paper Feed
When reinstalling the friction pad
Make sure that the mylar [A] does not go under the friction pad when reinstalling the friction
pad.
Do not touch the friction pad with your bare hands, when replacing it. If you do, clean the
friction pad with a damp cloth or alcohol.
4.12.4 PAPER SIZE SWITCH

1. Paper tray 1 and 2 ( p.4-114)
Paper size switch: T1 [A]

Paper size switch: T2 [B]
2. Paper size switch [A] (hooks, x 1)
D104/D016 4-116 SM
Paper Feed
4.12.5 PAPER END SENSOR
Paper End Sensor: T1

2. Release the two clamps [A].

3. Paper end sensor: T1 [B] (hooks, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
Paper End Sensor: T2
and
2. Release the clamp [A].

3. Paper end sensor: T2 [B] (hooks, x 1)
SM 4-117 D104/D016
Paper Feed
4.12.6 REGISTRATION SENSOR

2. Open the paper transfer unit to the fully-open position ( p.4-78).
3. Registration roller guide [A] ( x 2)
4. Close the paper transfer unit [A].

5. Relay guide plate [B] ( x 2)
6. Upper vertical transport guide [C] ( x 1, x 4)
7. Registration sensor [A] ( x 2, hooks, x 1)
D104/D016 4-118 SM
Paper Feed
Cleaning the registration roller
Clean the registration roller and registration idle roller [A] with a damp cloth every 60 K (total
count).
Replacement
Adjustment
Never use alcohol to clean the registration roller.
and
SM 4-119 D104/D016
Paper Feed
4.12.7 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR
Vertical Transport Sensor 1

2. Middle guide plate [A] ( x 2)
3. Open the lower right door [A].

4. Release the belt [B].
5. Open the lower guide plate [A]

6. Middle guide bracket [B] ( x 4, x 2, x 1)
D104/D016 4-120 SM
Paper Feed
7. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)

8. Vertical transport sensor 1 [B] ( x 1, hooks)
Vertical Transport Sensor 2

Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Open the lower right door [A].
3. Release the belt [B].
4. Release the rear pivot [A], and then remove the lower right door [B].
SM 4-121 D104/D016
Paper Feed
5. Lower guide bracket [A] ( x 2)
6. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)

7. Vertical transport sensor 2 [B] (hooks, x 1)
D104/D016 4-122 SM
Paper Exit
4.13 PAPER EXIT
4.13.1 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID FAN

1. Right upper cover ( p.4-23)
2. Right rear cover ( p.4-20)
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Fan base [A] ( x 1, x 1)
and
4. Junction gate solenoid fan [B] (hooks)
When installing the junction gate solenoid fan

Make sure that the junction gate solenoid fan is installed with its decal facing to the left side.
SM 4-123 D104/D016
Paper Exit
4.13.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT

1. Fusing Unit ( p.4-93)
2. Front right cover ( p.4-23)
3. Junction gate solenoid fan base ( p.4-123 "Junction Gate Solenoid Fan")
4. Paper exit cover ( p.4-24)
5. Inner Tray ( p.4-25)
6. Front harness cover [A] ( x 1)
7. Remove or disconnect the following:

Two screws [A] at the front side
Front harness [B]
Ground cable [C] ( x 1)
Rear harness [D]
D104/D016 4-124 SM
Paper Exit
8. Paper exit unit [A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-125 D104/D016
Paper Exit
4.13.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR

1. Paper exit unit ( p.4-124)
2. Sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
3. Fusing exit sensor [A] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-126 SM
Paper Exit
4.13.4 PAPER EXIT SENSOR

2. Paper exit sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
When installing the paper exit sensor
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Stand the paper exit unit so that [A] is facing up. Otherwise, the paper exit sensor feeler
interrupts the installation of the paper exit sensor.
Insert the hook [B] first.
SM 4-127 D104/D016
Paper Exit
4.13.5 INVERTER SENSOR

2. Remove the screw [A].

3. Release all clamps that clamp the harness [B].
4. Move the sensor assembly [A] to the cutout [B], and then remove it ( x1, x 1)
5. Inverter sensor [A] (hooks)
D104/D016 4-128 SM
Paper Exit
4.13.6 INVERTER MOTOR

2. Inverter motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-129 D104/D016
Paper Exit
4.13.7 FUSING FRONT FAN

1. Front right cover ( p.4-23)
2. Fusing front fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
When installing the fusing front fan

Make sure that the fusing front fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side.
Make sure that harnesses are correctly set [A] along the guide on the fan frame without slack
[B]. Otherwise, the some of the wires could be pinched and damaged or cut between the fan
frame and the frame of the main machine. SC533 can be issued if the harnesses are broken.
D104/D016 4-130 SM
Duplex Unit
4.14 DUPLEX UNIT
4.14.1 DUPLEX UNIT

Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Move the duplex unit in the direction shown by , and remove the hook [A].
5. Release the front and rear arms [A], [B] ( x 1 each).
SM 4-131 D104/D016
Duplex Unit
6. Remove the clip [A].

7. Slide the duplex unit [B] to the front side, and then remove it.
4.14.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR

2. Duplex inner cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Duplex entrance guide unit [A] (hook x 3)
Lift up the duplex guide plate [A] first when reinstalling the duplex entrance guide
unit.
D104/D016 4-132 SM
Duplex Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Duplex outer guide plate [A] ( x 4)
5. Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hook)
SM 4-133 D104/D016
Duplex Unit
4.14.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR

1. Pull out the 1st tray.
3. Duplex exit sensor assembly cover [A] ( x 1)

4. Duplex exit sensor assembly [B] ( x 1, ground screw x 1, x 1, x 1)
5. Duplex exit sensor [A] (hook)
D104/D016 4-134 SM
Duplex Unit
4.14.4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR

2. Duplex inner cover ( p.4-132 "Duplex Entrance Sensor")
Replacement
3. Duplex entrance motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x1, x 1)
Adjustment
and
4. Separate the duplex entrance motor [A] from the bracket ( x 2)
SM 4-135 D104/D016
Duplex Unit
4.14.5 DUPLEX EXIT MOTOR

3. Duplex exit motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2, x 1)
4. Separate the duplex exit motor [A] from the bracket ( x 2)
D104/D016 4-136 SM
Duplex Unit
4.14.6 BY-PASS MOTOR

Replacement
3. By-pass motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2, x 1)
Adjustment
and
Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket to disconnect the harness.
4. By-pass motor [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-137 D104/D016
Duplex Unit
4.14.7 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT

3. Reinstall the duplex unit once, and open it.
4. Disconnect the harness [A].

5. Close the duplex unit.
6. Open the by-pass tray unit [A]

7. By-pass tray unit ( x 2, hook [B]).
Use a flat-head screw driver or similar tool to push the hook [B] down.
D104/D016 4-138 SM
Duplex Unit
4.14.8 BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH SENSOR

1. Open the by-pass tray unit.
2. By-pass tray right cover [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. By-pass paper length sensor [A] ( x 1)
SM 4-139 D104/D016
Duplex Unit
4.14.9 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR

1. By-pass tray unit ( p.4-138)
2. By-pass tray cover [A] (hook x 1)
3. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1)
D104/D016 4-140 SM
Duplex Unit
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor
1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the
projection [C] of the left side fence bar.
3. Reassemble the copier.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Check this switch operation with SP5803-046 (By-Pass Size Detection SW < Input
Check).
- Display on the LCD -
Paper Size Display Paper Size Display
A3 SEF 00001001 A5 SEF 00001110
B4 SEF 00001011 B6 SEF 00001100
A4 SEF 00000011 A6 SEF 00001101
B5 SEF 00000111 Smaller A6 SEF 00001101
SM 4-141 D104/D016
Duplex Unit
4.14.10 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR

2. By-pass paper end sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
Reinstalling the By-pass Paper End Sensor

Reinstall the right hook first and then the left hook using a flat-head screw driver or
similar tool.
4.14.11 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER

2. By-pass feed roller [A] (hook)
D104/D016 4-142 SM
Duplex Unit
4.14.12 BY-PASS TRAY HP SENSOR

1. Open the by-pass tray unit.
3. Remove the hand holder [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Rotate the actuator [A] counter clockwise as shown above.
5. By-pass tray HP sensor [B] (hook).
SM 4-143 D104/D016
Electrical Components
4.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.15.1 BOARDS
Controller Box Closed
[A] BCU
[B] Controller Board
[C] IPU
[D] DRB
[E] SDVDB (Shut Down and Voltage Detection Board)
[F] PSU
D104/D016 4-144 SM
Controller Box Open
[A] HVPS: TTS Board
Replacement
Adjustment
[B] HVPS: CB Board
and
4.15.2 CONTROLLER BOX COVER
2. Remove the scanner cable bracket [A] ( x 3)

3. Loosen the five screws pointed by the arrow marks in the picture above.
4. Remove the three screws [B] at the bottom of the controller box.
5. Slid up the controller box cover [C], and then remove it.
SM 4-145 D104/D016
4.15.3 CONTROLLER BOX
Opening the controller box

4. Remove the three screws and disconnect the scanner cable [A] (ground screw x 1)
5. Open the controller box [A].
D104/D016 4-146 SM
4.15.4 BCU
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. BCU [A] ( x 7, x All)
Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in
the NVRAM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the downward side.
When installing the new BCU

1. Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU.
2. Install the NVRAM on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
4. Turn on the main power of the machine.
5. "SC995-01" occurs.
6. Enter the serial number with SP5811-004.
7. Turn the main power of the machine off and on.
Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data")
before you replace the NVRAM.
Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static
electricity can damage NVRAM data.
SM 4-147 D104/D016
4.15.5 HDD
Copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846-051 before
replacing the HDD if possible.
3. Open the BCU bracket [A] ( x 5, x 4, x 3, flat cable x 2).
4. HDD with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2).

5. HDD bracket [B] ( x 4)
6. HDD
After installing a new HDD

1. Do SP5832-001 to format the HDD.
2. Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the HDD.
3. Do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the hard disk from the SD card to
which you have already copied the address book data if possible.
4. Do SP5-878-001 to install the DataOverwriteSecurity application.
D104/D016 4-148 SM
5. Do SP5878-002 to install the HDD Encryption application.

6. Turn off the machine.
Disposal of HDD Units

Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the
HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.
Specifically, the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary
files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored
on the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with
illegal methods.
4.15.6 IPU BOARD

Replacement
Adjustment
3. Open the BCU bracket ( p.4-148 "HDD")
and
4. Flat cable holders [A]
5. Flat cables [B]
6. IPU board [C] ( x 6, x all)
SM 4-149 D104/D016
4.15.7 CONTROLLER BOX FAN

2. Open the controller box ( p.4-146 "Controller Box").
3. Controller box fan with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
4. Controller box fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
When installing the controller box fan

Make sure that the controller box fan is installed with its decal facing upward.
D104/D016 4-150 SM
4.15.8 FUSING REAR FAN

2. Open the controller box ( p.4-146 "Controller Box").
Replacement
3. Fusing rear fan with the bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
Adjustment
and
4. Disconnect the connector [A].
5. Remove the bottom bracket [B] (hook x 5).
6. Fusing rear fan [A]
SM 4-151 D104/D016
When installing the fusing rear fan

Make sure that the fusing rear fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side.
4.15.9 DRB
3. DRB [A] ( x 6, x all)
4.15.10 SDVDB
3. SDVDB [A] ( x 3, x 5)
D104/D016 4-152 SM
4.15.11 PSU
3. DRB with the bracket [A] ( x 4, x all, x all)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Power cord [A] (Blue: ground screw x 1, x 2)
5. Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket.
6. PSU board [C] ( x 9, x All, x All)
SM 4-153 D104/D016
4.15.12 HVPS: TTS BOARD

3. HVPS: TTS board [B] ( x 5, x all)
4.15.13 HVPS: CB BOARD

3. HVPS: CB board [A] ( x 6, All s)
D104/D016 4-154 SM
4.15.14 CONTROLLER BOARD

3. Controller box fan bracket ( p.4-150 "Controller Box Fan")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Controller box left bracket [A] ( x 6)
5. Controller board assembly [A] ( x 7, x 2)
SM 4-155 D104/D016
6. Remove the SD cards [A], interface rails [B], NVRAM [C] and RAM-DIMMs [D].
7. Controller board [E]
When installing a new controller board

1. Install the NVRAM from the old controller board on a new controller board.
2. Install the new controller board in the machine.
3. Disconnect the cables of the HDD from the controller board.
Disconnecting the cables of the HDD is very important. Otherwise, the HDD is
automatically formatted and all data in the HDD is lost due to the security
limitation.
5. Turn on the main power of the machine.
6. Turn off the main power of the machine, and then connect the cables of the HDD again.
Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data")
before you replace the NVRAM.
Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static
electricity can damage NVRAM data.
Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.
D104/D016 4-156 SM
HDD Encryption Recovery from a Device Problem

The flowchart below shows the recovery possibility of the HDD encryption if one of devices
related with the HDD encryption is defective.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Restoring the Encryption key
When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been
installed, updating the encryption key is required.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Ask an administrator to input the encryption key (this has been printed out earlier by the
user) into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
5. Remove only the HDD ( p.4-148 "HDD").
7. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption
key) in the machine.
9. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1).
10. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD slot 2.
11. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption
key in the flash memory on the controller board.
12. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
13. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2, and then attach the SD slot cover ( x 1).
14. Reinstall the HDD.
SM 4-157 D104/D016
Clearing the NVRAM

When replacing the controller board and a customer has lost the encryption key, clearing the
NVRAM is required to recover the HDD encryption unit.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Input "nvclear" into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
6. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption
key) in the machine.
8. Insert the SD card that contains "nvclear" into SD slot 2.
9. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption
key in the flash memory on the controller board.
10. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from slot 2.
13. Initialize the NVRAM (SP5801-001) and HDD unit (SP5832-001) with SP mode.
14. The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool.
D104/D016 4-158 SM
4.15.15 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
NVRAM on the BCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine ( p.2-18 "Initialize the Developer").
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 2. Then turn the main power on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824-001) if possible.
6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. SC195 occurs.
10. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have
Replacement
Adjustment
successfully copied them to the SD card.
and
11. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
13. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
14. Do the process control self-check.
15. Do ACC for the copier application program.
16. Do ACC for the printer application program.
SM 4-159 D104/D016
NVRAM on the Controller

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine ( p.2-18 "Initialize the Developer").
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Turn the main switch off. Then unplug the power cord.
4. Remove the rear cover ( p.4-18)
5. Remove the controller cover [A] ( x 2).

6. Disconnect the cables of the HDD from the controller board.
Disconnecting the cables of the HDD is very important. Otherwise, the HDD is
automatically formatted and all data in the HDD is lost due to the security
limitation.
7. Install a New NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine.
9. Remove the Security SD from SD slot 1.
10. Install a new Security SD in SD slot 1.
12. SC995-02 occurs.
13. Turn the machine off.
14. Connect the cables of the HDD to the controller board.
15. Reassemble the machine, and then turn on the machine.
16. Do the process control self-check.
17. Do ACC for the copier application program.
18. Do ACC for the printer application program.
19. Do SP5-878-001 to install the DataOverwriteSecurity application.
20. Do SP5878-002 to install the HDD Encryption application.
D104/D016 4-160 SM
Merge all applications in a one SD card in SD slot 1 if necessary ( p.2-94 "SD Card Appli
Move").
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-161 D104/D016
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
None
Service Program Mode
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Make sure that the data-in LED is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the
copier to process the data.
5.1.1 SP TABLES
There are most commonly used SP codes in the "Main SP Tables - 1 to - 9" of "Main
Chapters".
System SP Tables (all SP codes)
Printer SP Tables
Scanner SP Tables
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
Maintenance
Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
System
Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch
panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains
the functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for
the Fax SP modes.
SM 5-1 D104/D016
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP
Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then
press . (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If
not, just press the required SP Mode number.)
Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume
normal operation.
Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen
display (page).
Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
D104/D016 5-2 SM
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.)
for the test print.
3. Press Start to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you
want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number
that you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you
want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below
default or the current settings.
Maintenance
System
Refer to the SP Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the
appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
Press to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that
is out of range.)
Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and
select the settings for the test print. Press Start and then press SP Mode (highlighted)
in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
SM 5-3 D104/D016
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot
operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function
makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the
Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and
then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary
to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
1. Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
2. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed
servicing the machine.
The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
D104/D016 5-4 SM
5.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen

The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to
30 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be
abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full
description is over 30 characters.
Paper Weight
Thin paper: 52-59 g/m2 (14-16lb. Bond)
Plain Paper1: 60-74 g/m2 (16-20lb. Bond)
Plain Paper2: 75-81 g/m2 (20lb. Bond)
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2 (20-28lb. Bond)
Thick Paper 1: 106-169 g/m2 (28lb. Bond-90lb. Index)
Thick Paper 2: 170-210 g/m2 (65lb. Cover-54lb. Bond)
Thick Paper 3: 211-256 g/m2 (65lb. Cover-54lb. Bond)
Paper Type
Paper Feed Station
N: Normal paper
P: Paper tray
Maintenance
MTH: Middle thick paper
System
B: By-pass table
TH: Thick paper
Color Mode [Color]

[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode
Print Mode Process Speed

S: Simplex L: Low speed (60 mm/s)
D: Duplex M: Middle speed (120 mm/s)
SM 5-5 D104/D016
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting
sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch
must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is
stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value.
"ENG" and "CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board
CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of
the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only
numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by
using only the numbers.
SSP: This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.
D104/D016 5-6 SM
Main SP Tables-1
5.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1
5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick
2 or Thick3
1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor
operation timing for each mode.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the trailing edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the leading edge of paper.
001 Tray:Plain:600dpi *ENG
002 Tray:Thick1:600dpi *ENG
003 Tray:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG
004 By-pass:Plain:600dpi *ENG
005 By-pass:Thick1:600dpi *ENG
Maintenance
[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
System
008 By-pass: M-Thick:600dpi *ENG
009 Duplex:Plain:600dpi *ENG
010 Duplex:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
SM 5-7 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
018 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG
[Side-to-Side Registration]
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start
1002 position for each mode and tray.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the rear edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the front edge of paper.
001 By-pass *ENG
002 Paper Tray 1 *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
006 Duplex *ENG
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type), Paper Type: M-Thick: Middle Thick
1003
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the
paper feed timing.
001 Tray1:Plain:600dpi *ENG
002 Tray1:Thick1:600dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 2 / 1 mm/step]
003 Tray1:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG
D104/D016 5-8 SM
Main SP Tables-1
018 Tray234:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG
Maintenance
System
[–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
SM 5-9 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display
0:LT SEF/ 1:LG *ENG -
Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass
001 tray.
This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is
less than 8.5".
0: LT SEF (default), 1: LG
[Reload Permit Setting]
1101 Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific
Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [0 to 75 / 50 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the pre-rotation start temperature.
Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG [135 to 145 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the reload target temperature of the heating roller.
Reload Target Temp.:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

003
Specifies the reload target temperature of the pressure roller.
Temp.:Delta:Cold: Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
004 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing
unit is determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
005 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit
is determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold: Press *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
006 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is
determined as cold state.
D104/D016 5-10 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Rotation Time:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
007 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating when the fusing unit is
Temp.:Delta:Warm: Center *ENG [0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 5 / 1 deg/step]
unit is determined as warm state.
[40 to 200 / NA: 45, EU/AA: 35 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG
deg/step]
009
Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit
is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
determined as warm state.
Time:Warm *ENG [0 to 100 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
Maintenance
System
Temp.:Delta:Hot: Center *ENG [0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 5 / 1 deg/step]
unit is determined as hot state.
[0 to 100 / NA: 45, EU/AA: 35 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Hot:End *ENG
deg/step]
013
is determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
determined as hot state.
Time:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

015
Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating when the fusing unit is
SM 5-11 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 5 / 1 deg/step]
016 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and
white mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
[0 to 100 / NA: 45, EU/AA: 35 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG
deg/step]
017
Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and
Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
018 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white
mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Rotation Time:BW:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
019 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
white mode when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
021 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and
Temp.Delta:Warm:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
mode when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Rotation Time:BW:Warm *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

024
Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and
D104/D016 5-12 SM
Main SP Tables-1
white mode when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
mode when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
Rotation Time:BW:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
030 Flicker Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Temp.:Delta:Cold:
101 *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 deg/step]
BW2:Center
102 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
103 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
System
104 Rotation Time: BW2:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Delta:Warm:
105 *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 deg/step]
BW2:Center
106 Temp.:Delta:Warm: BW2:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Delta:Warm:
107 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
BW2:Press
108 Rotation Time: BW2:Warm *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
109 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 deg/step]
110 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
111 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
112 Rotation Time: BW2:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
SM 5-13 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
[Feed Permit Setting]
1102 Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.

Temp.:Lower [0 to 100 / NA: 30, EU/AA: 25 / 1

001 *ENG
Delta:Center deg/step]
[0 to 100 / NA: 65, EU/AA: 55 / 1

002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG
deg/step]
Temp.:Upper
003 *ENG [0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center
004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 65 / 1 deg/step]
006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
007 *ENG [0 to 100 / 35 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
Temp.:Lower
008 *ENG [0 to 100 / 35 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.1
Temp.:Upper
009 *ENG [0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
Temp.:Upper
010 *ENG [0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.1
Temp.:Lower
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.1
012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
013 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Lower
014 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2
D104/D016 5-14 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Temp.:Upper
015 *ENG [0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
016 *ENG [0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2
Temp.:Lower
017 *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.2
018 Rotation Time:Sp2 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
020 *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.3
Temp.:Lower
021 *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.3
Temp.:Upper
022 *ENG [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.3
Temp.:Upper
023 *ENG [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
Delta:End:Sp.3
System
Temp.:Lower
024 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.3
1105 [Print Target Temp]
(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)

Roller Type –> Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure –> Pressure roller
Paper Type -> Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special
[100 to 160 / NA: 150, EU/AA: 141 / 1

Plain1:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
001
Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
color printing.
SM 5-15 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
Plain1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
002 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
color printing..
[100 to 160 / NA: 140, EU/AA: 131 / 1

Plain1:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
003
Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW
printing.
Plain1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
004 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW
printing.
[100 to 160 / NA: 155, EU/AA: 146 / 1

deg/step]
005
color printing.
Plain2:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
006 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
coloe printing.
[100 to 160 / NA: 145, EU/AA: 136 / 1

deg/step]
007
printing.
Plain2:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
008 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW
printing.
009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 160 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
011 Thin:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 160 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
012 Thin:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
D104/D016 5-16 SM
Main SP Tables-1
013 M-thick:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
014 M-thick:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
015 M-thick:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
016 M-thick:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
017 Thick1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 155 / 1 deg/step]
018 Thick1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
019 Thick1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]
020 Thick1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
System
029 Special1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
030 Special1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
031 Special1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
032 Special1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
SM 5-17 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
041 Envelop:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 175 / 1 deg/step]
042 Envelop:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Plain1:FC:Center:Low
101 *ENG [100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:FC:Press:Low
102 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:BW:Center:Low
103 *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:BW:Press:Low
104 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
105 *ENG [100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain2:FC:Press:Low
106 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
107 *ENG [100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain2:BW:Press:Low
108 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:FC:Center:Low
109 *ENG [100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:FC:Press:Low
110 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:BW:Center:Low
111 *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
112 Thin:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
D104/D016 5-18 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Speed
M-Thick:FC:Center:Low
113 *ENG [100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-Thick:FC:Press:Low
114 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-Thick:BW:Center:Low
115 *ENG [100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-Thick:BW:Press:Low
116 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:FC:Center:Low
117 *ENG [100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:FC:Press:Low
118 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:BW:Center:Low
119 *ENG [100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:BW:Press:Low
120 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
Speed
System
121 *ENG [100 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
122 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
123 *ENG [100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
124 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
125 *ENG [100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
126 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
SM 5-19 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
127 *ENG [100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
128 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
131 OHP:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]
132 OHP:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Envelop:Center:Low
133 *ENG [100 to 200 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Envelop:Press:Low
134 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
135 Plain1:Grossy:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]
136 Plain1:Grossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
137 Plain2:Grossy:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
138 Plain2:Grossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
139 M-thick:Grossy:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
140 M-thick:Grossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
D104/D016 5-20 SM
Main SP Tables-1
153 Envelop:Center:Thick1 *ENG [100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
154 Envelop:Press:Thick1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]
[Fusing Temp. Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)

1106
Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
001 Center - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
002 End - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
System
The heating roller has two lamps. One heats the center of the heating roller
and the other heats both ends of the heating roller.
003 Pressure Center - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
005 Thermister Atmosphere - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
The pressure roller has no lamp.
1107 [Standby Target Temp. Setting]
Stanby/Preheat1: Center *ENG [100 to 150 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the ready or energy save 1
mode.
Stanby/Preheat1: Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the ready or energy save 1
SM 5-21 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
mode.
Preheat2: Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

003
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Preheat2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

004
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Low Power:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

005
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the low power mode.
Low Power:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

006
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode.
Print Ready:Center *ENG [120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

007
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

008
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.
1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.]
Center *ENG [120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.
Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.
D104/D016 5-22 SM
Main SP Tables-1
1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing]
Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low
temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
002 Sepcifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 30°C or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high
temperature.
Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
003 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature. If the fusing
temperature is in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the
taraget temperature.
High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
System
temperature is in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the
Job Low Temp.

005 *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
Job High Temp.

006 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
Job Low Temp.

007 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Job High Temp.

008 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
SM 5-23 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
1112 [Image Process Temp. Correction]
These SPs are used for the fusing temperature control for variable job images.
This control saves the power comsumption when the machine copies or prints a
job text image in black and white mode.
Temp.:Normal:Center:Level1 *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Specifies the subtractive temperature level 1 of the fusing temperature control for
variable job images.
Temp.:Normal:Center:Level2 *ENG [-25 to 10 / -10 / 1 /step]
003-
[Envir. Correct:Fusing]
006

003
Specifies the temperature correction in the low temperature condition.

004
Specifies the temperature correction in the high temperature condition.
Offset Temp:Low *ENG [0 to 15 / 6.5 / 0.1 deg/step]
005 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the low
temperature condition.
Offset Temp:High *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
006 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the high
D104/D016 5-24 SM
Main SP Tables-1
1113 [Curl Correction]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Execute Pattern *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Selects the curl correction type.
Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

002
Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

003
Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.
Permit
*ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Press:M-humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.
Permit
*ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Delta:Press:H-humid
Maintenance
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
System
[Stand-by Mode Setting]
006 P-Roll Thresh AF Job *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in
middle humidity.
CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
009 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high
humidity.
SM 5-25 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
1115 [Target Temp. Correction]
Temp.:Delta:End *ENG [-10 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating
roller.
1132 [Maximum Duty Switch]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Control Method Switch *ENG
0: Fixed Duty, 1: Power Control
001 Selects the heater control method.
Use "1: Power Contro" if hot offset occurs after power-on and input voltage is
relatively hight.
1141 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info]
001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number.
SC Cause *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step]
002 Shows the SC cause
0: Timeout 1, 1: Timeout 2, 2: Timeout 3, 4 to 9: Not used
Htg Roller:Ctr Diff1 *ENG [-20 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
101 Displays the calculated temperature at the center of the heating roller when an
SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Diff1 *ENG [-100 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
104 Displays the calculated temperature at the end of the heating roller when an
SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Det1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
105 Displays the detected temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC
was issued.
D104/D016 5-26 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Htg Roller:End Corr1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
106 Displays the ambient temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC
was issued.
Press Roller Temp Value1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

107
Displays the temperature at the pressure roller when an SC was issued.
Press Roller:End Temp Value1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
108 Displays the temperature at the end of the pressure roller when an SC was
issued.

151
SPs from -151 to -157 show previous fusing SC information.
152 Htg Rolloer:Ctr Det2 *ENG
153 Htg Roller:Ctr Corr2 *ENG
154 Htg Roller:End Diff2 *ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
155 Htg Roller:End Det2 *ENG
Maintenance
System
156 Htg Roller:End Corr2 *ENG
157 Press Roller Temp Value2 *ENG

201
SPs from -201 to -207 show fusing SC information before previous fusing SC.
202 Htg Rolloer:Ctr Det3 *ENG
203 Htg Roller:Ctr Corr3 *ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
206 Htg Roller:End Corr3 *ENG
SM 5-27 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
1142 [Fusing Jam Detection]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
SC Display *ENG
001 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.
1153 [Low Temp. Start Up]
001 Temp.:Threshold Value1 * ENG [-10 to 100 / 5 / 1°C./step]
Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up in the low

Temp.:Threshold Value2 * ENG [-10 to 100 / 15 / 1°C./step]
002 Sepcifies the threshold temperature 2 for the warming up in the low
Temp.:Target * ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1°C./step]
003 Sepcifies the target temperature for the warming up in the low temperature
condition.
Temp.: Rotation
* ENG [-10 to 100 / 30 / 1°C./step]
Threshold Value1
005
Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up rotation in the low
Time:Heat Storage
010 * ENG [0 to 250 / 60 / 1 sec./step]
Devision1
Sepcifies the execution time 1 for the warming up in the low temperature
condition.
Time:Heat Storage
011 * ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 sec../step]
Devision2
condition.
D104/D016 5-28 SM
Main SP Tables-1
1801 [Motor Speed Adjust]
001 Regist Mot:60:Thick *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
002 Regist Mot:120 *ENG
003 Bk OpcDevMot:120 *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.1 / 0.01 %/step]
004 Bk OpcDevMot:60:Thick *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.4 / 0.01 %/step]
005 Color OpcMot:120 *ENG

[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 %/step]
007 Fusing Mot:120 *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]
008 Fusing Mot:60:Thick *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]
009 Transfer Mot:120 *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]
010 TransferMot:60:Thick *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]
011 Feed1:CW60:Thick *ENG
012 Feed1:CW120 *ENG
Maintenance
013 Feed1:CCW60:Thick *ENG
System
014 Feed1:CCW120 *ENG

[–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
019 By-pass:60:Thick *ENG
020 By-pass:120 *ENG
021 Inverter:CW60:Thick *ENG
022 Inverter:CW120 *ENG

[–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
023 Inverter:CCW60:Thick *ENG
024 Inverter:CCW120 *ENG
SM 5-29 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-1
025 Duplex Entrance:60 *ENG

[–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
027 Duplex Exit:60 *ENG
029 R-Tray Exit Motor *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
030 Fine Adj. Control *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /1]
031 Offset:120:Color *ENG

[-7 to 7 / 0 /1step]
033 Regist Mot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
034 Feed1:CW60:1200dpi *ENG
035 Feed1:CCW60:1200dpi *ENG
036 Feed2:CW60:1200dpi *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
038 By-pass:60:1200dpi *ENG
039 Inverter:CW60:1200dpi *ENG

[–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
040 Inverter:CCW60:1200dpi *ENG
041 FusingMot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]
042 BkOpcDevMot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]
043 TransferMot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]
D104/D016 5-30 SM
Main SP Tables-1
[Sub Mag ADJ]
These SPs can adjust the sub-scan magnification error. However, first read the
1803 "Sub-scan Magnification Error" in the "Troubleshooting Guide" (Main Chapters)

to execute these SPs. NEVER EXECUTE these SPs before reading the
"Sub-scan Magnification Error". Otherwise, color registration errors occur on
outputs and this cannot be recovered by the line position adjustment.
001 Plain:600dpi:input *ENG
002 Plain:1200dpi:input *ENG [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
003 Thick:input *ENG
004 Plain:600dpi:result *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Success, 1: Failure
006 Thick:result *ENG
Maintenance
System
SM 5-31 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
5.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)
2013 [Envir. Correct:PCU]
Displays the environmental condition,

which is measured in absolute
humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
001 Envir. Range:FC:Display *ENG 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)
2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)
4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)
5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
Displays the current temperature.

007 Current Temp.: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Displays the current relative humidity.

008 Relative Humidity: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the absolute humidity.

009 Absolute Humidity: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the previous environmental

condition, which is measured in
010 Envir. Range:Bk:Display *ENG absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Displays the previous temperature.

011 Previous Temp.: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
D104/D016 5-32 SM
Main SP Tables-2
Displays the previous relative

012 Relative Humidity: Display *ENG humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the previous absolute

013 Absolute Humidity: Display *ENG humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
[Color Regist Adjust]
These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment
2101 and are adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value for
SP2101-001 after replacing the laser optics housing unit. For details, see
"Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section. The
value should be provided with the new laser optics housing unit.
001 Bk: Main Scan: Dot *ENG
002 C Main Scan: Dot *ENG

[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
003 M Main Scan: Dot *ENG
Maintenance
System
004 Y Main Scan: Dot *ENG
013 Bk: Sub Scan: Line *ENG
014 C: Sub Scan: Line *ENG

[–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
015 M: Sub Scan: Line *ENG
016 Y: Sub Scan: Line *ENG
[Magnification Adjust]
2102 These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment
and are adjusted at the factory. These SPs must be input only when a new
laser unit is installed.
001 Main Mag.: Bk:High Spd *ENG

[0 to 560 / 280 / 1 /step]
003 Main Mag.: Bk:Low Spd *ENG
SM 5-33 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
004 Main Mag.: C:High Spd *ENG
006 Main Mag.: C:Low Spd *ENG
007 Main Mag.: M:High Spd *ENG
009 Main Mag.: M:Low Spd *ENG
010 Main Mag.: Y:High Spd *ENG
012 Main Mag.: Y:Low Spd *ENG
[Erase Margin Adjust] (Area, Paper Size)

2103
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
001 Lead Edge *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trailing Edge *ENG
003 Left *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Right *ENG
006 Duplex Trail. L Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 Duplex Trail. M Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
008 Duplex Trail. S Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 Duplex Left Edge *ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
010 Duplex Right Edge *ENG
011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick *ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick *ENG
D104/D016 5-34 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[LD Initial Power Adjust]
2104 Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new laser
unit is installed.
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[80 to 120 / 100 / 1 %/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Test Pattern]
2109
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.
Pattern Selection - [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
0 None
1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot)
Maintenance
System
3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area
4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal)
003 5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal)
6: Grid Horizontal Line 18: Band (Vertical)
7: Grid pattern Small 19: Checker Flag Pattern
8: Grid pattern Large 20: Grayscale Vertical Margin
9: Argyle Pattern Small 21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin
10: Argyle Pattern Large 23: Full Dot Pattern
11. Independent Pattern (1dot)
Specifies the color for the test pattern.

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
005 Color Selection -
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4:
Cyan
006 Density: Bk - Specifies the color density for the test
007 Density: C - pattern.
SM 5-35 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
008 Density: M - [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

0: Lightest density
009 Density: Y - 15: Darkest density
2111 [Line Pos. Ajust]
Executes the fine line position adjustment

twice.
001 Execute: Mode a - If this SP is not completed (NG is
displayed), do SP2111-003 first and then try
this SP again.

once.
002 Execute:Mode b -
If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003
first and then try this SP again.
Executes the rough line position adjustment

once.
003 Execute:Mode c - After doing this SP, make sure to execute
SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line
position adjustment is not perfectly done.
2112 [TM/P Sensor Test] ID Sensor Check FA
This SP is used to check the ID sensors at

001 Execute the factory. The results of this SP are
displayed in SP2140 to SP2145.
[Skew Adjustment]
2117 Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed, see
"Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.
001 Pulse: C *ENG
002 Pulse: M *ENG [–75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Pulse: Y *ENG
D104/D016 5-36 SM
Main SP Tables-2
2118 [Skew Adjustment]
001 Execute: C *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment

values to the values specified with SP2117.
002 Execute: M *ENG
These SPs must be used when a new laser
optics housing unit is installed. For details,
003 Execute: Y *ENG see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the
"Replacement and Adjustment" section.
[Skew Adjustment Display]

2119
Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.
001 C *ENG
002 M *ENG [–75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Y *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]
Maintenance
Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.
System
2140
Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and
the process control
001 PWM *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 PWM: Front *ENG [0 to 1024 / 0 / 1/step]
006 PWM: Center *ENG
007 PWM: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]
2141 Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.

the process control
SM 5-37 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
001 Average *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Average: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Average: Center *ENG
007 Average: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]

the process control
001 Maximum *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Maximum: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Maximum: Center *ENG
007 Maximum: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]
2143 Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check.

the process control
001 Minimum *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Minimum: Center *ENG
007 Minimum: Rear *ENG
D104/D016 5-38 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[P-Sensor Test]
2144 Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

the process control
001 Maximum 2: *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Maximum 2: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Maximum 2: Center *ENG
007 Maximum 2: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]
2145 Displays the minimum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

the process control
Maintenance
System
001 Minimum 2 *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum 2: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Minimum 2: Center *ENG
007 Minimum 2: Rear *ENG
SM 5-39 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[MUSIC Condition]
2193
Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
003 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode
after job end.
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 page/step]
004 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing
mode during job.
2194 [MUSIC Exe Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step]
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step]
006 Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Execution Result *ENG
0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed
008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]
009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]
010 Error Counter: C *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Not done
011 Error Counter: M *ENG
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns
3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target
012 Error Counter: Y *ENG
4: Out of the adjustment range
5 to 9: Not used
D104/D016 5-40 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Skew Origin Set]
2220 Resets the value of the skew adjustment motor for each color.
These SPs must be executed when a new laser optics housing unit is installed.
For details, see "Laser Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.
001 C:Skew Motor *ENG
002 M:Skew Motor *ENG -
003 Y:Skew Motor *ENG
[Ambient Temp/Hum:Display]
2241
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.
001 Temperature - [–5 to 45 / - / 0.1deg/step]
002 Relative Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]
[Transfer Roller CL: Bias]
Maintenance
2326
Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
System
Positive:befor and after
*ENG [0 to 2100 / 250 / 10 V /step]
JOB
001
Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Negative:befor and
*ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
after JOB
002
Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Positive:after JAM *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step]
003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the
paper transfer roller.
004 Negative:after JAM *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
SM 5-41 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[Common: BW: Bias]

2351 Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
Image Transfer:Normal Speed *ENG [0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

003
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.
[Common: FC: Bias]

2357 Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Bk *ENG [0 to 60 / 23 / 1 A]
001 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for
plain paper.
Image Transfer:: Normal Spd:C *ENG [0 to 60 / 22 / 1 A]
002 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for
plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:M *ENG [0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]
003 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for
plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Y *ENG [0 to 60 / 29 / 1 A]
004 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for
plain paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Bk *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:C *ENG [0 to 60 / 12 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
D104/D016 5-42 SM
Main SP Tables-2
Image Transfer: Low Speed:M *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y *ENG [0 to 60 / 14 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
[Plain: Bias: BW]
2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in
black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 23 / 1 – A /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG

[0 to 200 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG
Maintenance
System
[Plain: Bias: FC]
2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color
mode.
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 13 / 1 – A /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 14 / 1 – A /step]
[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:BW]
2411 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for
each paper size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
SM 5-43 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1 *ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1 *ENG S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3 *ENG 250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm
(Paper width)
D104/D016 5-44 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

015 PaperTransfer: Low:1st:S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 200 / 5%/step]

150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5 *ENG
Maintenance
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]
System
019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]

020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5 *ENG
[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:FC]
SM 5-45 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
D104/D016 5-46 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2st Side: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 355 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]

[Thin: Bias: BW]
Maintenance
System
2453 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white
mode.
[Thin: Bias: FC]
2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.
SM 5-47 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
2482 [Gloss: Bias: BW]
Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 – A /step]
001 Adjusts the transfer current of the paper transfer roller for the 1st side of gloss
paper in black and white mode.
2483 [Gloss: Bias: FC]
paper in full color mode.
[Thick 1: Bias: BW]
2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in
Thick: 60 mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 – A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG Not used
[Thick 1: Bias: FC]
2507 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color
mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
D104/D016 5-48 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick-T:Size Correct:BW]
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1 *ENG
S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1 *ENG Not used
[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
Maintenance
System
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]

[Thick-T:Size Correct:FC]
Thick: 60 mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]
SM 5-49 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd: S5 *ENG Not used
[Thick 2: Bias: BW]
2553 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in
Thick: 60 mm/sec
D104/D016 5-50 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 2: Bias: FC]
2558 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in full color
mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[OHP: Bias: BW]
2603 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white
mode.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 200 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 13 / 1 – A /step]
[OHP: Bias: FC]

2608
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.
Maintenance
System
2630 [OHP: Env. Correct Table]
002 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / NA: 39, EU/AA: 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / NA: 7, EU/AA: 47 / 1 /step]
[Thick 3: Bias: BW]
2651 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in
Thick: 60 mm/sec
SM 5-51 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 3: Bias: FC]
2652 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color
mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[M-Thick:Bias:BW] Middle Thick: Bias: BW

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
2703
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in
001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st *ENG

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 - A /step]
002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd *ENG
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 13 / 1 - A /step]
[M-Thick:Bias:FC] Middle Thick: Bias: BW

2707
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in full color
mode.
001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 - A /step]
002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 28 / 1 - A /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11/ 1 - A /step]
D104/D016 5-52 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[SP 1: Bias: BW]
2753 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in
001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG
[SP 1: Bias: FC]
2757 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color
mode.
Maintenance
System
[SP1,2,3-T:Size Correct:BW]
Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st:

001 *ENG
S1
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd:
002 *ENG S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
S1
003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1 *ENG
SM 5-53 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

005 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
S2
width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
D104/D016 5-54 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

width)
Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: [100 to 4000 / 200 / 5%/step]

017 *ENG
S5 150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: [100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step]

018 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]

020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5 *ENG
[SP1,2,3-T:Size Correct:FC]
Maintenance
System

001 *ENG
S1

002 *ENG
S1 S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
SM 5-55 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

width)
D104/D016 5-56 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

width)

017 *ENG

018 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]

[SP 4: Bias: BW]
Maintenance
System
[SP 4: Bias: FC]
mode.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 – A /step]
SM 5-57 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]

D104/D016 5-58 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

width)
Maintenance
[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]
System
[SP 2: Bias: BW]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
SM 5-59 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[SP2: Bias: FC]
mode.
[SP 5: Bias: BW]
[SP 5: Bias: FC]
mode.
D104/D016 5-60 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[SP3: Bias: BW]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
[Special 3: Bias: FC]
mode.
Maintenance
System
[SP 6: Bias: BW]
SM 5-61 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-2
[SP 6: Bias: FC]
mode.
2940 [Charge Bias On Timing]
001 T1:Standard Speed DFU *ENG [-500 to 1000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
T1:Low Speed *ENG [-500 to 1000 / -80 / -80 msec /step]
If a horizontal white band at 40 mm from the leading edge occurs in the low
002 speed mode, change this setting from "-80" to "-500".

[Side Effect]:
"580 msec" is added to the first copy/ print time when using the low speed
mode.
D104/D016 5-62 SM
Main SP Tables-3
5.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)
3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution]
Executes the normal process control

manually (potential control).
001 Normal Procon -
Check the result with SP3-325-001 after
executing this SP.
Executes the toner density adjustment

002 Toner Density Adjst - manually. Check the result with
SP3-325-001 after executing this SP.
Executes the process control that is

normally done before ACC.
003 Procon BF-ACC -
The type of process control is selected with
SP3-041-004.
Maintenance
System
normally done at the same time as MUSIC.
004 With Full MUSIC -
This SP does the MUSIC (line position
adjustment) twice.

005 With Normal MUSIC -
adjustment) once.
[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order "Y C M K"
3012 e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others
were successful.
See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process Control Error section for
details.
SM 5-63 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
001 History: Latest *ENG
002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG

[1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
3013 [TD Sen Initial Setting] Developer Initialization Setting
001 Execution: ALL -
002 Execution: COL -
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the TD sensor initialization for
004 Execution: C - each color.
005 Execution: M -
006 Execution: Y -
D104/D016 5-64 SM
Main SP Tables-3
3014 [TD Sen Initial Set Result] Developer Initialization Result: Display
[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YMCK *ENG 1: Success
2 to 9: Failure
001 Displays the developer initialization result. See the "Error Condition Tables" in
the Process Control Error section for details on the meaning of each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y M C Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 1 (M) 2 (C) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others
succeeded.
3015 [Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
002 Execution: COL (MCY) -
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the manual toner supply to
004 Execution: C - the development unit.
Maintenance
System
005 Execution: M -
006 Execution: Y -
[Forced Toner Supply Cntl] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color])

3016
Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG
002 Supply Time: C *ENG

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]
003 Supply Time: M *ENG
004 Supply Time: Y *ENG
SM 5-65 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
3020 [Vt Limit Error]
001-
DFU
005
001 Delta Vt Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 5 / 0.01 V/step]
002 Upper Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 4.7 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Upper Error Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 20 / 1 time/step]
004 Lower Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]
005 Lower Error Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 times/step]
006 Upper Counter: Bk *ENG
007 Upper Counter: C *ENG
008 Upper Counter: M *ENG
009 Upper Counter: Y *ENG Displays the total times of the Vt upper
or lower limit error.
010 Lower Counter: Bk *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 times/step]
011 Lower Counter: C *ENG
012 Lower Counter: M *ENG
013 Lower Counter: Y *ENG
[TD Sensor Initial Set] Developer Initialization Setting
3021 Specifies the developer agitation time for each color at the developer
initialization.
001 Agitation Time: Bk *ENG
002 Agitation Time: C *ENG

[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
003 Agitation Time: M *ENG
004 Agitation Time: Y *ENG
005- Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color.
D104/D016 5-66 SM
Main SP Tables-3
008
005 Execution Flag: Bk *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
006 Execution Flag: C *ENG 0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON
007 Execution Flag: M *ENG This flag is cleared after executing TD

sensor initialization.
008 Execution Flag: Y *ENG
Enables or disables developer

initialization. DFU
009 Initial Setting Off *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
[Toner Replenishment Mode]

3022
Sets the toner supply flag of each color.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Maintenance
System
3041 [Process Control Type]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the charge
Bias Control *ENG DC bias and development DC bias set with
001 SP2-005 and SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL
Enables or disables the process control.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
LD Power Control *ENG 0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)
002 1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)
Selects the LD power control mode.
SM 5-67 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
AutoControl
*ENG 0: Permit
Prohibition Set
003 1: Forbid
Enables or disables the automatic process control at power-on or door

opening.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
Pre-ACC Process 0: Not Execute
*ENG
004 Control 1: Process Control
2: TC Control
Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: FIXED
005 P-Pattern Selection *ENG
1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED
[Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color])

3044
Selects the toner supply method type.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with
002 C *ENG
SP 3401)
003 M *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
004 Y *ENG 3: MBD (Vtref_Fixed)

4: MBD (Vtref_Control)
D104/D016 5-68 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Toner End Detection: Set]

3045
Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
DFU
001 ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 NE Detection *ENG 0: ALL (Calculation and TE sensor)
1: TE Sensor
[Toner End/Near End]

3101
Displays the amount of each color toner.
001 Toner Replenishment: Bk *ENG
002 Toner Replenishment: C *ENG

[1 to 600 / 235 / 1 g/step]
003 Toner Replenishment: M *ENG
Maintenance
System
004 Toner Replenishment: Y *ENG
005-008 Displays the consumed amount of each color toner.
005 Toner Consumption: Bk *ENG
006 Toner Consumption: C *ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
007 Toner Consumption: M *ENG
008 Toner Consumption: Y *ENG
Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated by
009-012
the operating times of the toner supply pumps.
009 Toner Remaining: Bk *ENG
010 Toner Remaining: C *ENG

[–50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
011 Toner Remaining: M *ENG
012 Toner Remaining: Y *ENG
SM 5-69 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
Adjusts the threshold of toner near end for each color. The toner near end
message appears on the LCD when the remaining toner amount reaches this
013-016
threshold. When one of these SPs (SP3-101-009 to 012 or -032 to -035)
reaches this threshold, toner near end is detected.
013 Near End Thresh: Bk *ENG [0 to 600 / 5 / 1 g/step]
014 Near End Thresh: C *ENG
015 Near End Thresh: M *ENG [0 to 600 / 0 / 1 g/step]
016 Near End Thresh: Y *ENG
Delta Vt Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]
021 This SP is the threshold for toner end. Delta Vt: Vt-Vtref
When both this SP and SP3-101-026 occur at same time, toner end is
determined.
Displays the total delta Vt (Vt-Vtref) value for each color.These are calculated
022-025
by pixel counting.
022 Delta Vt Sum: Bk *ENG
023 Delta Vt Sum: C *ENG

[0 to 655 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
024 Delta Vt Sum: M *ENG
025 Delta Vt Sum: Y *ENG
026 Delta Vt Sum Threshold *ENG [0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]
Displays the consumed toner amount calculated with the pixel count for each
028-031
color.
028 Pixel: Consumption: Bk *ENG
029 Pixel: Consumption: C *ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
030 Pixel: Consumption: M *ENG
031 Pixel: Consumption: Y *ENG
032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count.
D104/D016 5-70 SM
Main SP Tables-3
032 Pixel: Remaining : Bk *ENG
033 Pixel: Remaining : C *ENG

[-50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
034 Pixel: Remaining : M *ENG
035 Pixel: Remaining : Y *ENG
040-043 Displays the pixel M/A for each color.
040 Pixel M/A: Bk *ENG
041 Pixel M/A: C *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.05 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
042 Pixel M/A: M *ENG
043 Pixel M/A: Y *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.6 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
Adjusts the delta Vt (Vt – Vtref) of toner

044 Delta Vt Thresh BF NE *ENG end before toner near end is detected.
[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the total delta Vt (Vt – Vtref) of

Delta Vt Sum Thresh BF toner end before toner near end is
045 *ENG
Maintenance
NE detected.
System
[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]
046-049 Displays the latest mohno off time.
046 Mohno Off Time: Bk *ENG
047 Mohno Off Time: C *ENG

[0 to 0 x FFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 sec/step]
048 Mohno Off Time: M *ENG
049 Mohno Off Time: Y *ENG
Adjusts the threshold of the remaining toner for the toner near-end detection.
050-053
DFU
050 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Bk *ENG
051 TE Sn Detect Thresh:C *ENG [1 to 600 / 57 / 1 g/step]
052 TE Sn Detect Thresh:M *ENG
SM 5-71 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
053 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Y *ENG
[TE Count: Display]

3131
Display the number of toner end detections for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 time/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

3201
Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.
001 Current: Bk *ENG
002 Current: C *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: M *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
[Vtcnt: Display/Set]
3221
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.
002 Current: C *ENG

[2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: M *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-
Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization.
008
005 Initial: Bk *ENG

[2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Initial: C *ENG
D104/D016 5-72 SM
Main SP Tables-3
007 Initial: M *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
3222
Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.
002 Current: C *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: M *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-
Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization.
008
006 Initial: C *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: M *ENG
Maintenance
008 Initial: Y *ENG
System
009-
Displays or adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color.
012
009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG

[-5 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
010 Pixel Correction: C *ENG
011 Pixel Correction: M *ENG

[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
012 Pixel Correction: Y *ENG
[Vtref U/L-Limit Set]

3223
Adjusts the lower or upper limit value of Vtref for each color.
001 Lower: Bk *ENG

[0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step]
002 Lower: C *ENG
SM 5-73 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
003 Lower: M *ENG
004 Lower: Y *ENG
005 Upper: Bk *ENG
006 Upper: C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Upper: M *ENG
008 Upper: Y *ENG
Adjusts the initial toner concentration.

009 Initial TC *ENG
[1 to 15 / 7 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the upper limit of the toner

010 Upper: TC *ENG concentration.
[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the toner

011 Lower: TC *ENG concentration.
[1 to 15 / 4 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the upper limit of the TD sensor

012 Upper Sensitivity *ENG sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.44 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the TD sensor

013 Lower Sensitivity *ENG sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.209 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]
014 TD Thresh H/M *ENG [1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
015 TD Thresh M/L *ENG [1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
016 UpperTC:K *ENG
017 UpperTC:C *ENG [1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

018 UpperTC:M *ENG concentration for each color.
019 UpperTC:Y *ENG
D104/D016 5-74 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Vtref Correct: Pixel]

3224
Adjusts the coefficient of Vtref correction for each coverage and color.
001 Low Coverage Coeff. Bk *ENG
002 Low Coverage Coeff.C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step]
003 Low Coverage Coeffi.M *ENG
004 Low Coverage Coeff. Y *ENG
005 High Coverage Coeff, Bk *ENG
006 High Coverage Coeff, C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.3 / 0.01 V/step]
007 High Coverage Coeff, M *ENG
008 High Coverage Coeff, Y *ENG
Adjusts the threshold of the low

009 Low Coverage: Thresh *ENG coverage.
[0 to 20 / 3 / 0.1 %/step]
Maintenance
System
Adjusts the threshold of the high
010 High Coverage: Thresh:M *ENG coverage.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]
011 TC Upper Limit Correction *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
012 TC Upper Limit:Display:Bk *ENG
013 TC Upper Limit:Display: C *ENG

[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt% /step]
014 TC Upper Limit:Display: M *ENG
015 TC Upper Limit:Display: Y *ENG
016 Process Control Threshold:M *ENG [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 time/step]
017 High Coverage: Threshold:H *ENG Adjusts the threshold of the high
coverage.
018 High Coverage: Threshold:L *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]
019 Process Control Thresh:H *ENG [0 to 255 / 14 / 1 time/step]
SM 5-75 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
020 Process Control Thresh:L *ENG
021 Initial ProCon Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 6 / 1 time/step]
022 High Coverage Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 %/step]
023 Process Control Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 time/step]
[Toner Supply Consum.: Display]

3236
Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color.
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: C *ENG

[0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1 mg/step]
003 Latest: M *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG
[Developer Agitation Setting]

3237
001 Agitation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
[Vt Target: Setting]

3238
Displays the Vt target value at developer initialization.
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[0 to 5 / 2.7 / 0.01 V/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
D104/D016 5-76 SM
Main SP Tables-3
3241 [Background Potential Setting]
001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the

charge bias referring to the development
002 Coefficient: C *ENG
bias at process control.
003 Coefficient: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]
DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 +
004 Coefficient: Y *ENG 0.001 x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to -008
005 Offset: Bk *ENG These are additional values for calculating

the charge bias referring to the
006 Offset: C *ENG
development bias at process control.
007 Offset: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]
0.001 x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these
008 Offset: Y *ENG
values
[Coverage]
3251
Maintenance
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
System
001 Latest: Pixcel Bk *ENG
002 Latest: Pixcel C *ENG Displays the latest coverage for each
color.
003 Latest: Pixcel M *ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
004 Latest: Pixcel Y *ENG
Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach
the number specified with SP3251-017.
005 Average S: Bk *ENG
006 Average S: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]
007 Average S: M *ENG
008 Average S: Y *ENG
SM 5-77 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach
009 Average M: Bk *ENG
010 Average M: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]
011 Average M: M *ENG
012 Average M: Y *ENG
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach
the number specified with SP3-251-019.
013 Average L: Bk *ENG
014 Average L: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]
015 Average L: M *ENG
016 Average L: Y *ENG
017-019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-005 to -016.
017 Total Page Setting: S *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
018 Total Page Setting: M *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
019 Total Page Setting: L *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
020 Total Page Setting: S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
021 Total Page Setting: M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
022 Total Page Setting: L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.
024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG
025 Latest Coverage: C *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
026 Latest Coverage: M *ENG
D104/D016 5-78 SM
Main SP Tables-3
027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG
Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.
028 DevAgi. Theresh BF

*ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]
ProCon
[ID Sn Detection Value]

3311
Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
002 Voffset reg: C *ENG
003 Voffset reg: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
004 Voffset reg: Y *ENG
005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: C *ENG
006 Voffset dif: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
Maintenance
007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG
System
008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG
009 Voffset TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
010 Voffset TM (Rear) *ENG
3321 [ID/TM Sensor All]
Execute the ID sensor initialization setting

010 P/TM Sensor All -
for all sensors
[Vsg Adjust. Result: Vsg]

3322
Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.
SM 5-79 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG
002 Vsg reg: C *ENG
003 Vsg reg: M *ENG
004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG
005 Vsg dif: C *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Vsg dif: M *ENG
007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG
008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG
009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG
010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG
3323 [Vsg Adjust. Result: Ifsg]
001 Ifsg: Bk *ENG
002 Ifsg: C *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]
003 Ifsg: M *ENG
004 Ifsg: Y *ENG
005 Ifsg TM (Front) *ENG
006 Ifsg TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]
007 Ifsg TM (Rear) *ENG
3324 [Vsg Adjustment: Set]
003 Vsg Error Counter *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 0.1 time/step]
004 Vofset Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 V/step]
005 Vsg Upper Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 4.5 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Vsg Lower Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step]
D104/D016 5-80 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Vsg Adjustment Result]
Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

3325 The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front,
sensor for Bk, sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor
for Yellow and sensor for Rear).
001 Latest *ENG
002 Latest 1 *ENG
003 Latest 2 *ENG
004 Latest 3 *ENG

[111 to 999 / 999 / 1 /step]
005 Latest 4 *ENG 9: Unexpected error

3: Offset voltage error
006 Latest 5 *ENG 2: Vsg adjustment value error
007 Latest 6 *ENG 1: O.K
008 Latest 7 *ENG
Maintenance
009 Latest 8 *ENG
System
010 Latest 9 *ENG
3363 [ID Pattern Timing Setting]
Adjusts the detection timing for the

001 Scan YCMBk *ENG process control pattern.
[-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Adjusts the timing when the paper

transfer unit is kept away from the image
002 Detection Delay Time *ENG
transfer belt.
[0 to 2500 / 400 / 1 msec/step]
SM 5-81 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
Adjusts the processing timing for the

003 Delay Time *ENG process control pattern.
[0 to 2500 / 1335 / 1 msec/step]

pattern that is used for the line position
004 MUSIC Delay Time *ENG
adjustment.
[-2500 to 2500 / 300 / 1 msec/step]
[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

3411
Displays the current toner supply rate.
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Latest: M *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG
3421 [Toner Supply Range]
001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG
002 Upper Limit: C *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during
printing.
003 Upper Limit: M *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG
005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG
006 Minimum Supply Time: C *ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply
time.
007 Minimum Supply Time: M *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
008 Minimum Supply Time: Y *ENG
D104/D016 5-82 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Process Control Target M/A]

3501
Adjusts the target M/A of the full coverage in single color printer mode.
001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
002 Maximum M/A: C *ENG
003 Maximum M/A: M *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.445 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG
[Image Adj. Counter:Display]

3510
Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.
001 Process Control: BW *ENG
002 Process Control: FC *ENG
003 Power ON: BW *ENG
Maintenance
004 Power ON: FC *ENG
System
005 MUSIC: BW *ENG
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
006 MUSIC: FC *ENG
007 Vsg Adj. *ENG
008 Charge AC Control *ENG
009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW *ENG
010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC *ENG
[Execution Interval: Setting]

3511
Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.
001 Job End: Process Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Process Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
SM 5-83 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
003 Interrupt: Process Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Process Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
005 Initial: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
006 Initial: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
019 Envir.Correction:ON/OFF *ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
020 Gamma Correction: ON/OFF *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF),
1: Correct (ON)
021 Non-use Time Correct:ON/OFF *ENG
022 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 /step]
023 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
024 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]
025 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt:

026 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
BW

027 *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
BW

028 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]
FC

029 *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
FC
Max. Number Correction

030 *ENG [0 to 99 / 2 / 1/step]
Threshold

031 *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Counter
D104/D016 5-84 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Image Adj.: Interval]
3512 Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position adjustment
during printing or copying.
001 During Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 page/step]
002 During Stand-by *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]
3513 Displays the last time that the PCU motors stopped.
These are used for process control execution timing.
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
Maintenance
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / 0 / 1/step]
System
[Environmental Displ: Job End]
3514 Displays the environmental conditions at the last job.

001 Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / 0 / 0.1°C/step]
002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm3/step]
[Execution Interval: Display]
3515 Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number
of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
SM 5-85 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
[Refresh Mode]
While making prints with low coverage, the developer is agitated with less
3516 toner consumption and the toner carrier attraction tends to increase. This may
cause low image density or poor transfer (white dots). To prevent this, the
coagulated toner or overcharged toner has to be consumed by performing the
refresh mode.
001 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Bk *ENG
002 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: C *ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 0.1 m/step]
003 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: M *ENG
004 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Y *ENG
005 Rotation Threshold *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0.1 / 1 m/step]
006 Pixel Coverage Sum: Bk *ENG
007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C *ENG
008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M *ENG
009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y *ENG

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
010 Required Area: Bk *ENG
011 Required Area: C *ENG
012 Required Area: M *ENG
013 Required Area: Y *ENG
014 Refresh Threshold: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 49 / 1 cm2/m/step]
015 Refresh Threshold: C *ENG

[0 to 255 / 25 / 1 cm2/m/step]
016 Refresh Threshold: M *ENG
D104/D016 5-86 SM
Main SP Tables-3
017 Refresh Threshold: Y *ENG
018 Pattern Number: Bk *ENG
019 Pattern Number: C *ENG
020 Pattern Number: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 time/step]
021 Pattern Number: Y *ENG
022 Pattern Number: Upper limit *ENG
[10 to 2550 / 280 / 10

023 Toner Consumption Pattern Area *ENG
cm2/step]
024 Supply Coefficient *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01/step]
025 Job End Area Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 25.5 / 1 / 0.1/step]
026 Job End Vb Coefficient *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1%/step]
027 Job End Length *ENG [0 to 100 / 19 / 1mm/step]
[0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001
028 Job End Supply Amt *ENG
mg/cm2/step]
Maintenance
029 Refresh:Page Thresh *ENG
System
030 Mode Counter:Bk *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
031 Mode Counter:FC *ENG
[Blade Damage Prevention]
Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the
3517 transfer belt cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this
value, toner is applied to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to
prevent the blade from flipping over.
001 Execution Temp. Thresh *ENG [0 to 50 / 40 / 1°C/step]
3518 [Image Adj. Execution Flag] DFU
001 Toner End Recovery: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
SM 5-87 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
002 Toner End Recovery: C *ENG 0: OFF. 1: ON
003 Toner End Recovery: M *ENG
004 Toner End Recovery: Y *ENG
005 Vsg Adjustment *ENG
006 Developer Agitation *ENG
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
007 Process Control *ENG
0: OFF. 1: ON (once), 2: ON (twice)
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
008 MUSIC *ENG
009 Drum Phase Adj. *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON
011 Blade Damage Prevention *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Sets "1", when the following values
shows.
012 Vsg Average Error *ENG Vsg_reg_ave:
3.5 < Vsg_reg_ave < 4.5 or
Vsg_dif_ave:
0.0 < Vsg_dif_ave < 0.5
[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

3519
Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end.
001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner
002 MUSIC *ENG
end condition)
1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner
003 TC Adjustment *ENG
end condition)
D104/D016 5-88 SM
Main SP Tables-3
3520 [ITB Idle Rotation]
001 Temperature: High *ENG
002 Temperature: Medium *ENG Specifies the idle rotation times of

the ITB after the process control.
003 Temperature: Low *ENG [0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
004 Temp.: L: Power ON *ENG
005 to Adjusts the threshold temperature for entering the ITB idle rotation after the
011 process control.
005 Temp. Range Thresh:T2 *ENG [20 or 30 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
010 Temp. Thresh:High *ENG [0 or 50 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
011 Temp. Thresh:Low *ENG [0 or 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
[Initial Process Control Setting]
Maintenance
System
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.
3522 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs
when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process
control at power on is executed.
002 Non-use Time Setting *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]
003 Temp. Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1°C/step]
004 Relative Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
005 Absolute Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]
[Rapi Timer]
100 Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time-out time to get the Rapi timer.
3531 [Non-use Time Process Control Setting]
SM 5-89 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs
control at stand-by is executed.
Relative Humidity
003 *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
Change
Absolute Humidity
004 *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]
Change
Adjusts the maximum execution time for

Maximum Execution
005 *ENG the process control at stand-by.
Number
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611 [Dev. Gamma: Display/Set]
Displays the current development gamma

001 Bk (Current) *ENG for Bk
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
002 C (Current) *ENG

003 M (Current) *ENG for C/M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
004 Y (Current) *ENG
Displays the target development gamma

005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG for Bk.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
006 C (Target Display) *ENG

007 M (Target Display) *ENG for C/M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
008 Y (Target Display) *ENG
Displays the standard target development

009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG gamma for each color.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
D104/D016 5-90 SM
Main SP Tables-3
010 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG
011 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG
Turns on or off the environmental

correction for target development
013 Environmental Correction *ENG gamma.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct
014 K (Max Correction) *ENG
015 C (Max Correction) *ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.1 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/step]
016 M (Max Correction) *ENG
017 Y (Max Correction) *ENG
018 K (Max Abs Hum) *ENG
019 C (Max Abs Hum) *ENG

[1 to 99 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step]
020 M (Max Abs Hum) *ENG
Maintenance
System
021 Y (Max Abs Hum) *ENG
[Vk Display]
3612
Displays Vk for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
SM 5-91 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
[Dev. DC Control:Display]
3621
Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each
line speed and color.
001 Normal Speed:Bk *ENG
002 Normal Speed:C *ENG
003 Normal Speed:M *ENG
004 Normal Speed:Y *ENG

[0 to 700 / 550 / 1 -V/step]
009 Low Speed:Bk *ENG
010 Low Speed:C *ENG
011 Low Speed:M *ENG
012 Low Speed:Y *ENG
[Charge DC Control: Display]

3631
Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line
speed and color.

[0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step]
D104/D016 5-92 SM
Main SP Tables-3

Normal: 120 mm/sec
3641
Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each
color.

[0 to 3 / 1.75 / 0.01 kV/step]
[LD Power Control: Display]
3651 Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.
Maintenance
System
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step]
[HST Control: Bk]

3711
Displays the factory settings of the black PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]
003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step]
004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]
SM 5-93 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]
007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]
008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]
009 Serial Number 1 *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]
012 Adjustment: Vtref *ENG
013 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]
014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]
[HST Control: C]
3712
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]
D104/D016 5-94 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[HST Control: M]
3713
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]
Maintenance
System

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]
SM 5-95 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
[HST Control:Y]
3714
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]
D104/D016 5-96 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Toner Collection Bttl Full]

3800
Displays/ adjusts the PCDU toner collection bottle detection settings.
Condition *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Displays the current condition of the PCDU toner collection bottle.
0: Factory default, 1: Before near full, 2; Near full, 3: Full, 4: Reserved
Not used
002 Detection Times *CTL
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]
Not used
003 Print Page AF Near Full *CTL
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
004 Pixel Count AF Near Full *CTL
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Not used
Pixel Count AF Displays the pixel counter after
005 *CTL
Replacement replacement of toner collection bottle.
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Maintenance
System
Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step]
008
Adjusts the toner amount between near full and full. (0.1 indicates 10%.)
Enables or disables the calling for

@Remote.
Alarm Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Enable @Remote calling
011 1: Disable @Remote calling
NOTE:
If the PCDU toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine
detects used toner near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot
detect toner collection bottle near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
Day Thresh:NF *ENG [1 to 30 / 10 / 1 day/step]
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the PCDU toner
collection bottle is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected
SM 5-97 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
the actuator in the PCDU toner collection bottle.
Displays the total amount from the

013 Total Collected Toner *ENG near full detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]
Displays the date of the near full

014 Full Detection Date *ENG detection for the PCDU toner
collection bottle.
3810 [ITB T-Collection Bttl Full]
001 Displays the current condition of the ITB toner collection bottle.
Not used
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]
Not used
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Not used
005 *CTL
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]

008

@Remote.
011 0: Enable @Remote calling

1: Disable @Remote calling
NOTE:
If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects
D104/D016 5-98 SM
Main SP Tables-3
used toner near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect
toner collection bottle near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the IT toner
the actuator in the ITB toner collection bottle.
Displays the total amount from the near

013 Total Collected Toner *ENG full detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]

014 Full Detection Date *ENG detection fot the ITB toner collection
bottle.
[New Unit Detection]

3901
Turns new PCU detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
Maintenance
System
[Manual New Unit Set]
3902 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant
parts of section 3 (Replacement and Adjustment).
001 Development Unit: Bk *ENG
002 Development Unit: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Development Unit: M *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
004 Development Unit: Y *ENG
005 Developer: Bk *ENG

Not used
006 Developer: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
007 Developer: M *ENG
SM 5-99 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-3
008 Developer: Y *ENG
009 PCU: Bk *ENG
010 PCU: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
011 PCU: M *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
012 PCU: Y *ENG
013 ITB Unit *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
Do not use 3902-013 if you only change
015 Fusing Pad *ENG
the cleaning unit.
016 Fusing Belt *ENG 3902-017: This is for the image transfer
belt cleaning unit.
017 ITB Cleaning Unit *ENG
018 PTR Unit *ENG
PCU Toner Collection

019 *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Bottle
0: OFF, 1: ON
ITB Toner Collection
020 *ENG
Bottle
D104/D016 5-100 SM
Main SP Tables-4
5.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)
[Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment]

4008
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
001 SScan Mag.Adjust *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]
4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in
the sub-scan direction.
001 LE Regist Adjust *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]
4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in
Maintenance
the main scan direction.
System
001 StoS Rgst Adjust *ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale] Scanner: Erase Margin: Scale
4012 Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by
the gap between the original and the scale.
001 Book: Leading Edge
002 Book: Trailing Edge

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right
005 ADF: Leading Edge

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
007 ADF: Left
SM 5-101 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-4
008 ADF: Right
[Scanner Free Run]
4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following
mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

*ENG
002 Lamp: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
[Scan]
4014
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.
001 HP Detection Enable - Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
Scanner free run without HP sensor

002 HP Detection Disable -
check.
4020 [Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/

off.
001 Detection: ON/OFF *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection: Level *ENG
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
D104/D016 5-102 SM
Main SP Tables-4
Selects the level of the sub scan line

correction when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
003 Correction Level *ENG
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest
[APS Operation Check]
4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original
sensors. (See "Input Check Table".)
001 APS Operation Check - -
[APS Min Size]
4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors
are all OFF.
Maintenance
System
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No Original
001 APS Min. Size *ENG
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to
3)
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Detection (the machine detects
A4/LT size as A4 or LT, depending on the
4305 [8K/16K Detection] *ENG paper size setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K
001 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
SM 5-103 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-4
4308 [Scan Size Detection]
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Detect: ON/OFF *ENG
0: ON, 1: OFF
4309 [Scan Size Detect Setting] DFU
001 Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit /step]
002 Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec /step]
003 Lamp ON:Delay Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec /step]
[Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG
4400 Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 ADF: Left
008 ADF: Right
D104/D016 5-104 SM
Main SP Tables-4
[IPU Test Pattern]

4417
Selects the IPU test pattern.
001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A
14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B
15: Gray pattern (1)
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gray Pattern (3)
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid pattern
19: Thin line pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
21: Scanned + Gray scale
9: UCR pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
10: Color patch 16 (1)
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
12: Color patch 64
Maintenance
System
4429 [Illegal Copy Output]
001 Copy
002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
003 Fax
[Saturation Adjustment]
4440
Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: High
1: Lowest
001 - *ENG
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
SM 5-105 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-4
5: Highest
4450 [Scan Image Path Selection]
Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
[Digital AE Set] DFU
4460 Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust
its level for each scanning method (platen, ADF).
001 Lower Limit *ENG [0 to 1023 / 364 / 4 digit/step]
002 Background Level *ENG [512 to 1532 / 932 / 1 digit/step]
[ACC Target Density]

4501
Selects the ACC target.
001 Copy: Bk: Text *ENG
002 Copy: C: Text *ENG
003 Copy: M: Text *ENG
004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
005 Copy: Bk: Photo *ENG 10: Darkest density
006 Copy: C: Photo *ENG
007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG
008 Copy: Y: Photo *ENG
D104/D016 5-106 SM
Main SP Tables-4
[ACC Correction:Bright]
4505
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Master:K *ENG
002 Master:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Master:M *ENG
004 Master:Y *ENG
005 Slave:K *ENG
006 Slave:C *ENG

Reserved
007 Slave:M *ENG
008 Slave:Y *ENG
[ACC Correction: Dark]

4506
Maintenance
Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.
System
001 Master:K *ENG
002 Master:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Master:M *ENG
004 Master:Y *ENG
005 Slave:K *ENG
006 Slave:C *ENG

Reserved
007 Slave:M *ENG
008 Slave:Y *ENG
4550 [Scanner Appl.:Text/Chart]
4551 [Scanner Appl.: Text]
SM 5-107 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-4
4552 [Scanner Appl.:Txt Dropout]
4553 [Scanner Appl.:Text/Photo]
4554 [Scanner Appl.: Photo]
4565 [Scanner Appl.: GrayScale]
4570 [Scan Appl.: Color: Text-Photo]
4571 [Scan Appl.: Color: Glossy Photo]
4572 [Scan Appl.: Color: AutoColor]
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong) *ENG
0: MTF Off
-005
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image
contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

-006
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1–255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
Contrast: 1–255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
I-Dot Erase :0 (x1) 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]
-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for
weaker effect.
0: Not activated
4580 [FAX Appl.: Text/Chart]
4582 [FAX Appl.: Text/Photo]
4583 [FAX Appl.: Photo]
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
-005 MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong) *ENG
0: MTF Off
D104/D016 5-108 SM
Main SP Tables-4

-006

-007

-008
I-Dot Erase:0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]
-009 Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode. Sets the erasure level of
Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
0: Not activated
Texture Erase:0 (Fix), 1-2 *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
-010 Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for
weaker effect. This SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580, 4582 and 4583.
Maintenance
0: Not activated
System
4581 [FAX Appl.: Text]
4584 [FAX Appl.: Original 1]
4585 [FAX Appl.: Original 2]
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
-005

-006

-007
SM 5-109 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-4

-008
0: Not activated
[Scanner Hard Error]

4647
Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure
001 Power-ON -
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144
occurs.
[DF: Density Adjustment]
4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
001 - *ENG [50 to 150 / 107 / 1%/ step ]
4802 [DF Shading FreeRun]
001 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading

movement with exposure lamp on or off.
-
002 Lamp ON Press "OFF" to stop this free run.
Otherwise, the free run lasts.
4804 [Home Position Opetation]
001 - - Executes the scanner HP detection.
D104/D016 5-110 SM
Main SP Tables-4
4806 [Carriage Move]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home

position.
001 - - Dust may fall through the DF exposure
glass. Therefore, do this SP when you
transport the machine a long distance.
4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change]
- - [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Selects the SBU test pattern.

0: Normal output
001 1: Fixed value output
2: Main scan gradation

3: Sub scan gradation
4: Grid pattern
Maintenance
System
[ACC Data Display]
4902 This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 R DATA1 *ENG Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
002 G DATA1 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
003 B DATA1 *ENG Photo Y Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)
SM 5-111 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-4
4904 [IPU Board Test]
Bit0: TAURUS register

Bit1: ORION register
Bit2: LUPUS register
Test1 - Bit3 to 11: Not used
001 Bit12: Ri20

Bit13 to 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error
Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the BCU board and displays
the result.
Bit0: Image path from SBU to TAURUS

Bit1: Image path from TAURUS to ORION
Bit2: Image path from ORION to TAURUS
Bit3: Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS
002 Bit12: Image path from LUPUS to Ri20
Bit13: Image path from Ri20 to GAVD
Bit14 and 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error
Performs an image path check on the BCU board and displays the result.
4918 [Man Gamma Adj]
Adjusts the manual gamma for Copy/Photo

009 - - or Copy/Text with the soft keys on the
operation panel.
D104/D016 5-112 SM
Main SP Tables-4
4993 [High Light Correction]
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the range level of Highlight

correction.
002 Range Selection *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction
[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

4994
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Text priority
001 High Compression PDF *ENG
1: Normal
Maintenance
System
2: Photo priority
[White Paper Detect Level]
4996 Selects the threshold level of the original background density. Increasing this
threshold level machine easily judge that an original is white.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1 /step]
001 - *ENG 0: lightest
6: Darkest
SM 5-113 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
5.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
[mm/inch Display Selection]

5024
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL
1: inch (USA)
[Accounting Counter]
5045 Selects the counting method.

NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether
the counter value is negative or positive.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Counter Method *CTL 0: Developments
1: Prints
[Paper Display]
5047
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Backing Paper *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Toner Refill Detection Display]

5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
5051 1 - *CTL 0: ON
1: OFF
D104/D016 5-114 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[Display IP Address]
5055
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF 1: ON
[Coverage Counter Display]

5056
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: Not display, 1: Display
[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]

5061
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
Maintenance
System
[Parts PM System Setting]
5062
Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.
001 PCU:Bk *CTL
002 PCU:M *CTL
003 PCU:C *CTL
004 PCU:Y *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
005 Dev Unit:Bk *CTL
006 Dev Unit:M *CTL
007 Dev Unit:C *CTL
008 Dev Unit:Y *CTL
009 Fusing Unit *CTL
SM 5-115 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
010 Fusing Roller *CTL
011 Fusing Belt *CTL

012 *CTL
Bottle
5066 [Parts PM Menu Display Setting] Not used
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.
If the user service is selected, PM alart is displayed on the LCD.
001 PCU:Bk *CTL
002 PCU:M *CTL

[0: Service] or [1: User]
003 PCU:C *CTL
004 PCU:Y *CTL
006 Dev Unit:M *CTL

007 Dev Unit:C *CTL
008 Dev Unit:Y *CTL
010 Fusing Roller *CTL
011 Fusing Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]

012 *CTL
Bottle
D104/D016 5-116 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5104 [A3/DLT Double Count] SSP
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: No
PCU:Bk *CTL
1: Yes
001 2: Yes except By-pass
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except from
the bypass tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice,
that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5113 [Optional Counter Type]
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
Default Optional Counter 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card
001 *CTL
Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
Maintenance
System
This program specifies the external
counter type.
External Optional 0: None
002 *CTL
Counter Type 1: Expansion Device 1
2: Expansion Device 2
5114 [Optional Counter I/F]
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

001 MF Key Card Extension *CTL
accounting)]
5118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
001 This program disables copying.
SM 5-117 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
[Mode Clear Opt. [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but

5120 *CTL
Counter Removal] not used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install
001
or remove an optional counter, check the settings.
5121 [Counter Up Timing] *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]
This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to "paper
001
feed" and "paper exit" respectively.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)
5126 [F Size Original Setting] *ENG
1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)
2: 8" x 13" (F)
001 Selects F size original setting.
5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
001 This program disables the APS.
5150 [By-Pass Length Setting] *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
001 Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is
limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
D104/D016 5-118 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This
SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting
device.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Fax Printing Mode at
001 *CTL 0: Automatic printing
Optional Counter Off
1: No automatic printing
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with
this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Maintenance
[Size Adjust]
System
5181
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.
[0 to 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

001 Tray 1:1 *ENG
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
002 Tray 1: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
003 Tray 1: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
004 Tray 1: 4 *ENG
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
005 Tray 2: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
006 Tray 2: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
SM 5-119 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
007 Tray 2: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
008 Tray 2: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
009 Tray 3: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
010 Tray 3: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
011 Tray 3: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
012 Tray 3: 4 *ENG
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
013 Tray 4: 1 *ENG
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
014 Tray 4: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
015 Tray 4: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
016 Tray 4: 4 *ENG
[RK 4 Disconnect Operation]
5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.
If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)",
the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable
D104/D016 5-120 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[Copy NV Version]
5188
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.
001 - *CTL -
5196 [90 degree rotation (copy)]
001 - Not used
5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge.
A "+ value" moves the page number positions to the right edge.
003 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position

[–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
004 Duplex Printout High/Low Position
Maintenance
System
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
002 Time Difference *CTL# [-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]
5307 [Summer Time]
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

001 Setting - 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM 5-121 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start) -
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End) - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
5404 [User Code Counter Clear]
001 - *CTL Clears all counters for users.
D104/D016 5-122 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5411 [LDAP Certification]
Determines whether easy LDAP

004 Easy Certification *CTL certification is done.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 1: On, 0: Off
This SP is referenced only when

SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On).
Password Null Not
005 *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Permit
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
5413 [Lockout Setting]
Switches on/off the lock on the local

address book account.
001 Lockout On/Off *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts
Maintenance
System
002 Lockout Threshold *CTL for account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
Determines whether the system waits the

prescribed time for input of a correct user
ID and password after an account lockout
has occurred.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not
cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if
correct user ID and password are
entered.
Determines the length of time that the

system waits for correct input of the user
004 Cancellation Time *CTL
ID and password after a lockout has
occurred. This setting is used only if
SM 5-123 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).

[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min.]
005 Counter Clear Time *CTL Not Used
5414 [Access Mitigation]
Switches on/off masking of continuously

used IDs and passwords that are
identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: Off
1: On
Sets the length of time for excluding

continuous access for identical user IDs
002 Mitigation Time *CTL
and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min.]
5415 [Password Attack]
Sets the number of attempts to attack the

system with random passwords to gain
001 Permissible Number *CTL
illegal access to the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt]
Sets the time limit to stop a password

attack once such an attack has been
002 Detect Time *CTL
detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec.]
D104/D016 5-124 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5416 [Access Information]
Limits the number of users used by the

access exclusion and password attack
001 Access User Max Num *CTL
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users]
Limits the number of passwords used by

Access Password Max the access exclusion and password
002 *CTL
Num attack detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 passwords]
Sets the processing time interval for

referencing user ID and password
003 Monitor Interval *CTL
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec.]
5417 [Access Attack]
Sets a limit on access attempts when an
Maintenance
System
Access Permissible excessive number of attempts are
001 *CTL
Number detected for MFP features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1]
Sets the length of time for monitoring the

002 Attack Detect Time *CTL frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec.]
Sets the wait time to slow down the

speed of certification when an excessive
003 Productivity Fall Wait *CTL number of access attempts have been
detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec.]
Sets a limit on the number of requests

received for certification in order to slow
004 Attack Max Num *CTL
down the certification speed when an
excessive number of access attempts
SM 5-125 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
have been detected.

[50 to 200 / 200 /1 attempt]
[User Authentication]
5420 These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.
Determines whether certification is

required before a user can use the copy
001 Copy *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
Color Security Setting *CTL -
Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the
user authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
002 Bit0: B/W mode

Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

required before a user can use the
011 Document Server *CTL document server.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

required before a user can use the fax
021 Fax *CTL application.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
D104/D016 5-126 SM
Main SP Tables-5

required before a user can use the scan
031 Scanner *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

required before a user can use the printer
041 Printer *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off
051 SDK1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF

061 SDK2 *CTL
required before a user can use the SDK
071 SDK3 application.
[Authentication Error Code]

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
Maintenance
System
Determines whether an error code
appears in the system log after a user
001 System Log Disp *CTL authentication failure occurs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On

appears on the operation panel after a
002 Panel Disp *CTL user authentication failure occurs.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: On, 0: Off
5490 [MF Key Card (Japan only)]
Sets up operation of the machine with a

001 Job Permit Setting *CTL keycard.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
SM 5-127 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a

user code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a
user code.
002 Count Mode Setting *CTL -
5501 [PM Alarm]
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Alarm off
001 PM Alarm Level *CTL
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1
to 9999) x 1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: No alarm sounds
002 Original Count Alarm *CTL 1: Alarm sounds after the number of
originals passing through the ARDF >
10,000
5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL -
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
001 0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.
5505 The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set
number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
001 - *CTL [0 to 255 / 20 / 100 copies /step]
D104/D016 5-128 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[Supply Alarm] *CTL -

5507
Enables or disables the notifying a supply call via the @Remote.
001 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
002 Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
003 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via

the @Remote, when the following conditions
080 Toner Call Timing occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end
128 Interval :Others
132 Interval :A3
133 Interval :A4
134 Interval :A5
Maintenance
141 Interval :B4
System
[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step]
142 Interval :B5
160 Interval :DLT
164 Interval :LG
166 Interval :LT
172 Interval :HLT
5508* [CC Call] *CTL -
Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable

002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
SM 5-129 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable

003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Jam Detection: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an "unattended paper
jam".
Jam Detection: Continuous Count [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

012*
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call.
Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a
call.
[SC/Alarm Setting]
5515 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when
an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when
an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

0: Off
003 Service Parts End Call 1: On
004 User Call
006 Communication Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice
008 Alarm Notice

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
009 Non Genuin Tonner Alarm 0: Off
1: On
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Manegement Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
D104/D016 5-130 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5610 [Base Gamma Cntl P: Command]
Recall Factory Setting -

004
Recalls the factory settings of the base gamma control points.
Restore Factory Setting -
005 Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings of the base gamma
control points.
Restore Prev. Setting -

006
Recalls the previous settings of the base gamma control points.
5611 [Toner Color in 2C]
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-C *ENG
001 128: Darkest density
Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
Maintenance
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]
System
B-M *ENG
Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-Y *ENG
Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-M *ENG
006 R-Y *ENG [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]
SM 5-131 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
128: Darkest density
5618 [Color Mode Display Selection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour,
- *CTL
001 Single colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White
Selects the color selection display on the LCD.
Memory Clear (SP5-801)

The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,
meter charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586)
are not cleared.
5801 [Memory Clear]
Resets all correction data for process control and

001 All Clear all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
002 Engine [ENG] Clears the engine settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System

003 SCS Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the IMH settings.
005 MCS Initializes the Mcs settings.
006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax application settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
D104/D016 5-132 SM
Main SP Tables-5
The following service settings:

Bit switches
Gamma settings (User & Service)
Toner Limit
The following user settings:
008 Printer application Tray Priority
Menu Protect
System Setting except for setting of Energy
Saver
I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
PCL Menu
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and

009 Scanner application
all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management

010 Web Service
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

011 NCS
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Maintenance
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for
System
012 R-FAX
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)

014 Clear DCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control

015 Clear UCS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report

016 MIRS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and

017 CCS
Charge-control Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)

018 SRM Memory Clr
settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings.
020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings.
SM 5-133 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
5803 [Input Check] See "Input Check Table" in this section.
5804 [Output Check] See "Output Check Table" in this section.
5806 [RFID CONT.READING]
001 TIMES - Displays the read times of RFID.
002 NOT 0 -
003 RET. -
004 EXE.ALL
005 EXE.K
006 EXE.M
007 EXE.C
008 EXE.Y
[SC Reset]
5810 Resets a type A service call condition.
Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset - -
5811 [Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number Display
002 Display *ENG Displays the machine serial number.
004 - - Inputs the serial number.
D104/D016 5-134 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
Service *CTL -
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is
001 printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s "Counter"
menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can
be input).
Facsimile *CTL -
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
002 printed on the Counter List.

be input).
Supply *CTL -
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables.
Enter the number and press #.
Maintenance
System
Operation *CTL -
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the
number and press #.
5816 [Remote Service] *CTL -
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
002 Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
SM 5-135 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
0: Start of the service

1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to "2".
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registor has been
completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
011 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
D104/D016 5-136 SM
Main SP Tables-5
RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.

1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG – C Registed
021 This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
RCG – C Regist Detail
This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation status.

022 0: RCG device not registered
1: RCG device registered

2: Device registered
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.
Maintenance
023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
System
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or
display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set
063 up Embedded RC Gate-N.
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
SM 5-137 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065 The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

beyond the 31st character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066 The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received

067 1
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified

2
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
D104/D016 5-138 SM
Main SP Tables-5
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
4
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue

11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed

13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
Maintenance
17
System
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
18
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
068 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification

1
has expired.
An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
2
has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual
SM 5-139 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firmware Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This setting determines if the firmware can be

updated, even without the HDD installed.
084 Non-HDD Firm Up
0: Not allowed update
1: Allowed update
This SP setting determines if the operator can

confirm the previous version of the firmware
before the firmware update execution. If the
085 Firm Up User Check option to confirm the previous version is
selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with
the firmware files from the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size

086 Firmware Size of the firmware data files during the firmware
update execution.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

087 CERT: Macro Ver.
certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote

088 CERT: PAC Ver.
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification.

Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).
089 CERT: ID2 Code Asteriskes (*) indicate that no @Remote
certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".
D104/D016 5-140 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Displays the common name of the @Remote

certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote
Displays serial number for the @Remote

091 CERT: Serial No. certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no
@Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the

@Remote certification. CN = the following 30
092 CERT: Issuer
bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote
certification exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the

093 CERT: Valid Start
current @Remote certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the

094 CERT: Valid End
Maintenance
System
Selection Country
150
Not used
Line Type Automatic Judgment

151
Not used
Line Type Judgment Result

152
Not used
Selection Dial/Push
153
Not used
Outside Line/Outgoing Number

154
Not used
156 Dial Up User Name
SM 5-141 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Not used
Dial Up Password
157
Not used
Local Phone Number

161
Not used
Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming

162
Not used
Access Point
163
Not used
Line Connecting
164
Not used
173 Modem Serial Number Not used
Retransmission Limit
174
Not used
FAX TX Priority -
187
Not used
200 Manual Polling - Not used
Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device
cannot communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate
cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
D104/D016 5-142 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

202 Letter Number
Embedded RCG Gate.
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote

203 Confirm Execute
Gateway.
204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Maintenance
Confirm Place
System
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in
answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is
registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)

8: Other error
SM 5-143 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
9: Registration executing
Error Code
208 Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error

Illegal Modem
-11002 Chat execution error
Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution

Operation Error,
-12003 of an inquiry and no previous
Incorrect Setting
registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited.

-12005 The device has an Embedded RC
gate-related problem.
A confirmation request was made after

-12006 the confirmation had been already
completed.
The request number used at registration

-12007 was different from the one used at
confirmation.
Update certification failed because

-12008
mainframe was in use.
Attempted dial up overseas without the

Error Caused by -2385 correct international prefix for the
Response from GW telephone number.
URL
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
D104/D016 5-144 SM
Main SP Tables-5
-2389 Database out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG

Gate setup.
209 Instl Clear
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after
this setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
Maintenance
System
5821 [Remote Service Address]
Sets the IP address of the RCG

(Remote Communication Gate)
002 RCG IP Address *CTL
destination for call processing at the
remote service center.
[NV-RAM Data Upload]
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
5824 number) from the NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see the "NVRAM Data
Upload/Download" in the "System Maintenance Reference" of the Field
Service Manual.
001 - # -
SM 5-145 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
[NV-RAM Data Download]
5825 Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For
details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "System
Maintenance Reference" of the Field Service Manual.
001 - # -
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL -
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

1284 Compatibility
050 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
(Centro)
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro)
This SP is activated only when

SP5-828-50 is set to "1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at

Job Spooling Clear: Start power on.
066
Time 0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
D104/D016 5-146 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function

for each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
069 Job Spooling (Protocol)
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
Maintenance
System
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on
the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the
Active IPv6 Link Local format:
145
Address "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Active IPv6 Stateless

147
Address 1
These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
Active IPv6 Stateless referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
149
Address 2 (802.11b) in the format:
Active IPv6 Stateless "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"

151 The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
Address 3
153
Address 4
SM 5-147 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5

155
Address 5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address

referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11b) in the format:
156 IPv6 Manual Address
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced

on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The
158 IPv6 Gateway Address
IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
Enables or disables the automatic setting for

IPv6 Stateless Auto IPv6 stateless.
161
Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Displays or does not display the Web system

items.
[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:
236 Web Item visible Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Displays or does not display the link to Net

RICOH on the top page and link page of the web
237 Web shopping link visible system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
Displays or does not display the link to

Consumable Supplier on the top page and link
238 Web supplies Link visible page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
D104/D016 5-148 SM
Main SP Tables-5
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on

239 Web Link1 Name the link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on

240 Web Link1 URL the link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on

the top page of the web system.
241 Web Link1 visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL
001 HDD Formatting (ALL)
Maintenance
System
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP
mode only if there is a hard disk error.
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a

009
Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
SM 5-149 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
5836 [Capture Settings] *CTL
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
be initialized, displayed, or selected.
Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

002
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836-71 to 5836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents
sent to the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
071 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB.
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
081 Format for Copy Color
This SP is not used in this
model.
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
083 Format for Copy B&W Other
D104/D016 5-150 SM
Main SP Tables-5
084 Format for Printer Color
model.
085 Format for Printer B&W
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document
management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Sets the IP address for the primary capture server.

101 Primary srv IP address
This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Primary srv port
Maintenance
103 This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
System
number
104 Primary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture

Secondary srv IP
111 server. This is basically adjusted by the remote
address
system.
112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Secondary srv port

number
Secondary srv URL

path
Default Reso Rate

Switch
SM 5-151 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Reso: Copy (Color) [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi

Reso: Print (Color)
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
123 Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Reso: Print (Mono)
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
124 Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
5840 [IEEE 802.11]
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel MAX *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
006 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.
The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels.
Do not change the setting.
D104/D016 5-152 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels.
[0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 – 55M Fix
0 x 10 – 48M Fix
0 x 0F – 36M Fix
0 x 0E – 18M Fix
0 x 0D – 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed *CTL 0 x 0B – 9M Fix
0 x 0A – 6M Fix
Maintenance
0 x 07 – 11M Fix
System
0 x 05 – 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 – 1M Fix
0 x 13 – 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 12 – 72M (reserved)
Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
011 WEP key Select *CTL
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the

IEEE802.11 card.
042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
This SP is displayed only when the
IEEE802.11 card is installed.
SM 5-153 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Determines whether the CTS self

function is turned on or off.
043 11g CTS to Self *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044 11g Slot Time *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA

authentication application.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL
1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
5841 [Supply Name Setting]
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta Specifies supply names. These

appear on the screen when the
007 OrgStamp *CTL
user presses the Inquiry button
011 Staple Std1 in the user tools screen.
012 Staple Std2
013 Staple Std3
014 Staple Std4
D104/D016 5-154 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5844 [USB]
0x01: Full speed

Transfer Rate *CTL
001 0x04: Auto Change
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
Displays a message of the unspported

USB device for the USB host slot.
100 Notify Unsupport *CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL -

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Primary)
Maintenance
255.255.255.255
System
002
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is
displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile
application and an external device.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as
the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting
of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting.
SM 5-155 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr Capability [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible

010
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Rapid Sending Control
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
022 error.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
D104/D016 5-156 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL -
Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
001 value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the
NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte
binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery
server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Maintenance
System
Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
the delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user
information managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
020 WSD Maximum Entries
SM 5-157 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Addr Book Migration (SD => HDD)

040
Not used in this machine.
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the
new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
041 Procedure

2. Install a new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the
system administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
Displays the slot number where an address

book data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Clears the local address book information,

047 Initialize Local Addr Book
including the user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book

048
Book information, except the user code.
049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book Clears the LDAP address book information,
D104/D016 5-158 SM
Main SP Tables-5
except the user code.
Clears all directory information managed by

050 Initialize All Addr Book
UCS, including all user codes.
Uploads all directory information to the SD

051 Backup All Addr Book
card.
Downloads all directory information from the

052 Restore All Addr Book
SD card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD

card in the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from
this machine.
This feature does not work if the card is
053 Clear Backup Info write-protected.
After you do this SP, go out of the SP

mode, and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the
Maintenance
Power LED stops flashing.
System
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit: Meaning
060 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
SM 5-159 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP does not normally require adjustment.

This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
Specifies the FTP port for getting a

distribution server address book that is used
091 FTP Auth Port Setting
in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function

094 Encryption Stat
for the address book data.
[Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL -
SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data

transferred externally by the Net File page reference function.
5847 [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by
NetFile.
"Net files" are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and
the DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate for Copy Color

0: 1x
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text 1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
3: 1/4x
004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
005 Rate for Printer B&W
D104/D016 5-160 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
021 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[Web Service] *CTL -
SP5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
5848 Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control

Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Lower 4 bits)
0010: No writing control
Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr. Print

003
(Lower 4 bits)
Maintenance
Access Ctrl: user Directory
System
004
(only Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax

007
(Lower 4 bits)
Switches access control on and off.
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower
009 0000: No access control
4 bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Ctrl: Device
011
management (Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower

021
4 bits)
Access Ctrl: uadministration

022
(Lower 4bits)
Repository: Download Image Specifies the max size of the image data that
100
Max. Size the machine can download.
SM 5-161 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed

5849 1 Display
to "Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is

printed on the printout for the total counter.
5849 2 Switch to Print [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
003 Total Counter -
[Bluetooth Mode]
5851 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
[Stamp Data Download]
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the
ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as
5853 required. This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard
disks.
This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
[Remote ROM Update]
5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284)
when updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Disable
1: Enable
D104/D016 5-162 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL -
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the
conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can

be copied one by one to each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
006
Maintenance
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
System
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
SM 5-163 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
[Debug Save When] *CTL -
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
5858 destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes

generated by copier engine errors.
001 Engine SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

generated by GW controller errors.
002 Controller SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

004 Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
D104/D016 5-164 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL -
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log
005 Key 5 files for functions that use common memory on
006 Key 6 the controller board.

[–9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
Maintenance
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
System
020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / – ]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

0: No
1: Yes
022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From item switched.
SM 5-165 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
025 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP

mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an

E-mail sent by S/MIME.
S/MIME: MIME Header [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
026 -
Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5866 [E-mail Report] Not Used
Enables or disables the e-mail alert.

001 Report Validity *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Adds or does not add the date field to

the header of the alert mail.
005 Add Date Field *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Not added, 1: Added
D104/D016 5-166 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5870 [Common Key Info Writing]
Rewrites the common certification used

001 Writing *CTL
for the @Remote.
Initialize *CTL -
Initializes the set certification.

When the GW controller board is replaced with a new one for repair, you must
003 execute the "Initiralize (-003)" and "Writing (-001)" just after the new board
replacement.
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after the "Initiralize (-003)" and
"Writing (-001)" have been done.
5873 [SD Card Appli Move]
This SP copies the application programs from the original

001 Move Exec
SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD
Maintenance
card in SD Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot
System
002 Undo Exec
1. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some
programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
Enables or disables the automatic reboot

function when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC
001 Reboot Setting *CTL error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC
codes.
SM 5-167 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878 [Option Setup]
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.

001 Overwrite Security - Press "EXECUTE" on the operation
panel. Then turn the machine off and on.
002 HDD Encryption - Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
001 - *ENG Deletes the fixed phrase.
[Plain 1/2 Setting]

5884
Select the paper type (plain 1 or plain 2) for each tray.
001 By-pass Table *ENG
002 Tray 1 *ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
003 Tray 2 *ENG 0: Plain Paper 1
1: Plain Paper 2
004 Tray 3 *ENG
005 Tray 4 *ENG
D104/D016 5-168 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings

5885
Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)
Document Server ACC 2: Forbid print function (1)
020 *CTL
Ctrl 3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)
7: Reserved
Selects the display type for the document

box list.
050 DocSvr Format *CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
Maintenance
Sets the number of documents to be
System
051 DocSvr Trans *CTL displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Signature for each e-mail
Set Signature *CTL
1: Signature for all e-mails
100 2: No signature
Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the
WIM when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
Determines whether the scanned

documents with the WIM are encrypted
101 Set Encryption *CTL when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak *CTL Not used
SM 5-169 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
201 DocSur Timeout *CTL Not used
[SD Get Counter]

5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card

inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
The operation stores. The file is stored in
a folder created in the root directory of the
SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is
saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the
001 - *CTL number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2
(lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch
[EXECUTE].
3. Touch [Execute] in the message
when you are prompted.
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for
001 - *CTL
logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only
an administrator can see the logs)
[External Counter Setting]

5894
-
001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
D104/D016 5-170 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5896 [Copy/PrinterPriority]
- [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 Selects the priority memory type. The larger memory is used for the selected
mode (copy or printer).
0: Copy priority, 1: Printer priority
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
001 names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913 [Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
Maintenance
System
002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and
the operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can
gain control of the display.
5967 [Copy Server Set Function] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
001
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
[Cherry Server]
5974
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, "Lite" or "Full", is installed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
001 Cherry Server *CTL
0: Lite, 1: Full
SM 5-171 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-5
[Device Setting]
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board
NIC" is limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT
authentication.
001 On Board NIC

Other network applications than NRS or
LDAP/NT authentication are not available
when this SP is set to "2". Even though
you can change the initial settings of those
network applications, the settings do not
work.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
5987 [Mech. Counter Protection]
This SP detects that a mechanical counter device

001 0: OFF / 1: ON
is removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs.
[SP print mode]

5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All (Data List) -
002 SP (Mode Data List) -
003 User Program - -
004 Logging Data -
005 Diagnostic Report -
D104/D016 5-172 SM
Main SP Tables-5
006 Non-Default -
007 NIB Summary -
008 Capture Log -
021 Copier User Program -
022 Scanner SP -
023 Scanner User Program -

001
5997 [Fusing Cont mode]
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 fast/silent -
0: Off, 1: On
Maintenance
Turns on or off the fusing unit preceding mode.
System
The machine turns on the fusing unit first by default after power-on or
recovery from the energy save mode.
If a customer does not want the fusing unit to rotate before sending a job to
the machine, change this setting to "0". In this case, the first print time or
recovery time may be little bit longer than before.
SM 5-173 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-6
5.7.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
001 S-to-S Registration 1st

[-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
002 S-to-S Registration 2nd *ENG
003 Leading Edge Registration [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and
rear sides.
005 Buckle: Duplex: 1st

*ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
006 Buckle: Duplex: 2nd
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
007 Trailing Edge Erase *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
[ADF INPUT Check]
6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only
Bit 0 is used for ADF input check ( "Iutput Check Table" in this section").
[ADF OUTPUT Check]
6008 Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time (
"Output Check Table" in this section")
D104/D016 5-174 SM
Main SP Tables-6
[ADF Free Run]

6009
Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.
002 Free Run Duplex Mode -
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

6010
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Original Size Detection Priority] Original Size Detection Priority
6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since
original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
*ENG 0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2
Maintenance
System
Setting 1 Setting 2
DLT SEF Folio SEF 11" x 15"
NA LG SEF Foolscap SEF

001 -
LT SEF US EXE 8" x 10"
LT LEF US EXE LEF
DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm

EU/
LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm
ASIA
LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

6017
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
001 - *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
SM 5-175 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-6
[Staple Position Adjustment]
6101 Adjusts the staple position for finisher.

+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
001 - ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]
[Punch Position Adjustment]

6102
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.
001 Leading Edge Adjustment ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.1mm/step]
[Jogger Position Adjustment]

6103
Adjusts the jogger position
001 - ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm/step]

6104
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.
001 Side-to-Side Adjustment ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]
[Finisher Input Check] Finisher (D429)
6120 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (
"Iutput Check Table" in this section")
[Finisher Output Check] Finisher (D429)
6121 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (
"Output Check Table" in this section")
D104/D016 5-176 SM
Main SP Tables-7
5.8.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
[Total SC Counter]
7401
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
001 - *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]
[SC History]
7403 Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but
can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
Maintenance
System
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
[Total Paper Jam Counter]

7502
Displays the total number of jams detected.
001 - * CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
SM 5-177 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
[Total Original Jam Counter]

7503
Displays the total number of original jams.
001 - *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]
[Paper Jam Location]

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were
detected.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
001 At Power On *CTL
003 Tray 1: ON *CTL
004 Tray 2: ON *CTL
005 Tray 3: ON *CTL
006 Tray 4: ON *CTL
008 Bypass: ON *CTL
009 Duplex: ON *CTL

For details, p.6-137 "Jam
011 Vertical Transport 1: ON *CTL
Detection"
012 Vertical Transport 2: ON *CTL
017 Registration: ON *CTL
018 Fusing Entrance: ON *CTL
019 Fusing Exit: ON *CTL
020 Paper Exit: ON *CTL
025 Duplex Exit: ON *CTL
027 Duplex Entrance: ON *CTL
028 1-Bin Exit Sensor *CTL For details, p.6-137 "Jam
051 SEF Sensor 1 *CTL Detection"
D104/D016 5-178 SM
Main SP Tables-7
052 SEF Sensor 2 *CTL
053 Bank SEF Sensor 1 *CTL
057 Regist Sensor *CTL
059 Fusing Exit Sensor *CTL
060 Exit Sensor *CTL
065 Duplex Exit Sensor *CTL
068 1-Bin Exit: ON *CTL
240 Finisher Entrance *CTL
241 Finisher Shift Tray Exit *CTL
242 Finisher Staple *CTL
243 Finisher Exit *CTL
244 Finisher Drive Motor *CTL
245 Finisher Tray Lift Motor *CTL For details, p.6-137 "Jam
Detection"
Maintenance
246 Finisher Jogger Motor *CTL
System
247 Finisher Shift Motor *CTL
248 Finisher Staple Motor *CTL
249 Finisher Exit Motor *CTL
250 Finisher Entrance *CTL
251 Finisher Proof Exit *CTL
SM 5-179 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
[Original Jam Detection]

7505
Displays the total number of original jams by location.
001 At Power On
003 Skew Correction: ON
004 Registration: ON
For details, p.6-137 "Jam
005 Paper Exit: ON *CTL
Detection"
053 Skew Correction: OFF
054 Registration: OFF
055 Paper Exit: OFF
[Jam Count by Paper Size]

7506
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
*CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
D104/D016 5-180 SM
Main SP Tables-7
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
[Plotter Jam History]

7507
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
Maintenance
008 Latest 7
System
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
[Original Jam History]

7508
Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest-1
003 Latest-2
*CTL -
004 Latest-3
005 Latest-4
006 Latest-5
SM 5-181 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
007 Latest-6
008 Latest-7
009 Latest-8
010 Latest-9
7624 [Parts PM Use Setting]
001 PCU:Bk *CTL
002 PCU:M *CTL
003 PCU:C *CTL
004 PCU:Y *CTL
006 Dev Unit:M *CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
007 Dev Unit:C *CTL
0: No (Not PM maintenance)
008 Dev Unit:Y *CTL 1: Yes (PM maintenance)
009 Image Transfer Belt *CTL
010 ITB Cleaning Unit *CTL
012 PTR Unit *CTL

013 *CTL
Bottle
7801 [ROM No./Firmware Version]
Displays all versions and ROM numbers

255 - *CTL
in the machine.
D104/D016 5-182 SM
Main SP Tables-7
7803 [PM Counter Display]
(Page, Unit, [Color])
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets
printed. Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double
Count cannot be deactivated.
-001 to
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit
-021
is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the
PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 21) and is reset to "0".
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked
with SP7-906-1 to 21.
001 Paper
002 Page: PCU: Bk
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: M
Maintenance
System
005 Page: PCU: Y
006 Page: Development Unit: Bk
007 Page: Development Unit: C
008 Page: Development Unit: M
009 Page: Development Unit: Y
010 Page: Developer: Bk
011 Page: Developer: C
012 Page: Developer: M
013 Page: Developer: Y
014 Page: ITB Unit
015 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit
SM 5-183 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
016 Page: Fusing Unit
017 Page:Fusing Pad
018 Page: Fusing Belt
019 Page:PTR Unit
020 Page:ITB T-Collect Bottle
021 Page:PCU T-Collect Bottle
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current

maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
-031 to When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit
-048 is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the
PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-31 to 48) and is reset to "0". The total
number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-31 to 48.
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: C
033 Rotation: PCU: M
034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: C
037 Rotation: Development Unit: M
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk
040 Rotation: Developer: C
041 Rotation: Developer: M
042 Rotation: Developer: Y
043 Rotation:ITB Unit
D104/D016 5-184 SM
Main SP Tables-7
044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Fusing Pad
047 Rotation: Fusing Belt
048 Rotation: PTR Unit
-049 to [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step ]

-050 Displays the total amount of each toner collection bottle.
049 Amount:ITB T-Collect Bottle
050 Amount:PCU T-Collect Bottle
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the
-061 to unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
-078 The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end
Maintenance
condition, even though the R% counter is still less than 100%.
System
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: C
063 Rotation (%): PCU: M
064 Rotation (%): PCU: Y
065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit:M
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: C
071 Rotation (%): Developer: M
SM 5-185 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): ITB Unit
074 Rotation (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Fusing Pad
077 Rotation (%): Fusing Belt
078 Rotation (%):PTR Unit
-079 to [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

-080 Displays how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
079 Amt(%):ITB T-Collect Bottle
080 Amt(%):PCU T-Collect Bottle

(Current printouts ÷ Target printouts) × 100. This shows how much of the
unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
-091 to
The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of
-108
printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the
end condition, even though the Page% counter is still less than 100%.
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: C
093 Page (%): PCU: M
094 Page (%): PCU: Y
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
096 Page (%): Development Unit: C
097 Page (%): Development Unit: M
098 Page (%): Development Unit: Y
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk
D104/D016 5-186 SM
Main SP Tables-7
100 Page (%): Developer: C
101 Page (%): Developer: M
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): ITB Unit
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit
106 Page (%): Fusing Pad
107 Page (%): Fusing Belt
108 Page (%): PTR Unit
[PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

7804
(Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.

Press the Enter key after the machine asks "Execute?", which will store the
Maintenance
PM counter value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of
System
the current PM counter (SP7-803) to "0".
001 Paper
002 PCU: Bk
003 PCU: C
004 PCU: M
005 PCU: Y
006 PCU: All
007 Development Unit: Bk
008 Development Unit: C
009 Development Unit: M
010 Development Unit: Y
SM 5-187 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
011 Development Unit: All
012 Developer: Bk
013 Developer: C
014 Developer: M
015 Developer: Y
016 Developer: All
017 ITB Unit
018 ITB Cleaning Unit
019 Fusing Unit
020 Fusing Pad
021 Fusing Belt
022 PTR Unit
023 ITB T-Collect Bottle
024 PCU T-Collect Bottle
100 All
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

7807
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
001 - *CTL -
7826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only
001 Error Total *CTL -
002 Error Staple *CTL -
7827 [MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only
- *CTL -
D104/D016 5-188 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

7832
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
001 - *CTL -
7835 [ACC Counter]
001 Copy ACC - Displays the ACC exectuion times for
002 Printer ACC -- each mode.
Total Memory Size (CTL)

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
001 - *CTL -
[DF Glass Dust Check]
7852 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on
Maintenance
the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting
System
is done only if SP4-020-1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter *CTL

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection Clear Counter *CTL
[Replacement Counter]
7853
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
001 PCU: Bk *CTL
002 PCU: C *CTL
003 PCU: M *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
004 PCU: Y *CTL
005 Development Unit: Bk *CTL
SM 5-189 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
006 Development Unit: C *CTL
007 Development Unit: M *CTL
008 Development Unit: Y *CTL
009 Developer: Bk *CTL
010 Developer: C *CTL
011 Developer: M *CTL
012 Developer: Y *CTL
013 ITB Unit *CTL
016 Fusing Pad *CTL
018 PTR Unit *CTL
019 ITB T-Collect Bottle *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
020 PCU T-Collect Bottle *CTL
[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.

Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
[A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
[B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
7855
The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].

The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each
coverage range are displayed with the following SPs.
Color1 counter: SP8601-021
D104/D016 5-190 SM
Main SP Tables-7
001 Coverage Range 1 *CTL [1 to 200 / 5 /1]
[Prev. Unit PM Counter]

7906
(Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit *ENG
-001 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
-020 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step ]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: Y
Maintenance
System
013 Page: ITB Unit
016 Page: Fusing Pad
018 Page: PTR Unit
SM 5-191 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous

-031 to
maintenance units.
-050
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
043 Rotation: ITB Unit
049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle
050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle
-061 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or
-080 toner cartridge.
D104/D016 5-192 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: Bk
062 Rotation %: PCU: C
063 Rotation %: PCU: M
064 Rotation %: PCU: Y
065 Rotation %: Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation %: Development Unit: C
067 Rotation %: Development Unit: M
068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: C
071 Rotation %: Developer: M
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y
Maintenance
073 Rotation %: ITB Unit
System
074 Rotation %: ITB Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit
076 Rotation %: Fusing Pad
077 Rotation %: Fusing Belt
078 Rotation %: PTR Unit
079 Rotation %:ITB T-Collect Bottle
080 Rotation %:PCU T-Collect Bottle

-091 to (Current count ÷ Yield count) x 100, where "Current count" is the current
-108 values in the counter for the part, and "Yield count" is the recommended yield.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
SM 5-193 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
[Toner Bottle Bk]

7931
Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
001 Machine Serial ID *ENG
002 Cartridge Ver *EGN
003 Brand ID *EGN -
004 Area ID *EGN
005 Product ID *EGN
D104/D016 5-194 SM
Main SP Tables-7
006 Color ID *EGN
007 Maintenance ID *EGN
008 New Product Information *EGN
009 Recycle Counter *EGN
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
012 Toner Remaining *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
014 End History *EGN
015 Refill Information *EGN
016 Attachment: Total Counter *EGN
017 Attachment: Color Counter *EGN -
018 End: Total Counter *EGN
Maintenance
019 End: Color Counter *EGN
System
020 Attachment Date *EGN
021 End Date *EGN
[Toner Bottle M]
7932
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
003 Brand ID *EGN

-
004 Area ID *EGN
005 Product ID *EGN
006 Color ID *EGN
SM 5-195 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle C]
7933
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
003 Brand ID *EGN
004 Area ID *EGN -
005 Product ID *EGN
006 Color ID *EGN
D104/D016 5-196 SM
Main SP Tables-7
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
Maintenance
021 End Date *EGN
System
[Toner Bottle Y]
7934
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
003 Brand ID *EGN
004 Area ID *EGN

-
005 Product ID *EGN
006 Color ID *EGN
SM 5-197 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
016 Attachment: Total Counter *EGN -
017 Attachment: Color Counter *EGN
021 End Date *EGN
7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]
001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for Bk.
004 Refill Information
005 Serial No.

*ENG
009 Serial No. Displays the toner bottle

*ENG
010 Attachment Date information log 3 for Bk.
D104/D016 5-198 SM
Main SP Tables-7
011 Attachment: Total Counter
013 Serial No.

*ENG
017 Serial No.

*ENG
7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M]
001 Serial No.
Maintenance
*ENG
System
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for M.
005 Serial No.

*ENG
009 Serial No.

*ENG
013 Serial No. *ENG Displays the toner bottle
SM 5-199 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
014 Attachment Date information log 4 for M.
017 Serial No.

*ENG
7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for C.
005 Serial No.

*ENG
009 Serial No.

*ENG
013 Serial No.

*ENG
D104/D016 5-200 SM
Main SP Tables-7
017 Serial No.

*ENG
7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for Y.
005 Serial No.

*ENG
Maintenance
System
009 Serial No.

*ENG
013 Serial No.

*ENG
017 Serial No.

Displays the toner bottle
018 Attachment Date *ENG
information log 5 for Y.
SM 5-201 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
[Unit Replacement Date]

7950
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
001 ITB Unit *ENG
002 ITB Cleaning Unit *EGN
003 PTR Unit *EGN
004 Fusing Unit *EGN
005 Fusing Pad *EGN

-
006 Fusing Belt *EGN
013 PCU: Bk *EGN
014 PCU: C *EGN
015 PCU: M *EGN
016 PCU: Y *EGN
017 Development Unit:Bk *EGN
018 Development Unit:C *EGN
019 Development Unit:M *EGN
020 Development Unit:Y *EGN

-
021 Developer:Bk *EGN
022 Developer:C *EGN
023 Developer:M *EGN
024 Developer:Y *EGN
D104/D016 5-202 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[Remaining Day Counter] *ENG
7951 Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.

[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: Y
Maintenance
System
013 Page: ITB Unit
018 Page: PTR Unit
SM 5-203 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
048 Rotation:PTR Unit
[PM Yield Setting]

7952
Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.
[0 to 999999999 / 172177000 / 1000

001 Rotation: ITB Unit *EGN
mm/step]
Rotation: ITB Cleaning [0 to 999999999 / 129133000 / 1

002 *EGN
Unit mm/step]
003 Rotation: Fusing Unit *EGN [0 to 999999999 / 87264000 / 1000
004 Rotation: Fusing Roller *EGN mm/step]
D104/D016 5-204 SM
Main SP Tables-7
005 Rotation: Fusing Belt *EGN
[0 to 999999999 / 172177000 / 1000

006 Rotation:PTR Unit *EGN
mm/step]
Amount:ITB T-Collect
007
Bottle [0 to 999999999 / 300000 / 1000
*EGN
Amount:PCU T-Collect mg/step]
008
Bottle
011 Page: ITB Unit *EGN [0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1000 sheet/step]
012 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit *EGN [0 to 999999 / 180000 / 1 sheet/step]
013 Page: Fusing Unit *EGN
014 Page: Fusing Pad *EGN [0 to 999999 / 144000 / 1 sheet/step]
015 Page: Fusing Belt *EGN
016 Page: PTR Unit *EGN [0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1 sheet/step]
Day Threshold: PCU:

021 *EGN
Bk
Maintenance
System
022 Day Threshold: PCU: C *EGN
023 Day Threshold: PCU: M *EGN
024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y *EGN Adjusts the threshold day of the near end
Day Threshold: for each PM unit.

025 *EGN [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
Development Unit: Bk
These threshold days are used for
Day Threshold: @Remote alarms.
026 *EGN
Development Unit: C
Day Threshold:
027 *EGN
Development Unit: M
Day Threshold:
028 *EGN
Development Unit: Y
Day Threshold: Adjusts the threshold day of the near end

029 *EGN
Developer: Bk for each PM unit.
SM 5-205 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
Day Threshold: [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]

030 *EGN
Developer: C These threshold days are used for
@Remote alarms.
Day Threshold:
031 *EGN
Developer: M
Day Threshold:
032 *EGN
Developer: Y
033 Day Threshold: ITB Unit *EGN
Day Threshold: ITB

034 *EGN
Cleaning Unit
Day Threshold: Fusing

035 *EGN
Unit

036 *EGN
Roller

037 *EGN
Belt

*EGN
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Rotation: Development
042 *EGN
Unit: Bk
043 *EGN
Unit: C
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
044 *EGN
Unit: M
045 *EGN
Unit: Y

*EGN [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
D104/D016 5-206 SM
Main SP Tables-7
050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: C

*EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
052 Page: PCU: M
053 Page: PCU: Y
Page: Development
054
Unit: Bk
Page: Development
055
Unit: C
*EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Page: Development
056
Unit: M
Page: Development
057
Unit: Y
Maintenance
System
*EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Day Threshold:PTR
062
Unit Adjusts the threshold day of the near end
for each PM unit.
Day Thresh:ITB
063 *EGN [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
T-Collect Bttl
Day Thresh:PCU @Remote alarms.
064
T-Collect Bttl
7953 [Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]
Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.

T: Temperature (°C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
SM 5-207 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-7
001 T<=0
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
004 T<=5: 70<=H<=100
005 5<T<15: 0<=H<30

*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
006 5<T<15: 30<=H<55
007 5<T<15: 55<=H<80
008 5<T<15: 80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25: 0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25: 30<=H<55
011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80
012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30
014 25<=T<30: 30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30: 55<=H<80

*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
016 25<=T<30: 80<=H<=100
017 30<=T: 0<=H<30
018 30<=T: 30<=H<55
019 30<=T: 55<=H<80
020 30<=T: 80<=H<=100
[Operation Env. Log Clear]

7954
Clears the operation environment log.
001 -
D104/D016 5-208 SM
Main SP Tables-8
5.9.1 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK TABLES
Input Check Table

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Copier
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 1 C-Dev. Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 2 C-Drum Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
Maintenance
System
5803 3 Bk-Drum/Dev. Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 4 ITB Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 5 Fusing/P-Exit Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 6 Electrical FAN:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 7 Fusing Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 8 Dev. Front Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 9 Dev. Rear Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 10 Fusing Exit Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 11 LD Unit FAN:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 12 Jun. Gate SOL Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 13 Fusing:New Detection New Not new
SM 5-209 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
5803 14 Fusing:Area Detection - -
5803 15 Zero Cross Not detected Detected
5803 16 Regist Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
Actuator not
5803 17 Drum Phase Sn:Bk Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 18 Drum Phase Sn:Color Actuator detected
detected
5803 19 Inverter Sensor Inverter gate open Inverter gate close
5803 20 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
5803 21 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter HP Sn
5803 22 HP Not HP
(PTR Contact Sensor)
5803 23 HVPS:CB - -
5803 24 HVPS:T - -
5803 25 Right Door Open SW Door close Door open
5803 26 Right Lower Cover OP SW Cover close Cover open
5803 27 Mechanical Counter:Bk Not set Set
5803 28 Mechanical Counter:FC Not set Set
5803 29 Key Counter Set Sensor Set Not set
5803 30 Key Card Set Sensor Set Not set
5803 31 Toner End Sensor: K End Not end
5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C End Not end
5803 33 Toner End Sensor: M End Not end
5803 34 Toner End Sensor: Y End Not end
5803 35 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
5803 36 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
D104/D016 5-210 SM
Main SP Tables-8
5803 37 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
Not HP
5803 38 ITB Contact HP Sensor HP (Contact)
(not contact)
5803 39 ITB T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Set Not set
5803 40 PCU T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Set Not set
5803 41 PCU T-Collect Bttl Full Sn Full Not full
5803 42 Vertical Transport 1 Sn Paper detected No paper detected
5803 44 Tray1 Size Detection SW See "Table 1" below.
5803 46 Bypass Size Detection SW See "Table 2" below.
5803 47 Bypass Length Detection Sn Detected Not detect
5803 48 Bypass HP Sensor HP Not HP
5803 49 Tray1 Paper End Sensor Not end End
Maintenance
System
5803 51 Bypass Paper End Sensor Not end End
5803 52 Tray1 Set SW Set Not set
5803 54 Interlock SW 1 Door close Door open
5803 56 DIP SW - -
5803 57 BCU Version - -
5803 58 PCU T-Collect Motor Set Not set Set
5803 59 Reserve Fan:LOCK Lock Normal
No paper
5803 70 R-Tray Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
SM 5-211 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
5803 71 R-Tray Set Sensor Set Not set
No paper
5803 72 1-Bin:Transport Sensor Paper detected
detected
No paper
5803 73 1-Bin:Paper Sensor Paper detected
detected
5803 74 1-Bin Set Detection Set Not set
5803 75 Shift Tray:Half Turn Sn Not HP HP
5803 76 Shift Tray Set Detection Not set Set
5803 77 1T PFU:Size Sensors See "Table 4".
5803 78 1T PFU:Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 79 1T PFU:Paper Height Sn - -
5803 80 1T PFU:Right Cover SW Open Close
5803 81 1T PFU:Set Detection Not set Set
5803 82 1T PFU:Paper End Sn Not end End
5803 83 2T PFU:Upper Size Sns

See "Table 4" below.
5803 84 2T PFU:Lower Size Sns
5803 85 2T PFU:Upper Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 86 2T PFU:Lower Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 87 2T PFU:Upper Paper Height Sn - -
5803 88 2T PFU:Lower Paper Height Sn - -
5803 90 2T PFU:Upper PE Sn Not end End
5803 91 2T PFU:Lower PE Sn Not end End
No paper
5803 92 2T PFU:V-Transport Sn Paper detected
detected
5803 94 LD OFF Check:Factory - -
D104/D016 5-212 SM
Main SP Tables-8
5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close
Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1/ 2):

Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Bit
North America Europe/Asia 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 0 0
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 1 1 0
Maintenance
System
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3
0 0 1
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-003 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-001 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-004 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-008 (Tray 2).
SM 5-213 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
Table 2: Paper Size (By-pass Table):

0: ON, 1: OFF
By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length

NA EU/ASIA
bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Sensor
1 1 0 0 1 HLT SEF B6 SEF
1 1 1 1 1 HLT SEF A5 SEF
0 0 1 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
0 0 1 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 0 0 1 0 DLT SEF A3 SEF
1 0 0 1 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.
D104/D016 5-214 SM
Main SP Tables-8
Table 3: APS Original Size Detection:
Length
Original Size Width Sensor
Sensor SP4-301
Inch display
Metric version W1 W2 W3 L1 L2
version
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 00000011
B4 10" x 14" O O X O O 00000011
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x
13", or 8" x 13" 8.5" x 14" O X X O O 00000011
SP 5126 controls the
size that is detected
A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" O O O X X 00000000
B5 LEF - O O X X X 00000000
A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" O X X O X 00000010
Maintenance
System
B5 SEF - X X X O X 00000010
5.5" x 8.5",
A5 LEF/ SEF X X X X X 00000000
8.5" x 5.5"
SM 5-215 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
Table 4: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3/ 4):

"Bit 0" is used for tray set detection. 0: Set, 1: Not set
0: Not Interrupted, 1: Interrupted
Models Bit
North America Europe/Asia 3 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 1 1 0
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

1 1 1 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 0 0 0
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 0 1 1
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 0 0 0 0
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 1 0 1
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

1 0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 1 0 0
A5 SEF A5 SEF 1 1 0 1
5-181-010 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-014 (Tray 4).
5-181-011 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-015 (Tray 4).
5-181-009 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-013 (Tray 4).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-012 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-016 (Tray 4).
D104/D016 5-216 SM
Main SP Tables-8
ARDF (D366)
Reading
6007 Description
0 1
6007 1 Original Length Sn1 (B5 Sn) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 2 Original Length Sn2 (A4 Sn) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 3 Original Length Sn3 (LG Sn) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 4 Original Width Sn:S Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 5 Original Width Sn:M Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 6 Original Width Sn:L Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 7 Original Width Sn:LL Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 9 Original Set Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 10 Trailing Edge Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 11 Skew Correction Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
Maintenance
System
6007 13 Registration Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 14 Exit Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 15 Feed Cover SW ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 16 Lift Up Sn HP Not HP
SM 5-217 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
Reading
6120 Description
0 1
6120 1 Staple Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
6120 2 Punch Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
6120 3 Staple HP Sensor Not HP HP
6120 4 Paper T-Edge Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 5 Pick Roller Lift Sensor Up Down
6120 6 Paper Detection Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 7 Belt Roller Lift Sensor Down Up
6120 8 Entrance Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 9 Rear Jogger HP Sensor HP Not HP
6120 10 Front Jogger HP Sensor HP Not HP
6120 11 Fan Lock Signal Normal Lock
6120 12 Finisher Open Switch Close Open
6120 13 Punch Unit:Area Detect2

6120 15 Paper Stack Sensor 2 HP Not HP
6120 17 Punch Position Sensor Not HP HP
6120 18 Paper Width Sensor:A3 Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 19 Paper Width Sensor:LD Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 20 Paper Width Sensor:B4 Paper not detected Paper detected
D104/D016 5-218 SM
Main SP Tables-8
6120 22 Paper Width Sensor:16K Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 24 Punch Hopper Full Sensor Full Not full
6120 25 Tray Upper Sensor Upper Not upper
6120 26 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 27 Tray Lower Sensor Lower Not lower
6120 28 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
6120 29 Punch HP Sensor Not rear Rear Position
6120 30 Stapler Safety Sensor No staple Staple detected
6120 31 Staple Empty Sensor No staple Staple detected
6120 32 Punch Unit Sensor Not set Set
Table 5: Area Display:

The bit 0 of these SPs shows the punch unit type.
2: 2 Holes, 2/3: 2/3 Holes, 4 (EU): 4 Holes Europe,
Maintenance
System
4 (Scan.): 4 Holes Scandinavia
SP 2 2/3 4 (EU) 4 (Scan.)
6120-013 Punch Unit:Area Detect2 0 0 1 1
SM 5-219 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
Output Check Table

Copier
5804 Display Description
5804 1 Paper Feed M1:CW:190mm/s -
5804 4 P-Feed M1:CW:60mm/s:Thick -
5804 5 Paper Feed M1:CCW:190mm/s -
5804 8 P-Feed M1:CCW:60mm/s:Thick -
5804 17 Bypass M:CW:190mm/s -
5804 19 Bypass M:CW:60mm/s:400mA -
5804 21 Bypass M:CCW:190mm/s -
D104/D016 5-220 SM
Main SP Tables-8
5804 24 Registration M:120mm/s -
5804 26 Regist M:60mm/s:Thick -
5804 27 Inverter M:CW:280mm/s -
5804 33 Inverter M:280mm/s -
5804 39 Duplex Exit M:280mm/s -
Maintenance
System
5804 42 Duplex Ent. M:280mm/s -
5804 45 Color Dev. M:120mm/s -
5804 47 Color Drum. M:120mm/s -
5804 49 Bk Drum M:120mm/s -
5804 50 Bk Drum M:60mm/s -
5804 51 ITB Motor:120mm/s -
SM 5-221 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
5804 53 Fusing/P-Exit M:120mm/s -
5804 55 Electrical FAN:H -
5804 56 Electrical FAN:L -
5804 57 Fusing Fan:H -
5804 58 Fusing Fan:L -
5804 59 Dev. Front FAN:H -
5804 60 Dev. Front FAN:L -
5804 61 Dev. Rear FAN:H -
5804 62 Dev. Rear FAN:L -
5804 63 Fusing Exit Fan:H -
5804 64 Fusing Exit Fan:L -
5804 65 LD Unit Fan:H -
5804 67 PSU Fan:H -
5804 69 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:H -
5804 70 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:L -
5804 71 Toner Supply M:Bk -
5804 72 Toner Supply M:C -
5804 73 Toner Supply M:M -
5804 74 Toner Supply M:Y -
5804 75 PCU T-Collect Motor -
5804 76 ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter Motor PTR Contact Motor
5804 77 ITB Contact Motor -
5804 78 Bk Dev. Clutch -
5804 79 Junction Gate SOL -
D104/D016 5-222 SM
Main SP Tables-8
5804 80 PWM:Potential Sn:Bk -
5804 81 PWM:Potential Sn:C -
5804 82 PWM:Potential Sn:M -
5804 83 PWM:Potential Sn:Y -
5804 84 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:H -
5804 85 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:L -
5804 86 HVPS:Charge AC:C:H -
5804 87 HVPS:Charge AC:C:L -
5804 88 HVPS:Charge AC:M:H -
5804 89 HVPS:Charge AC:M:L -
5804 90 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:H -
5804 91 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:L -
5804 92 HVPS:Charge DC:Bk -
Maintenance
5804 93 HVPS:Charge DC:C -
System
5804 94 HVPS:Charge DC:M -
5804 95 HVPS:Charge DC:Y -
5804 96 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Bk -
5804 97 HVPS:Dev. Bias:C -
5804 98 HVPS:Dev. Bias:M -
5804 99 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Y -
5804 100 HVPS:PTR Bias:- PWM -
5804 101 HVPS:PTR Bias:+ PWM -
5804 102 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk -
SM 5-223 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
5804 106 MUSIC Sensor:R:PWM -
5804 107 MUSIC Sensor:C:PWM -
5804 108 MUSIC Sensor:F:PWM -
5804 109 Reserve Fan:H -
5804 110 Reserve Fan:LOCK -
5804 111 Toner End Sn Power -
5804 120 R-Tray M:280mm/s -
5804 121 R-Tray M:120mm/s -
5804 122 R-Tray SOL -
5804 123 Shift Motor -
5804 124 1T PFU:Tray Lift M -
5804 125 1T PFU:Paper Feed M -
5804 126 1T PFU:Paper Feed CL -
5804 127 2T PFU:Relay CL -
5804 128 2T PFU:Upper Feed CL -
5804 129 2T PFU:Lower Feed CL -
5804 130 2T PFU:P-Feed M:190mm/s -
5804 131 2T PFU:P-Feed M:120mm/s -
5804 132 2T PFU:P-Feed M:60mm/s -
5804 133 2T PFU:Upper Tray Lift M -
5804 134 2T PFU:Lower Tray Lift M -
5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: Bk -
5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: C -
5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: M -
D104/D016 5-224 SM
Main SP Tables-8
5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: Y -
5804 196 RFID COM ON: Bk -
5804 197 RFID COM ON: C -
5804 198 RFID COM ON: M -
5804 199 RFID COM ON: Y -
5804 202 Scanner Lamp -
5804 210 Polygon Motor -
5804 216 LD1: Bk -
5804 218 LD1: M
5804 220 LD1: C -
5804 222 LD1: Y -
Maintenance
System
SM 5-225 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-8
6121 Description Description
6121 1 Transport Motor -
6121 2 Front Jogger Motor -
6121 3 Rear Jogger Motor -
6121 4 Stapler Slide Motor -
6121 5 Stuck Feed-out Motor -
6121 6 Pick Roller Lift Motor -
6121 7 Staple Motor -
6121 8 Tray Lift Motor -
6121 9 Paper Detection SOL -
6121 10 Paddle Rotation SOL -
6121 11 Belt Roller SOL -
6121 13 Fan Motor -
6120 14 Punch Motor -
6120 15 Punch Slide Motor -
6120 16 Inverter Roller SOL -
D104/D016 5-226 SM
Main SP Tables-8
ARDF (D366)
6008 3 Feed Motor: Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation
6008 4 Feed Motor: Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation
6008 5 Transport Motor: Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 9 Feed Clutch -
6008 10 Pick-up Solenoid -
6008 11 Junction Gate Solenoid -
6008 12 Stamp Solenoid Stamp Solenoid
Maintenance
System
SM 5-227 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-9
5.10.1 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot

( p.5-273 "Card Save Function").
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.
D104/D016 5-228 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Normal

Collate Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
Maintenance
bit 4 DFU - -
System
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
SM 5-229 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-9
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS
print-side 0: Disable 1: Enable
reversal
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side
because of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce
printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
D104/D016 5-230 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable
panel.
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0: Disable

1: Enable
mismatch occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device
can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
Maintenance
System
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs Disable Enable (1000)
to 1000 jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 Face-up output Disable Enable
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6 Method for determining the image 0: Disable 1: Enable
SM 5-231 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-9
rotation for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only)

bit 0 and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are
always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths
increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
D104/D016 5-232 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without

Disable Enable
requiring User Code
Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if

usercode authentication is enabled.
Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
Maintenance
System
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

"Disabled "Enabled
submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately)" (10 seconds)"
1284).
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled Enabled

(Not (Cancelled)
SM 5-233 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-9
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might
result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation

0: Disable 1: Enable
(SEF/LEF)
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous

generations. It only takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" =
"Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the
bypass tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch,
the MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by
the MFP bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Bit 4 DFU
- -
to 7
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 1
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Summary
1004 1
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
D104/D016 5-234 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1005 [Display Version]
Disp. Version
1005 1
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
1006 1
When you select "1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy
Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b)
the previous setting, or c) the current setting.
1101 1 Factory
Maintenance
1101 2 Previous
System
*CTL
1101 3 Current
1101 4 ACC
[Resolution Setting]
1102
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text,

1102 1
1800x600, Text, 600x600 Text
[Test Page]
1103 Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
SM 5-235 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-9
1103 2 Color Pattern
[Gamma Adjustment]
1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection"
menu.
1104 1 Black: Highlight
1104 2 Black: Shadow
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight
1104 22 Cyan: Shadow
1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax
D104/D016 5-236 SM
Main SP Tables-9
[Save Tone Control Value]
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the
1105 current setting. Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves
the data currently stored as the "current setting" to the "previous setting"
memory storage location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
[Toner Limit]
1106
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
Maintenance
System
SM 5-237 D104/D016
Main SP Tables-9
5.10.2 SCANNER SP MODE
SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1001 [Scan Nv Version]
1001 5 - *CTL -
[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is
activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL
0: enable, 1: disable
1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.
[Non Display Clear [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

1010 *CTL
Light PDF] 0: Display, 1: No display
1011 [Org count Disp] *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Selects the original counter display.

1011 1
0: Displays remaining memory for the original scanning.
D104/D016 5-238 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1: Displays original counter.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
1012 [UserInfo release] *CTL
0: No, 1: Yes
Clear the following settings:

1012 1
Address, Sender, Text / Subject, Filename
[Multimedia Function [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1013 *CTL
Setting] 0: OFF, 1: ON
1013 1 On or off multimedia function
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)
[Compression Level (Grayscale)]
2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the
three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
Maintenance
System
2021 1 Comp 1: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp 2: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Comp 3: 5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2021 4 Comp 4: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp 5: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]
2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]

*CTL
2024 2 Compression Ratio (High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
SM 5-239 D104/D016
Firmware Update
5.11 FIRMWARE UPDATE
To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware
downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2
on the left rear side of the controller box.
5.11.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE
Location of
Type of firmware Function Message shown
firmware
Engine Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine
System/Copy Flash ROM on the

Operating system System/Copy
Application controller board
Flash ROM on the

Printer Application Feature application Printer
controller board
Scanner Flash ROM on the

Feature application Scanner
Application controller board
Flash ROM on the

Fax Application Feature application Fax
controller board
Flash ROM on the

NIB Network Interface Network Support
controller board
Operation Panel Panel control Operation Panel Lcdc.
Fax FCU Fax control FCU GWFCU-4(ww)-1-1
Flash ROM on the

Remote Fax Fax control Remote Fax
controller board
Language firmware Language 1

Two languages can be
Language Operation Panel
selected from 16 Language 2
languages.
Document server Flash ROM on the

WebDocBox Web Uapl
application controller board
D104/D016 5-240 SM
Firmware Update
Flash ROM on the

WebSys Web Service application Web Support
controller board
Page description
PS/ PDF PS3 SD card PS3/ PDF
language (PostScript3)
PictBridge PictBridge control PictBridge SD card PctBrgd
ARDF ARDF control ARDF ADF
Finisher (D429) Finisher control Finisher (D429) Finisher
Java VM SDK application Java VM SD card SDK
Data Overwrite HDD Format

Security application Security SD card
Security Option
Maintenance
System
SM 5-241 D104/D016
Firmware Update
5.11.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle
SD cards:
Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card
into the slot with the power on.
Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high
humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card
get exposed to shock or vibration.
Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an
application to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
"Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to
send data from the SD card to the machine.
To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of
the LCD, or, press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation panel.
For example, when "Exit (0)" shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the
screen, or, press the button on the operation panel of the copier.
Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for
arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update
procedure.
D104/D016 5-242 SM
Firmware Update
5.11.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE
Preparation
If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D104" folder onto the card.
If the card already contains folders up to "D104", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g.
D104xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only
model firmware you want.
Updating Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Remove the slot cover ( x 1).
3. Remove the Java VM card from SD slot 2
4. Insert the SD card into SD slot 2. Make sure the label on the SD card faces the rear side
of the machine.
5. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure
the SD card locks in place.
Maintenance
System
To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops
out of the slot.
6. Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network.
7. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update
screen appears on the LCD in English.
8. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation
panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version
ROM: currently installed. The first line is the module number, the second
line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD
NEW: card. The first line is the module number, the second line the
version name.
SM 5-243 D104/D016
Firmware Update
D104/D016 5-244 SM
Firmware Update
Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same
time. It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
9. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update.
The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch
"OpPanel". The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals when the
LCDC firmware is updating. The power key flashes on and off at 3 s intervals
when the update is finished.
10. The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the
updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
11. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or
follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
12. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
13. Install the Java card in SD slot 2, and then attach the SD slot cover ( x 1).
14. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24"
Maintenance
System
displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( "Handling Firmware Update
Error")
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update
because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
SM 5-245 D104/D016
Firmware Update
Recovery after Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is
updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine
is switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then
in order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to
show until the ROM is updated successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware
download automatically from the card without the menu display.
5.11.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL

Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
3. Remove the Java VM card from SD slot 2.
4. Insert the SD card into SD slot 2.
5. Switch the copier main switch on.
6. The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds.
7. Touch "Ope Panel.xx".
8. "xx" differs depending on the destination.
9. Touch "UpDate(#) or ( ) to start the update.
10. Downloading starts after about 9 seconds.
11. The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s intervals
when the data is downloading. The same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals
when the update is finished.
12. Press the "Exit" button.
13. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card from SD slot 2
14. Install the Java VM card in SD slot 2.
16. Switch the copier on.
17. Then turn the copier off and on again.
D104/D016 5-246 SM
Firmware Update
5.11.5 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code
consists of the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Cannot decompress Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

22
compressed data corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second

23
update program started attempt fails, replace controller board.
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use

24 SD card access error
another SD card.
Maintenance
No HDD available for stamp
System
30 HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
data download
Insert the SD card with the remaining data

Data incorrect for continuous
31 required for the download, the re-start the
download
procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended

Data incorrect after download
32 module download, then repeat the installation
interrupted
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

33 Incorrect SD card version
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct

34 module is not on the SD data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
card) again.
Module mismatch – Module SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

35
on SD card is not for this card is for another machine. Acquire correct
SM 5-247 D104/D016
Firmware Update
machine update data then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

Cannot write module –
36 card is for another machine. Acquire correct
Cause other than E34, E35
update data then install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the

Engine module download
40 SD card and try again, or replace the BCU
failed
board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the
42
download failed SD card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module Replace the update data for the module on the
43
download failed SD card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Replace the update data for the module on the

Controller module download
44 SD card and tray again, or replace controller
failed
board.
Set the setting of "Update Firmware" under the

Firmware update is "Administrator Tools" to "Do not Prohibit".
49
prohibited (Administrator Tools > Extended Security >
Update Firmware)
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

Electronic confirmation check
50 card is for another machine. Acquire correct
failed
update data then install again.
D104/D016 5-248 SM
Firmware Update
5.11.6 JAVA VM UPDATING PROCEDURE

1. Turn the main power off, then remove the SD slot cover ( x 1), and remove the Java
VM card from SD slot 2.
2. Insert the Java VM card to the SD card writer that is connected to PC.
3. Make sure which drive is assigned for the SD card.
4. Decompress the downloaded update file, then two files exist that one file is ".exe" file
extension and the other is ".bat" file extension.
5. Double click the ".bat" file then command prompt screen is appeared.
6. The first command line is shown as
"Please input drive letter of SD card [a – x]:"
Then enter the SD card drive name, and press "Enter" key.
7. "Press any key to continue…" is appeared, then press "Enter" key again. The updating to
the SD card starts.
8. "Press any key to continue…" is appeared again, then press "Enter" key. The command
prompt screen is disappeared automatically if the updating is successful.
9. Remove the Java VM card from the SD card writer after going off the access lamp on the
SD card writer.
10. Insert the Java VM card in the SD slot 2 of the machine and turn the main power on.
Maintenance
5.11.7 APP2ME UPDATING PROCEDURE
System
Follow this procedure to update App2Me if a new version is available.
1. Push the [User/Tools] key on the operation panel.
2. If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, Step 3 and Step 4 are required.
Otherwise, skip to step 5.
3. Push [Login/Logout] on the operation panel.
5. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
6. Touch each of the applications until the status changes to "Stop".
8. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1), and then remove the Java VM card from SD slot 2.
9. Prepare the newer App2Me file from the Firmware Download Center, and then unzip the
zip file. (The folder name is "337051920".)
SM 5-249 D104/D016
Firmware Update
10. Copy the App2Me Provider folder into the specified path for the VM card. The path is:
"SD_Card Drive¥ sdk¥dsdk¥dist¥337051920"
11. Turn the SD card label face to the rear of the machine, and then push it slowly into SD
slot 2 (lower slot) until you hear a click.
13. Turn the main power switch on.
14. Press [User Tools] on the operation panel.
15. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.
16. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on the LCD.
17. Touch the "App2Me" line.
18. Set the setting of the "Auto Start" to "On".
19. Touch the "Exit" button.
20. Exit the [User Tools/Counter] settings.
D104/D016 5-250 SM
Firmware Update
5.11.8 BROWER UNIT UPDATING PROCEDURE
1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1).

2. Remove the VM card [B] from the SD slot 2.
Maintenance
System
3. Turn the SD-card label face of the latest version Brower Unit [A] to the front of the
machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 until you hear a click.
5. Push the "User Tools" key.
If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required.
Otherwise, skip to step 7
6. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
8. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
9. Touch "Uninstall" on the LCD.
10. Touch the "Browser" line
11. Confirmation message appears on the LCD.
12. Touch "Yes" to proceed.
SM 5-251 D104/D016
Firmware Update
13. Reconfirmation message appears on the LCD.

14. Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit.
15. You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
16. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.
17. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch.
18. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
19. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with PC.
20. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit.
21. Remove the SD card of the latest version Brower Unit from SD slot 2.
23. Attach the SD slot cover [A] ( x 1).
D104/D016 5-252 SM
Installing Another Language
5.12 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE
Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do
the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the
languages you want from the user interface on the operation panel.
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.
3. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 2.
4. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds.
5. Touch "Language Data (2)" on the screen (or press ).
Maintenance
System
6. Touch "LANG. 1(1)" or "LANG. 2(2)"
Key What it does
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to
LANG. 1(1)
open the next screen so you can select the 1st language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to
LANG. 1(2)
open the next screen so you can select the 2nd language.
Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to
Exit(0)
quit the update procedure and return to normal screen.
7. Touch "LANG 1(1)" to select the 1st Language. Touch "LANG (2)" to select the 2nd
Language.
SM 5-253 D104/D016
8. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to
select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.
If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.
Touching "Exit (0)" returns you to the previous screen.
9. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch " (7)" or " (9)" on the
screen (or press or ) to show more choices.
The Download Screen opens after you select a language.
The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows.
The following show to right of the selection:
1. The first column shows the language currently selected.
2. The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language.
The example below shows that the download will replace "Japanese" with "Italian" as the
1st language.
10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download.
Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading.
The following occur at the time the language is downloading:
The operation panel switches off.
D104/D016 5-254 SM
The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.

11. After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD, switch the copier
main power switch off. Then remove the SD card from the slot.
12. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-255 D104/D016
Reboot/System Setting Reset
5.13 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET
5.13.1 SOFTWARE RESET

You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures:
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps
once, release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” shows for a few seconds,
the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal operation.
5.13.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
System Setting Reset

The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down and then press System Settings.
You must press first.
3. Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
D104/D016 5-256 SM
Reboot/System Setting Reset
Copier Setting Reset

Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
You must press first.
3. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings.
Maintenance
System
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
SM 5-257 D104/D016
Controller Self-Diagnostics
5.14 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.14.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
1. Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just
after the power has been turned on.
2. SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during
operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
D104/D016 5-258 SM
SD Card Appli Move
5.15 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.15.1 OVERVIEW
The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you to copy application programs
from one SD card to another SD card.
Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. However, more than two optional
applications are supplied for this machine. In that case, you can move application programs
from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure.
Consider the following limitations when you try to merge SD cards.
PostScript3 cannot be moved to the other SD card.
The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD
cards. Refer to the following table for the memory size of each SD card.
Outline of SD Card Appli Move:
1. Choose a SD card with enough space.
Do not use an SD card if it has been used on a computer. Normal operation is

not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
2. Enter SP5873 “SD Card Appli Move”. Then move the application from the SD Card in
Slot 2 to the card in slot 1.
Maintenance
3. Exit the SP mode
System
Use caution when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application

program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to
use the SD card after you copy the application program from one card to another
card.
4. Remove the inner cover ( p.4-22 "Inner Cover").

5. Keep the SD card in the place [A] inside the inner cover after you have copied the
SM 5-259 D104/D016
SD Card Appli Move
application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following
reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
5.15.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original
SD card to another SD card.
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine. If
the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied into
this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 2. The
application program is copied from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”
D104/D016 5-260 SM
SD Card Appli Move
5.15.3 UNDO EXEC

The menu “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD
card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have
mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine. If
the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back into
this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 1. The
application program is copied back from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.”
Maintenance
System
This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the
machine.
SM 5-261 D104/D016
Downloading Stamp Data
5.16 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA
The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the
following times:
After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp
data required by the hard disks.
2. Select SP5853 and then press “EXECUTE”. The following screen opens while the stamp
data is downloading.
The download is finished when the message prompts you to close.
3. Press the “Exit” button. Then turn the copier off and on again.
D104/D016 5-262 SM
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.17 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.17.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked
1. Do SP5990-001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a record of
the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2. Then switch the copier on.
5. Execute SP5824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the "Execute" key.
6. The following files are copied to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload
procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM¥<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM¥K5000017114.NV
7. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds
Maintenance
the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
System
You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
SM 5-263 D104/D016
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.17.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the
machine.
The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or
if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the
NVRAM data.
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2.
4. Switch the copier main power switch on.
5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key.
The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the
serial numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
C/O, P/O Count
D104/D016 5-264 SM
Address Book Upload/Download
5.18 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.18.1 INFORMATION LIST

The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
Registration No.
Select Title
User Code
Folder
E-mail
Local Authentication
Protection Code
Folder Authentication
Fax Destination
Account ACL
Fax Option
New Document Initial ACL
Group Name
LDAP Authentication
Key Display
5.18.2 DOWNLOAD
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
Maintenance
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
System
3. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
4. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1).
5. Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 (for service use).
8. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
10. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
11. Install the SD slot cover.
If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an
error message is displayed.
Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it
back to your location.
SM 5-265 D104/D016
Address Book Upload/Download
5.18.3 UPLOAD
1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1).
3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2.
6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
9. Install the SD slot cover.
The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor
uploaded.
If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is
displayed.
D104/D016 5-266 SM
Using the Debug Log
5.19 USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.19.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save
and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this
information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later
retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved
automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then ask the user to
reproduce the problem.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-267 D104/D016
Using the Debug Log
5.19.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the "Save Debug Log" function has been
switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
Enter "System SP".
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", touch "1 On/Off".
3. On the control panel keypad, press "1". Then press . This switches the Save Debug
Log feature on.
The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the
debug information to be saved.
4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857
Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select the
hard disk as the target destination. Then press .
Select "3 SD Card" to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is
inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log.
SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
D104/D016 5-268 SM
Using the Debug Log
Saves data when an engine-related SC code is

1 Engine SC Error
generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC

Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you

3 Any SC Error
specify by entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press "ON" for each selection. This example shows
"Engine SC Error" selected.
Maintenance
System
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code
Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number
keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
SM 5-269 D104/D016
Using the Debug Log
For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4.
"Troubleshooting".
6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch
"5859".
Under "5859" press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press .
Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No. Copy Printer Scanner Web
1 2222 (SCS)
2 14000 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
4600
8 3000 (UCS) 3300 (PTS)
(GPS-PM)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
D104/D016 5-270 SM
Using the Debug Log
10 2224 (BCU) 4126 (DCS) 2000 (NCS)
The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").

Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GW Print Service – Print

GSP-PM PTS Print Server
Module
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
System Resource
MCS Memory Control Service SRM
Management
Web Document Box

NCS Network Control Service WebDB
(Document Server)
Maintenance
System
1. The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD
(the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected with SP5858 and
the memory modules selected with SP5859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner,
and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that
key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding
4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006 to 010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from
the 9 available selections for the "PRINTER" column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to
4 MB.
SM 5-271 D104/D016
Using the Debug Log
5.19.3 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into slot 2 (service slot) of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)) to
write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.
5.19.4 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please instruct the user
to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data for any other errors
that occur while the customer engineer is not on site. Such problems also include a controller
or panel freeze.
You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and select the
hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want to use this feature.
1. Press (Clear Modes).on the operation panel when the error occurs.
2. On the control panel, enter "01". Then hold down for at least 3 seconds until the
machine beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later
retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the service
representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card.
D104/D016 5-272 SM
Card Save Function
5.20 CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.20.1 OVERVIEW
Card Save:
The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card
with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4.
Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have
been used.
Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be
created. This file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has
“Add” and “New” menu items.
Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If
the card becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the
operation panel. Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks
Maintenance
System
will not work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
SM 5-273 D104/D016
Card Save Function
5.20.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.
2. Insert the SD card into slot 2. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the “Printer SP”.
5. Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch”.
6. Select “Bit Switch 1 Settings” and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then
press the “#” button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By
doing this, Card Save option will appear in the “List/Test Print” menu.
7. Press “Exit” to exit SP Mode.

8. Press the “User Tools/Counter” button.
9. Select “Printer Features”.
D104/D016 5-274 SM
Card Save Function
10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card
Save (Add) or Card Save (New).
11. Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu.
Maintenance
System
12. Press the “Printer” button.

13. Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel.
SM 5-275 D104/D016
Card Save Function
14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below.
15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically
with no print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save
operation was successful.
16. Press “Offline” and then the “Clear/Stop” button to exit Card Save mode.
17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the “#” button in the
numeric keypad to register the changes.
18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off.
Error Messages
Card Save error messages:
D104/D016 5-276 SM
Card Save Function
Init error: A card save process (i.e. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to
initialize.
Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
Write error: Failed to write to the card.
Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing “OK” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the
ready state.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-277 D104/D016
TROUBLESHOOTING
19 06/15/2011 Updated SC400
72 8/2/2011 SC899
SC Tables
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SC TABLES
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
Summary
The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter
(not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures.
The table shows the classification of the SC codes.
Key Definition Reset Procedure
Controller The error has occurred in the See “Troubleshooting Procedure”

CTL
errors controller. in the table.
The error involves the fusing

Turn the main switch off and on.
unit. The machine operation is
A Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1).
disabled. The user cannot reset
Turn the main switch off and on.
the error.
The error involves one or some

specific units. The machine Turn the operation switch off and
B
operates as usual, excluding on.
the related units.
shooting
The error is logged. The Trouble -
Other errors SC-code history is updated. The SC will not show. Only the
C
The machine operates as SC history is updated.
usual.
The machine operation is

disabled. You can reset the
machine by turning the
Turn the operation switch or main
D operation switch or main switch
power switch off and on.
off and on. If the error occurs
again, the same SC code is
displayed.
SM 6-1 D104/D016
SC Tables
After you turn the main power switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the
main power switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004) in
SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is
detected.
If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the
connectors before you replace the PCBs.
If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you
replace motors or sensors.
SC Code Classification
The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
100 - Scanner
1XX Scanning
190 - Unique for a specific model
200 - Polygon motor
220 - Synchronization control
2XX Laser exposure 230 - FGATE signal related
240 - LD control
300 - Charge
330 - Drum potential

3XX Image development 1
350 - Development
400 - Image transfer
420 - Paper separation

4XX Image development 2
430 - Cleaning
440 - Around drum
D104/D016 6-2 SM
SC Tables
460 - Unit
480 - Others
500 - Paper feed
5XX Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex
520 - Paper transport
530 - Fan motor
540 - Fusing
5XX Paper feed / Fusing
560 - Others
600 - Electrical counters
620 - Mechanical counters
630 - Account control
6XX Communication 640 - CSS
650 - Network
670 - Internal data processing
shooting
Trouble -
700 - Original handling
7XX Peripherals 720 - Two-tray finisher
740 - Booklet finisher
800 - Error after ready condition
820 - Diagnostics error

8XX Controller
860 - Hard disk
SM 6-3 D104/D016
SC Tables
900 - Counter
9XX Others 920 - Memory
990 - Others
6.1.2 SC1XX: SCANNING
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Exposure lamp error
The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning
the shading plate.
Exposure lamp defective

Lamp stabilizer defective
Exposure lamp connector defective
101 D Standard white plate dirty
Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty
1. Check and clean the scanner mirror(s) and scanner lens.

2. Check and clean the shading plate.
3. Replace the exposure lamp.
4. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
5. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or scanner lens.
Scanner home position error 1
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the “OFF” condition
during operation.
120 D
Scanner motor driver defective
Scanner motor defective
Harness between BCU and scanner motor disconnected
D104/D016 6-4 SM
SC Tables
Scanner HP sensor defective

Harness between BCU and HP sensor disconnected
1. Check the cable connection between the BCU and scanner motor.
2. Check the cable connection between the BCU and HP sensor.
3. Replace the scanner motor.
4. Replace the scanner HP sensor.
Scanner home position error 2
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the “ON” condition
during operation.
Scanner motor driver defective

Harness between BCU and scanner motor disconnected
121 D Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between BCU and HP sensor disconnected
1. Check the cable connection between the BCU board and scanner
motor.
2. Check the cable connection between the BCU and HP sensor.
4. Replace the scanner HP sensor.
shooting
Trouble -
Black level detection error
The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the
zero clamp.
141 D Harness disconnected

Defective SBU
1. Check the cable connection

2. Replace the SBU.
SM 6-5 D104/D016
SC Tables
White level detection error
The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain
control.
Dirty exposure glass or optics section

SBU board defective
Exposure lamp defective
142 D Lamp stabilizer defective

1. Clean the exposure glass, white plate, mirrors, and lens.

2. Check if the exposure lamp is lit during initialization.
3. Check the harness connection between SBU and BCU.
4. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the SBU board.
SBU communication error
The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from

the energy save mode.
Defective SBU
144 D Defective harness
Defective detection port on the BCU
1. Replace the harness.

2. Replace the SBU.
3. Replace the BCU.
161 D IPU error
-001 D The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the IPU is detected.
D104/D016 6-6 SM
SC Tables
Defective IPU or BCU

Defective connection between IPU (or BCU ) and SBU
1. Check the connection between IPU and SBU.

2. Replace the IPU board.
3. Replace the BCU.
An error is detected during an access to the IPU.
Defective IPU or BCU

-002 D
2. Replace the BCU.
Copy Data Security Unit error
The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data
security function is set "ON" with the initial setting.
A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is
165 D set "ON" with the initial setting.
Incorrect installation of the copy data security board

Defective copy data security board
1. Reinstall the copy data security board.
shooting
2. Replace the copy data security board. Trouble -
Serial Number Mismatch
Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code.
NVRAM defective
195 D BCU replaced without original NVRAM
1. Reinstall the original NVRAM in the replaced BCU.

2. Turn off and on the main power switch of the copier if a new
NVRAM is installed in the BCU.
SM 6-7 D104/D016
SC Tables
6.1.3 SC 2XX: EXPOSURE
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout
The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed
within the specified time after turning on or changing speed
Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board

Defective polygon motor driver board
202 D Defective polygon motor.
1. Replace the polygon motor.

2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the harness.
5. Replace the BCU.
Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3
seconds after the polygon motor switches off.
Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board
203 D Defective polygon motor driver board

Defective polygon motor
1. Check or replace the harness.

4. Replace the BCU.
D104/D016 6-8 SM
SC Tables
Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The polygon ready (SCRDY_N) signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the
laser diode is firing.
Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board
204 D Defective polygon motor

Defective polygon motor driver board

4. Replace the BCU.
220 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD1
222 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD1
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the
LDB [K], [Y], is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while
the polygon motor is rotating normally.
Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or
shooting
defective connection Trouble -
Defective laser synchronizing detector

- -
Defective LDB
Defective BCU
1. Check the connectors.

4. Replace the BCU.
SM 6-9 D104/D016
SC Tables
FGATE ON error: K
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after

processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position [K].
Defective ASIC
230 D Poor connection between IPU and BCU.
Defective BCU
1. Check the connection between the controller board and the BCU.
2. Replace the BCU.
3. Replace the controller board.
FGATE OFF error: K
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after

processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position
231 D
adjustment) for end position [K].
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.
FGATE ON error: Y

232 D processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment)
for start position [Y].
D104/D016 6-10 SM
SC Tables
FGATE OFF error: Y

233 D
adjustment) for end position [Y].
FGATE ON error: M

for start position [M].
FGATE OFF error: M
shooting
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position Trouble -
235 D
adjustment) for end position [M].
SM 6-11 D104/D016
SC Tables
FGATE ON error: C

for start position [C].
FGATE OFF error: C

237 D
adjustment) for end position [C].
240 C LD error: K
241 C LD error: Y
The BCU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit
turns on after LDB initialization.
Worn-out LD
- - Disconnected or broken harness of the LD
1. Replace the harness of the LD.

D104/D016 6-12 SM
SC Tables
Line position adjustment (MUSIC) error
Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times.
Pattern sampling error ( insufficient image density )

Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment
Defective image transfer belt unit
Defective PCDU(s)
285 D Defective laser unit
1. Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCDU(s).
2. Check if each toner bottle has enough toner.
3. Replace the ID sensor.
4. Replace the image transfer belt unit.
5. Replace the PCDU(s).
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-13 D104/D016
SC Tables
6.1.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1
312 D AC charge output error [K]
313 D AC charge output error [C]
314 D AC charge output error [M]
315 D AC charge output error [Y]
The measured voltage is not proper when BCU measures the charge
output for each color.
Disconnected or broken high voltage cable

Defective or not installed PCDU
- -
Defective HVPS-CB board
1. Check or replace the connectors.

2. Replace the PCDU for the affected color.
3. Replace the HVPS-CB board.
Color development motor error
The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds
while the motor START signal is on.
Color development motor slip due to an increase in the torque
325 D caused by connected components.

Defective motor.
1. Adjust the torque properly by replacing or cleaning the

development unit.
2. Replace the development unit.
3. Replace the development motor: CMY if load torque is normal.
D104/D016 6-14 SM
SC Tables
360 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K
361 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M
362 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C
363 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y
The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor

exceeds the specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3020-002
twenty counts.
The [Vt - Vtref] value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor exceeds the specified value (default: 5.0V) with
SP3020-001.
Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor disconnected

- - Harness between TD sensor and development unit defective
Defective TD sensor.
1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector

and harness between the TD sensor and development unit for
damage.
2. Check the drawer connector of the PCDU.
4. Replace the PCDU.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-15 D104/D016
SC Tables
364 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: K
365 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M
366 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C
367 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y
The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below

the specified value with SP3020-004 (default: 0.5V) ten counts.
TD sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective

A drawer connector disconnected, loose, defective
TD sensor defective
- -
1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector
and harness between the TD sensor and development unit for
damage.
2. Check the drawer connector of the PCDU.
372 D TD sensor adjustment error: K
373 D TD sensor adjustment error: M
374 D TD sensor adjustment error: C
375 D TD sensor adjustment error: Y
SC is issued only if one of followings is satisfied.

During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the
- -
specified value with SP3238-001 to -004 (default: 2.7V) ± 0.2V.
The TD sensor output is 0.7 V or more when the Vcnt is 4.3 v.
The adjusted Vcnt is 4.7 V or less.
D104/D016 6-16 SM
SC Tables
Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack

TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
TD sensor defective
Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
Different developer density from initial developer density
1. Remove the heat seal from each PCDU.

380 C Drum gear position sensor error: K
381 C Drum gear position sensor error: M, C, Y
The machine does not detect a change signal (H L or L H) for 2.4

seconds at the drum phase adjustment.
Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor

- -
1. Check the harnesses.
2. Clean or replace the drum gear position sensor.
shooting
Trouble -
396 D Drum/Development motor error: K
The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor:

K for 2 seconds after the drum/development motor: K turned on.
Overload on the drum/development motor: K

Defective drum/development motor: K
- - Defective harness
Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU
Defective interlock system

2. Check if torque output value for drum/development motor is proper
SM 6-17 D104/D016
SC Tables
if not replace the unit.

3. Replace the drum/development motor: K.
4. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.
397 D Drum motor error: CMY
The machine detects a High signal from the drum motor: CMY for 2
seconds after the drum motor: CMY turned on.
Overload on the drum motor: CMY

Defective drum motor: CMY
Defective harness
Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU
- -
Defective interlock system

2. Check if torque output value for drum motor is proper if not replace
the unit.
3. Replace the drum motor: CMY.
4. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.
D104/D016 6-18 SM
Rev. 06/15/2011 SC Tables
6.1.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING - 2
ID sensor adjustment error
When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC400".
The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor
is more than the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3324-005 or less
than the value (default: 3.5V) specified with SP3324-006.
Dirty or defective ID sensor

ID sensor detection surface dirty
⇒ 1. Check the harness of the ID sensor.
400 D 2. Clean the ID sensor with a cloth moistened with water.

3. Execute SP3011-001 (manual process control).
4. If the value of SP3324-003 (Vsg error counter) is NOT “0”, repeat
Steps 2 and 3.
5. If the value of SP3324-003 is still NOT “0” after repeating Steps 2
and 3, check the spring for the PTR unit contact lever. (See “PTR
Unit Contact Motor” in the chapter “Replacement and Adjustment”).
6. Replace the ID sensor. (See “ID sensor board” in the chapter
“Replacement and Adjustment”.)
7. Replace the BCU.
shooting
Trouble -
8. Replace the ITB unit.
SM 6-19 D104/D016
SC Tables
ITB unit motor error
The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds
while the motor START signal is on.
Motor overload
Defective ITB unit motor
441 D Defective or disconnected connector
Check the operation of the ITB unit motor with SP5804-051.

No operation:
1. Check the harness of the ITB unit motor.
2. Check if the cleaning blade of the ITB cleaning unit is rolled up.
3. Replace the ITB unit motor.
ITB contact motor error
The ITB contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at
the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
Dirty ITB contact sensor

ITB contact motor overload.
Defective ITB contact motor
Disconnected connector of ITB contact sensor or motor
442 D Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU.

Disconnected cable
Check the operation of the ITB unit motor with SP5804-077.

No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB contact motor.
2. Replace the ITB contact motor.
Operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB contact sensor.
2. Replace the ITB contact sensor.
D104/D016 6-20 SM
SC Tables
ITB unit error
The machine detects the encoder sensor error.
Disconnect or defective harness

Defective ITB rotation sensor
ITB unit installation error
Defective ITB unit motor
443 C ITB unit motor overload
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB rotation sensor.

2. Check the trash or scratch on the encoder disc surface of the ITB
rotation sensor.
3. Check if the ITB unit is correctly set.
4. Replace the ITB unit motor.
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) contact error
The PTR contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at
the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
Defective PTR contact sensor
shooting
Trouble -
Defective PTR contact motor
PTR contact motor overload
Broken +24V fuse on PSU
452 D Defective or disconnected harness.
Defective BCU
Check the operation of the PTR contact motor with SP5804-076.

No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the PTR contact motor.
2. Replace the PTR contact motor.
Operation:
1. Replace the PTR contact sensor.
SM 6-21 D104/D016
SC Tables
High voltage power: Drum/ development bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or
development.
High voltage leak
491 D Broken harness

Defective drum unit or development unit
Defective HVPS-CB board

2. Replace the drum unit or paper transfer unit.
3. Replace the HVPS-CB board.
High voltage power: Image transfer/ paper transfer bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the

separation, image transfer belt or paper transfer roller.
High voltage leak

Broken harness
Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit
Defective HVPS-TTS board
492 C 1. Input "0V" in the following SP settings:

SP2-326-001
SP2-326-003
SP2-407-001
2. Execute the "Process Control" with SP3011-001.
3. Replace the ITB unit if an SC occurs after the Process Control.
4. Replace the PTR unit if an SC does not occur after the Process
Control.
5. Replace the HVPS-TTS board.
D104/D016 6-22 SM
SC Tables
PCDU toner collection motor error
The machine detects that the PCDU toner collection bottle is not set for
one second when the PCDU toner collection motor is turned off.
PCDU toner collection bottle motor damaged

Disconnect or defective harness
495 D Defective DRB board

Defective BCU

2. Replace the PCDU toner collection bottle motor.
3. Replace the DRB board
4. Replace the BCU
5. Check and retry the connecting procedure.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-23 D104/D016
SC Tables
6.1.6 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING
503 B 3rd paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional Paper Tray Unit)
504 B 4th paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional Paper Tray Unit)
The paper lift sensor did not activate within 18 sec. (for PTU) or 8 sec.
(for LCT) after the tray lift motor switched on.
An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the

motor drive and caused an overload.
Paper lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
- - Paper lift sensor defective
Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
Tray lift motor defective

2. Replace the tray lift motor.
3. Replace the BCU.
Paper tray feed motor lock (optional Paper Tray Unit)
A motor lock signal is not detected for more than 1.5 s at power-on or
the lock signal is not detected for more than 1.0 s during rotation.
An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the

feed motor drive and caused an overload.
506 B Paper tray feed motor connection loose, disconnected, or
damaged
Paper tray feed motor defective

2. Replace the feed motor.
3. Replace the BCU
D104/D016 6-24 SM
SC Tables
By-pass bottom plate error
The signal from the by-pass tray HP sensor does not change for 1.0
second after the by-pass motor has rotated counterclockwise.
If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
508 B Disconnect or defective harness of the by-pass motor

Defective or disconnected connection for the by-pass motor.
Defective by-pass motor
Disconnect or defective harness of the by-pass HP sensor
Defective or disconnected connection for the by-pass HP sensor.
Defective by-pass HP sensor
Check the operation of the by-pass motor with SP5804-023.

No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the by-pass tray and duplex unit.
2. Replace the by-pass motor.
Operation:
Check the operation of the by-pass HP sensor with SP5803-048 while
the by-pass motor is rotating.
No change of Bit 0
1. Check the harness connection of the by-pass HP sensor.
2. Replace the by-pass HP sensor.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-25 D104/D016
SC Tables
530 D Ventilation fan: front error
531 D Ventilation fan: rear error
The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor
lock signal was first detected.
Defective ventilation fan: front or rear

Disconnected or defective harness
Defective DRB
Defective BCU

2. Replace the ventilation fan: front (SC530) or rear (SC531).
3. Replace the DRB.
4. Replace the BCU.
Laser unit fan error
Defective laser unit fan

532 D Defective drive board

Defective BCU

2. Replace the laser unit fan.
3. Replace the laser unit fan motor.
4. Replace the DRB.
5. Replace the BCU.
D104/D016 6-26 SM
SC Tables
Fusing front fan error
Defective fusing front fan

533 D Defective DRB
Defective BCU

2. Replace the fusing front fan.
3. Replace the DRB.
4. Replace the BCU.
Fusing rear fan error
Defective fusing rear fan

534 D
shooting
Trouble -
Defective DRB
Defective BCU

2. Replace the fusing rear fan.
3. Replace the DRB.
4. Replace the BCU.
SM 6-27 D104/D016
SC Tables
Controller box fan error
Defective controller box fan

535 D Disconnected or defective harness
Defective BCU

2. Replace the controller box fan.
3. Replace the BCU.
Junction gate solenoid fan error
Defective junction gate solenoid fan

536 D Disconnected or defective harness
Defective BCU

2. Replace the junction gate solenoid fan.
3. Replace the BCU.
D104/D016 6-28 SM
SC Tables
Fusing/Paper exit motor error
The BCU receives the lock signal 2.0 seconds after turning on the
fusing/paper exit motor.
Motor overload
540 D Defective fusing/paper exit motor

Defective or disconnected connection for the fusing/paper exit
motor
1. Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.

2. Check or replace connector and harness for the fusing/paper exit
motor.
Heating roller error 1
The temperature detected by the thermopile does not reach 0°C for 3
seconds.
541 A Loose connection of the thermopile

Defective thermopile
1. Check that the thermopile is firmly connected.
shooting
2. Replace the thermopile. Trouble -
SM 6-29 D104/D016
SC Tables
Heating roller warm-up error 1
The heating roller temperature does not reach 50°C for 4

seconds after the heating lamp on.
542 A The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready
temperature for 43 seconds after the fusing unit has rotated.
seconds in the low temperature condition after the heating lamp
on.
Dirty or defective thermopile

Defective thermopile.
Trash on the surface of the thermopile lens.
Defective thermostat
Broken harness of thermostat
Input voltage is over guaranteed value
Defective heating roller lamp
1. Check if the thermopile is firmly connected.

2. Clean the surface of the thermopile lens.
3. Test the conductance for the thermopile and the heating roller.
4. Replace the thermopile.
5. Replace the harness of thermostat or thermostat.
6. Replace the heating roller lamp.
Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (software error)
The detected fusing temperature stays at 230°C for 1 second.
543 A Defective PSU

Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
D104/D016 6-30 SM
SC Tables
Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (hardware error)
During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller

temperature reaches 250°C.
544 A Defective PSU

Defective BCU
Defective fusing control system
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
Heating roller fusing lamp consecutive full power 1
When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the heating
roller fusing lamp keeps on full power for 37 seconds.
545 A Broken heating roller thermostat

Broken heating roller fusing lamp
1. Replace the heating roller thermostats.

2. Replace the heating roller fusing lamp.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-31 D104/D016
SC Tables
Zero cross error
The zero cross signal is detected for 0.05 seconds three times
even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power.
The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though
the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the
front door.
The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal
547 D detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross
signal is less than 45.
Defective fusing lamp relay

Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
Unstable power supply
1. Check the power supply source.

2. Replace the shorted 24V fuse on the PSU.
3. Replace the PSU
Heating roller thermistor (end) error 2
The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor (end)

does not reach 0°C for 150 seconds when the machine's inside
temperature is 5°C or more.
The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor (end) is
551 A -5°C or less for 8 seconds.
Loose connection of heating roller thermistor (end)

Defective heating roller thermistor (end)
1. Check that the heating roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.

2. Replace the heating roller thermistor (end).
D104/D016 6-32 SM
SC Tables
Heating roller warm-up error 2
The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready

temperature for 65 seconds after the fusing unit has rotated.
seconds in the low temperature condition after the heating lamp on.
552 A Dirty or defective thermistor (end)

Heating roller fusing lamp broken
Defected thermostat
Defective heating roller fusing lamp
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.

2. Replace the heating roller thermistor (end).
Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 230°C or more for 1

second.
553 A Defective PSU
shooting
Trouble -
Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
SM 6-33 D104/D016
SC Tables
Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 (hardware error)
The heating roller thermistor (end) detects 250°C or more.
Defective PSU
554 A Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
Heating roller lamp consecutive full power 2
When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the pressure
roller-fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 130 seconds or more.
555 A Broken heating roller thermostat

Broken heating roller fusing lamp
1. Replace the heating roller thermostat.

Zero cross frequency error
When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or

more in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and
557 C SC557 occurs.
Noise (High frequency)
Check the power supply source.
D104/D016 6-34 SM
SC Tables
Consecutive fusing jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times. The paper
jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly.
559 A This SC is activated only when SP1142-001 is set to "1" (default "0").
Paper jam in the fusing unit.
Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit. Then make sure
that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.
Pressure roller thermister error 3
The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (center)

does not reach 0°C for 45 seconds.
561 A Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor (center)

Defective pressure roller thermistor (center)
1. Check that the pressure roller thermistor (center)is firmly

connected.
2. Replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).
shooting
Trouble -
Pressure roller overheat 3 (software error)
The detected fusing roller temperature stays at 230°C or more for 1

second.
563 A Defective PSU

Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
SM 6-35 D104/D016
SC Tables
Pressure roller overheat 3 (hardware error)
The pressure roller thermistor (center) detects 250°C or more.
Defective PSU
564 A Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
Pressure roller thermister error 4
The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (end) does

not reach 0 °C for 45 seconds.
571 A Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor (end)

Defective pressure roller thermistor (end)
1. Check that the pressure roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.

2. Replace the pressure roller thermistor (end).
Pressure roller overheat 4 (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 230°C or more for 1

second.
573 A Defective PSU

Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
D104/D016 6-36 SM
SC Tables
Pressure roller overheat 4 (hardware error)
The pressure roller thermistor (end) detects 250°C or more.
Defective PSU
574 A Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-37 D104/D016
SC Tables
6.1.7 SC6XX: DEVICE COMMUNICATION
610 D Mechanical counter error: K
611 D Mechanical counter error: FC
This SC is only for NA models.

The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001
is set to "1".
Disconnected mechanical counter

- -
Defective mechanical counter
Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the mechanical counter.

2. Replace the BCU.
ARDF communication error
After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication

timeout occurs.
Incorrect installation of ARDF

ARDF defective
620 D IPU defective
External noise
1. Check the cable connection of the ARDF.

2. Shut out the external noise.
3. Replace the ARDF.
4. Replace the IPU.
D104/D016 6-38 SM
SC Tables
621 D Finisher communication error
While the BCU communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is

displayed if one of following conditions occurs.
The BCU receives the break signal which is generated by the
peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
When the BCU does not receive an OK signal from a peripheral
100ms after sending a command to it. The BCU resends the
command. The BCU does not receive an OK signal after sending
the command 3 times.
Cable problems
- -
BCU problems
PSU problems in the machine
Main board problems in the peripherals
Defective main board of peripherals.
Disconnected peripherals.
1. Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected.

2. Replace the PSU if no power is supplied to peripherals.
3. Replace the main board of peripherals.
4. Replace the BCU.
shooting
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Trouble -
Counter device error 1
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via
the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100
CTL ms.
632
B
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
and copier control board is disconnected or damaged
Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
device.
SM 6-39 D104/D016
SC Tables
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via
the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100
CTL ms.
633
B
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
and copier control board is disconnected or damaged
Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
device.
CTL A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.

634
B
Counter device control board defective
Backup battery of counter device defective
CTL A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.

635
B
Counter device control board defective
Backup battery of counter device defective
636 CTL SD Card Error
Expanded authentication module error
01 D There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.

The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is
broken.
D104/D016 6-40 SM
SC Tables
There is no DESS module in the machine.
No expanded authentication module

Defective SD card
No DESS module
1. Install the expanded authentication module.

2. Install the SD card.
3. Install the DESS module.
Version error
The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.

02 D
Incorrect module version
1. Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.
BCU control data transfer abnormal
A sampling of the control data sent from the BCU reveals an

abnormality.
CTL Controller board defective

641 External noise
D
BCU board defective
shooting
Trouble -
1. Check the connection between the controller board and BCU.
3. Replace the BCU.
SM 6-41 D104/D016
SC Tables
CTL
650 Communication error of the remote service modem (RCG-M)
B
Authentication error
The authentication for the RCG-M fails at a dial up connection.
Incorrect SP settings
-001 - Disconnected telephone line

Disconnected modem board
Disconnected Local Area Network card
Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password
(SP5816-157).
Incorrect modem setting
Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting.

-004 -
Same as -001
Check and set the correct AT command (SP5819-160).
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective
-005 - communication line or defective connection.
Same as -001
Consult with the user's local telephone company.
Incorrect dial up connection
CTL -001: Program parameter error

651
C -002: Program execution error
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (RCG-M) tries to call the
D104/D016 6-42 SM
SC Tables
center with a dial up connection.
Caused by a software bug
No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of

the machine.
NVRAM error
Retry of NVRAM communication fails three times after the machine has
669 D detected the NVRAM error.
Caused by noise
Turn the main power switch off and on.
Engine start up error
CTL The ready signal from the engine board is not detected.
670
D Defective engine board.
Replace the engine board.
shooting
Trouble -
Engine board mismatch error
Engine board and controller mismatch detected.
CTL Wrong engine board installed.

671 Wrong controller board installed.
D
Check the type of engine board and controller board.
1. Replace the BCU.

SM 6-43 D104/D016
SC Tables
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
After powering on the machine, the communication circuit between the

controller and the operation panel is not opened, or communication with
controller is interrupted after a normal startup.
CTL Controller stall

672
D Controller board installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel connector loose or defective
1. Check the harness connection.

681 D RFID: Communication error
Communication error occurs when the RFID starts to communicate with

the RFID receptor.
Noise
No memory chip on the toner cartridge
001-005 Defective RFID reader and writer
Disconnected RFID controller board I/F

2. Replace the toner cartridge.
3. Replace the RFID controller board.
Retry of RFID communication fails three times after the machine has
detected the RFID communication error.
Defective RFID reader and writer

061-164
No memory chip on the toner cartridge
Noise
1. Replace the toner cartridge.
D104/D016 6-44 SM
SC Tables

3. Replace the RFID-R/W controller board.
Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error
Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the

machine has detected the memory chip communication error.
Damaged memory chip data

682 D Disconnected inter face
No memory chip on the development unit
Noise

RFID: Unit check error
The machine gets RFID communication error even the toner cartridges
683 C have not been installed in the machine.
Caused by noise
shooting
Trouble -
Turn the main power switch off and on.
SM 6-45 D104/D016
SC Tables
Memory address command error
The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the
controller for the prescribed time after the paper has reached the
registration sensor.
Harness disconnection at BCU

Controller board loose or broken
Defective HDD
687 D Defective BCU
Defective controller
1. Check if the controller is firmly connected to the BCU.

2. Update the firmware of the IPU.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Update the firmware of the BCU.
5. Replace the BCU.
GAVD communication error
The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.

A device-status error occurs during I2C bus communication.
The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other
than a buffer shortage.
690 D Loose connection

Defective BCU
Defective LD controller board
1. Turn the main switch off and on.

2. Check the cable connection.
4. Replace the BCU board.
D104/D016 6-46 SM
SC Tables
6.1.8 SC7XX: PERIPHERALS
Shift tray motor error
The shift tray HP sensor does not activate within 1.86 seconds after the
shift tray motor starts to move at power on or copying. The 1st
detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
730 B code.
Defective shift tray motor

Defective shift tray HP sensor.
Replace the shift tray motor.
Finisher stapler motor error
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Staple jam
Motor overload
740 D Defective stapler motor
Defective stapler safety sensor
shooting
Trouble -
1. Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned
above.
2. Replace the stapler unit
3. Replace the finisher main board.
SM 6-47 D104/D016
SC Tables
Finisher stapler movement motor error
Motor overload
Loose connection of the stapler unit HP sensor
Loose connection of the stapler unit movement motor
Defective stapler unit HP sensor
742 D
Defective stapler movement motor
1. Check the connection of the stapler movement motor.

2. Check the connection of the stapler unit HP sensor.
3. Replace the stapler unit HP sensor.
4. Replace the stapler unit movement motor.
Finisher: Tray lift motor error
Motor overload
Loose connection of the tray lift motor
750 D
Defective tray lift motor
1. Check the connections to the tray lift motor.

2. Replace the tray lift motor.
Finisher punch motor error
The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the
punch motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
760 D
Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective
Punch motor disconnected or defective
Punch motor overload due to obstruction
1. Check the connections and cables for the punch motor and HP
D104/D016 6-48 SM
SC Tables
sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the punch motor mechanism.
3. Replace the punch slider unit.
4. Replace the punch unit.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
Finisher: Punch registration motor error
The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within
the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the
2nd failure issues this SC code.
763 B Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective

Defective registration motor
1. Check the connections to the punch registration motor.

2. Replace the punch unit slider.
Finisher: Paper edge detection sensor error
The machine does not detect correct voltage from the paper edge
shooting
detection sensor. Trouble -
787 D Defective connector

Defective paper edge detection sensor.
Defective DA or AD converter.

SM 6-49 D104/D016
SC Tables
788 D Finisher: Paper size sensor error without side tray
B Finisher: Paper size sensor error with side tray
The machine does not detect correct voltage from the paper size
sensors.
789 Defective connector

Defective paper size sensors
Defective DA or AD converter.

790 D Finisher: Front jogger motor error without side tray
B Finisher: Front jogger motor error with side tray
The machine does not detect a correct signal from the front jogger
fence HP sensor at power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
793 Defective front jogger motor

Loosen connection
Motor overload
Defective front jogger fence HP sensor
1. Replace the front jogger fence HP sensor.

2. Replace the front jogger motor.
D104/D016 6-50 SM
SC Tables
791 D Finisher: Rear jogger motor error without side tray
B Finisher: Rear jogger motor error with side tray
The machine does not detect a correct signal from the rear jogger
fence HP sensor at power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
794 Defective rear jogger motor

Loosen connection
Motor overload
Defective rear jogger fence HP sensor
1. Replace the rear jogger fence HP sensor.

2. Replace the rear jogger motor.
792 D Pick-up roller contact motor error without side tray
B Pick-up roller contact motor error with side tray
The machine does not detect a correct signal from the pick-up roller
HP sensor at power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error,
and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
shooting
Trouble -
795 Defective pick-up roller contact motor
Loosen connection
Motor overload
Defective pick-up roller HP sensor
1. Replace the pick-up contact motor.

2. Replace the pick-up roller HP sensor.
SM 6-51 D104/D016
SC Tables
Belt roller solenoid error
Disconnected harness
Defective belt roller position sensor
796 B Defective belt roller solenoid

2. Replace the belt roller position sensor.
3. Replace the belt roller solenoid.
NVRAM data error
Defective NVRAM on the main board of the internal finisher

797 D
2. Replace the main board.
Front Fan error
The machine detects the fan lock signal (ON) consecutively 200 ms.
Front fan damaged

798 D Disconnect or defective the harness
Front fan overload

2. Replace the front fan.
D104/D016 6-52 SM
SC Tables
Output tray motor error
Output tray motor damaged

Output tray motor overload
799 D
Loose connection of the output tray motor
Defective output tray motor
Replace the output tray unit.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-53 D104/D016
SC Tables
6.1.9 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM
Energy saving I/O sub-system error
CTL The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error.

816
D Controller board defective
Replace the controller board.
Monitor Error
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the
boot loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel,
CTL
817 or root system files from the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD
D
card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware

SD card data defective; use another SD card
Fatal kernel error
CTL Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system

819
C processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
[0x5032] HAIC-P2 error

System program defective
[0x696e] init died Controller board defective
[0x766d] vm_pageout: VM is full Optional board defective

1. Replace controller firmware
[554C] USB error
D104/D016 6-54 SM
SC Tables
CTL Self-diagnostics error: CPU

820
D [XXXX]: Detailed error code
CPU error
During the self-diagnostic, the controller CPU detects an error. There
are 47 types of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of
[0001] to [06FF] the error. The CPU detects an error and displays the specific error
[0801] to [4005] code with the program address where the error occurs.
System firmware problem


2. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
3. Replace the controller.
When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure, the
following information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to
a technical support center.
SC code
Detailed error code
Program address
CPU/Memory Error
shooting
Trouble -
System firmware problem
[0702] Defective RAM-DIMM
[0709] Defective controller
[070A]
1. Reinstall the controller system software.
2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
SM 6-55 D104/D016
SC Tables
CTL Self-diagnostics error: ASIC

821
ASIC error
The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC.

[0B00]
Defective ASIC device
Replace the controller.
ASIC detection error
The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected.
[0B06] Defective ASIC

Defective North Bridge and PCI I/F
Self-diagnosis error: ASIC
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the
CPU timer. If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range,
this SC code is displayed.
[0D05] System firmware problem

Defective RAM-DIMM

2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
Video bridge device (ASIC) error 1
The CPU does not detect the video bridge device.

[50A1]
Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
D104/D016 6-56 SM
SC Tables
Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1
The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from
[50A2] the video bridge device.
Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
CTL Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive)

822
B [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[3003] Timeout error
[3004] Command error
When the main switch is turned on or starting the self-diagnostic, the

- -
HDD stays busy for the specified time or more.
Loose connection
- - Defective HDD
1. Check that the HDD is correctly connected to the controller.

- - 2. Replace the HDD.
shooting
Trouble -
CTL Self-diagnostic error: NIB

823
MAC address check sum error

[6101] The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check
sum stored in ROM.
PHY IC error
[6104]
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
SM 6-57 D104/D016
SC Tables
PHY IC loop-back error

[6105] An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the
controller.
- Replace the controller.
[1401]
Self-diagnosis error: Standard NVRAM
The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed or
detects that the NVRAM is defective.
CTL Loose connection

824
D Defective standard NVRAM
1. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly inserted into the socket.

2. Replace the NVRAM.
CTL
826 Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/optional NVRAM
D
The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second
counted by the CPU on the controller.
[1501]
Defective the RTC device
Replace the RTC device..
The RTC device is not detected.
Defective RTC device

[15FF] NVRAM without RTC installed
Discharged backup battery
Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device.
D104/D016 6-58 SM
SC Tables
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-59 D104/D016
SC Tables
CTL Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM

827
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM

(SDRAM DIMM).
Loose connection
[0201] Defective SDRAM DIMM

2. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
Resident memory error
The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable.
[0202] Defective RAM DIMM

Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
Defective 12C bus
1. Replace the RAM DIMM.
CTL Self-diagnostic error: ROM

828
Check sum error 1

The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is
[0101]
checked. If the check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code
is displayed.
D104/D016 6-60 SM
SC Tables
CTL Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM

829
Verification error (Slot 1)

[0401] The data stored in the optional RAM in Slot 1 does not match the data
when reading.
Not specified RAM DIMM installed

Defective RAM DIMM
1. Replace the RAM DIMM.

CTL
833 Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
C
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the
[0F30] PCI configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F31]
Replace the BCU.
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the
[0F41] PCI configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
shooting
Trouble -
Replace the BCU.
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
[50B1] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
Replace the mother board.
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
[50B2] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
Replace the mother board.
SM 6-61 D104/D016
SC Tables
CTL
838 Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator
D
A verify error occurred when setting data is read from the clock
generator on the controller.
[2701] Defective clock generator

Defective controller board
CTL
839 USB NAND Flash ROM error
C
The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.
[9101] Defective controller board
The USB NAND Flash ROM is disconnected.
[9110] Defective controller board
IEEE1394 interface error
The 1394 interface is unusable.
CTL Defective IEEE1394

851 Defective controller.
B

2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface board.
D104/D016 6-62 SM
SC Tables
Wireless LAN card not detected
The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is

CTL established, though the wireless LAN board is detected.
853
B
Loose connection
Check the connection.
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card not detected
The wireless LAN/Bluetooth card is not detected after communication is

CTL established, but the wireless LAN board is detected.
854
B
Loose connection
Check the connection.
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card error
An error is detected in the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card.
855 CTL Loose connection
shooting
856 B Trouble -
Defective wireless LAN/Bluetooth card
1. Check the connection.

2. Replace the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card.
SM 6-63 D104/D016
SC Tables
USB interface error
The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error.
CTL Defective USB driver

857
B Loose connection

2. Replace the USB board.
HDD Encryption unit error 1
A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption

key with the HDD encryption unit.
Encryption key acquisition error:

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
[0]
Encryption key setting for HDD error:

The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
CTL [1]
858 Defective SATA chip on the controller board
C
NVRAM data encryption error 1:

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
[2]
Defective NVRAM on the controller board
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
[30]
D104/D016 6-64 SM
SC Tables
Other error:
[30] A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
Same as SC991
HDD Encryption unit error 2
A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an

encryption key with the HDD encryption unit.
HDD check error:

The HDD is not correctly installed.
No HDD installed
[8] Unformatted HDD

The encryption key on the controller is different from the
one on the HDD
CTL 1. Install the HDD correctly.
859
C 1. Initialize the HDD.
Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been
[9] completed.
Power failure during the data encryption
shooting
1. Initialize the HDD. Trouble -
Data read/write error:
[10] The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
Same as SC863
SM 6-65 D104/D016
SC Tables
HDD: Initialization error
The controller detects that the hard disk fails.
CTL HDD not initialized

860
B Defective HDD
1. Reformat the HDD.

2. Replace the HDD.
HDD: Reboot error
The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is
supplied to the HDD.
Loose connection
CTL Defective cables

861 Defective HDD
D
1. Check the connection between the HDD and controller.

2. Check and replace the cables.
3. Replace the HDD.
Bad sector number error
The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over
CTL 101.
862
D Defective HDD
1. Format the HDD with SP5-832-002.

2. Replace the HDD.
D104/D016 6-66 SM
SC Tables
HDD: Read error
The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.
CTL Defective HDD

863
D Defective controller
1. Replace the HDD.

HDD: CRC error
While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data
CTL transmission fails.
864
D
Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
HDD: Access error
CTL An error is detected while operating the HDD.
shooting
Trouble -
865
D Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
SD card authentication error
CTL A correct license is not found in the SD card.

866
B SD-card data is corrupted.
Store correct data in the SD card.
SM 6-67 D104/D016
SC Tables
SD card error
CTL The SD card is ejected from the slot.

867
D
1. Install the SD card.
SD card access error

-13 to -3: File system error
Other number: Device error
An error report is sent from the SD card reader.

CTL
868 An error is detected in the SD card.
D
1. For a file system error, format the SD card on your PC.
2. For a device error, turn the mains switch off and on.
3. Replace the SD card.
Address book error
An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a

network.
Defective software program
CTL Defective HDD

870 Incorrect path to the server
B
1. Back up the address book data ( "Address Book

Upload/Download" in the Appendices) and Initialize the address
book data (SP5-846-046) and the user information.
(Restore the address book data if possible.)
2. Replace the HDD.
D104/D016 6-68 SM
SC Tables
HDD mail data error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
CTL Defective HDD

872 Power failure during an access to the HDD
B

2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-007).
3. Replace the HDD.
HDD mail transfer error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
CTL Defective HDD

873
B Power failure during an access to the HDD
1. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008).

2. Replace the HDD.
shooting
Trouble -
Delete All error 1: HDD
An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted

physically by the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362).
CTL
874 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (SD card) not installed
D
Defective HDD
1. Install the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362).

2. Replace the HDD.
SM 6-69 D104/D016
SC Tables
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted

CTL logically by the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362).
875
D
The logical format for the HDD fails.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
Log Data Error
CTL An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or
876
D during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the
machine off while it is operating.
Log Data Error 1
-001 Damaged log data file in the HDD
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 2
An encryption module not installed

-002
1. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)
2. Install the DESS module.
Log Data Error 3
Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

-003
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)
Log Data Error 4
-004 Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
D104/D016 6-70 SM
SC Tables
Log Data Error 5
Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine

-005
1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 99
-099 Other than the above causes
Ask your supervisor.
HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error
The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362) is installed and activated.
CTL
877 Defective SD card (D362)
D
SD card (D362) not installed
1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card (D362).
2. Check and reinstall the SD card (D362).
shooting
Trouble -
TPM system authentication error
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).

CTL
878 Incorrect updating for the system firmware
D
Defective flash ROM on the controller board
SM 6-71 D104/D016
SC Tables Rev. 08/02/2011
File format converter error
CTL The file format converter does not respond.

880
D Defective file format converter
Replace the file format converter.
899 Software error
An error occurred with the GW Controller software

CTL
⇒ D Cycle the machine off/on
Update the Controller firmware
Controller board defective
D104/D016 6-72 SM
SC Tables
6.1.10 SC9XX: MISCELLANEOUS
Electric counter error
Abnormal data in the counters.
CTL Defective NVRAM

900 Defective controller
D
1. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller.

Printer application error
An error is detected in the printer application program.
CTL Defective software

920 Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)
D
1. Software defective; switch off/on, or change the controller firmware

if the problem is not solved
2. Insufficient memory
shooting
Trouble -
Printer font error
A necessary font is not found in the SD card.

CTL
921 A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
D
The SD card data is corrupted.
Check that the SD card has the correct data.
SM 6-73 D104/D016
SC Tables
Software performance error
The software makes an unexpected operation.
Defective software
CTL
990 Software error
D
2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware.
See Note 1 at the end of the SC table.
Software continuity error
The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation.

However, unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the
CTL software.
991
C
Software program error
Internal parameter incorrect, insufficient working memory.
This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only).
Undefined error
Defective software program
CTL An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred

992
D
Print the "Logging Data" with SP5990-004 and then check the SP7990.
If 498-Engine is found in the SP7990;
1. Check the harness connection of the temperature/humidity sensor.
2. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
D104/D016 6-74 SM
SC Tables
995 D CPM setting error
Defective BCU
-001 1. Input the serial number with SP5811-004, and turn the main power
switch off/on.
Defective NVRAM on the controller

-002 1. Install a new NVRAM, and turn off and on the main power switch
after SC995-002 has occurred.
2. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or download the information with
SP5825-001, after that turn the main power off and on.
Incorrect type controller installed
-003 Defective controller
Replace the controller board with the correct type.
Incorrect model controller installed.

-004
Replace the controller board with the correct model.
Application function selection error
shooting
The application selected by the operation panel key does not start Trouble -
or ends abnormally.
Software (including the software configuration) defective

An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not
CTL installed
997
B Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated
1. Check the devices necessary for the application program. If

necessary devices have not been installed, install them.
2. Check that application programs are correctly configured.
3. For a fax operation problem, simplify the nesting of the fax group
addresses.
SM 6-75 D104/D016
SC Tables
4. Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application

program. If the logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see
the logs.
Application start error
No applications start within 60 seconds after the power is turned on.
Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

CTL Software problem
998
D
1. Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)",
change it to "0 (OFF)".
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are correctly connected.
Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image
file), the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and
information needs to be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may
take some time to get a reply on how to solve the problem, because in some cases the
design staff in Japan must analyze the data.
Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
Summary sheet (SP mode “Printer SP”, SP1-004 [Print Summary])
SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the
problem is logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
D104/D016 6-76 SM
Process Control Error Conditions
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
6.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT

Displayed number shows results of each developer initialization result.
0000 = YMCK
SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result)
No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action
Developer
Successfully initialization is
1 -
completed successfully
completed.
A cover was opened or the main

switch was turned off during the
initialization.
Developer 1. Do the developer initialization again
Forced
2 initialization was when done in SP mode. Reinstall the
termination
forcibly terminated. engine main firmware if the result is
the same.
2. Turn the main switch off and on when
done at unit replacement.
Vt is less than 0.7V

6 Vt error 1. Defective TD sensor
when Vcnt is 4.3V.
shooting
Trouble -
Vcnt is more than 1. Defective TD sensor
7 Vcnt error 1 4.7V when Vcnt is Vt 2. Vt target settings are not correct.
target ±0.2V. 3. Toner density error
Vt is less than 0.7V

when Vcnt is 4.3V and
8 Vcnt error 2 Vcnt is more than 1. Defective TD sensor
4.7V when Vcnt is Vt
target ±0.2V.
SM 6-77 D104/D016
1. Defective TD sensor
Vcnt is Vt target ±
9 Vcnt error 3 2. Vt target settings are not correct.
over 0.2V.
3. Toner density error
The machine starts developer initialization after you set “1” in SP3-902-005, 006, 007,
or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the
front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs.
6.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

Displayed number shows results of each Process Control Self-Check.
00000000 = YYMMCCKK
SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Self-check Result)
Process control
Successfully self-check
11 -
completed successfully
completed.
Defective development unit

Vt maximum error and an image is faint:
1. Replace the toner hopper unit.
Vt maximum or Vt maximum error and an image is O.K:
41 Vt error minimum error is 1. Replace the development unit.
detected. 2. Replace the BCU board.
Vt minimum error:
D104/D016 6-78 SM
Solid image is not sufficient density:

1. Retry the process control.
2. Replace the ID sensors.
ID sensor 3. Replace the BCU board.
coefficient Not enough data can Solid image is O.K.
53
(K5) detection be sampled. 1. Replace the ID sensors.
error 2. Replace the BCU board.
ID sensor is dirty:
1. Clean the ID sensors.
2. Retry the process control.
When the K5 is more

ID sensor
than the value of
coefficient
SP3-362-003 or less ID sensor pattern density is too high
54 (K5)
than the value of or low.
maximum/
SP3-362-004, the
minimum error
error 54 is displayed.
ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Gamma error: Gamma is out of
55 Hardware defective.
Maximum range. 5.0 < Gamma
Same as 53
ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Gamma is out of
Gamma error: Hardware defective.
56 range.
Minimum 1. Same as 53
shooting
Gamma < 0.15 Trouble -
2. Replace the toner hopper unit.
ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Vk error: Vk is out of range.
57 Hardware defective.
Maximum 300 < Vk
Same as 53
ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Vk error: Vk is out of range. Background dirty
58
Minimum Vk < –300 Hardware defective
Same as 53
Sampling data Not enough data can ID sensor pattern density is too high
59
error during be sampled during the or low.
SM 6-79 D104/D016
gamma gamma correction. Hardware defective

correction Same as 53
Unexpected Power Failure

99 Process control fails.
error Check the power source.
D104/D016 6-80 SM
Vsg Adjustment Result

Displayed number shows results of each sensor check.
000 = FCR
SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result)
Vsg adjustment
1 O.K -
is correctly done.
Dirty ID sensors (toner, dust, or foreign

material)
Dirty image transfer belt
Scratched image transfer belt
Defective ID sensors
Poor connection
ID sensor Vsg cannot be
Defective BCU
2 adjustment adjusted within
1. Clean the ID sensors.
error 4.0 ±0.5V.
2. Check the ITB cleaning unit. Clean or
replace the image transfer belt.
3. Replace the image transfer belt.
4. Replace the ID sensors.
shooting
Defective ID sensors Trouble -
ID sensor output
Poor connection
is more than
ID sensor Defective BCU
3 "Voffset
output error 1. Replace the ID sensors.
Threshold"
(SP3-324-004)
Vsg Vsg adjustment

Other cases
9 Adjustment has not been
Retry SP3-321-010.
error completed.
SM 6-81 D104/D016
6.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y)
This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which
color has an error (M, Y or C).
No. Result Description Note
0 Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. -
Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been

1 -
successfully done,
Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for

2 See Note
patterns line position adjustment.
Fewer lines on
The patterns, which ID sensors have detected,
3 the pattern than See Note
are not enough for line position adjustment.
the target
More lines on
4 the pattern than Not used in this machine. -
the target
5-9 Not used - -
For details, see the "Troubleshooting Guide - Line Position Adjustment" section.
D104/D016 6-82 SM
Troubleshooting Guide
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
6.3.1 IMAGE QUALITY

The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems
on this product.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-83 D104/D016
D104/D016 6-84 SM
6.3.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as
follows.
Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment.
Test
1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment).
2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0:
Completed successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure
list for color registration errors’.
3. Do SP2-111-001 (Mode a: fine adjustment twice).
4. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0:
Completed successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure
list for color registration errors’.
5. Put some A3/DLT paper on the by-pass tray.
When you print a test pattern, use the by-pass tray to feed the paper.
6. Print out test pattern "7" with SP2-109-003.
7. Check the printed output with a loupe.
8. If there are no color registration errors on the output, the line position adjustment is
correctly done. If not, refer to the countermeasure list for color registration errors.
Countermeasure list for color registration errors
shooting
Trouble -
After Executing SP2-111-003
Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure
Defective image processing unit

Low density of test pattern
White image, Abnormal image, Defective controller
Low density 1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
SM 6-85 D104/D016
3. Replace the BCU.
Defective ID sensors
Normal image, but with color Defective BCU
registration errors 1. Replace the ID sensor.
2. Replace the BCU.

Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
One of results: "4" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
The main scan registrations of M, Defective laser unit

C, Y are shifted by more than ±15 Defective BCU
mm from the main scan 1. Replace the laser unit.
registration of K. 2. Replace the BCU.
Defective image transfer belt

The sub scan registrations of M, Defective drive units
C, Y are shifted by more than ±20 Defective BCU
mm from the sub scan 1. Replace the image transfer belt.
registration of K. 2. Replace the drum motor.
3. Replace the BCU.
Defective ID sensor at center

The main scan registration is Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
shifted by more than ±0.66 mm, Defective BCU
but only at the central area of the 1. Replace the ID sensor.
image on the output. 2. Replace the image transfer belt.
3. Replace the BCU.
Defective PCU
Defective laser unit
The skew for M, C, Y is more
Defective BCU
than ±0.75 mm from the main
1. Reinstall or replace the BCU.
scan registration of K
3. Replace the BCU.
D104/D016 6-86 SM
Skew correction upper limit error

Defective BCU
Others Defective laser unit
1. Replace the BCU.

Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
Result: "0" in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
Do SP2-111-001 or -002.

Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
White image, Abnormal image, Defective image processing unit

Low density Low density of test pattern
Defective BCU
1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
shooting
2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or Trouble -

3. Replace the BCU.
Normal image, but with color Defective ID sensor

registration errors Defective BCU
2. Replace the BCU.

Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
Result: "4" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
SM 6-87 D104/D016
Low image density on the output Low pattern density

Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
The main scan registrations of M, No defective component

C, Y are shifted by more than Defective laser optics housing unit
±1.4 mm from the main scan Defective BCU
registration of K. 1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
3. Replace the BCU.
The sub scan registrations of M, No defective component

C, Y are shifted by more than Defective image transfer belt
±1.4mm from the sub scan Defective drive units
registration of K. Defective BCU
1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
3. Replace the drum motor.
4. Replace the BCU.
The main scan registration is Defective ID sensor at center

shifted by more than ±0.66 mm, Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
but only at the central area of the Defective BCU
image on the output. 1. Replace the ID sensor.
3. Replace the BCU.
The skew for M, C, Y is more Defective PCDU

than ± 0.75 mm from the main Defective laser unit
scan registration of K. – at the Defective BCU
end of the scan line? 1. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
3. Replace the BCU.
Others Skew correction upper limit error

Defective BCU
Defective laser unit
1. Replace the BCU.
D104/D016 6-88 SM

Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
Result: No color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
The main scan registration of K is Abnormal SP setting value of main scan: K

shifted. Adjust the value with SP2-101-001.
The main scan length of K is Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length
shifted. detection: K
Adjust the value with SP2-102-001 and -003.
Note:
The setting value of these SPs should be same.

Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
Result: Color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Low image density on the output Low pattern density

Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
The main scan registration is Defective ID sensor at center
shooting
shifted, but only at the central Deformed center area on the image transfer belt Trouble -
area of the image on the output. Defective BCU
3. Replace the BCU.
The main scan registrations of M, Defective laser optics housing unit

C, Y are shifted. Defective ID sensor
Defective BCU
Incorrect SP value
1. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
SM 6-89 D104/D016
3. Replace the BCU.

4. Adjust the value with SP2-182-004 to -021.
The sub scan registrations of M, Defective image transfer belt

C, Y are shifted. Defective drive units
Defective ID sensor
Defective BCU
Incorrect SP value
3. Replace the drum motor.
4. Replace the BCU.
5. Adjust the value with SP2-182-022 to -039.
The skew of M, C, Y is different. Defective PCDU

Defective laser optics housing unit
Defective BCU
1. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
2. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
3. Replace the BCU.
The sub scan lines are shifted. Defective PCDU

Shifted lines appear cyclically. Defective drive unit
Drum phase adjustment error
1. Do SP1-902-001 (Drum phase adjustment); see
Replacement and Adjustment – Drive Unit – Gear
Unit for details.
2. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
3. Check or replace the drive unit.
D104/D016 6-90 SM
6.3.3 IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS

If a defect occurs in the image at one of these intervals, the related component may be
defective.
Development roller: 32 mm
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller): 75.0 mm
Drum: 94.2 mm
Fusing belt: 157.1 mm
6.3.4 SUB-SCAN MAGNIFICATION ERROR

If a sub-scan magnification error of an image occurs on an output, follow the procedure below
to adjust the sub-scan magnification.
Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment Procedure

1. Adjust the sub-scan magnification for each paper type and print mode with the following
SPs.
shooting
Trouble -
Input the same value in these SP settings. Otherwise, color registration errors
occur on outputs and this cannot be recovered by the line position adjustment.
SP1-803-001: Plain paper/ 600 dpi Input
SP1-803-002: Plain paper/ 1200 dpi Input
SP1-803-003: Thick paper Input
2. Turn the main power of the machine off and on.
3. Check if all settings of the following SPs are "0" (success).
SP1-803-004: Plain paper/ 600 dpi Result
SP1-803-005: Plain paper/ 1200 dpi Result
SP1-803-006: Thick paper Result
If one of the settings of SP1-803-004 to 006 is "1" (error), return to step 1 and
SM 6-91 D104/D016
then input a value which is closer to "0" compared with the previously input
value.
For example, if "+0.9" is input in the settings of SP1-803-001 to 003 and an error
occurs, input "+0.8" or less with SP1-803-001 to 003.
For example, if "-0.9" is input in the settings of SP1-803-001 to 003 and an error
occurs, input "-0.8" or more with SP1-803-001 to 003.
If an error still remains, refer to "Motor Speed Adjustment".
4. Execute the line position adjustment (rough) with SP2-111-003.
5. Execute the line position adjustment (fine) with SP2-111-001.
6. Make sample copies and check if the outputs are satisfactory.
Motor Speed Adjustment

If "Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment Procedure" does not solve the sub-scan magnification
error, the setting of the motor speed adjustment may be out of adjustable range. Check the
following three points.
1. An error ("1") occurs in SP1-803-004.
[Setting values of the following SPs + input value with SP1-803-001] > motor speed
adjustable range
e.g.) 3.5 (SP1-801-002) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 4.5
In this case, "4.5" is over the maximum adjustable value ("4") of the SP1-801-002. As a
result, the result of the motor speed adjustment issues "1" (error).
Adjust the settings of the SP1-830-001 to -003 so that the total value (motor speed
setting value + input value) is within the adjustable range for each motor described
below.
SP No. Max. Min. Title
SP1-801-002 4 -4 Regist Mot:120 (0.3 default)
SP1-801-003 4 -4 Bk OpcDevMot:120 (-0.1 default)
SP1-801-007 6 -6 Fusing Mot:120 (0.1 default)
SP1-801-009 4 -4 Transfer Mot:120 (0 default)
SP1-801-012 2 -2 Feed1:CW120 (0.3 default)
SP1-801-014 2 -2 Feed1:CCW120 (0.3 default)
SP1-801-016 2 -2 Feed2:CW120 (0.3 default)
D104/D016 6-92 SM
SP1-801-018 2 -2 Feed2:CCW120 (0.3 default)
SP1-801-020 2 -2 By-pass:120 (0.3 default)
SP1-801-022 2 -2 Inverter:CW120 (0 default)
SP1-801-024 2 -2 Inverter:CCW120 (0 default)
SP1-801-026 2 -2 Duplex Entrance:120 (0.3 default)
SP1-801-028 2 -2 Duplex Exit:120 (0.3 default)
2. An error ("1") occurs in SP1-803-005.

adjustable range
e.g.) 1.5 (SP1-801-025) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 2.5
Adjust the settings of SP1-830-001 to -003 so that the total value (motor speed
below.
SP1-801-025 2 -2 Duplex Entrance:60
SP1-801-027 2 -2 Duplex Exit:60
shooting
Trouble -
SP1-801-033 4 -4 Regist Mot:60:1200dpi
SP1-801-034 2 -2 Feed1:CW60:1200dpi
SP1-801-035 2 -2 Feed1:CCW60:1200dpi
SP1-801-036 2 -2 Feed2:CW60:1200dpi
SP1-801-037 2 -2 Feed2:CCW60:1200dpi
SP1-801-038 2 -2 By-pass:60:1200dpi
SP1-801-039 2 -2 Inverter:CW60:1200dpi
SP1-801-040 2 -2 Inverter:CCW60:1200dpi
SM 6-93 D104/D016
SP1-801-041 6 -6 FusingMot:60:1200dpi
SP1-801-042 4 -4 BkOpcDevMot:60:1200dpi
SP1-801-043 4 -4 TransferMot:60:1200dpi
3. An error ("1") occurs in the SP1-803-006.

adjustable range
e.g.) 3.5 (SP1-801-001) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 4.5
Adjust the settings of SP1-830-001 to -003 so that the total value (motor speed
below.
SP1-801-001 4 -4 Regist Mot:60:Thick
SP1-801-004 4 -4 Bk OpcDevMot:60:Thick
SP1-801-008 6 -6 Fusing Mot:60:Thick
SP1-801-010 4 -4 TransferMot:60:Thick
SP1-801-011 2 -2 Feed1:CW60:Thick
SP1-801-013 2 -2 Feed1:CCW60:Thick
SP1-801-015 2 -2 Feed2:CW60:Thick
SP1-801-017 2 -2 Feed2:CCW60:Thick
SP1-801-019 2 -2 By-pass:60:Thick
SP1-801-021 2 -2 Inverter:CW60:Thick
SP1-801-023 2 -2 Inverter:CCW60:Thick
D104/D016 6-94 SM
6.3.5 TRAPEZOID IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Before Adjusting the Trapezoid Image

1. Enter SP2-109 and print out the test pattern 14 (Trimming Area).
2. Make sure the horizontal lines are parallel.

"Parallel": The gap between horizontal lines is 1.8 mm or less.
3. If the lines are not parallel, check the following and apply corrections as necessary:
Make sure that the side fences of the tray are set neatly against the sides of the
paper.
Make sure that the PTR unit is connected to the bracket correctly.
shooting
Make sure that the shafts of the duplex unit are not bent nor damaged. Trouble -
Adjusting the Trapezoid Image

1. Remove the following items:
Fusing unit ( p.4-93)
Front right cover ( p.4-23)
PCDU toner collection bottle ( p.4-15)
Inner cover ( p.4-22)
Inner right cover ( p.4-22)
SM 6-95 D104/D016
2. Remove the interlock switch bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 2).
3. Loosen the four screws [A] on the front fusing guide.

4. Remove the screw [B] on the adjustor lever.
This screw is not necessary after tightening the front fusing guide.
5. If the horizontal lines slope down to the left [A], move the front fusing guide upward. To do
this, turn the adjustor lever [B] of the fusing front guide clockwise [C].
D104/D016 6-96 SM
One step of the adjustor lever moves the front fusing guide by 1 mm.
6. If the horizontal lines slope down to the right [A], move the fusing front guide downward.
To do this, turn the adjustor lever [B] of the front fusing guide counterclockwise [C].
One step of the adjustor lever moves the front fusing guide by 1 mm.
7. Retighten the four screws for the front fusing guide.
8. Print out the test pattern and check the image quality.
9. If the symptom still occurs, repeat the above steps.
6.3.6 LOUD SQUEAKING NOISE FROM PCDU

Symptom:
A loud squeaking noise can be heard when two of the following conditions are met:
High image coverage
High original-to-copy ratio (1-to-x)
Printing at half speed
shooting
Trouble -
Cause:
Normally, silica inside the toner is deposited on the drum surface over a long period of time,
some of which is removed by the cleaning blade. However, when two or more of the
conditions above are met, the rate of deposit accelerates, and eventually the blade cannot
run across the drum surface smoothly.
Solution:
If this problem is reported, replace the standard spring with the modified spring (P/N
AA063690).
Side Effect:
The part life of the PCU may be shortened.
SM 6-97 D104/D016
Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the front cover [A] from the PCDU ( x 2).
2. Slide the upper cover [A] of the drum unit as shown and remove it.
3. Carefully lift up the metal plate [A], and then remove the spring [B] at the front side and
rear side.
Be careful not to bend the metal plate.
D104/D016 6-98 SM
4. Attach the modified spring [A] to the boss [B] on the lubricant holder.
5. Install the metal plate [C] in the spring [A] so that the modified spring is kept between the
boss [B] on the lubricant holder and the metal plate.
[A]: Standard spring (P/N: AA063887)

[B]: Modified spring (P/N: AA063690)
The modified spring [B] is black, and about 3 mm shorter than the old spring.
6. Reattach the upper cover of the drum unit.
7. Reattach the front cover to the PCDU ( x 2), and then reinstall the PCDU in the
shooting
machine. Trouble -
6.3.7 LOUD NOISE FROM THE PAPER TRAY

Symptom:
A loud vibration can be heard while the paper is being fed from the paper tray.
Cause:
The excessive pressure between the feed roller and friction pad of the paper tray causes a
loud vibration due to the incorrect position of the maylar at the friction pad.
Solution:
Reinstall the friction pad in the correct position. For details, see "Friction Pad" in the section
"Replacement and Adjustment".
SM 6-99 D104/D016
6.3.8 GRAINY IMAGE

If grainy images are reported from the field, use the following flowchart to take action in
response to the eight conditions.
D104/D016 6-100 SM
Possible Cause List
Cause 1: Grainy Image on Rough Surface Paper

When the surface of the paper is relatively rough, the strength of the electrical field
between the ITB and the "sunken" areas in the paper weakens, causing low image
density only in these areas.
Action Procedure
1. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode,
select "CMY+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described
below.
2. Change the paper transfer bias. For details, see "Action 2A" described below.
3. Increase the amount of the toner per area (M/A). For details, see "Action 3"
described below.
4. Ask a customer to change paper from high resistant paper to more smooth paper.
Cause 2: Grainy Image on Humid Paper

The surface resistance of paper such as humid paper is low, and the electrical field for
the paper transfer is weak.
Action Procedure
1. Ask a customer to keep paper in dry condition.
2. Turn on the tray heater if it has already been installed or ask a customer to install the
optional tray heater.
shooting
3. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, Trouble -
below.
4. Change the paper transfer bias. For details, see "Action 2A" described below.
described below.
Cause 3: Grainy Image on 2nd Side of Paper

This may be caused by the resistance value difference from 1st side and 2nd side paper.
The resistance of the 2nd side paper is changed after the paper has passed the fusing
unit. As a result, the resistance of 2nd side paper which has passed the fusing unit is out
SM 6-101 D104/D016
of the range for the standard resistance of paper.
Action Procedure
below.
2. Change the paper transfer bias. For details, see "Action 2B" described below.
described below.
4. Ask a customer to change paper from rough surface paper to more smooth paper.
Cause 4: Grainy Image on Small Size Paper

The transfer current tends to leak at the non paper area of the paper transfer roller. As a
result, insufficient transfer current causes a grainy image when using small size paper in
the high temperature and high humidity condition.
Action Procedure
below.
2. Use the A4 LEF paper. If A4 LEF paper does not solve the grainy image, check the
other causes (Cause 1, 2 and 3)
3. Change the paper size correction coefficient. For details, see "Action 4" described
below.
described below.
5. Ask a customer to change paper from high resistant paper to more smooth paper.
D104/D016 6-102 SM
Cause 5: Blur Uneven Black Image

The resistance difference between the image transfer roller and image transfer belt
causes the blur uneven black image when printing a high coverage image. This symptom
tends to occur especially just after initial machine installation.
Action Procedure
1. Leave a machine for several hours if this symptom appears just after initial machine
installation.
below.
3. Decrease the target development gamma. For details, see "Action 5" described
below.
4. Decrease the image transfer roller current for black and paper transfer roller current.
For details, see "Action 6" described below.
Cause 6: Grainy Image on High Resistance Small Paper

The transfer current tends to leak at the non paper area of the paper transfer roller. As a
result, insufficient transfer current causes a grainy image when using high resistance
paper such as photo paper and OHP.
Action Procedure
1. Change the feeding direction from SEF to LEF.
2. Change the paper size correction coefficient. For details, see "Action 4" described
shooting
below. Trouble -
Cause 7: Grainy Image on OHP

The grainy image, which includes white dots, occurs when using OHP in the low
temperature and low humidity condition.
Action Procedure
Change the environmental correction table of the paper transfer roller for OHP. For
details, see "Action 8" described below.
SM 6-103 D104/D016
Cause 8: Bk Grainy Image on High Smoothness Paper

The black solid image may become grainy on the high smoothness paper when the black
solid area is printed in the full color printing mode. This is because the transfer current for
the full color printing is excessive for the high smoothness paper. (Basically the transfer
current for the monochrome printing is lower than the transfer current for the full color
printing.)
Action Procedure
Select "CMY+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described
below.
Action List
Action 1
With this setting for PCL, all BW images are printed using process black, including text.
Action Procedure
Select "CMY+K" with the PCL printer driver. (Print Quality -> Color: Manual -> Gray
reproduction -> CMY+K)
Action 2A
Changing the PTR current for each paper type can solve the grainy image for the 1st side
of paper.
Action Procedure
1. Increase the PTR current for the 1st side of paper in steps of 2 A until +6 A from the
default value.
B/W mode/ Normal speed: SP2-403-001
B/W mode/ Low speed: SP2-403-003
Full Color mode/ Normal speed: SP2-407-001
Full Color mode/ Low speed: SP2-407-003
2. If the grainy images get worse, decrease the PTR current in steps of 2 A until -6 A
from the default value.
D104/D016 6-104 SM
3. If the grainy images only occur when using a specific type of paper, set the Paper Type
setting to one of the Special Paper settings as follows.
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 1.
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thin Paper, Coated Paper: Gloss
Select Special Paper 1, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
B/W mode: SP2-783-001
Full Color mode: SP2-787-001
Action 2B
Changing the PTR current for each paper type can solve the grainy image for the 2nd
side of paper.
Action Procedure
1. Increase the PTR current for the 2nd side of paper in steps of 2 A until +6 A from the
default value.
shooting
Full Color mode/ Low speed: SP2-407-004 Trouble -
2. If the grainy images get worse, decrease the PTR current in steps of 2 A until -6 A
from the default value.
3. If the grainy images only occur when using a specific type of paper, set the Paper Type
setting to one of the Special Paper settings as follows.
SM 6-105 D104/D016
B/W mode: SP2-783-001
Full Color mode: SP2-787-001
Basically, there are different setting values for 1st side and 2nd side of thick paper
when using the by-pass printing mode. When using thick paper in the by-pass
printing mode, adjust the PTR current of Special Paper 4 for the 2nd side of thick
paper. Always use the adjusted setting of Special Paper 4 when the 2nd side of thick
paper is fed from the by-pass tray.
Action 3
Increase the amount of the toner per area (M/A). However, too much toner may cause
the toner blasting.
Action Procedure
1. Set the following SP modes to the values highlighted in bold.
Set the setting of SP3-501-001 to 0.500 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: Bk.
Set the setting of SP3-501-002 to 0.495 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: C.
Set the setting of SP3-501-003 to 0.495 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: M.
Set the setting of SP3-501-004 to 0.495 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: Y.
2. Execute Process Control with SP3-011-001.
Action 4
Changing the correction value of the PTR current for each paper size can solve the
grainy image.
The paper size correction coefficient setting for non-special paper types is applied to several
different paper types at once. This can create side effects for paper types on which the
symptom is not occurring. Therefore, if you only want to change the setting for one type, use
the Special Paper settings.
Action Procedure
1. Increase the correction value of the PTR current for each paper size in steps of 10%
against the default setting for each SP mode until +30% against the default setting of
each SP mode.
D104/D016 6-106 SM
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 1, 2
or 3.
Select Special Paper 1, 2 or 3, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode for Plain Paper: SP2-411-001 to -020
Full Color mode for Plain Paper: SP2-412-001 to -020
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 4, 5
or 6.
Select Special Paper 4, 5 or 6, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode for Thick Paper: SP2-511-001 to -017
Full Color mode for Thick Paper: SP2-512-001 to -017.
2. If the grainy images get worse, decrease the correction value of the PTR current for each
paper size in steps of -10% against the default setting for each SP mode until -30%
against the default setting of each SP mode.
If the special paper setting which is proper for this action procedure has already been used
for the other paper setting, change the following SPs of non-special paper types.
B/W mode for Special 1, 2 and 3: SP2-761-005 to -020
Full Color mode for Special 1, 2 and 3: SP2-762-005 to -020
B/W mode for Special 4, 5 and 6: SP2-791-005 to -020
Full Color mode for Special 4, 5 and 6: SP2-792-005 to -020
Action 5
Decreasing the target gamma for the developer can solve the grainy image.
shooting
Action Procedure Trouble -
1. Change the setting of SP3-611-009 from "0.90" to "0.85".

2. Execute the SP3-011-001.
Action 6
Decreasing the transfer current values for the ITB roller and PTR can solve the grainy
image in the BW printing mode. However, decreasing the transfer current of the ITB roller
affects other settings (paper type and size) and may cause a light toner image for some
paper type and size.
SM 6-107 D104/D016
Action Procedure
Change the settings of SP2-351-001 by -2 A or SP2-351-003 by -1 A.
1. Decrease the transfer current of the PTR for each paper type by 1 A until -4 A from
the default setting.
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Plain Paper: SP2-403-001 to -004
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Thin Paper: SP2-453-001 and -003
B/W mode/ Low speed for Glossy Paper: SP2-482-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Thick 1: SP2-502-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Thick 2: SP 2-553-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for OHP: SP 2-603-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Thick 3: SP 2-651-001
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Middle Thick Paper: SP2-703-001 to -004
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Special 1 Paper: SP2-753-001 to -004
B/W mode/ Low speed for Special 4 Paper: SP2-783-001
If the result of step 2 is not satisfactory, change the settings of SP2-351-001 by -2 A or
SP2-351-003 by -1 A again and then decrease the transfer current of the PTR for each
paper type by 1 A until -4 A from the default setting again.
D104/D016 6-108 SM
Action 7
Increasing the transfer current for the PTR can solve the grainy image on small size
paper. Use Special 4, Special 5 or Special 6 for the small size paper setting. It is because
the adjusted transfer current for small size paper is very different from the transfer current
for normal paper.
Action Procedure
1. Increase the settings of the PTR transfer current corrections for each paper size until a
grainy image on small size paper is solved.
B/W mode: SP2-791-005 to -017
Full color mode: SP2-791-005 to -017
Action 8
Increasing the transfer current for the PTR can solve the grainy image on OHP in the full
color printing.
Action Procedure
1. Change the setting of SP2-608-001 from 20 A to 18 A.
2. Change the setting of SP2-630-003 from 47 to 11.
3. If the result of steps 1 and 2 are not satisfactory, decrease the setting of SP2-608-001 by
1 A until a grainy image on OHP in the full color printing.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-109 D104/D016
6.3.9 TONER SUPPLY ERROR

If the toner end message is displayed even though the toner bottle still has toner in itself,
check the following points.
1. Check if the setting of SP3044-001 to -004 is set to "4".
2. Check if the toner supply motor for each color works correctly with SP5804-071 to -074.
Replace the toner supply motor with a new motor if it is defective.
3. Check if the red mark is painted besides the black cord of the toner supply motor. The left
picture [A] shows a correct motor and right picture [B] shows a malfunction motor.
Replace the toner supply motor with a new motor if the red mark is painted besides
the red cord of the toner supply motor.
4. Check if the gear [A] of the toner supply motor is attached to the motor shaft.
Replace the toner supply motor with a new motor if the gear of the toner supply
motor is not attached to the motor shaft.
5. Check if the toner supply drive shaft is correctly installed.
Install the tone supply drive shaft correctly if not.
D104/D016 6-110 SM
6.3.10 PAPER JAM TROUBLESHOOTING

This explains the troubleshooting for each paper jam code; Jam code 3, 4, 8, 11, 12, 17, 19,
51, 52 and 59. Refer to the following troubleshooting procedure corresponding to the paper
jam code.
Jam 3: Paper is not fed from Tray 1.

1. Pull out the tray 1 and tray 2 from the machine ( x 2 each).
2. Turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-005 (Output check: Paper Feed
M1:CCW:190mm/s).
3. Check if the feed roller shaft [A] for the tray 1 rotates.
shooting
Trouble -
4. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051164 if the feed roller shaft does not rotate.
SM 6-111 D104/D016
5. Open the duplex unit with the paper feed motor rotating.
6. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 1 gently with a small piece
of paper, as shown above.
7. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.
8. Ask a customer to fix the end fence and side fences in the tray 1 with the end fence
stopper and screws installed in the tray 1.
For details about fixing the end fence of the paper tray, see "Fixing the End Fence of
the Paper Tray" described below.
9. Instruct the customer to press down the paper stack until the bottom plate of the tray 1 is
locked when loading paper in the paper tray.
D104/D016 6-112 SM
Fixing the End Fence of the Paper Tray

1. Pull out the paper tray from the machine.
2. Hold the sides of the end fence [A], and then move it to the position as shown above.
3. Turn over the paper tray [A].
shooting
4. Install the end fence stopper [B] in the notch [C] of the end fence. Trouble -
5. Install the screw [A] loosely in the end fence stopper.

6. Turn over the paper tray, and then adjust the end fence for the paper size to be used.
SM 6-113 D104/D016
7. Pull the end fence stopper [A], and then tighten the screw.
8. Make sure that the end fence is firmly fixed.
Jam 4: Paper is not fed from Tray 2.

1. Pull out the tray 1 and tray 2 from the machine ( x 2 each).
M2:CCW:190mm/s).
3. Check if the feed roller shaft [A] for the tray 2 rotates.
D104/D016 6-114 SM
4. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051164 if the feed roller shaft does not rotate.
5. Open the lower right door with the paper feed motor rotating.
shooting
of paper, as shown above. Trouble -
SM 6-115 D104/D016
8. Ask a customer to fix the end fence and side fences in the tray 1 with the end fence
stopper and screws installed in the tray 1.
For details about fixing the end fence of the paper tray, see "Fixing the End Fence of
the Paper Tray" described below.
9. Instruct the customer to press down the paper stack until the bottom plate of the tray 1 is
locked when loading paper in the paper tray.
D104/D016 6-116 SM
Fixing the End Fence of the Paper Tray

1. Pull out the paper tray from the machine.
2. Hold the sides of the end fence [A], and then move it to the position as shown above.
3. Turn over the paper tray [A].
shooting
4. Install the end fence stopper [B] in the notch [C] of the end fence. Trouble -
5. Install the screw [A] loosely in the end fence stopper.

6. Turn over the paper tray, and then adjust the end fence for the paper size to be used.
SM 6-117 D104/D016
7. Pull the end fence stopper [A], and then tighten the screw.
8. Make sure that the end fence is firmly fixed.
Jam 8: Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray.

1. Remove the paper from the trays 1 and 2.
3. Turn on the paper feed motor on using SP5-804-001 (Output check: Paper Feed
M2:CW:190mm/s).
D104/D016 6-118 SM
Jam 11: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect paper from the tray
1.
2. Open the lower right door.
3. Turn on the paper feed motor on using SP5-804-009 (Output check: Paper Feed
M2:CW:190mm/s).
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-119 D104/D016
5. Replace the one-way clutch with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.
6. If Jam 11 still occurs, replace the brackets [A] [B] for the vertical transport covers (Front:
P/N D0392943, Rear: P/N D0392944).
D104/D016 6-120 SM
Jam 12: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect paper from Tray 2.
1. Remove the lower guide bracket ( p.4-120 "
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-121 D104/D016
2. Vertical Transport Sensor ")
3. Press down on the vertical transport sensor bracket in the area around the emboss
(bead) [A] as shown above.
4. If there is a gap between this area of the bracket and the frame underneath it, replace the
bracket with P/N D0392929.
5. If Jam 11 still occurs, replace the brackets [A] [B] for the vertical transport covers (Front:
P/N D0392943, Rear: P/N D0392944).
Jam 17: Registration sensor does not detect paper.

M2:CW:190mm/s).
D104/D016 6-122 SM
6. If Jam 17 still occurs, turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-009 (Output check:
shooting
Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/s). Trouble -
SM 6-123 D104/D016
Jam 51/ Jam 52: Vertical transport sensor 1/2 does not turn off.
1. Open the lower right door.
2. Replace the brackets for the vertical transport covers (Front: P/N D0392943, Rear: P/N
D0392944).
Jam 59: Fusing exit sensor does not turn off.

If Jam 59 occurs frequently, replace the fusing exit sensor bracket (D0394952) ( p.4-126
"Fusing Exit Sensor").
D104/D016 6-124 SM
6.3.11 NO FEED PAPER JAM FROM PFU

Symptom:
A non-feed paper jam occurs when the machine tries to feed relatively heavy weight paper
from the PFU.
Cause:
There is not enough pressure on the top sheet of paper stack to separate it from the other
sheets.
Solution:
1. Instruct a customer to adjust the amount of paper stuck in the PFU when using heavy
weight paper types.
If the customer wants to use the heavy weight paper in the full load condition, try
step 2.
shooting
Trouble -
2. Replace the pressure tension springs (P/N D3312773) as shown above with special
springs (P/N D3312774) ( "Lift Motors" under the chapter Replacement and
Adjustment" of the PFU service manual).
Side Effect:
These "special springs" will increase the paper feed pressure. Therefore, if a customer uses
thin paper types after installing "special springs", multi-feeds may occur.
SM 6-125 D104/D016
6.3.12 SETTING FOR SPECIAL PAPER 4, 5 AND 6 MODE
Default Settings for Special Paper Modes
Fusing Temperature
Paper Transfer Current
600 dpi 1200 dpi
Same as Middle Same as Middle

Special Paper 1 Same as Middle Thick
Thick (155°C) Thick (130°C)
Special Paper 2 Same as Middle Thick 160°C 135°C
Special Paper 3 Same as Middle Thick 150°C 125°C
Same as Thick
Special Paper 4 Same as Thick Paper 1 -
Paper 1 (150°C)
Same as Thick
Special Paper 5 Same as Thick Paper 1 -
Paper 1 (160°C)
Special Paper 6 Same as Thick Paper 1 145°C -
Special Paper 1-3 are designed for plain paper and Middle Thick paper types.
Special Paper 4-6 are designed for paper types equivalent to Thick paper 1 or thicker.
Special Paper 2-3 and 5-6 are intended to solve specific types of image problems, and
Special Paper 1 and 4 are intended to be used as a customized mode if modes 2-6 are
ineffective.
Special Paper 1:
Use this mode if the issue occurs only with a specific type of Plain Paper of Middle Thick
Paper, and you need to change (customize) the paper transfer current and/or fusing
temperature settings. The default settings for this mode are exactly the same as those for
Middle Thick.
Special Paper 2:
Use this mode if poor fusing occurs only with a specific type of Plain Paper or Middle Thick
Paper.
Special Paper 3:
Use this mode if blistered images occur only with a specific type of Plain Paper of Middle
Thick Paper.
D104/D016 6-126 SM
Special Paper 4:
Use this mode if the issue occurs only with a specific type of Thick Paper, and you need to
change (customize) the paper transfer current and/or fusing temperature settings. The default
settings for this mode are exactly the same as those for Thick Paper 1.
Special Paper 5:
Use this mode if poor fusing occurs only with a specific type of Thick Paper.
Special Paper 6:
Use this mode if blistered images occur only with a specific type of Thick Paper.
How to select the proper Special Paper mode

With this model, you cannot select Special Paper 4, 5, and 6 from the operation panel or
inside the printer driver. Therefore, if you want to use these modes, select the following
instead:
Copy Mode
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the target tray as follows:
Equivalent to Paper Type Paper Thickness
Special Paper 1 Special Paper 1 Plain Paper or Middle Thick
Special Paper 4 Special Paper 1 Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3
shooting
Trouble -
2. Select the target tray and make copies.
SM 6-127 D104/D016
Printer Mode
Refer to the following table of recommended settings.
System Setting (Tray Paper Setting)
Paper Tray Paper Type Paper Thickness
Plain Paper or
Tray 1 to 4 Special Paper 1 to 3
Middle Thick
Bypass Tray
Special Paper 1 to
(Driver/Command Any setting Any setting
3
Priority)
Bypass Tray (Machine Plain Paper or

Special Paper 1 to 3
Setting Priority) Middle Thick
Tray 1 to 2
Special Paper 4 to
Tray 3 to 4 Special Paper 4 to 6 Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3
6
Bypass Tray
Printer Driver Setting
Paper Tray Paper Source Tray Paper Type
Tray 1 to 4 Target Tray
Bypass Tray
Special Paper 1 to (Driver/Command
3 Priority) Bypass Tray
Bypass Tray (Machine

Setting Priority)
Tray 1 to 2 Target Tray None
Special Paper 4 to Not Available (Tray 3 and 4 do not have

Tray 3 to 4
6 thick paper capability.)
Bypass Tray Bypass Tray None
D104/D016 6-128 SM
Paper Trays (Trays 1– 4)
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the target tray.
2. Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" and "Paper Type" to the same tray
and paper type that you selected in Step 1 above.
Bypass Tray
"Driver/Command" Priority (default)
Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" to the bypass tray, and the "Paper
Type" to Special Paper 1, 2, or 3.
The machine will ignore the "Paper Type" setting in User Tools.
"Machine Setting" Priority
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the bypass tray.
shooting
Special Paper 2 Special Paper 2 Plain Paper or Middle Thick Trouble -
2. Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" to the bypass tray, and the "Paper
Type" to the same paper type that you selected in Step 1 above.
SM 6-129 D104/D016
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the target tray.
2. Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" to the target tray (from Step 1
above), and Paper Type to "None".
SP Modes for Setting the Paper Type

RTR Current ( A) = RTR standard current ( A) x Paper size correction co-efficient (%) x X
Plain Paper
Resolution
RTR standard Paper size correction co-efficient
Mode (Process Print side
current ( A) (%)
Speed)
600dpi Face side 2-403-001 2-411-005(S2),009(S3),013(S4),017(S5)
(120mm/s) Back side 2-403-002 2-411-006(S2),010(S3),014(S4),018(S5)

BW

Color
D104/D016 6-130 SM
Middle Thick
Resolution RTR standard

Paper size correction co-efficient
Mode (Process Print side current
(%)
Speed) ( A)
600dpi Face side 2-703-001
(120mm/s) Back side 2-703-002

BW Common with the Plain Paper 1
(60mm/s) Back side 2-703-004
(120mm/s) Back side 2-707-002

Color Common with the Plain Paper 1
(60mm/s) Back side 2-707-004
Thin Paper

Print Paper size correction co-efficient
Mode (Process current
side (%)
Speed) ( A)
shooting
600dpi
Face Trouble -
side 2-453-001
(120mm/s)
Only
BW Common with the Plain Paper 1
Face
1200dpi
side 2-453-003
(60mm/s)
Only
Face
600dpi
side 2-457-001
(120mm/s)
Color Only Common with the Plain Paper 1
1200dpi Face
2-457-003
(60mm/s) side
SM 6-131 D104/D016
Only
Coated Paper Gloss

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
BW 60mm/s Only side 2-482-001
Only
Common with the Plain Paper 1
Face
60mm/s
Color side 2-483-001
Only
Only
Thick Paper 1

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
2-511-005(S2), 009(S3),
BW 60mm/s Only side 2-502-001
013(S4), 017(S5)
Only
Face
60mm/s 2-512-005(S2), 009(S3),
Only 013(S4), 017(S5)
Only
D104/D016 6-132 SM
Thick Paper 2

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
60mm/s
BW side 2-553-001
Only
Only
Common with the Thick Paper 1
Face
60mm/s
Only
Only
Thick Paper 3

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
60mm/s
BW side 2-651-001
Only
Only
Common with the Thick Paper 1
Face
60mm/s
shooting
Trouble -
Only
Only
SM 6-133 D104/D016
OHP
Resolution RTR standard Paper size correction

Print
Mode (Process current co-efficient
side
Speed) ( A) (%)
Face
60mm/s
BW side 2-603-001
Only
Only Common with the Thickl Paper
Face 1
60mm/s
Only
Only
Special Paper 1

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face 2-761-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

2-753-001
600dpi side 017(S5)
(120mm/s) Back 2-761-006(S2), 010(S3), 014(S4),

2-753-002
side 018(S5)
BW
Face 2-761-007(S2), 011(S3), 015(S4),
2-753-003
1200dpi side 019(S5)
(60mm/s) Back 2-761-008(S2), 012(S3), 016(S4),

2-753-004
side 020(S5)
Face 2-762-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

2-757-001
600dpi side 017(S5)
(120mm/s) Back 2-762-006(S2), 010(S3), 014(S4),

Color 2-757-002
side 018(S5)
1200dpi Face 2-762-007(S2), 011(S3), 015(S4),

2-757-003
(60mm/s) side 019(S5)
D104/D016 6-134 SM
Back 2-762-008(S2), 012(S3), 016(S4),

2-757-004
side 020(S5)
Special Paper 2

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
2-803-001
600dpi side
(120mm/s) Back
2-803-002
side
BW Common with the Special Paper 1
Face
2-803-003
1200dpi side
(60mm/s) Back
2-803-004
side
Face
2-807-001
600dpi side
(120mm/s) Back
2-807-002
side
Color Common with the Special Paper 1
Face
2-807-003
shooting
Trouble -
1200dpi side
(60mm/s) Back
2-807-004
side
SM 6-135 D104/D016
Special Paper 3

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
600dpi Face
2-852-001
(120mm/s) side
BW
1200dpi Face
2-852-003
(60mm/s) side
Common with the Special Paper 1
600dpi Face
2-857-001
(120mm/s) side
Color
1200dpi Face
2-857-003
(60mm/s) side
Special Paper 4

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
60mm/s 2-791-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),
BW side 2-783-001
Only 017(S5)
Only
Face
60mm/s 2-792-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),
Only 017(S5)
Only
D104/D016 6-136 SM
Special Paper 5

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
60mm/s
BW side 2-833-001
Only
Only
Face
60mm/s
Only
Only
Special Paper 6

side (%)
Speed) ( A)
Face
60mm/s
BW side 2-883-001
Only
Only
Face
60mm/s
shooting
Trouble -
Only
Only
SM 6-137 D104/D016
Jam Detection
6.4 JAM DETECTION
6.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY

SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
CODE: Indicates the jam code.

SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.
TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
Paper Size Code
Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
05 A4 LEF 141 B4 SEF
06 A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF
14 B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF
38 LT LEF 164 LG SEF
44 HLT LEF 166 LT SEF
132 A3 SEF 172 HLT SEF
133 A4 SEF 255 Others
134 A5 SEF - -
D104/D016 6-138 SM
Jam Detection
6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES
Mainframe
SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 1 At Power On Paper is stack at power-on. Note
7504 3 Tray 1: ON Paper is not fed from tray 1. A2
7504 4 Tray 2: ON Paper is not fed from tray 2. A1
Paper is not fed from tray 3 (one-tray

7504 5 Tray 3: ON Y
paper feed unit).
7504 6 Tray 4: ON Paper is not fed from tray 4. Y
7504 8 Bypass: ON Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray. A2
7504 9 Duplex: ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit. Z
Vertical Transport 1: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not

7504 11 A1
ON detect paper from tray 1.
Vertical Transport 2: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not

7504 12 Y
ON detect paper from tray 2.
shooting
Trouble -
Registration sensor does not detect
7504 17 Registration: ON A2
paper.
Fusing entrance sensor does not detect

7504 18 Fusing Entrance: ON B
paper.
Fusing exit sensor does not detect

7504 19 Fusing Exit: ON C
paper.
7504 20 Paper Exit: ON Paper exit sensor does not detect paper. C
Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not

7504 21 Relay Exit: ON D
detect paper.
SM 6-139 D104/D016
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 24 Inverter Sn: ON Inverter sensor does not detect paper. C
Duplex exit sensor does not detect

7504 25 Duplex Exit: ON Z
paper.
Duplex entrance sensor does not detect

7504 27 Duplex Entrance: ON Z
paper.
1-bin tray exit sensor does not detect

7504 28 1-Bin Exit Sensor C
paper.
Paper exit sensor of the side tray does

7504 29 R-tray Paper Exit: ON C
not detect paper.
Vertical Transport Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn

7504 51 A1, A2
Sensor1 off.

7504 52 Y
Sensor2 off.

7504 53 Y
Sensor3 off.
7504 57 Registration Sensor Registration sensor does not turn off. B
Fusing Entrance Fusing entrance sensor does not turn

7504 58 C
Sensor off.
7504 59 Fusing Exit Sensor Fusing exit sensor does not turn off. C
7504 60 Exit Sensor Paper exit sensor does not turn off. C
7504 64 Inverter Sensor Inverter sensor does not turn off. C
7504 65 Duplex Exit Sensor Duplex exit sensor does not turn off. Z
Duplex Entrance Duplex entrance sensor does not turn

7504 67 Z
Sensor off.
7504 68 1-Bin Exit: ON 1-bin tray exit sensor does not turn off. R
R-tray Paper Exit Paper exit sensor of the side tray does
7504 69 W
Sensor not turn off.
D104/D016 6-140 SM
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
The machine does not get paper exit

7504 230 FIN:Paper Exit Error R1, R2
data from the internal finisher.
The machine gets a command error

7504 231 FIN:Command Error R1, R2
from the internal finisher.
Entrance sensor of the internal finisher C, R1,

7504 240 Fin. Entrance: ON
does not detect paper. R2
Entrance sensor of the internal finisher

7504 241 Fin. Entrance Sensor R1, R2
does not turn off.
The mainframe detects the lock signal

7504 242 Feed-Out Belt Motor from the paper transport motor of the R1, R2
internal finisher.

7504 243 Stapler Motor from the staple motor of the internal R1, R2
finisher.

7504 244 Jogger Motor from the front or rear jogger motor of the R1, R2
internal finisher.

Pick-Up Roller Lift
7504 245 from the pick-up roller contact motor of R1, R2
Motor
shooting
Trouble -
the internal finisher.

Stapler Unit Drive
7504 246 from the stapler unit movement motor of R1, R2
Motor
the punch unit.

7504 247 Output Tray Motor from the feed motor of the internal R1, R2
finisher.
The mainframe detects the belt lift

7504 248 Belt Lift Solenoid R1, R2
solenoid error from the internal finisher.
7504 249 Finisher Fan The mainframe detects the finisher fan R1, R2
SM 6-141 D104/D016
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
error from the internal finisher.

7504 250 Punch Motor R1, R2
from the punch motor.

7504 251 Finisher Proof Exit from the registration motor of the punch R1, R2
unit.
FIN:Stapler Position The stapler unit stays on the jogger end

7504 252 R1, R2
Error fence so that stapling is disabled.
Unexpected job data is sent to the

7504 253 FIN:Job Data Error R1, R2
internal finisher from the mainframe.
The jam location display depends on where a paper jam is detected at power-on.
ARDF (Original Jam)
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7505 1 At Power On Original is stack at power-on. P
Skew correction sensor does not detect

7505 3 Skew Correction: ON P
paper.
Registration sensor does not detect

7505 4 Registration: ON P
paper.
7505 5 Paper Exit: ON Exit Sensor does not detect paper. P
Skew correction sensor does not turn

7505 53 Skew Correction: OFF P
off.
7505 54 Registration: OFF Registration sensor does not turn off. P
7505 55 Paper Exit: OFF Exit Sensor does not turn off. P
D104/D016 6-142 SM
Jam Detection
Sensor Locations
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-143 D104/D016
Electrical Component Defects
6.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
6.5.1 SENSORS
The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the BCU.
Sensor Name/
No. Active CN Condition Symptom
Sensor Board Name
"Open Cover" is
Open
Duplex Unit Open displayed.
SW4 L CN232/2
Switch "Open cover" cannot be
Shorted
detected.
Open/
ID Sensor: Front A CN214/8, 9 SC400
Shorted
Open/
S5 ID Sensor: Center A CN214/6, 7 SC400
Shorted
Open/
ID Sensor: Rear A CN214/2, 3 SC400
Shorted
Open/
S19 PTR Contact Sensor H CN232/4 SC452
Shorted
Open Jam A2 (Jam17)

S6 Registration Sensor L CN214/11
Shorted Jam B (Jam57)
Drum Phase Sensor: Open/

S35 H CN220/2 SC380/SC396
K Shorted
Drum Phase Sensor: Open/

S36 H CN220/17 SC381/SC397
CMY Shorted
S21 Toner End Sensor - Y Toner end cannot be

Open
S22 Toner End Sensor - CN234/14, detected.
L
S23 M 17, 20, 23 Toner end is detected
S24 Toner End Sensor - C Shorted
when there is enough
D104/D016 6-144 SM
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Toner End Sensor - K toner.
Open/
S12 ITB Rotation Sensor H/L CN219/20 SC443
Shorted
Vertical Transport Open Jam A1 (Jam11)

S10 L CN219/10
Sensor 1 Shorted Jam A1, A2 (Jam51)
Paper end is not

detected when there is
Open
no paper in the paper
S8 Paper End CN214/17, tray.
L
S9 Sensor 1, 2 19
Paper end is detected
Shorted when there is paper in
the paper tray.
Vertical Transport Open Jam Y (Jam12)

S11 L CN219/15
Sensor 2 Shorted Jam Y (Jam52)
Open/
Paper size error
Tray 1 Paper Size CN211/11, Shorted
SW6 L
Switch 12, 13, 15 Tray 1 is detected when
Shorted
tray 1 is not set.
shooting
By-pass Paper Size CN221/9, Open/ Trouble -
S13 L Paper size error
Sensor 10, 12, 13 Shorted
Paper on the by-pass

Open tray is not detected
By-pass Paper End when paper is set.

S15 L CN221/18
Sensor Paper on the by-pass
Shorted tray is detected when
paper is not set.
By-pass Paper Open

S14 L CN221/15 Paper size error
Length Sensor Shorted
SM 6-145 D104/D016
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Open/
S16 By-pass HP Sensor H CN221/21 SC508
Shorted
Fusing Entrance Open Jam B (Jam18)

S7 L CN214/14
Sensor Shorted Jam C (Jam58)
Duplex Entrance Open Jam Z (Jam27)

S17 L CN221/24
Sensor Shorted Jam Z (Jam67)
Open Jam Z (Jam25)

S18 Duplex Exit Sensor L CN221/27
Shorted Jam Z (Jam65)
CN212/B9, Open/
S34 TD Sensor - K A SC372
B11 Shorted
CN212/A9, Open/
S32 TD Sensor - M A SC373
A11 Shorted
CN212/B3, Open/
S33 TD Sensor - C A SC374
B5 Shorted
CN212/A3, Open/
S31 TD Sensor - Y A SC375
A5 Shorted
Open Jam C (Jam19)

S26 Fusing Exit Sensor L CN227/18
Shorted Jam C (Jam59)
Used toner near full

Open indicated when it is not
PCDU Toner near full.
S30 Collection Bottle Full H CN211/9 Used toner near full

Sensor cannot be detected
Shorted
when the waste toner
bottle is nearly full.
PCDU Toner Toner collection bottle

SW5 L CN211/7 Open
Collection Bottle Set is not detected when
D104/D016 6-146 SM
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Switch the waste toner bottle is

set.
Toner collection bottle

is detected when the
Shorted
waste toner bottle is not
set.
Used toner near full

Open indicated when it is not
near full.
S29 H CN211/4 Used toner near full
Bottle Full Sensor
cannot be detected
Shorted
when the waste toner
bottle is nearly full.
Open/
Paper size error
Tray 2 Paper Size CN211/16, Shorted
SW7 L
Switch 17, 18, 20 Tray 2 is detected when
Shorted
the tray 2 is not set.
Printed image has

some problems such as
Temperature/ CN222/15, Open/
S37 A rough image, dirty
shooting
Trouble -
Humidity Sensor 17 Shorted
background, weak
image or poor fusing.
Open/
S28 Thermopile A CN237/14 SC541
Shorted
Heating Roller Open/

TH1 A CN233/4 SC551
Thermistor Shorted
Pressure Roller Open/

TH2 A CN233/11 SC561
Thermistor 1 (Center) Shorted
Pressure Roller Open/

TH3 A CN233/9 SC571
Thermistor 2 (Ends) Shorted
SM 6-147 D104/D016
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Open Jam C (Jam20)

S27 Paper Exit Sensor L CN227/21
Original Length Open/ Original paper size

S1 A CN206/2
Sensor 1 Shorted cannot be detected.
Original Length Open/ Original paper size

S2 A CN206/5
Sensor 2 Shorted cannot be detected.
Open SC120
S3 Scanner HP Sensor H CN205/2
Shorted SC121
Open/ Platen cover open

S4 Platen Cover Sensor L CN205/5
Shorted cannot be detected.
Open/
S20 ITB Contact Sensor L CN234/5 SC442
Shorted
Open Jam C (Jam 24)

S25 Inverter Sensor L CN227/15
"Open Cover" is
Open
Right Lower Door displayed.
SW2 L CN219/13
Open Switch "Open cover" cannot be
Shorted
detected.
D104/D016 6-148 SM
6.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Power Supply Unit
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
120V 220V - 240V
The controller works, but SC547 is issued. (5V

FU101 15A/125V 8A/250V
power to the fusing unit is not supplied.)
No response. (5V power to the PSU is not

FU102 10A/125V 5A/250V
supplied.)
AC power to the scanner heater and tray heater

FU103 2A/250V 2A/250V
is not supplied.
FU5 5A/250V 5A/250V 5V power to the BCU is not supplied.
FU6 5A/250V 5A/250V 5VS power to the controller is not supplied.
FU7 10A/125V 10A/250V 24VS power to the BCU is not supplied.
FU8 10A/125V 10A/250V 24VS power to the BCU is not supplied.
24V power to the DRB and controller is not

FU9 10A/125V 10A/250V
supplied.
shooting
Trouble -
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating
of fuse.
SM 6-149 D104/D016
Scanner Test Mode
6.6 SCANNER TEST MODE
6.6.1 SBU TEST MODE

Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control
operates correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings
and pressed the start key.
The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal and the SBU test
pattern is normal.
The followings can be the cause if the copy is normal and the SBU test pattern is
abnormal:
The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the IPU.
The IPU or SBU board may be defective.
6.6.2 IPU TEST MODE

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1.
If no error is detected, the test ends. Then the completion code shows in the operation panel
display. If an error is detected, the test is interrupted. Then an error code shows. The table
below lists the completion and error codes.
SP4-904-1 Register Access

There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates a different CPU. The error result is
displayed on the operation panel as a decimal number.
0: Normal, 1: Error
D104/D016 6-150 SM
Scanner Test Mode
SP4-904-2 Image Path

There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates a different CPU path. The error result
is displayed on the operation panel as a decimal number.
0: Normal, 1: Error
Errors may be caused by the following problems:
1. Short circuit on the signal lines
When the IPU board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged.
Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins.
Condensation
2. Destruction of circuit elements
Over current or a defective element breaks the circuit.
3. Abnormal power supply
•The required voltage is not supplied to the devices.
4. Overheat/overcooling
The environment is inappropriate for the board (the scanner unit).
5. Static electricity
Static electricity of a high voltage occurs during the test.
6. Others
The scanner and IPU are incorrectly connected.
When you have completed a check, turn the main switch off and on before you do another
check. When you have completed all necessary checks, turn the main switch off and on.
shooting
Trouble -
SM 6-151 D104/D016
ENERGY SAVING
None
Energy Save
7. ENERGY SAVING
7.1 ENERGY SAVE
7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the
environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when
the timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be
different. For example, if the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and
Energy
Saving
no energy is saved before 240 min. expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
Auto off timer (1 – 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode
Default settings: 1 min.
Return to Stand-by Mode

Off/Sleep Mode
Recovery time.
DI-C1.5: Min. 10 sec.
SM 7-1 D104/D016
Energy Save
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their
energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the
environment of extra energy use.
If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is
not too long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one
(such as 60 min.) if the customer is not satisfied.
If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy
until 240 minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has
finished using the machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be
saved.
If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as
explained below.
7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in
each mode.
8941-001: Operating mode
8941-002: Standby mode
8941-003: Panel off mode (Not used in this model)
8941-004: Low power mode (Not used in this model)
8941-005: Off/sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate
the amount of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption
specifications are measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure
the actual energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005.
At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again.
Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the
later measurement).
Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
Here is an example calculation.
D104/D016 7-2 SM
Energy Save
Time Power
Differences Consumption
Power SP8941: Start Time: End Time:
Machine (Data:b - (Data:a x
Consumption Machine (min.) (min.)
Date Data: c) Data:d)
(W): Data: a Status Data: b Data: c
(min.) Data: (Wmin.)
d Data: e
001:
Operating
1081.8 Operating 21089.0 21386.0 297.0 321294.6
mode
Time
Ready
002:
mode
214.0 Standby 306163.0 308046.0 1883.0 402962.0
(stand
Time
by)
Energy 003:
mode Energy
214.0 71386.0 75111.0 3725.0 797150.0
(Panel Save
off) Time
Low 004: Low

power 153.0 power 154084.0 156340.0 2256.0 345168.0
mode Time
005: Off
Off/Sleep
7.0 mode 508776.0 520377.0 11601.0 81207.0
mode
Time
Energy
Total Time of Data: d (min.) 19762.0 Saving
Total Time of Data: d/60min. (Hour) 329.37
Total Power Consumption of Data: e (Wmin.) 1947781.60
Total Power Consumption of Data: e /60min./1000W (KWH) 32.46
SM 7-3 D104/D016
Paper Save
7.2 PAPER SAVE
7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION

Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less
energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment.
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
D104/D016 7-4 SM
Paper Save
3. Duplex + Combine:
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even
though two sheets are used.
Recommendation
Please explain the above features to the customers, so that they can reduce their paper
usage.
Model DI-C1.5
Total counter: SP 8581-001
Energy
Saving
Duplex counter: SP 8411-001
Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421-004
Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421-005
The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple
examples of single-sided and duplex jobs
SM 7-5 D104/D016
Paper Save
Duplex mode:
Simplex Sheet Duplex Paper Total counter Duplex counter

Originals
used Sheets used Saved SP8501-001 SP8411-001
1 1 1 0 1 0
2 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 2 1 3 1
4 4 2 2 4 2
5 5 3 2 5 2
10 10 5 5 10 5
20 20 10 10 20 10
If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained
previously. The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some
simple examples of duplex/combine jobs.
2 in 1 mode:

Originals
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 2 2
4 4 2 2 2 2
5 5 3 2 3 2
10 10 5 5 5 5
20 20 10 10 10 10
D104/D016 7-6 SM
Paper Save
Duplex + 2 in 1 mode:

Originals
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 2 2 2
4 4 1 3 2 2
5 5 2 3 3 3
6 6 2 4 3 3
7 7 2 5 4 4
8 8 2 6 4 4
9 9 3 6 5 5
10 10 3 7 5 5
11 11 3 8 6 6
12 12 3 9 6 6
Energy
Saving
SM 7-7 D104/D016
D104/D106
SERVICE MANUAL
006369MIU
APPENDIX & ACCESSORIES
D104/D106
SERVICE MANUAL
(APPENDIX & ACCESSORIES)
D104/D106
SERVICE MANUAL
(APPENDIX & ACCESSORIES)
006369MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2011 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 02/2011 Original Printing
D104/D106
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D104/D106 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS ................................................... 1-1

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 COPIER ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2 PRINTER .......................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.3 SCANNER ........................................................................................ 1-6
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES .................................................................... 1-7
1.2.1 PAPER FEED ................................................................................... 1-7
North America ...................................................................................... 1-7
Europe/ Asia......................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................... 1-11
Mainframe and optional trays ............................................................. 1-11
Internal Finisher ................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION .............................. 1-15
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .................................................................. 1-17
1.3.1 PRINTER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS ............................................... 1-17
1.3.2 SCANNER DRIVER ........................................................................ 1-18
1.3.3 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..................................................................... 1-18
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 1-19
1.4.1 ARDF (D541) .................................................................................. 1-19
1.4.2 PAPER FEED UNIT (D425) ............................................................ 1-20
1.4.3 PAPER FEED UNIT (D331) ............................................................ 1-21
1.4.4 INTERNAL FINISHER (D429) AND PUNCH UNIT (D390) ............. 1-22
1.4.5 SHIFT TRAY (D428) ....................................................................... 1-23
1.4.6 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D426) ............................................................... 1-24
1.4.7 SIDE TRAY (D427) ......................................................................... 1-24
1.4.8 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3010 (D559)............................................ 1-25
SM APPENDIX i D104/D106
2. APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ................ 2-1
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS ............................................ 2-1
Mainframe ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 OTHERS YIELD PARTS................................................................... 2-4
Mainframe ............................................................................................ 2-4
ARDF (D366) ....................................................................................... 2-5
One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D425) ........................................................ 2-5
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D331) ........................................................ 2-6
1 Bin Tray (D426) ................................................................................. 2-6
Shift Tray (D427) .................................................................................. 2-6
3. APPENDIX: SP MODE TABLES.................................................. 3-1

3.1 SYSTEM SP1-XXX .................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) .............................................................................. 3-1
3.2 SYSTEM SP2XXX ................................................................................... 3-48
3.2.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)........................................................................... 3-48
3.3 SYSTEM SP3XXX ................................................................................. 3-145
3.3.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) .................................................................. 3-145
3.4 SYSTEM SP4XXX ................................................................................. 3-200
3.4.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) .................................................................. 3-200
3.5 SYSTEM SP5XXX ................................................................................. 3-226
3.5.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) ........................................................................ 3-226
3.6 SYSTEM SP6XXX ................................................................................. 3-303
3.6.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) .......................................................... 3-303
3.7 SYSTEM SP7-XXX ................................................................................ 3-306
3.7.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ................................................................. 3-306
3.8 SYSTEM SP8-XXX ................................................................................ 3-343
3.8.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2................................................................. 3-343
3.9 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK TABLES ................................................ 3-396
3.9.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE ................................................................. 3-396
Copier............................................................................................... 3-396
Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1/ 2) ............................................. 3-400
Table 2: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ............................................... 3-401
Table 3: APS Original Size Detection ............................................... 3-402
Table 4: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3/ 4) ............................................. 3-403
D104/D106 ii SM APPENDIX
ARDF (D366) ................................................................................... 3-404
Internal Finisher (D429).................................................................... 3-405
Table 5: Area Display ....................................................................... 3-406
3.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ............................................................. 3-407
Copier............................................................................................... 3-407
Internal Finisher (D429).................................................................... 3-413
ARDF (D366) ................................................................................... 3-414
3.10 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ............................................................ 3-415
3.11 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ............................................................. 3-417
3.11.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) ................................................. 3-417
3.12 SCANNER SP MODE ...................................................................... 3-428
3.12.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) ..................................... 3-428
3.12.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY) ............................. 3-430
SM APPENDIX iii D104/D106

APPENDIX:
SPECIFICATIONS
None
Specifications
1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix:
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 COPIER
Configuration: Desktop
Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system

Print Process:
4 drums tandem method
Scan: 600 dpi

Resolution:
Print: 600 dpi/ 1200 dpi
Scan: 8 bits/pixel each for RGB/ 600 dpi 1 bit/pixel

Gradation:
Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel
Original type: Sheets, book, objects
Maximum original size: A3/11" x 17"
ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF

Thin (59 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 25 cpm (color/black & white)
Plain 1 (74 g/m2 or less)/ 2 (81 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white)
Middle Thick (105 g/m2 or less)
Copy speed: C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white)
Thick 1 (169 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
SM APPENDIX 1-1 D104/D106


OHP, Glossy (1200 dpi)
Color:
9.2 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
First copy (normal
Black & white:
mode):
6.4 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) for NA model
6.3 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) for EU/AA model
Warm-up time: Less than 22 seconds (20°C)
Standard tray: 250 sheets x 2 + 100

By-pass tray: 100 sheets (Plain), 40 sheets (Thick 1: 106 -
Print Paper Capacity:
2
169g/m2), 20 sheets (Thick 2/3: 170 - 256 g/m2), 35 sheets
(80 g/m , 20 lb)
(Postcard)
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 2
(Refer to "Supported Paper Sizes".)
- Minimum Maximum
A5 (LEF)/
Tray 1/ Tray 2 A3/11" x 17"
Print Paper Size: 8.5" x 11"
By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 600 mm
A5 (LEF)/
Optional Tray A3/11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
Standard tray 1: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.)

Standard tray 2: 60 to 169 g/m2 (16 to 45 lb.)
Printing Paper Weight: Optional paper tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
By-pass tray: 52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.)
Duplex unit: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
D104/D106 1-2 SM APPENDIX

Specifications
Appendix:
Standard exit tray: 500 sheets or more (face down)*1
Shift tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
1-bin tray: 100 (80 g/m2)
Output Paper Capacity:
Side tray: 50 (80 g/m2)
Internal finisher 500 (80 g/m2)
*1: T6200, A4 LEF
Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets
Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)
NA Europe
25% 25%
50% 50%
65% 65%
73% 71%
78% 75%
Zoom: 85% 82%
93% 93%
100% 100%
121% 115%
129% 122%
155% 141%
200% 200%
400% 400%

Memory: Standard: 1.5 GB
120 V - 127 V, 60 Hz: 12A or more (for North America)

Power Source:
220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: 8A or more (for Europe/ASIA)
- 120V 220 - 240V
Power Consumption: Maximum 1600 W or less 1680 W or less
Sleep Mode 2.0 W or less 2.0 W or less
(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.
The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 587 x 676 x 725 mm (23.1" x 26.7" x 28.5")
Copier + PFU + Right tray + Internal finisher: 1009 x 676 x 1117 mm (39.7" x 26.7" x
44.0")
Less than 85 kg (187 lb.) [without ARDF excluding toner]

Weight:
Less than 100 kg (220 lb.) [with ARDF excluding toner]

Specifications
1.1.2 PRINTER
Appendix:
PCL 5c/6 (standard)
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
Printer Languages:
PDF Direct (optional)
PictBridge (optional)
PCL 5c/6:
300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode
Resolution and 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bit)
Gradation: PS3:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bit)
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi
C1.5a:
20 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode
12.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)
Printing speed:
C1.5c:
25 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode
12.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)
PCL 5c/6 (Standard):

45 Compatible fonts
Resident Fonts: 13 International fonts
Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional):
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
USB2.0: Standard
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard
Host Interfaces: Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional
IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional
IEEE802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN): Optional
Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
HDD 160 GB (standard)

1.1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan

Resolution: 600 dpi
Twain Mode:
Available scanning 100 to1200 dpi
Resolution Range: Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel
Scan to E-mail / Folder:

Scanning BW: 44 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /Compression: On
Throughput (MH))
(ARDF mode): FC: 44 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / Compression:
Standard)
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T/1000 Base-T for TCP/IP),

Interface:
Wireless LAN, USB2.0/SD Slot
Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)

Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG

Specifications
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
Appendix:
1.2.1 PAPER FEED
North America
BT: By-pass Tray, T1/2: Tray 1/2 (standard), T3/4: Tray 3/4 (option), DU: Duplex Unit
Size
Paper BT T1/2 T3/4 DU
(W x L)
A3 W 12" x 18" M - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm M S1 S1 M
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm M A A M
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm M S3 S3 M
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm M - M M
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm M A A M
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm M - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M S2 S2 M
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M A A M
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M S4 S4 M
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M - - -
Ledger 11" x 17" A A1 A1 M
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" A A A M
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" A A3 A3 M
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" M A2 A2 M
Government
8.25" x 14" M M M M
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" A - - -

Size
(W x L)
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" M M M M
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" M A4 A4 M
F SEF 8" x 13" M M M M
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" M M M M
8.25" x 13" M M M M
11" x 15" M M M M
Folio SEF
10" x 14" M M M M
8" x 10" M M M M
8K 267 x 390mm M M M M
16K SEF 195 x 267mm M M M M
16K LEF 267 x 195mm M M M M
Custom M M M -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" M - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" M - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162mm M - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229mm M - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220mm M - - -

Remarks:
Specifications
Appendix:
A Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
M Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Supported: depends on a technician adjustment

S Paper size which has same superscript number can be changeable with SP
setting. (eg. Ledger: A1 <=> A3 SEF: S1)
- Not supported
Europe/ Asia
BT: By-pass Tray, T1/2: Tray 1/2 (standard), T3/4: Tray 3/4 (option), DU: Duplex Unit
Size
(W x L)
A3 W 12" x 18" M - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A A1 S1 M
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A A A M
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A A3 A3 M
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm A - A M
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm A A A M
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm M - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M A2 A2 M
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M A A M
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M A4 A4 M
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M - - -
Ledger 11" x 17" M S1 S1 M
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" M A A M

Size
(W x L)
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" M S3 S3 M
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" M S2 S2 M
Government
8.25" x 14" M M M M
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" M - - -
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" M M M M
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" M S4 S4 M
F SEF 8" x 13" M M M M
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" M M M M
8.25" x 13" M M M M
11" x 15" M M M M
Folio SEF
10" x 14" M M M M
8" x 10" M M M M
8K 267 x 390mm M M M M
16K SEF 195 x 267mm M M M M
16K LEF 267 x 195mm M M M M
Custom M M M -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" M - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" M - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162mm M - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229mm M - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220mm M - - -

Remarks:
Specifications
Appendix:
A Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
M Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Supported: depends on a technician adjustment

S Paper size which has same superscript number can be changeable with SP
setting. (eg. Ledger: S1 <=> A3 SEF: A1)
- Not supported
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT
Mainframe and optional trays

Main: Mainframe/ 1-bin: 1-bin tray/ Shift: Shift Tray/ Side: Side Tray
Paper Size (W x L) Main 1-bin Shift Side
A3 W 12" x 18" Y - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y - Y -
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y - Y -
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y

Paper Size (W x L) Main 1-bin Shift Side
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y
Government
8.25" x 14" Y Y Y Y
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y Y Y
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y Y
8.25" x 13" Y Y Y Y
11" x 15" Y Y Y Y
Folio SEF
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y
Custom Y - Y -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Y - Y -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" Y - Y -
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm Y - Y -
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm Y - Y -
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y - Y -

Remarks:
Specifications
Appendix:
Y Supported
- Not supported
Internal Finisher
Str: Straight Feed Out/ Inv: Inverter Path/ Srt; Sort/ Stp: Staple/ 2/3P: 2/3 Holes Punch/ 4P: 4
Holes Punch/ S4P: Scandinavia 4 Holes Punch/ RT: Right Tray
Internal finisher
Paper Size (W x L)
Str Inv Srt Stp 2/3P 4P S4P
A3 W 12" x 18" - - - - - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y 10 30 Y Y Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y 20 50 Y* - Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y 20 50 Y Y Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y - - - - -
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y - - - - -
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y - - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y 10 30 - - -
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y 20 50 - - -
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y 20 50 - - -
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y Y - - - - -
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y 10 30 Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y 20 50 Y* - Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y 20 50 Y Y Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y 10 30 Y* - Y

Internal finisher
Paper Size (W x L)
Str Inv Srt Stp 2/3P 4P S4P
Government
8.25" x 14" Y Y 10 30 - - -
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" Y Y - - - - -
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y 20 50 - - -
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y 20 50 - - -
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y - - - - -
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y 10 30 Y* - Y
8.25" x 13" Y Y 10 30 - - -
11" x 15" Y Y 10 30 - - -
Folio SEF
10" x 14" Y Y - - - - -
8" x 10" Y Y - - - - -
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y 10 30 - - -
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y - - - - -
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y 20 50 - - -
Custom - - - - - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" - - - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" - - - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm - - - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm - - - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm - - - - - - -

Remarks:
Specifications
Appendix:
Y Supported (*1: 2 holes punch only)
30 Output up to 30 sheets
50 Output up to 50 sheets
- Not supported
1.2.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
Size Platen ARDF Platen ARDF
(width x length) [mm] Inches Inches Metric Metric
A3 (297 x 420) L - Y Y*3 Y
B4 (257 x 364) L - - Y*3 Y
A4 (210 x 297) L Y*1 Y Y*3 Y
A4 (297 x 210) S Y*3 Y Y*3 Y
B5 (182 x 257) L - - Y*3 Y
B5 (257 x 182) S - - Y*3 Y
A5 (148 x 210) L - - -*1 Y
A5 (210 x 148) S - - Y Y
B6 (128 x 182) L - - - -
B6 (182 x 128) S - - - -
11" x 17" (DLT) Y Y*2 - Y*2
11" x 15" - Y*2 - -
10" x 14" - Y - -
8.5" x 14" (LG) Y Y*2 - -

8.5" x 13" (F4) - Y*2 Y*4 Y*4
8.25" x 13" - - Y*4 Y*4
8" x 13"(F) - - Y*4 Y*4
8.5" x 11" (LT) Y*3 Y*2 Y*3 Y*2
11" x 8.5" (LT) Y*3 Y*2 Y*3 Y*2
8" x 10" - Y*2 - -
5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) -*1 Y - -
8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) Y Y - -
8K (267 x 390) - - Y*3 Y*2
16K L (195 x 267) - - Y*3 Y*2
16K S (267 x 195) - - Y*3 Y*2
7.25" x 10.5"
- Y - -
(Executive)
10.5" x 7.25"
- Y*2 - -
(Executive)
*1: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message “Can-t detect
original size” shows.
*2: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.

Specifications
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
Appendix:
The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD-ROMs
1: Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM
2: Scanner Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM.
An auto-run installer lets you to select the components you want to install.
1.3.1 PRINTER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS
MacOS8.6 to 9.x,
Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003,
Printer Language MacOSX10.1
Vista, Server 2008, 7
or later
PCL5c
Yes No
/ PCL6
PS3 Yes Yes
RPCS No No
The PCL5c/6 and PS3 drivers are provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM
The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers, except for Windows
2000/XP/2003/Vista/7. Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating
system is provided with the driver.
The PPD installer for Macintosh supports Mac OS X 10.1 or later versions.
The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor
and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)

1.3.2 SCANNER DRIVER
Printer Windows 2000, XP, Server MacOS8.6 to 9.x, MacOSX10.1

Language 2003, Vista, 7 or later
Network TWAIN Yes No
The Network TWAIN driver is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.
1.3.3 UTILITY SOFTWARE
Software Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the

Font Manager
printer
(2000/XP/Server 2003/7)
This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or

Printer Utility for Mac TCP This software provides several convenient
(Mac) functions for printing from Macintosh clients.
This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Appendix:
1.4.1 ARDF (D541)
Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT

Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (10 to 34 lb.)
Paper Size/Weight:
Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Duplex
Weight 52 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Copy - 32 to 200 %
Supported Magnification
Color 32.6 to 200 %
Ratios: Fax
Black & white 48.9 to 200 %
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: 50 W or less
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 mm x 491 mm x 120 mm (21.7" x 19.3" x 4.7")
Weight: 10 kg (22 lb.)

Optional Equipment
1.4.2 PAPER FEED UNIT (D425)
Paper Feed System: Feed Roller and Friction Pad
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
Capacity: 500 sheets
Paper Weight: 80 g/m2 (21 lb.)
Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: 15 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 137 mm (22" x 20.8" x 5.48")
Weight: Less than 12 kg (26.4 lbs)

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4.3 PAPER FEED UNIT (D331)
Appendix:
Paper Size: A5 to A3, 51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17"
Paper Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2, 16 - 28 lb
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb) x 2 trays
Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
24 Vdc and 5Vdc (from the copier/printer)

120 Vac (120 V version) from the copier/printer when the
Power Source: optional tray heater is installed
220 – 240 Vac (230 V version) from the copier/printer
when the optional tray heater is installed
Power Consumption: 35 W (Copying/printing)
Weight: 25 kg (55 lb)
Size (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm

Optional Equipment
1.4.4 INTERNAL FINISHER (D429) AND PUNCH UNIT (D390)
No punch mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B6/5.5" x 8.5" (SEF)
Punch mode:
2 holes:
A3, A4 or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (SEF), 8.5" x 13" (SEF), 8.5"
x 11"
3 holes:
Print Paper Size: A3, A4 (LEF) or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Europe):
A3, A4 (LEF) or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Scandinavia):
A3, A4 or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (SEF), 8.5" x 13" (SEF), 8.5"
x 11", 7.25" x 10.5"
Staple mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B5/8.5" x 11"
No punch mode:
52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.)
Punch mode:
Paper Weight: 52 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Staple mode:
52 to 128 g/m2 (14 to 34 lb.)
Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled
500 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or less

Tray Capacity:
250 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or more
50 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Staple capacity:
30 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
3 positions
Staple position: 1-staple: 2 positions (Top/ Bottom)
2-staples: 1 position
Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)
Power consumption: 50 W + 12 W (Punch Unit)

Optional Equipment
Specifications
Finisher:
Appendix:
535 x 525 x 205 mm (21.1" x 20.7" x 8.1")
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Punch Unit:
98 x 500 x 165 mm (3.9" x 19.7" x 6.5")
Without punch unit: 13 kg (28.6 lb.)

Weight:
With punch unit: 16.2 Kg (35.6 lb.)
1.4.5 SHIFT TRAY (D428)
Paper Capacity: 250 sheet (A4/ 81/2" x 111/2" or smaller: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 600 mm
Paper Weight: 52-256 g/m2/ 14 - 68 lbs
Power Consumption: Max 13 W (Power is supplied from the mainframe.)
Dimension (W x D x H): 431 x 477.5 x 107mm (17.2" x 19.1" x 4.3")
Weight: Approx. 2kg (4.4lbs)

Optional Equipment
1.4.6 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D426)
Standard Size:
Paper Size:
A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2, 16 to 28 lb.
Tray Capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 1 W
Weight: Less than 2kg (4.4lbs)
Size (W x D x H): 455 x 530 x 226mm (18.2" x 21.2" x 9")
1.4.7 SIDE TRAY (D427)
Standard Size:
Paper Size:
A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2, 16 to 28 lb.
Tray Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 40 W
Weight: 1.5 kg
Size (W x D x H): 480 x 480 x 170mm (19.2"x19.2"x6.8")

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4.8 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3010 (D559)
Appendix:
A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, DLT (11x17),
Legal (8.5x14), Foolscap (8.5x13), Letter (8.5x11),
GovernmentLG (8.25x14), Folio (8.25x13), F/GL(8x13),
Paper Size:
Eng Quatro (8x10), Executive(7.25x10.5), Half
Letter(5.5x8.5), Com10(4.125x9.5), Monarch(3.875x7.5),
C5, C6, DL Env, 11x15, 10x14
Paper Weight: 60 - 256 g/m2/ 14 - 68 Bond lbs.
250 sheets
Tray Capacity:
150 sheets (A5SEF/ A6SEF/ B6SEF/ Half Letter SEF)
Power Source: -
Power Consumption: -
Weight: 2 or less kg/ 4.4 or less lbs.
Size (W x D x H): 495.8 × 550 × 94 mm/ 19.5" × 21.7" × 3.7"

APPENDIX:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
2 06/15/2011 Updated ID Sensors to use Cloth moistened with water.
Maintenance Tables
2. APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
TABLES
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Tables
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS
A4 (LT) long-edge feed
5% image coverage ratio
Color ratio: 20%
2 print/job
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Mainframe
Item 60K 120K 240K EM Remarks
Scanner
Reflector C Optics cloth
1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors C Optics cloth
Front and Rear Rails C Dry cloth
Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth
ADF Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth
APS Sensor C Dry cloth
PCDU
Drum Unit-K, C, M, Y R
PCDU Toner Collection Bottle R

Maintenance Tables Rev. 06/15/2011
ITB and PTR unit
ITB Cleaning Unit R
Cloth moistened with

⇒ ID Sensors C
water
Fusing
Alcohol
Pressure Roller C* C
*: Clean it if dirty.
Heating Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth
Pressure Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth
Entrance Guide Plate C C Alcohol
Exit Guide Plate C C Alcohol
Stripper Plate C C Alcohol
Thermopile C C Dry cloth
Fusing Gear Shafts L S552R
Cleaning Unit (Option)*NOTE C R Dry cloth
Others
Dust Filter R
The cleaning unit prevents the pressure roller from getting dirty due to paper dust.

Maintenance Tables
Paper Feed
Feed Roller: Tray 1/2 R C Damp cloth
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Friction Pad: Tray 1/2 R C Dry cloth
Tables
Damp cloth
Registration Roller C*1 C
Never use alcohol.
Registration Sensor C Dry cloth
Vertical Transport Roller C Damp cloth
Vertical Transport Sensor C Dry cloth
By-pass Feed Roller C Damp cloth
By-pass Friction Pad C Dry cloth
By-pass HP Sensor C Dry cloth
Paper Dust Container C Vacuum
Duplex
Duplex Transport Roller C Damp cloth
Duplex Exit Sensor C Dry cloth
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Roller C Damp cloth
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth
Inverter Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Inverter Sensor C Dry cloth
Fusing Exit Sensor C Dry cloth
*1: The registration roller requires a cleaning maintenance every 60 K (total count).

Maintenance Tables
2.1.2 OTHERS YIELD PARTS

The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume
made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine’s targeted lifetime if the
machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these
parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts).
Mainframe
Item 240K EM Remarks
PCDU
Development Unit-K, C, M,
R
Y
ITB and PTR unit
Image Transfer Belt R
PTR unit R
Fusing
Fusing Unit R

Maintenance Tables
ARDF (D366)
Item 80K EM Remarks
Pick-up Roller R Number of originals
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Tables
Feed Belt R Number of originals
Separation Roller R Number of originals
Sensors C Blower brush
Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if

Platen Sheet Cover C
required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol
One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D425)
Item 60K 120K EM Remarks
Feed Roller R C Dry cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C C Dry cloth
Paper Feed Guide C C Dry cloth
Friction Pad R C Dry cloth
Paper Feed Clutch I

Maintenance Tables
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D331)
Item 60K 120K EM Remarks
Paper Feed Roller R C Dry cloth
Friction Pad R C Dry cloth
Paper Feed Guides C C Dry cloth
Relay Rollers C C Dry cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C C Dry cloth
Relay Clutch I Replace if necessary
Paper Feed Clutch I Replace if necessary
1 Bin Tray (D426)
Items 150K EM Remarks
Exit Rollers C C Damp or Dry cloth
Idle Rollers C Damp or Dry cloth
Tray C Damp cloth
Exit Sensor C C Blower brush
Paper Sensor C Blower brush
Bearing C S552R
Shift Tray (D427)
Items EM Remarks
Tray C Damp cloth

APPENDIX:
SP MODE TABLES
None
System SP1-xxx
3. APPENDIX: SP MODE TABLES
3.1 SYSTEM SP1-XXX
3.1.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick
2 or Thick3
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor
operation timing for each mode.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the trailing edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the leading edge of paper.
001 Tray:Plain:600dpi *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
008 By-pass: M-Thick:600dpi *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

System SP1-xxx
[Side-to-Side Registration]
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start
1002 position for each mode and tray.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the rear edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the front edge of paper.
001 By-pass *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
006 Duplex *ENG
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type), Paper Type: M-Thick: Middle Thick
1003
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the
paper feed timing.
004 Tray234:Plain:600dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

System SP1-xxx
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

[–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

System SP1-xxx
1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display
0:LT SEF/ 1:LG *ENG -
Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass
001 tray.
This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is
less than 8.5".
0: LT SEF (default), 1: LG
[Reload Permit Setting] DFU
Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
1101 However, these SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the
adjusted setting.
Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [0 to 75 / 50 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the pre-rotation start temperature.
Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG [135 to 145 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the reload target temperature of the heating roller.
Reload Target Temp.:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 75 / 1 deg/step]

003
Specifies the reload target temperature of the pressure roller.
Temp.:Delta:Cold: Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
unit is determined as cold state.
[0 to 100 / NA: 55, EU/AA: 45 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Cold:End *ENG
deg/step]
005
is determined as cold state.

System SP1-xxx
Temp.:Delta:Cold: Press *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Rotation Time:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
007 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing reload when the fusing unit is determined
as cold state.
[0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 15 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Warm: Center *ENG
Appendix:
deg/step]
SP Mode
Tables
008
Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing
unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]
Time:Warm *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
011 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing reload when the fusing unit is determined
as warm state.
[0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 15 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Hot: Center *ENG
deg/step]
012
Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing
unit is determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
is determined as hot state.

System SP1-xxx
Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]
Time:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
[0 to 100 / NA: 20, EU/AA: 15 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
016
Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and
[0 to 100 / NA: 55, EU/AA: 45 / 1

Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG
deg/step]
017
Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and
Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Rotation Time:BW:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx
Temp.Delta:Warm:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]
mode when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Rotation Time:BW:Warm *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]
mode when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
Rotation Time:BW:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
030 Flicker Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Temp.:Delta:Cold: [0 to 100 / NA: 20, EU/AA: 15 / 1

101 *ENG
BW2:Center deg/step]
[0 to 100 / NA: 55, EU/AA: 45 / 1

102 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:End *ENG
deg/step]
103 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
104 Rotation Time: BW2:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

System SP1-xxx
Temp.:Delta:Warm:
105 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
BW2:Center
106 Temp.:Delta:Warm: BW2:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Delta:Warm:
107 *ENG [0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]
BW2:Press
108 Rotation Time: BW2:Warm *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
109 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
110 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:End *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]
111 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]
112 Rotation Time: BW2:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
[Feed Permit Setting]
1102 Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.

DFU
-001
These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
to -005
setting.

001 *ENG
Delta:Center deg/step]
[0 to 100 / NA: 65, EU/AA: 50 / 1

002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG
deg/step]
Temp.:Upper
003 *ENG [0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center
004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]
006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

System SP1-xxx
DFU
-007
to -011
setting.

007 *ENG
Delta:Center:Sp.1 deg/step]

008 *ENG
Delta:End:Sp.1 deg/step]
Temp.:Upper
009 *ENG [0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Delta:Center:Sp.1
Tables
Temp.:Upper
010 *ENG [0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.1
Temp.:Lower
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.1
Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
012 Usage Limitation:
Use 3 seconds or more for this setting.
DFU
-013
to -017
setting.
Temp.:Lower
013 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Lower
014 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
015 *ENG [0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
016 *ENG [0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2

System SP1-xxx
Temp.:Lower
017 *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.2
DFU
-019
to -024
setting.
019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
020 *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.3
Temp.:Lower
021 *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.3
Temp.:Upper
022 *ENG [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.3
Temp.:Upper
023 *ENG [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.3
Temp.:Lower
024 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.3
Rotation Time:Sp3 *ENG [0 to 200 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
Use 3 seconds or more for this setting.

System SP1-xxx
1105 [Print Target Temp]
(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)

Roller Type –> Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure –> Pressure roller
Paper Type -> Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special
[100 to 160 / NA: 150, EU/AA: 141 / 1

deg/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
001 color printing.
Tables
Usage Limitation:
+5°C against the default value for each destination is the upper limit for this
setting.
Plain1:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
002 color printing.

DFU:
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.
[100 to 160 / NA: 140, EU/AA: 131 / 1

deg/step]
003 printing.
Usage Limitation:
setting.

System SP1-xxx
Plain1:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW
004 printing.
DFU:
setting.
[100 to 160 / NA: 155, EU/AA: 146 / 1

deg/step]
005 color printing.
Usage Limitation:
setting.
Plain2:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
006 coloe printing.

DFU:
setting.
[100 to 160 / NA: 145, EU/AA: 136 / 1

deg/step]
007 printing.
Usage Limitation:
setting.

System SP1-xxx
Plain2:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW
008 printing.
DFU:
setting.
Thin:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 160 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
+5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
Tables
010 Thin:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Thin:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 160 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
012 Thin:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
M-thick:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
014 M-thick:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
M-thick:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
016 M-thick:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Thick1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx
018 Thick1:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
Thick1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
020 Thick1:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
Special1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx
030 Special1:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
Special1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
Special1:BW:Press
032 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Special2:BW:Press
036 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
Special3:BW:Press
040 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)

System SP1-xxx
Envelop:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
042 Envelop:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 172 / 1 deg/step]
*ENG [100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
101
Usage Limitation:
Plain1:FC:Press:Low
102 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
103
Usage Limitation:
Plain1:BW:Press:Low
104 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
105
Usage Limitation:
Plain2:FC:Press:Low
106 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
107
Usage Limitation:

System SP1-xxx
Plain2:BW:Press:Low
108 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
Thin:FC:Center:Low
*ENG [100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
109
Usage Limitation:
Thin:FC:Press:Low
110 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Thin:BW:Center:Low
*ENG [100 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
111
Usage Limitation:
Thin:BW:Press:Low
112 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
M-Thick:FC:Center:Low
*ENG [100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
113
Usage Limitation:
M-Thick:FC:Press:Low
114 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
M-Thick:BW:Center:Low
*ENG [100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
115
Usage Limitation:
M-Thick:BW:Press:Low
116 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)

System SP1-xxx
*ENG [100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
117
Usage Limitation:
118 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
119
Usage Limitation:
120 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
121
Usage Limitation:
122 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
123
Usage Limitation:
124 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
125
Usage Limitation:

System SP1-xxx
126 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
*ENG [100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
127
Usage Limitation:
128 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
OHP:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
132 OHP:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]
Envelop:Center:Low
*ENG [100 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
133
Usage Limitation:
Envelop:Press:Low
134 *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
Speed (DFU)
Plain1:Grossy:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
Plain1:Grossy:Press
136 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
Plain2:Grossy:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx
Plain2:Grossy:Press
138 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
M-thick:Grossy:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
M-thick:Grossy:Press
140 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
Special4:BW:Press
144 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
Special5:BW:Press
148 *ENG [0 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)

System SP1-xxx
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Special6:BW:Press
152 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
Envelop:Center:Thick1 *ENG [100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
Envelop:Press:Thick1
154 *ENG [0 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
156 *ENG [0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
158 *ENG [0 to 200 / 178 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)

System SP1-xxx
Postcard:Center:Thick1 *ENG [100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
Postcard:Press:Thick1
160 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
162 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
164 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
(DFU)
[Fusing Temp. Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)

1106
Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
001 Center - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
002 End - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
The heating roller has two lamps. One heats the center of the heating roller
and the other heats both ends of the heating roller.
003 Pressure Center - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
005 Thermister Atmosphere - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
006 Pressure End - [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
The pressure roller has no lamp.

System SP1-xxx
1107 [Standby Target Temp. Setting]
Stanby/Preheat1: Center *ENG [100 to 150 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the ready or energy save 1
mode.
DFU
-002
to -006
setting.
Stanby/Preheat1: Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
002 Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the ready or energy save 1
Tables
mode.
Preheat2: Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

003
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Preheat2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

004
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Low Power:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

005
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the low power mode.
Low Power:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

006
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode.
Print Ready:Center *ENG [120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

007
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.
008 DFU
setting.

System SP1-xxx
1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.]
Center *ENG [120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.
Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.

002 DFU
setting.
[Environment Correction:Fusing] DFU

1111 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.
Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low
temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
002 Sepcifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 30°C or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high
temperature.
temperature is in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the
temperature is in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the

System SP1-xxx
Job Low Temp.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
005
Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature when the
environmental condition is determined as low temperature.
Job High Temp.

006 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature when the
environmental condition is determined as high temperature.
Appendix:
Job Low Temp.
SP Mode
Tables
007 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Job High Temp.

008 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
1112 [Image Process Temp. Correction]
These SPs are used for the fusing temperature control for variable job images.
This control saves the power comsumption when the machine copies or prints a
job text image in black and white mode.
Temp.:Normal:Center:Level1
*ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]
(DFU)
DFU
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.

System SP1-xxx
[-25 to 10 / NA: -10, EU/AA: -12 for

Temp.:Normal:Center:Level2 *ENG C1.5a/ NA: -3, EU/AA: -10 for C1.5c / 1
/step]

Usage Limitation:
Use 0°C or less for this setting.
[Envir. Correct:Fusing] DFU

-003 to
-006
setting.

003
Specifies the temperature correction in the low temperature condition.

004
Specifies the temperature correction in the high temperature condition.
Offset Temp:Low *ENG [0 to 15 / 6.5 / 0.1 deg/step]
005 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the low
Offset Temp:High *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
006 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the high
1113 [Curl Correction]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Execute Pattern *ENG
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the curl correction type.
-002 to DFU
-006, These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
-008, setting.

System SP1-xxx
-009
Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

002
Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

003
Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.
Permit
*ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Press:M-humid
Appendix:
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.
SP Mode
Tables
Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:
*ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
005 H-humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
[Stand-by Mode Setting]
006 P-Roll Thresh AF Job *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the stand-by mode.
CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in
middle humidity.
CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
009 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high
humidity.
[Heat Storage Status] DFU

1114 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.
Temp.:Threshold: Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for the heat storage
status.

System SP1-xxx
Temp.:Threshold:
*ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
Atmosphere
002
Specifies the threshold temperature inside the machine for the heat storage
feedback control.
[Target Temp. Correction] DFU

1115 This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.
Temp.:Delta:End *ENG [-10 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating
roller.
1116 [Press Temp. FB Control]
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
Execution mode *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON: BW, 2: ON: BW/FC
001 Selects the heat storage FB control mode.
Usage Limitation:
Use "0: OFF" or "1: ON: BW" only.
DFU
-011
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change
to -106
the adjusted setting.
011 Time Out *ENG [0 to 500 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
Delay:Standard
021 *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
Speed:FC:1
Delay:Standard
022 *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
Speed:BW:1
025 Delay:Low Speed:FC:1 *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
026 Delay:Low Speed:BW:1 *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
031 Delay:Standard *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

System SP1-xxx
Speed:FC:2
Delay:Standard
032 *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
Speed:BW:2
041 Press Reference Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. Correction Lower

042 *ENG [-30 to 0 / -2 / 1 deg/step]
Limit
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Temp. Correction Upper
043 *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Limit
Paper Thickness
051 *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 /step]
Coefficient:Plain1
Paper Thickness
052 *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 /step]
Coefficient:Plain2
Paper Thickness
053 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Thin
Paper Thickness
054 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:M-thick
Paper Thickness
055 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Thick1
Paper Thickness
056 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Thick2
Paper Thickness
057 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Thick3
Paper Thickness
058 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Special1
Paper Thickness
059 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Special2

System SP1-xxx
Paper Thicknes
060 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Special3
Paper Thickness
061 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Envelop
Paper Thickness
071 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Plain1:Low Speed
Paper Thickness
072 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Plain2:Low Speed
Paper Thickness
073 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Thin:Low Speed
Paper Thickness
074 Coeff.:M-thick:Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Speed
Paper Thickness
075 Coeff.:Special1:Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Speed
Paper Thickness
Speed
Paper Thickness
Speed
Paper Thickness
078 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Plain1:Glossy
Paper Thickness
079 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Plain2:Glossy
Paper Thickness
080 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:M-thick:Glossy
Paper Thickness
081 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:OHP

System SP1-xxx
Paper Thickness
082 Coeff.:Envelop:Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Speed
Paper Thickness
101 *ENG [0 to 100 / 200 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Special4
Paper Thickness
102 *ENG [0 to 100 / 200 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Special5
Paper Thicknes
103 *ENG [0 to 100 / NA: 75, EU/AA: 70 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Special6
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Paper Thickness
104 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Coeff.:Envelop:Thick1
Paper Thickness
105 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
Paper Thickness
106 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]
[Time Control] DFU

1117 The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the
adjusted setting.
001 Control Time1 *ENG [0 to 1000 / 1 / 1 sec./step]
002 Control Time2 *ENG [0 to 1000 / 29 / 1 sec./step]
003 Temp:Plain:Center1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1°C/step]
[-35 to 35 / NA: -2, EU/AA: 9 for C1.5a/

004 Temp:Plain:Press.1 *ENG
NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 for C1.5c / 1°C/step]
006 Temp:Plain:Press.2 *ENG [-35 to 35 / NA: 1, EU/AA: 10 / 1°C/step]
007 Temp:M-Thick:Center1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]
008 Temp:M-Thick:Press.1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]

System SP1-xxx
009 Temp:M-Thick:Center2 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]
010 Temp:M-Thick:Press.2 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]
011 Temp:Other:Center1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]
012 Temp:Other:Press.1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]
013 Temp:Other.Center2 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]
014 Temp:Other:Press.2 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 10 / 1°C/step]
015 Temp:Plain:BW: Center1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1°C/step]
016 Temp:Plain:BW:End1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1°C/step]
018 Temp:Plain:BW:End2 *ENG [-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1°C/step]
019 Temp:Other:Center1:LowSpeed *ENG [-35 to 35 / 20 / 1°C/step]
020 Temp:Other:End1:LowSpeed *ENG [-35 to 35 / 20 / 1°C/step]
021 Temp:Other.Center2:LowSpeed *ENG [-35 to 35 / 20 / 1°C/step]
022 Temp:Other:End2:LowSpeed *ENG [-35 to 35 / 20 / 1°C/step]
023 Temp:Envelop:Center1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 15 / 1°C/step]
024 Temp:Envelop:End1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 15 / 1°C/step]
025 Temp:Envelop:Center2 *ENG [-35 to 35 /15 / 1°C/step]
026 Temp:Envelop:End2 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 15 / 1°C/step]
1121 [Switch:Rotation Start/Stop]
001 Time:After Reload *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1 sec./step]
Specifies the interval of the re-load mode.
DFU
-002
to -010

System SP1-xxx
002 Time:After Recovery *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
003 Time:After Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
004 Press Temp.:After Reload *ENG [0 to 160 / 160 / 1°C/step]
End Uniform Start

005 *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1°C/step]
Temp.:B4
End Uniform Start

006 *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1°C /step]
Temp.:B5
End Uniform Start
Appendix:
007 *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1°C /step]
SP Mode
Tables
Temp.:A5
008 Overshoot Prevent Temp. *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1°C /step]
009 Overshoot Prevent Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
Overshoot Prevent
010 *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1°C /step]
Temp.:End
[Standby Rotation Setting] DFU

1122 The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change
001 Rotation Interval *ENG [0 to 240 / 60 / 1 min./step]
002 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 10000 / 600 / 1 msec/step]
[CPM Down Setting] DFU
Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode.

1124 DFU
001 Low:Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature
condition. If the fusing temperature decreases -20°C (adjustable) below the
target temperature, the machine enters the CPM down mode.

System SP1-xxx
002 Low:Up Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -15 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the CPM up threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If
the fusing temperature increases -15°C (adjustable) below the target
temperature, the machine enters the CPM up mode.
003 Low :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 5 %/step]
Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
004 Low :2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 5 %/step]
Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
005 Low :3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 5 %/step]
Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
006 High :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 5 %/step]
Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
007 High:2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 5 %/step]
Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
008 High:3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 5 %/step]
Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
High:1st CPM Down

009 *ENG [100 to 225 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A3
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

010 *ENG [100 to 225 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A3
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.

System SP1-xxx
High:3rd CPM Down

011 *ENG [100 to 225 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A3
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

012 *ENG [100 to 225 / 175 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A4
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

013 *ENG [100 to 225 / 177 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A4
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

014 *ENG [100 to 225 / 179 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A4
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

015 *ENG [100 to 225 / 177 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B5:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

016 *ENG [100 to 225 / 186 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B5:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B5 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

017 *ENG [100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B5:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

018 *ENG [100 to 225 / 178 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A5:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A5 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

019 *ENG [100 to 225 / 185 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A5:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A5 paper size.

System SP1-xxx
High:3rd CPM Down

020 *ENG [100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A5:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

021 *ENG [100 to 225 / 191 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A6:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A6 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

022 *ENG [100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A6:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A6 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

023 *ENG [100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A6:Press
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A6 paper size.
Judging Interval *ENG [1 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

024
Specifies the interval for CPM down judgement.
High:1st CPM Down

025 *ENG [100 to 225 / 137 / 1 deg /step]
Temp.:Env.M-t:Press
High:2nd CPM Down

026 *ENG [100 to 225 / 142 / 1 deg /step]
Temp.:Env.M-t:Press
High:3rd CPM Down

027 *ENG [100 to 225 / 187 / 1 deg /step]
Temp.:Env.M-t:Press
High:1st CPM Down

028 *ENG [100 to 225 / 125 / 1 deg /step]
Temp.:Narrow-Thick:Press
High:2nd CPM Down

029 *ENG [100 to 225 / 137 / 1 deg /step]
High:3rd CPM Down

030 *ENG [100 to 225 / 145 / 1 deg /step]

System SP1-xxx
1131 [Continues Print Mode Switch]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Productivity Priority mode
001 Feed Permit Condition *ENG
1: Quality Priority mode 1
2: Quality Priority mode 1
Selects the feed permission type.

0: No paper feed permission
1: Paper feed permission is done when changing the paper size from smaller
one to larger one.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2: Paper feed permission is done when changing the paper size from smaller
one to larger one and changing the copy/print mode from duplex mode to
simplex mode.
[Maximum Duty Switch]

DFU
1132
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
001 Control Method Switch *ENG
0: FIXED, 1: CONTROL
Selects the heater control method.

Use "1: CONTORL" if hot offset occurs after power-on and input voltage is
relatively hight.
[PowerControl]
003 *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
Power Offset
012 Voltage Detection *ENG [0 to 350 / 0 / 1 V/step]
[Voltage Detection]
013 *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1°C/step]
Temp.:Threshold Value

System SP1-xxx
[Last Paper Heater OFF Control]

DFU
1133
Heater OFF Time:

001 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 2400 / 1 msec./step]
Normal Speed: FC
Heater OFF Time:

002 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 1200 / 1 msec./step]
Normal Speed: BW
Heater OFF Time:Low

005 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 6300 / 1 msec./step]
Speed:FC
Heater OFF Time:Low

006 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 1400 / 1 msec./step]
Speed:BW
Heater OFF Time: After

007 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 17000 / 1 msec./step]
State Shift
[Fusing SC Issue Time Info]

DFU
1141
001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number.
SC Cause *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step]
002 Shows the SC cause
0: Timeout 1, 1: Timeout 2, 2: Timeout 3, 4 to 9: Not used
101 Displays the calculated temperature at the center of the heating roller when an
SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Diff1 *ENG [-100 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
104 Displays the calculated temperature at the end of the heating roller when an
SC was issued.

System SP1-xxx
Htg Roller:End Det1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
105 Displays the detected temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC
was issued.
Htg Roller:End Corr1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
106 Displays the ambient temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC
was issued.
Press Roller Temp Value1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

107
Displays the temperature at the pressure roller when an SC was issued.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Press Roller:End Temp Value1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
108 Displays the temperature at the end of the pressure roller when an SC was
issued.

151
SPs from -151 to -157 show previous fusing SC information.
156 Htg Roller:End Corr2 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
158 Press Roller:End Temp Value2 *ENG

201
SPs from -201 to -207 show fusing SC information before previous fusing SC.
206 Htg Roller:End Corr3 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]
208 Press Roller.End Temp Value3 *ENG

System SP1-xxx
[Fusing Jam Detection]

DFU
1142
setting.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
SC Display *ENG
001 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.
[Fusing Nip Band Check]

DFU
1152
Execute - -
001 Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller.
If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure
roller or install a new fusing unit.
Pre-Idling Time *ENG [0 to 999 / 600 / 1 sec/step]

002
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1152-001.
Stop Time * ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

003
Specifies the time for paper staying at the nip.
Feed Time * ENG [0 to 10000 / 5000 / 1 msec./step]
004 Specifies the feeding time from the tray to the fusing unit at the fusing nip band
check.

System SP1-xxx
[Low Temp. Start Up]

DFU
1153
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Temp.:Target * ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1°C./step]
003 Sepcifies the target temperature for the warming up in the low temperature
condition.
Temp.: Rotation
* ENG [-10 to 100 / 30 / 1°C./step]
Threshold Value1
005
Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up rotation in the low
Time:Heat Storage
* ENG [0 to 250 / 60 / 1 sec./step]
Devision1
010
condition.
Time:Heat Storage
* ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 sec../step]
Devision2
011
condition.

System SP1-xxx
1801 [Motor Speed Adjust]
001 Regist Mot:60:Thick *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
002 Regist Mot:120 *ENG
003 Bk OpcDevMot:120 *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.1 / 0.01 %/step]
004 Bk OpcDevMot:60:Thick *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.4 / 0.01 %/step]

[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 %/step]
007 Fusing Mot:120 *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]
008 Fusing Mot:60:Thick *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]
009 Transfer Mot:120 *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]
010 TransferMot:60:Thick *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

[–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
019 By-pass:60:Thick *ENG
020 By-pass:120 *ENG
021 Inverter:CW60:Thick *ENG
022 Inverter:CW120 *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
023 Inverter:CCW60:Thick *ENG

System SP1-xxx
024 Inverter:CCW120 *ENG

[–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
029 R-Tray Exit Motor *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
030 Fine Adj. Control *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /1]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[-7 to 7 / 0 /1step]
033 Regist Mot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
034 Feed1:CW60:1200dpi *ENG
036 Feed2:CW60:1200dpi *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]
038 By-pass:60:1200dpi *ENG
039 Inverter:CW60:1200dpi *ENG

[–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
040 Inverter:CCW60:1200dpi *ENG
041 FusingMot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]
042 BkOpcDevMot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]
043 TransferMot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

System SP1-xxx
[Sub Mag ADJ]
These SPs can adjust the sub-scan magnification error. However, first read the
1803 "Sub-scan Magnification Error" in the "Troubleshooting Guide" (Main Chapters)

to execute these SPs. NEVER EXECUTE these SPs before reading the
"Sub-scan Magnification Error". Otherwise, color registration errors occur on
outputs and this cannot be recovered by the line position adjustment.
001 Plain:600dpi:input *ENG
002 Plain:1200dpi:input *ENG [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
003 Thick:input *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Success, 1: Failure
006 Thick:result *ENG
1902 [Drum Phase Adj.] DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Execute -
Execute drum phase adjustment.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Displays the result of drum phase
adjustment.
002 Result *ENG
0: Successfully done
2: Sampling failure
3: Insufficient detection number
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Turns the automatic drum phase
003 Auto Execution *ENG
adjustment on or off.
0: Off, 1: On

System SP1-xxx
1907 [Inverter Timing Adj]
001 Inverter Position Adj. *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Feed Timing Adj]
002 R-Tray J-Gate SOL:ON *ENG

[–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
003 R-Tray J-Gate SOL:OFF *ENG
1950 [Fan Cooling Time Set] DFU
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
001 Development Fan1 *ENG
003 LD Unit Fan *ENG
004 Fusing Exit Sn Fan *ENG

[0 to 600 / 0 / 1sec/step]
005 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG
006 Electrical Fan *ENG
007 PSU Fan *ENG
008 Junction Gate SOL Fan *ENG
[Fan Start Time Set]

1951
Adjust the start time for each fan motor after a job end.
001 Development Fan1
003 Imaging Fan *ENG
Fusing Exit Sensor [0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

004 *ENG
Cooling Fan
006 Electrical Unit Fan *ENG

System SP1-xxx
007 PSU Fan *ENG
008 Solenoid Cooling Fan *ENG
1952 [Fan Control Off Mode Time Set]
001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 min./step]
1953 [Extra Fan Control]
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
State *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off.
Time: Threshold *ENG [0 to 60 / 60 / 1 min./step]

002
Specifies the threshold time for the extra fan control.
003 Rotat: Threshold *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the execution time and date of

004 Start Date *ENG
the extra fan cooling.
Time *ENG [0 to 7200 / 0 / 1 sec./step:

005
Specifies the execution time for the extra fan cooling.
008 Imaging Fan *ENG [0 to 7200 / 1 / 1 sec./step]
Fusing Exit Sensor Specifies the exexution time of the extra

009 *ENG fan rotation for each fan.
Cooling Fan

System SP1-xxx
012 PSU Fan *ENG
1954 [Fan Start Time Initial]
003 Imaging Fan *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Fusing Exit Sensor [0 to 600 / 1 /.1 sec. /step]
004 *ENG
Cooling Fan Specifies the initial execution time of the
005 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG extra fan rotation for each fan.
007 PSU Fan *ENG

System SP2xxx
3.2 SYSTEM SP2XXX
3.2.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)
[Charge DC V:Fixed] DFU

2005 (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color)
Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode
(SP3-041-1 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode
with SP3-041-1, the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: C *ENG
003 Plain: M *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG

[0 to 1000 / 600 / 10 –V/step]
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG
[Charge DC V:Fixed] DFU

(Paper Type, Process Speed, Color)
Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
2006 Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (AC component) is adjusted by environment correction
(SP2-007-xxx to SP2-011-xxx). These SPs are activated only when SP2-012-1
is set to "1: manual control".
001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 3000 / 2100 / 10V/step]

System SP2xxx
002 Plain: C *ENG
003 Plain: M *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Charge AC Current: LL] DFU
Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for LL
2007 (Color)
Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for LL environment

(Low temperature and Low humidity).
001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG [0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step]
002 Environmental Target: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 630/ 10 A/step]
003 Environmental Target: M *ENG [0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step]
004 Environmental Target: Y *ENG [0 to 3000 / 670 / 10 A/step]
[Charge AC Current: ML] DFU

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM (Color)
2008
Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for ML environment
(Meddle temperature and Low humidity).
002 Environmental Target: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 630 / 10 A/step]

System SP2xxx
[Charge AC Current: MM] DFU

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM (Color)
2009
Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MM environment
(Middle temperature and Middle humidity).
002 Environmental Target: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 630 / 10 A/step]
[Charge AC A: MH] DFU

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MH (Color)
2010
Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MH environment
(Middle temperature and High humidity).
001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG

[0 to 3000 / 820 / 10 A/step]
002 Environmental Target: C *ENG
[Charge AC A: HH] DFU

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for HH (Color)
2011
Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for HH environment
(High temperature and High humidity).
001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG

[0 to 3000 / 860 / 10 A/step]
002 Environmental Target: C *ENG

System SP2xxx
2012 [Charge Output Control] DFU
Selects the AC voltage control type.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control
1: Manual control (AC voltages are
decided with SP2006.)
2013 [Envir. Correct:PCU]
Displays the environmental condition,
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
which is measured in absolute
humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
001 Envir. Range:FC:Display *ENG 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)
2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)
4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)
5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
Selects the environmental condition

manually. DFU
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Forced Setting *ENG
0: The environmental condition is
determined automatically.
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Changes the humidity threshold

003 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 1 *ENG between LL and ML. DFU
[0 to 100 / 4.3 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

004 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 2 *ENG between ML and MM. DFU
[0 to 100 / 11.3 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

005 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 3 *ENG between MM and MH. DFU
[0 to 100 / 18.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

System SP2xxx

006 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 4 *ENG between MH and HH. DFU
[0 to 100 / 24.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the current temperature.

007 Current Temp.: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Displays the current relative humidity.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the absolute humidity.

009 Absolute Humidity: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the previous environmental

condition, which is measured in
010 Envir. Range:Bk:Display *ENG absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Displays the previous temperature.

011 Previous Temp.: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Displays the previous relative humidity.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the previous absolute

013 Absolute Humidity: Display *ENG humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
2014 [Charge AC Control: Setting] DFU
001 Main Interval: Power ON *ENG

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
002 Main Interval: Print *ENG
003 Sub: Interval *ENG [0 to 500 / 10 / 1 page/step]
004 Sub:Thresh Temp *ENG [0 to 99 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
005 Sub:R-Humid Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]

System SP2xxx
006 Sub:A-Humid Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 12 / 1 g/m3/step]
007 Main:Temp Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
008 Main:RH Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
009 Main:AH Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]
010 Sub:Temp Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 20 / 1 / 0.1 deg/step]
011 Sub:RH Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 %RH/step]
012 Sub:AH Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 20 / 1 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
013 Non-use Time *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 10 min/step]
014 Correction Coeff. *ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 kV/mA/step]
2015 [Charge AC Adj: Result]
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
2016 [ZnSt Application Mode]
The drum lubrication mode interrupts the copy/print job to prevent the drum
filming or cleaning problem after the high coverage image printing if some
conditions are met. The following SPs can be adjusted for the drum lubrication
mode.
Temperature Threshold *ENG [0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the threshold temperature for the low temperature mode of the drum
lubrication during the multiple printing job.
Execution Interval: Setting:1 *ENG [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
002 Specifies the reference number of the outputs for the high coverage image job
in the low speed mode.

System SP2xxx
003 Specifies the reference number of the outputs for the high coverage image
printing job in the low temperature condition.

004
Specifies the reference number of the outputs for the low coverage image job.
High Coverage Threshold:1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 0.01%/step]
005 Specifies the threshold for the high coverage image to the drum lubrication
mode handled by the setting 1 (SP2-016-002).
High Coverage Threshold:2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 0.01%/step]
006 Specifies the threshold for the high coverage image to the drum lubrication
High Coverage Threshold:3 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.5 / 0.01%/step]
007 Specifies the threshold for the low coverage image to the drum lubrication
Application Time:1 *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 sec./step]
008 Specifies the execution time for the drum lubrication mode of the setting 1
(SP2-016-002).
(SP2-016-003).
(SP2-016-004).
Average Coverage:1:K *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

011
Displays the average coverage of black color for the setting 1.
Average Coverage:1:M *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

012
Displays the average coverage of magenta color for the setting 1.

System SP2xxx
Average Coverage:1:C *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

013
Displays the average coverage of cyan color for the setting 1.
Average Coverage:1:Y *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

014
Displays the average coverage of yellow color for the setting 1.
015 Average Coverage:2:K *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
016 Average Coverage:2:M *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
017 Average Coverage:2:C *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
018 Average Coverage:2:Y *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
019 Average Coverage:3:K *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
020 Average Coverage:3:M *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
021 Average Coverage:3:C *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
022 Average Coverage:3:Y *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]
Mode Counter:K *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1 page/step]

023
Displays the black print counter after the previous drum lubrication.
Mode Counter:CMY *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1 page /step]

024
Displays the color print counter after the previous drum lubrication.
[Color Regist Adjust]
These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment
2101 and are adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value for
SP2101-001 after replacing the laser optics housing unit. For details, see
"Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section. The
value should be provided with the new laser optics housing unit.
001 Bk: Main Scan: Dot *ENG
002 C Main Scan: Dot *ENG [–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
003 M Main Scan: Dot *ENG

System SP2xxx
004 Y Main Scan: Dot *ENG
013 Bk: Sub Scan: Line *ENG
014 C: Sub Scan: Line *ENG

[–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
015 M: Sub Scan: Line *ENG
016 Y: Sub Scan: Line *ENG
[Magnification Adjust]
2102 These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment
and are adjusted at the factory. These SPs must be input only when a new
laser unit is installed.
001 Main Mag.: Bk:High Spd *ENG
003 Main Mag.: Bk:Low Spd *ENG
004 Main Mag.: C:High Spd *ENG
006 Main Mag.: C:Low Spd *ENG

[0 to 560 / 280 / 1 /step]
007 Main Mag.: M:High Spd *ENG
009 Main Mag.: M:Low Spd *ENG
010 Main Mag.: Y:High Spd *ENG
012 Main Mag.: Y:Low Spd *ENG
[Erase Margin Adjust] (Area, Paper Size)

2103
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
001 Lead Edge *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trailing Edge *ENG
003 Left *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Right *ENG
006 Duplex Trail. L Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]

System SP2xxx
007 Duplex Trail. M Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
008 Duplex Trail. S Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 Duplex Left Edge *ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
010 Duplex Right Edge *ENG
011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick *ENG
[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick *ENG
[LD Initial Power Adjust]
2104 Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new laser
unit is installed.
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[80 to 120 / 100 / 1 %/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[LD Power Adjust] DFU

(Process Speed, Color)
2105 Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed.
Each LD power setting is decided by process control.
High Speed: 120 mm/sec, Low Speed: 60 mm/sec
001 Bk: High Speed *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

Decreasing a value makes lines
002 C: High Speed *ENG
thinner on the output.
003 M: High Speed *ENG Increasing a value makes lines

System SP2xxx
004 Y: High Speed *ENG thicker on the output.
009 Bk: Low Speed *ENG
010 C: Low Speed *ENG
011 M: Low Speed *ENG
012 Y: Low Speed *ENG
[Polygon Rotation Time] DFU

2106
Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation.
001 Warming-Up *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
002 Job End *ENG [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
[Image Parameter]
2107
DFU
001 Image Gamma Flag *ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
002 Shading Correction Flag *ENG
[Test Pattern]
2109
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.
Pattern Selection - [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
0 None 12. Independent Pattern (2dot)

2: Vertical Line (2dot) 14. Trimming Area
003 3: Horizontal (1dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal)

4: Horizontal (2dot) 17: Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line 18: Band (Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line 19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern Small 20: Grayscale Vertical Margin
8: Grid pattern Large 21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin

System SP2xxx
9: Argyle Pattern Small 23: Full Dot Pattern

10: Argyle Pattern Large
11. Independent Pattern (1dot)
Specifies the color for the test pattern.

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
005 Color Selection -
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4:
Cyan
006 Density: Bk -
Specifies the color density for the test
007 Density: C - pattern.
Appendix:
SP Mode
[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
Tables
008 Density: M - 0: Lightest density
009 Density: Y - 15: Darkest density
2111 [Line Pos. Ajust]

twice.
001 Execute: Mode a - If this SP is not completed (NG is
displayed), do SP2111-003 first and then try
this SP again.

once.
002 Execute:Mode b -
If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003
first and then try this SP again.
Executes the rough line position adjustment

once.
003 Execute:Mode c - After doing this SP, make sure to execute
SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line
position adjustment is not perfectly done.

System SP2xxx
2112 [TM/P Sensor Test] ID Sensor Check FA
This SP is used to check the ID sensors at

001 Execute the factory. The results of this SP are
displayed in SP2140 to SP2145.
[Skew Adjustment]
2117 Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed, see
"Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.
001 Pulse: C *ENG
002 Pulse: M *ENG [–75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Pulse: Y *ENG
2118 [Skew Adjustment]
001 Execute: C *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment

values to the values specified with SP2117.
002 Execute: M *ENG
These SPs must be used when a new laser
optics housing unit is installed. For details,
003 Execute: Y *ENG see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the
"Replacement and Adjustment" section.
[Skew Adjustment Display]

2119
Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.
001 C *ENG
002 M *ENG [–75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Y *ENG

System SP2xxx
[P-Sensor Test]

the process control
001 PWM *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 PWM: Front *ENG [0 to 1024 / 0 / 1/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
006 PWM: Center *ENG
007 PWM: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]

the process control
001 Average *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Average: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Average: Center *ENG
007 Average: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]

the process control
001 Maximum *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
[TM-Sensor Test]

System SP2xxx
005 Maximum: Front *ENG
006 Maximum: Center *ENG
007 Maximum: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]
2143 Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check.

the process control
001 Minimum *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Minimum: Center *ENG
007 Minimum: Rear *ENG
[P-Sensor Test]
2144 Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

the process control
001 Maximum 2: *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Maximum 2: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
006 Maximum 2: Center *ENG
007 Maximum 2: Rear *ENG

System SP2xxx
[P-Sensor Test]
2145 Displays the minimum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

the process control
001 Minimum 2 *ENG
[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum 2: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
006 Minimum 2: Center *ENG
007 Minimum 2: Rear *ENG
[Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA
Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided
into 8 areas. Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image)
2150 and area 8 is at the rear side of the machine (right side of the image).
Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print.
Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
027 Bk: Area0 *ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
028 Bk: Area1 *ENG
029 Bk: Area2 *ENG
030 Bk: Area3 *ENG
031 Bk: Area4 *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
032 Bk: Area5 *ENG [–256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step ]
033 Bk: Area6 *ENG
034 Bk: Area7 *ENG
035 Bk: Area8 *ENG

System SP2xxx
079 C: Area0 *ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
080 C: Area1 *ENG
081 C: Area2 *ENG
082 C: Area3 *ENG
083 C: Area4 *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
084 C: Area5 *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
085 C: Area6 *ENG
086 C: Area7 *ENG
087 C: Area8 *ENG
131 M: Area0 *ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
132 M: Area1 *ENG
133 M: Area2 *ENG
134 M: Area3 *ENG
135 M: Area4 *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
136 M: Area5 *ENG [–256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
137 M: Area6 *ENG
138 M: Area7 *ENG
139 M: Area8 *ENG
183 Y: Area0 *ENG [–256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
184 Y: Area1 *ENG
185 Y: Area2 *ENG

Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
186 Y: Area3 *ENG
[–256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
187 Y: Area4 *ENG
188 Y: Area5 *ENG

System SP2xxx
189 Y: Area6 *ENG
190 Y: Area7 *ENG
191 Y: Area8 *ENG
[Shading Correct Setting] FA
Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power.

The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited
2152 from area 1 to area 14.
Appendix:
For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the
SP Mode
Tables
image) and area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
For Cyan and Yellow, area 1 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the
image) and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image).
001 Bk: Area 0 *ENG
002 Bk: Area 1 *ENG
003 Bk: Area 2 *ENG
004 Bk: Area 3 *ENG
005 Bk: Area 4 *ENG
006 Bk: Area 5 *ENG
007 Bk: Area 6 *ENG

This is for the synchronizing detection
008 Bk: Area 7 *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
009 Bk: Area 8 *ENG
010 Bk: Area 9 *ENG
011 Bk: Area 10 *ENG

System SP2xxx
This is out of the image area.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
033 C: Area 0 *ENG
034 C: Area 1 *ENG
035 C: Area 2 *ENG
036 C: Area 3 *ENG
037 C: Area 4 *ENG
038 C: Area 5 *ENG
039 C: Area 6 *ENG

040 C: Area 7 *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
041 C: Area 8 *ENG
042 C: Area 9 *ENG
043 C: Area 10 *ENG
044 C: Area 11 *ENG
045 C: Area 12 *ENG
046 C: Area 13 *ENG
047 C: Area 14 *ENG

048 C: Area 15 *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

065 M: Area 0 *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
066 M: Area 1 *ENG
067 M: Area 2 *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
068 M: Area 3 *ENG
069 M: Area 4 *ENG

System SP2xxx
070 M: Area 5 *ENG
071 M: Area 6 *ENG
072 M: Area 7 *ENG
073 M: Area 8 *ENG
074 M: Area 9 *ENG
075 M: Area 10 *ENG
076 M: Area 11 *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
077 M: Area 12 *ENG
078 M: Area 13 *ENG
079 M: Area 14 *ENG

080 M: Area 15 *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

097 Y: Area 0 *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
098 Y: Area 1 *ENG
099 Y: Area 2 *ENG
100 Y: Area 3 *ENG
101 Y: Area 4 *ENG
102 Y: Area 5 *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
103 Y: Area 6 *ENG
104 Y: Area 7 *ENG
105 Y: Area 8 *ENG
106 Y: Area 9 *ENG
107 Y: Area 10 *ENG

System SP2xxx
108 Y: Area 11 *ENG
109 Y: Area 12 *ENG
110 Y: Area 13 *ENG
111 Y: Area 14 *ENG
112 Y: Area 15 *ENG This is out of the image area.
2160 [Vertical Line Width] DFU
001 600dpi:Bk *ENG
002 600dpi:C *ENG
003 600dpi:M *ENG
004 600dpi:Y *ENG

[10 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
005 1200dpi:Bk *ENG
006 1200dpi:C *ENG
007 1200dpi:M *ENG
008 1200dpi:Y *ENG
009 600dpi:Indet.:Bk *ENG
010 1200dpi:Indet.:Bk *ENG

[10 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
600dpi:Multivalued:Bk
011 *ENG
(2bit)
2180 [Line Pos. Adj. Clear] DFU
001 Color Regist. -
003 MUSIC Result -
004 Area Mag. Correction -

System SP2xxx
2181 [Line Pos. Adj. Result] DFU
Displays the values for each correction.

"Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value
between two sheets of paper.
"Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value.
"M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan
direction.
"S. Scan Erro." Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan
direction.
Appendix:
SP Mode
"M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction.
Tables
"M. Cor.: Subdot" indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan
direction.
Bk: Black, M: Magenta, C: Cyan, Y: Yellow
001 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
002 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Skew: C *ENG
004 Bent: C *ENG
005 M. Scan Shift: Left: C *ENG
006 M. Scan Shift: Center: C *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / 0 / 0.001 m/step]
007 M. Scan Shift: RIght: C *ENG
008 S. Scan Shift: Left: C *ENG
009 S. Scan Shift: Center: C *ENG
010 S. Scan Shift: RIght: C *ENG
011 M. Cor.: Dot: C *ENG [–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
012 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
013 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG

System SP2xxx
015 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
016 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
017 S. Cor.: 600 Line: C *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
018 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]
019 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: C *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
020 S. Cor.: 1200 Subdot: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]
021 Skew: M *ENG
022 Bent: M *ENG
023 M. Scan Shift: Left: M *ENG
024 M. Scan Shift: Center: M *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / 0 / 0.001 m/step]
025 M. Scan Shift: Right: M *ENG
026 S. Scan Shift: Left: M *ENG
027 S. Scan Shift: Center: M *ENG
028 S. Scan Shift: Right: M *ENG
029 M. Cor.: Dot: M *ENG [–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
030 M. Cor.: Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: M *ENG
032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
034 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
035 S. Cor.: 600 Line: M *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
036 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]
037 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: M *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
038 S. Cor.: 1200 Subdot: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

System SP2xxx
039 Skew: Y *ENG
040 Bent: Y *ENG
041 M. Scan Shift: Left: Y *ENG
042 M. Scan Shift: Center: Y *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / 0 / 0.001 m/step]
043 M. Scan Shift: Right: Y *ENG
044 S. Scan Shift: Left: Y *ENG
045 S. Scan Shift: Center: Y *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
046 S. Scan Shift: Right: Y *ENG
047 M. Cor.: Dot: Y *ENG [–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
048 M. Cor.: Subdot: Y *ENG [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
049 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Y *ENG
050 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Y *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
051 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
052 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
053 S. Cor.: 600 Line: Y *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
054 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]
055 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: Y *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
056 S. Cor.: 1200 Subdot: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]
057 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]
058 Drum Cor.:600:Subdot *ENG [–7 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]
059 S. Cor.:1200 Subdot *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]
060 Drum Cor.:1200:Subdot *ENG [–7 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

System SP2xxx
[Line Pos. Adj. Offset] DFU

2182 (Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan
High / Medium: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
001 C Magnification *ENG Adjusts the line position manually.

[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step]
002 M Magnification *ENG
When line shifts are not corrected
by the automatic line position
adjustment, do this SP.
Increasing a value reduces the
003 Y Magnification *ENG
image in the main scan direction.
Decreasing a value enlarges the
image in the main scan direction.
004 M. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
005 M. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
008 M. Scan: Low: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
010 M. Scan: High: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
011 M. Scan: High: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
014 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
015 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
016 M. Scan: High: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
017 M. Scan: High: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
021 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
022 S. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]
023 S. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
026 S. Scan: Low: Dot: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]

System SP2xxx
027 S. Scan: Low: Subdot: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
028 S. Scan: High: Dot: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]
029 S. Scan: High: Subdot: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
032 S. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]
033 S. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
034 S. Scan: High: Dot: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]
035 S. Scan: High: Subdot: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
038 S. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]
039 S. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
040 C:Skew *ENG
041 M:Skew *ENG [-50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
042 Y:Skew *ENG
2190 [Line Pos. Adj. Mode] DFU
001 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: Bk *ENG
002 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean/step]
003 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
004 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
005 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean /step]
006 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG 0: Disable correction
1: Enable correction
007 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
008 Area Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
009 Area Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean /step]
010 Area Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG

System SP2xxx
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 boolean /step]
0: Adjusted with Bk
011 S. Scan Cor. Setting *ENG
1: Adjusted in minimum shift
among four colors
012 Detection Error Level *ENG [0 to 3500 / 200 / 1 m/step]
[MUSIC Coeff Setting] DFU

2191 Position Adjustment: Coefficient Setting
ch 0: ID sensor at rear, ch 1: ID sensor at center, ch 2: ID sensor at front
001 ch 0: Filter: Front: a1 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 125869 / 1 bit/step]
002 ch 0: Filter: Front: a2 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / –60488 / 1 bit/step]
003 ch 0: Filter: Front: b0 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step]
006 ch 0: Filter: Rear: a1 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 128596 / 1 bit/step]
007 ch 0: Filter: Rear: a2 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / –63398 / 1 bit/step]
008 ch 0: Filter: Rear: b0 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step]

System SP2xxx
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
031 Q Format Selection *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
[MUSIC Coeff Setting] DFU

2192 Line Position Adjustment: Threshold Setting
ch 0: ID sensor at rear, ch 1: ID sensor at center, ch 2: ID sensor at front
001 ch 0: 1st *ENG
002 ch 0: 2nd *ENG
003 ch 0: 3rd *ENG
004 ch 0: 4th *ENG [0.5 to 3 / 1.4 / 0.1 V/step]
005 ch 1: 1st *ENG
006 ch 1: 2nd *ENG
007 ch 1: 3rd *ENG

System SP2xxx
008 ch 1: 4th *ENG
009 ch 2: 1st *ENG
010 ch 2: 2nd *ENG
011 ch 2: 3rd *ENG
012 ch 2: 4th *ENG
[MUSIC Condition] DFU

2193
Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
Auto Execution *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

001
Enables/disables the automatic line position adjustment.
Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
mode after job end.
Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
after job end.
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 page/step]
mode during job.
Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 page/step]
during jobs.
Page: Standby: BW + FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in
006 stand-by mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of
outputs in BW printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the
condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.

System SP2xxx
Page: Standby: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in
007 stand-by mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of
outputs in color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the
condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
Temp Change *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1deg/step]
008 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment
(Mode b: adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on
the combinations of several conditions. Section Descriptions" section.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Elapse Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment
once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Temp Change 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step]
011 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment
(Mode a: adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on
the combinations of several conditions.
016 Page: Power ON:BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
2194 [MUSIC Exe Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step]
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step]
006 Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Execution Result *ENG
0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed

System SP2xxx
008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]
009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]
010 Error Counter: C *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Not done
011 Error Counter: M *ENG
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns
3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target
012 Error Counter: Y *ENG
4: Out of the adjustment range
5 to 9: Not used
[MUSIC Exe Time]

2197
DFU
001 Execution Time *ENG [10 to 40 / 20 / 10 ms/step]
002 TM Sensor Position *ENG [48.2 to 500 / 48.2 / 0.1mm/step]
2198 [Music A/D Interval] DFU
001 ADC Trigger *ENG [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step]
2199 [Music Time Setting] DFU
001 Error Time Set *ENG [0.1 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 sec /step]
[Skew Origin Set]
2220 Resets the value of the skew adjustment motor for each color.
These SPs must be executed when a new laser optics housing unit is installed.
For details, see "Laser Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.
001 C:Skew Motor *ENG
002 M:Skew Motor *ENG -
003 Y:Skew Motor *ENG

System SP2xxx
[LD Power: Fixed] DFU
2221 Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color.
These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0".
001 Bk:Normal Spd *ENG
002 C:Normal Spd *ENG
003 M:Normal Spd *ENG
004 Y:Normal Spd *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Increasing this value makes the
Tables
009 Bk:Low Spd *ENG image density darker.
010 C:Low Spd *ENG
011 M:Low Spd *ENG
012 Y:Low Spd *ENG
[Dev. DC Bias:Fixed] DFU

Development DC Bias Adjustment
Adjusts the development bias.

Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
2229 adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-041-001
Default: ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-041-001, the values in these SP
modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG

[0 to 800 / 450 / 10 –V/step]
004 Plain: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2: Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2: M *ENG

System SP2xxx
011 Thick 2: C *ENG
012 Thick 2: Y *ENG
[Ambient Temp/Hum:Display]
2241
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.
001 Temperature - [–5 to 45 / - / 0.1deg/step]
002 Relative Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]
[Env. Correct:Transfer] DFU

2302
Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit
Forced Setting *ENG [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets the environment condition manually.

0: Automatic environment control
1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity)
002 2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity)

4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity)
6: SLL (Super low temperature/ low humidity)
Absolute Humidity: Threshold 1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 4 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

003
Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML.

004
Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM.

005
Adjusts the threshold value between MM and MH.

006
Adjusts the threshold value between MH and HH.

System SP2xxx
Temperature:Threshold *ENG [–5 to 30 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
007 Adjusts the threshold temperature for SLL. If detected temperature is less than
a value specified by this SP, SLL condition is determined regardless of
humidity.
[Paper Size Correction] DFU

2308
Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction.
[0 to 350 / 290 / 1 mm/step]
Appendix:
001 Threshold 1 *ENG Threshold 1 < paper:
SP Mode
Tables
Paper is detected as "S1" size.
[0 to 350 / 250 / 1 mm/step]

002 Threshold 2 *ENG Threshold 2 < paper < Threshold 1:
[0 to 350 / 194 / 1 mm/step]

003 Threshold 3 *ENG Threshold 3 < paper < Threshold 2:
[0 to 350 / 150 / 1 mm/step]

Threshold 4 < paper < Threshold 3:
004 Threshold 4 *ENG Paper is detected as "S4" size.
Paper < Threshold 4:
2311 [Non Image Area: Bias] DFU
Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt

between images. This value is added to the
001 Image Transfer *ENG
value of the image transfer belt bias.
[10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step]
Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller

002 Paper Transfer *ENG between images.
[0 to 2100 / 0 / 100V/step]

System SP2xxx
2316 [Power ON:Bias] DFU
Image Transfer *ENG [0 to 60 / 5 / 1 A /step]

001
Adjusts the bias of the image transfer roller at power-on or a closed cover.
[Transfer Roller CL: Bias] DFU

2326
Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
Positive:befor and after

*ENG [0 to 2100 / 250 / 10 V /step]
JOB
001
Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Negative:befor and
*ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
after JOB
002
Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Positive:after JAM *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step]
003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the
paper transfer roller.
004 Negative:after JAM *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
[Common: BW: Bias]

2351 Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment
Image Transfer:Normal Speed *ENG [0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

003
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.

System SP2xxx
[Common: FC: Bias] DFU

2357 Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Bk *ENG [0 to 60 / 23 / 1 A]
plain paper.
Image Transfer:: Normal Spd:C *ENG [0 to 60 / 22 / 1 A]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:M *ENG [0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]
plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Y *ENG [0 to 60 / 29 / 1 A]
plain paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Bk *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:C *ENG [0 to 60 / 12 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:M *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.

System SP2xxx
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y *ENG [0 to 60 / 14 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
2360 [Common: BW Env. Correction Table] DFU
001 Image Transfer: Normal *ENG [1 to 50 / 42 / 1 /step]
003 Image Transfer: Low *ENG [1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]
[Common: FC Env. Correction Table] DFU
004 Image Transfer: Normal Spd:BK *ENG [1 to 50 / 25 / 1 /step]
005 Image Transfer: Normal Spd: C *ENG [1 to 50 / 46 / 1 /step]
006 Image Transfer: Normal Spd:M *ENG [1 to 50 / 43 / 1 /step]
007 Image Transfer:: Normal Spd:Y *ENG [1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step]
012 Image Transfer: Low Speed:Bk *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]
013 Image Transfer: Low Speed:C *ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]
014 Image Transfer: Low Speed:M *ENG
015 Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y *ENG [1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step]
[Plain: Bias: BW]
2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in

[0 to 200 / 12 / 1 – A /step]

System SP2xxx
[Plain: Bias: FC]
2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color
mode.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:BW]
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

015 PaperTransfer: Low:1st:S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 200 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step]


System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]

[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:FC]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2st Side: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step]


System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 355 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]

[Pain-T:Size-Env.Correct:BW] DFU
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2413 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current
for each paper size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG [1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1 *ENG width)
[1 to 50 / 23 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 34 / 1/step]
(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 26 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]
Paper Transfer: LowSpeed: 1st Side:
015 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
S4
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)
[1 to 50 / 41 / 1/step]
019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)
[Pain-T:Size-Env.Correct:FC] DFU
002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG [1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 37 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 16 / 1/step]
(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 32 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 24 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 18 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 22 / 1/step]
(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]
[Plain:L-Edge Correction] DFU
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading
2421 edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422.

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx
[Plain: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU
Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge
2422 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image
area.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[Plain: T-Edge Correction] DFU

Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the
2423 paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these
SP values.
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424.

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Plain: Switch Timing: T-Edge] DFU
Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge

2424 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image
area.

System SP2xxx

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2430 [Plain: Env. Correct Table] DFU
003 Paper Transfer: BW: Normal: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 39 / 1 /step]
Appendix:
004 Paper Transfer: BW: Normal: 2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]
SP Mode
Tables
005 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 39 / 1 /step]
006 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 33 / 1 /step]
009 PaperTransfer:BW:Low:1st *ENG

[1 to 50 / 25 / 1 /step]
010 Paper Transfer: BW:Low:2nd *ENG
011 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step]
012 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 31 / 1 /step]
[Thin: Bias: BW]
2453 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white
mode.

System SP2xxx
[Thin: Bias: FC]
2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.
[Thin: L-Edge Correction] DFU

Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thin: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU
area.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[Thin: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2473 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the
paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these
SP values.

System SP2xxx

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thin: Switch Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2474
Appendix:
plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image
SP Mode
Tables
area.

[-100 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2480 [Thin: Env. Correct Table] DFU
005 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]
011 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 44 / 1 /step]
2482 [Gloss: Bias: BW]
paper in black and white mode.

System SP2xxx
2483 [Gloss: Bias: FC]
paper in full color mode.
2485 [Gross: L-Edge Correct] DFU
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2486 [Gross: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2487 [Gross: T-Edge Correct] DFU
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2488 [Gloss:Switch Timing:T-Edge] DFU
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [-100 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2489 [Glossy: Env. Correct Table] DFU
003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 17 / 1 /step]
005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 21 / 1 /step]

System SP2xxx
[Thick 1: Bias: BW]
2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in
Thick: 60 mm/sec
Appendix:
[Thick 1: Bias: FC]
SP Mode
Tables
2507 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color
mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick-T:Size Correct:BW]
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]

[Thick-T:Size Correct:FC]
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]

Appendix:
018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd: S5 *ENG Not used
SP Mode
Tables
[Thick:Size-Env.Correct:BW] DFU
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]
005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
width)
[1 to 50 / 40 / 1/step]
width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 20 / 1/step]
[Thick:Size-Env.Correct:FC] DFU
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 49 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 50 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]
width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 6 / 1/step]
[Thick 1:L-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick 1: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU
area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

System SP2xxx
[Thick 1: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the
2523 paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these
SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick 1: Switch Timing: T-Edge] DFU

area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to -100 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2530 [Thick 1: Env. Correct Table] DFU
004 Paper Transfer: BW:2nd *ENG Not used
006 Paper Transfer: FC:2nd *ENG Not used

System SP2xxx
[Thick 2: Bias: BW]
2553 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in
Thick: 60 mm/sec
Appendix:
[Thick 2: Bias: FC]
SP Mode
Tables
2558 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in full color
mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick 2: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick: 60 mm/sec

System SP2xxx
area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2mm/step]
[Thick 2: T-Edge Correction] DFU

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick2:T-Edge Correct] DFU

area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to -100 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

System SP2xxx
2580 [Thick 2 Env. Correct Table] DFU
004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd *ENG Not used
006 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd *ENG Not used
[OHP: Bias: BW]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2603 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white
mode.
[OHP: Bias: FC]

2608
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.
[OHP: L-Edge Correct] DFU

OHP: Leading Edge Correction
2621 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading
edge in each mode. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx
[OHP: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU
2622 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge
plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image
area.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[OHP: T-Edge Correct] DFU

OHP: Trailing Edge Correction
2623 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing
[OHP: T-Edge Correction] DFU
2624 Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge
area.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [–98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2630 [OHP: Env. Correct Table]
002 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / NA: 39, EU/AA: 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / NA: 7, EU/AA: 47 / 1 /step]

System SP2xxx
[Thick 3: Bias: BW]
2651 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in
Thick: 60 mm/sec
Appendix:
[Thick 3: Bias: FC]
SP Mode
Tables
2652 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color
mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick 3: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick: 60 mm/sec

System SP2xxx
area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick 3: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick: 60 mm/sec
[Thick 3: TrailingEdge Correction] DFU

area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

System SP2xxx
[Thick 3: Env. Correct Table] DFU

2660 Thick 3 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment
Thick: 60 mm/sec
003 Paper Transfer:BW:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 36 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer:BW:2nd *ENG Not used
006 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd *ENG Not used
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[M-Thick:Bias:BW] Middle Thick: Bias: BW
2703
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 - A /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
[M-Thick:Bias:FC] Middle Thick: Bias: BW

2707
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in full color
mode.
001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 - A /step]
002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 28 / 1 - A /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11/ 1 - A /step]

System SP2xxx
[M-Thick:L-Edge Correct] DFU


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]
[M-Thick:SwTiming:L-Edge] DFU
area.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm /step]
[M-Thick:T-Edge Correct] DFU

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]

System SP2xxx
[M-Thick:SwTiming:T-Edge] DFU
Appendix:
area.
SP Mode
Tables

[0 to -100 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[M-Thick:Env.Correct Table] DFU

2730
003 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]
005 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]
006 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 33 / 1 /step]
009 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 32 / 1 /step]
010 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 21 / 1 /step]
011 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 48 / 1 /step]
012 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 28 / 1 /step]

System SP2xxx
[SP 1: Bias: BW]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
[SP 1: Bias: FC]
mode.

001 *ENG
S1
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]
002 *ENG S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
S1

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

Appendix:
SP Mode
width)
Tables
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]
width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

S4
width)

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

width)

017 *ENG

018 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]


001 *ENG
S1

002 *ENG

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]
width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

S4
width)

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

width)

017 *ENG

018 *ENG
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]

[SP1,2,3-T:Size Env.Correct:BW] DFU

001 *ENG
S1
Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: [1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]

002 *ENG

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 23 / 1/step]
S2
width)
[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]
S2
width)
[1 to 50 / 34 / 1/step]
width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[1 to 50 / 26 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]
S3
width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
S3
width)
[1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]
S4
width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
S4
width)
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
width)
Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: [1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]

017 *ENG

018 *ENG
[1 to 50 / 41 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
[SP1,2,3-T:Size Env.Correct:FC] DFU

001 *ENG
S1

002 *ENG

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 37 / 1/step]
S2
width)
[1 to 50 / 16 / 1/step]
S2
width)
[1 to 50 / 32 / 1/step]
width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[1 to 50 / 24 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]
S3
width)
[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]
S3
width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 18 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
S4
width)

System SP2xxx
[1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step]
S4
width)
[1 to 50 / 22 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]
width)
Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: [1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]

017 *ENG

018 *ENG
[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]
[SP1: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx
[SP 1:SwTiming:L-Edge] DFU
area.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[SP1: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[SP 1:SwTiming:T-Edge] DFU

area.

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

System SP2xxx
[SP 1: Env. Correct Table] DFU

2780
004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]
[SP 4: Bias: BW]
[SP 4: Bias: FC]
mode.

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]
width)
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

width)

System SP2xxx
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]

[SP4,5,6-T:Size Env.Correct:BW] DFU
[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 40 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 20 / 1/step]

System SP2xxx
[SP4,5,6-T:Size Env.Correct:FC] DFU
[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
[1 to 50 / 49 / 1/step]
width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[1 to 50 / 50 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]
width)
[1 to 50 / 6 / 1/step]


System SP2xxx
[SP 4: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU
area.

[SP 4: Sw Timing: T-Edge] DFU
area.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2799 [SP 4: Env. Correct Table] DFU
003 Paper Transfer:BW: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 17 / 1 /step]
005 Paper Transfer:FC: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 29 / 1 /step]
[SP 2: Bias: BW]

System SP2xxx

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
[SP2: Bias: FC]
mode.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[SP 2: L-Edge Correct] DFU


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx
[SP 2: SW Timing: L-Edge] DFU
area.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[SP 2: T-Edge Correct] DFU


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[SP 2: SwTiming: T-Edge] DFU

area.
001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

System SP2xxx

2830
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[SP 5: Bias: BW]
[SP 5: Bias: FC]
mode.

System SP2xxx

Special 5Paper: Leading Edge Correction
[SP 5: SwTiming: L-Edge] DFU
area.

area.

System SP2xxx
[SP3: Bias: BW]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
[Special 3: Bias: FC]
mode.

System SP2xxx
[SP 3: L-Edge Correct] DFU


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5% /step]
[Special 3: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge] DFU
area.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[SP 3: T-Edge Correct] DFU


System SP2xxx

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
area.

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2880

System SP2xxx
[SP 6: Bias: BW]
[SP 6: Bias: FC]
mode.

Special 5Paper: Leading Edge Correction
[SP 6: Sw Timing: L-Edge] DFU
area.

System SP2xxx

Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
area.
[Drum Idling Time]

2900
Specifies the drum idling time at job end for each line speed.
001 Normal Speed *ENG [0 to 60 / 5 / 1sec /step]
002 Low Speed *ENG [0 to 120 / 5 / 1sec /step]

System SP2xxx
[Fus.Reload:DrumIdleTimeOffset] DFU
2901 Adjusts the drum idling time for each coverage at the re-load temperature in
the half speed mode.
001 Coverage:0-6% *ENG [-60 to 300 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
005 Coverage:40%over *ENG [-60 to 300 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
[OPC Drum Rev Time] DFU

2902
Adjusts the time for how long the drum motor reverses after job end.
001 All: BW *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 10 msec/step]
002 All: FC *ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 10 msec/step]
003 DevRev: FC *ENG [0 to 200 / 70 / 10 msec/step]
004 DevRev: Bk *ENG [0 to 200 / 200 / 10 msec/step]
005 All *ENG [0 to 400000 / 0 / 10/step]
006 K *ENG
007 C *ENG
[0 to 999999999 / - / 1/step]
008 M *ENG
009 Y *ENG

System SP2xxx
[Brake Time] DFU
2903 Adjusts the time when the image transfer belt motor and drum motors reverses
from normal rotation after job end.
Bk OPC Drum &

001 *ENG
Intermediate Transfer
[290 to 5000 / 290 / 10 msec/step]
002 FC OPC Drum *ENG
003 FC Development *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[ImageTrunsferRevTime] DFU
2904 Adjusts the time for how long the image transfer belt motor reverses after job
end.
003 All *ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 10 msec/step]
2906 [Drum Stop Angle] DFU
001 Color *ENG

[0 to 359 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
002 Bk *ENG
[GainAdj:TransferM] DFU
2908
Gain Adjustment of Image Transfer Belt Motor
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 120 mm/sec *ENG 0: GAIN: High speed
1: GAIN: Low speed
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1: GAIN: Low speed

System SP2xxx
2915 [GainAdj:BkOpcDevM] DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: GAIN: Low speed
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1: GAIN: Low speed
2916 [GainAdj:ColorOpcM] DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: GAIN: Low speed
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1: GAIN: Low speed
2920 [Transfer Motor Ctrl]
DFU
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
001 TransferMotorCtrl *ENG
0: FG Control
1: ENC Control
SC443 Count *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]

002
Displays the detection times of SC443.
[P-Transfer:Bias Limit] DFU

Paper Transfer Roller Feed-back: Threshold Adjustment
2930
Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance
(division 2) at the paper transfer roller. This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939.
001 Bias *ENG [0 to 7000 / 6000 / 10 –V/step]

System SP2xxx
2931 [Transfer Roller CL:Timing]
T15:Standard Speed *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
001 Specifies the timing for the transfer roller cleaning after job end in the normal
speed mode.
T15:Low Speed *ENG [-2000 to 2000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
003 Specifies the timing for the transfer roller cleaning after job end in the low
speed mode.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2940 [Charge Bias On Timing]
001 T1:Standard Speed DFU *ENG [-500 to 1000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
T1:Low Speed *ENG [-500 to 1000 / -80 / -80 msec /step]
If a horizontal white band at 40 mm from the leading edge occurs in the low
002 speed mode, change this setting from "-80" to "-500".

[Side Effect]:
"580 msec" is added to the first copy/ print time when using the low speed
mode.
2941 [Dev. Bias Down Mode] DFU
001 T5:Bk:Normal *ENG [-140 to 140 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
002 T7:FC:Normal *ENG [-140 to 140 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
003 T5:Bk:Low *ENG [-210 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
004 T7: FC: Low *ENG [-210 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
2960 [Process Interval] DFU
001 Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

System SP2xxx
2971 [BW Non-Image:Bias ON]
T1 BW:Bias On:Normal *ENG [–360 to 80 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
001 Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller in the
normal speed.
T1 BW:Bias On:Low *ENG [–780 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller in the
low speed.
2972 [BW Image Request Timing] DFU
001 Fwait:K:Standard Speed *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
002 Fwait:K:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]
2973 [Forced Process Down Threshold]
- *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
001 Specifies the threshold pages for the forced processing stop at a continuous
printing job.
0: No forced processing stop (default)
2974 [FC Image Request Timing]
001 Fwait:Y:Standard Speed *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Fwait:Y:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]

System SP2xxx
2990 [Print Duty Control]
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Duty Control State *ENG
001 0: No limit, 1: Limit
Limit or does not limit the duty control for a continuous printing job.
Duty Control Thresh Time *ENG [0 to 195 / 100 / 10 min./step]

002
Specifies the judgment time for the duty control for a continuous printing job.
Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
003 Specifies the threshold for the duty control for a continuous printing job.
0: No duty control (default)
Forced CPM Down

*ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
Thresh: No Duty Control
004
Specifies the threshold page for the forced processing stop without the duty
limit.
Drum Stop Time: No Duty

*ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
005 Control
Specifies the drum brake time without the duty limit.
ITB Stop Time: No Duty

*ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
006 Control
Specifies the ITB brake time without the duty limit.
Forced CPM Down

*ENG [0 to 5000 / 1 / 1 page/step]
007 Thresh: Duty Control
Specifies the threshold page for the forced processing stop with the duty limit.
Drum Stop Time: Duty

*ENG [300 to 1500 / 1500 / 10 msec/step]
008 Control
Specifies the drum brake time with the duty limit.

System SP2xxx
ITB Stop Time: Duty

*ENG [300 to 1500 / 1500 / 10 msec/step]
009 Control
Specifies the ITB brake time with the duty limit.
Duty Control: Start Time *ENG -

010
Displays the execution time of the duty limit control.
FC Development Stop
*ENG [290 to 5000 / 290 / 10 msec/step]
011 Time: No Duty Control
Specifies the development stop time without the duty limit.
FC Development Stop
*ENG [290 to 5000 / 1550 / 10 msec/step]
012 Time: Duty Control
Specifies the development stop time with the duty limit.
Duty Control Time *ENG [0 to 300 / 30 / 1 min/step]

013
Specifies the duty control time.

System SP3xxx
3.3 SYSTEM SP3XXX
3.3.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)
3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution]
Executes the normal process control

manually (potential control).
001 Normal Procon -
Check the result with SP3-325-001 after
executing this SP.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Executes the toner density adjustment
002 Toner Density Adjst - manually. Check the result with
SP3-325-001 after executing this SP.

normally done before ACC.
003 Procon BF-ACC -
The type of process control is selected with
SP3-041-004.

004 With Full MUSIC -
adjustment) twice.

005 With Normal MUSIC -
adjustment) once.

System SP3xxx
[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order "Y C M K"
3012 e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others
were successful.
See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process Control Error section for
details.
001 History: Latest *ENG

[1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
3013 [TD Sen Initial Setting] Developer Initialization Setting
002 Execution: COL -
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the TD sensor initialization for
004 Execution: C - each color.
005 Execution: M -
006 Execution: Y -

System SP3xxx
3014 [TD Sen Initial Set Result] Developer Initialization Result: Display
[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YMCK *ENG 1: Success
2 to 9: Failure
001 Displays the developer initialization result. See the "Error Condition Tables" in
the Process Control Error section for details on the meaning of each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y M C Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 1 (M) 2 (C) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others
succeeded.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
3015 [Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
002 Execution: COL (MCY) -
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the manual toner supply to
004 Execution: C - the development unit.
005 Execution: M -
006 Execution: Y -
[Forced Toner Supply Cntl] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color])

3016
Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG
002 Supply Time: C *ENG

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]
003 Supply Time: M *ENG
004 Supply Time: Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
3020 [Vt Limit Error]
001-
DFU
005
001 Delta Vt Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 5 / 0.01 V/step]
002 Upper Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 4.7 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Upper Error Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 20 / 1 time/step]
004 Lower Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]
005 Lower Error Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 times/step]
006 Upper Counter: Bk *ENG
007 Upper Counter: C *ENG
008 Upper Counter: M *ENG
009 Upper Counter: Y *ENG Displays the total times of the Vt upper
or lower limit error.
010 Lower Counter: Bk *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 times/step]
011 Lower Counter: C *ENG
012 Lower Counter: M *ENG
013 Lower Counter: Y *ENG
[TD Sensor Initial Set] Developer Initialization Setting
3021 Specifies the developer agitation time for each color at the developer
initialization.
001 Agitation Time: Bk *ENG
002 Agitation Time: C *ENG

[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
003 Agitation Time: M *ENG
004 Agitation Time: Y *ENG
005- Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color.

System SP3xxx
008

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

Enables or disables developer

initialization. DFU
009 Initial Setting Off *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Toner Replenishment Mode]

3022
Sets the toner supply flag of each color.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

3041 [Process Control Type]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the charge
Bias Control *ENG DC bias and development DC bias set with
001 SP2-005 and SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL
Enables or disables the process control.
LD Power Control *ENG 0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)
002 1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)
Selects the LD power control mode.

System SP3xxx
AutoControl
*ENG 0: Permit
Prohibition Set
003 1: Forbid
Enables or disables the automatic process control at power-on or door

opening.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
Pre-ACC Process 0: Not Execute
*ENG
004 Control 1: Process Control
2: TC Control
Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: FIXED
005 P-Pattern Selection *ENG
1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED
3043 [TD Adjustment Mode]
Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at

power on.
001 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,

4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low,
and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Initial *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

the developer initialization.

6 to 9: Disabled

System SP3xxx
Repeat Number: Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in

stand by mode.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
ACC.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Recovery *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

005
Not used
Repeat Number: Job End *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]

job end.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number:Interrupt *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
007 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment
during printing. DFU

System SP3xxx
Toner Supply Coeff. *ENG [0 to 25.5 / 10 / 0.1 sec/step]
008 Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to
be low.
C-pattern: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
009 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density
when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment.
C-pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
010 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density
C-pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
011 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density
C-pattern: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
012 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density
T1 Bias: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

013
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black.
T1 Bias: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

014
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta.
T1 Bias: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

015
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan.
T1 Bias: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

016
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow.
Developer Agitation Time *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

017
Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment.

System SP3xxx
C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: Bk *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density
018 adjustment.
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected
development gamma values (SP3611-001) exceed the target values
(SP3611-005) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: C *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
019 adjustment.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
020 adjustment.
C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: Y *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
021 adjustment.
[Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color])

3044
Selects the toner supply method type.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with
002 C *ENG
SP 3401)
003 M *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)

System SP3xxx
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
004 Y *ENG 3: MBD (Vtref_Fixed)
4: MBD (Vtref_Control)
[Toner End Detection: Set]

3045
Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
DFU
001 ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 NE Detection *ENG 0: ALL (Calculation and TE sensor)
1: TE Sensor
[Toner End/Near End]

3101
Displays the amount of each color toner.
001 Toner Replenishment: Bk *ENG
002 Toner Replenishment: C *ENG

[1 to 600 / 235 / 1 g/step]
003 Toner Replenishment: M *ENG
004 Toner Replenishment: Y *ENG
005-008 Displays the consumed amount of each color toner.
005 Toner Consumption: Bk *ENG
006 Toner Consumption: C *ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
007 Toner Consumption: M *ENG
008 Toner Consumption: Y *ENG
Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated by
009-012
the operating times of the toner supply pumps.
009 Toner Remaining: Bk *ENG [–50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

System SP3xxx
010 Toner Remaining: C *ENG
011 Toner Remaining: M *ENG
012 Toner Remaining: Y *ENG
Adjusts the threshold of toner near end for each color. The toner near end
message appears on the LCD when the remaining toner amount reaches this
013-016
threshold. When one of these SPs (SP3-101-009 to 012 or -032 to -035)
reaches this threshold, toner near end is detected.
013 Near End Thresh: Bk *ENG [0 to 600 / 13 / 1 g/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
014 Near End Thresh: C *ENG
015 Near End Thresh: M *ENG [0 to 600 / 3 / 1 g/step]
016 Near End Thresh: Y *ENG
Delta Vt Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]
021 This SP is the threshold for toner end. Delta Vt: Vt-Vtref
When both this SP and SP3-101-026 occur at same time, toner end is
determined.
Displays the total delta Vt (Vt-Vtref) value for each color.These are calculated
022-025
by pixel counting.
022 Delta Vt Sum: Bk *ENG
023 Delta Vt Sum: C *ENG

[0 to 655 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
024 Delta Vt Sum: M *ENG
025 Delta Vt Sum: Y *ENG
026 Delta Vt Sum Threshold *ENG [0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]
Displays the consumed toner amount calculated with the pixel count for each
028-031
color.
028 Pixel: Consumption: Bk *ENG
029 Pixel: Consumption: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
030 Pixel: Consumption: M *ENG

System SP3xxx
031 Pixel: Consumption: Y *ENG
032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count.
032 Pixel: Remaining : Bk *ENG
033 Pixel: Remaining : C *ENG

[-50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
034 Pixel: Remaining : M *ENG
035 Pixel: Remaining : Y *ENG
040-043 Displays the pixel M/A for each color.
040 Pixel M/A: Bk *ENG
041 Pixel M/A: C *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.05 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
042 Pixel M/A: M *ENG
043 Pixel M/A: Y *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.6 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
Adjusts the delta Vt (Vt – Vtref) of toner

044 Delta Vt Thresh BF NE *ENG end before toner near end is detected.
[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the total delta Vt (Vt – Vtref) of

Delta Vt Sum Thresh BF toner end before toner near end is
045 *ENG
NE detected.
[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]
046-049 Displays the latest mohno off time.
046 Mohno Off Time: Bk *ENG
047 Mohno Off Time: C *ENG

[0 to 0 x FFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 sec/step]
048 Mohno Off Time: M *ENG
049 Mohno Off Time: Y *ENG
Adjusts the threshold of the remaining toner for the toner near-end detection.
050-053
DFU
050 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Bk *ENG [1 to 600 / 57 / 1 g/step]

System SP3xxx
051 TE Sn Detect Thresh:C *ENG
052 TE Sn Detect Thresh:M *ENG
053 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Y *ENG
[Toner End Recovery]
3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the
TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.
001 Repeat: Bk *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
002 Repeat: C *ENG
[1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step]
003 Repeat: M *ENG
004 Repeat: Y *ENG
[TE Count: Display]

3131
Display the number of toner end detections for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 time/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

3201
Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.
002 Current: C *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: M *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
[Vt Shift: Display/Set]
3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed.

001 Med Speed Shift:Bk *ENG
002 Med Speed Shift:C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.29 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Med Speed Shift:M *ENG
004 Med Speed Shift:Y *ENG
005 Low Speed Shift:Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.28 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Low Speed Shift:C *ENG
007 Low Speed Shift:M *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.31 / 0.01 V/step]
008 Low Speed Shift:Y *ENG
013 Low TCShift: K *ENG
014 Low TCShift: C *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
015 Low TCShift: M *ENG
016 Low TCShift: Y *ENG
3221
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.
002 Current: C *ENG

[2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: M *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-
Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization.
008
005 Initial: Bk *ENG [2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

System SP3xxx
006 Initial: C *ENG
007 Initial: M *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
3222
Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.
Appendix:
002 Current: C *ENG
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: M *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-
Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization.
008
006 Initial: C *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: M *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
009-
Displays or adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color.
012
009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG

[-5 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
010 Pixel Correction: C *ENG
011 Pixel Correction: M *ENG

[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
012 Pixel Correction: Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
[Vtref U/L-Limit Set]

3223
Adjusts the lower or upper limit value of Vtref for each color.
001 Lower: Bk *ENG
002 Lower: C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Lower: M *ENG
004 Lower: Y *ENG
005 Upper: Bk *ENG
006 Upper: C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Upper: M *ENG
008 Upper: Y *ENG
Adjusts the initial toner concentration.

009 Initial TC *ENG
[1 to 15 / 7 / 0.1 wt%/step]

010 Upper: TC *ENG concentration.
[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the toner

011 Lower: TC *ENG concentration.
[1 to 15 / 4 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the upper limit of the TD sensor

012 Upper Sensitivity *ENG sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.44 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the TD sensor

013 Lower Sensitivity *ENG sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.209 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]
014 TD Thresh H/M *ENG [1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
015 TD Thresh M/L *ENG [1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
016 UpperTC:K *ENG [1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

System SP3xxx
017 UpperTC:C *ENG Adjusts the upper limit of the toner

concentration for each color.
018 UpperTC:M *ENG
019 UpperTC:Y *ENG
[Vtref Correct: Pixel]

3224
Adjusts the coefficient of Vtref correction for each coverage and color.
001 Low Coverage Coeff. Bk *ENG
Appendix:
002 Low Coverage Coeff.C *ENG
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step]
003 Low Coverage Coeffi.M *ENG
004 Low Coverage Coeff. Y *ENG
005 High Coverage Coeff, Bk *ENG
006 High Coverage Coeff, C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.3 / 0.01 V/step]
007 High Coverage Coeff, M *ENG
008 High Coverage Coeff, Y *ENG
Adjusts the threshold of the low

009 Low Coverage: Thresh *ENG coverage.
[0 to 20 / 3 / 0.1 %/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the high

010 High Coverage: Thresh:M *ENG coverage.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]
011 TC Upper Limit Correction *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
012 TC Upper Limit:Display:Bk *ENG
013 TC Upper Limit:Display: C *ENG

[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt% /step]
014 TC Upper Limit:Display: M *ENG
015 TC Upper Limit:Display: Y *ENG
016 Process Control Threshold:M *ENG [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 time/step]

System SP3xxx
017 High Coverage: Threshold:H *ENG Adjusts the threshold of the high
coverage.
018 High Coverage: Threshold:L *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]
019 Process Control Thresh:H *ENG

[0 to 255 / 14 / 1 time/step]
020 Process Control Thresh:L *ENG
021 Initial ProCon Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 6 / 1 time/step]
022 High Coverage Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 %/step]
023 Process Control Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 time/step]
3230 [Toner Supply MBD] DFU
001 ADD:TIME *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 10 msec/step]
002 ADD:K *ENG
003 ADD:C *ENG

[0.01 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
004 ADD:M *ENG
005 ADD:Y *ENG
007 ADD:LowSpd *ENG [0.01 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
008 MSEC_V *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.080 / 0.001/step]
009 N_Delay *ENG [0 to 200 / 27 / 1 /step]
030 PID:I:K *ENG
031 PID:I:C *ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.4 / 0.01 /step]
032 PID:I:M *ENG
033 PID:I:Y *ENG
034 PID:P:K *ENG
035 PID:P:C *ENG [0 to 100 / 8 / 0.01 /step]
036 PID:P:M *ENG

System SP3xxx
037 PID:P:Y *ENG
039 PID:I:LowSpd *ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]
041 PID:P:LowSpd *ENG
060 AWILOW:K *ENG
061 AWILOW:C *ENG

[-1 to 1 / 0.125 / 0.0001 /step]
062 AWILOW:M *ENG
063 AWILOW:Y *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
064 AWPUP:K *ENG
065 AWPUP:C *ENG

[-1 to 1 / 1 / 0.0001 /step]
066 AWPUP:M *ENG
067 AWPUP:Y *ENG
070 AWILOW:LowSpd *ENG

[0 to 100 / 2 / 0.01 /step]
071 AWPUP:LowSpd *ENG
090 SMITH:K *ENG
091 SMITH:C *ENG

[0 to 2 / 0.06 / 0.01 /step]
092 SMITH:M *ENG
093 SMITH:Y *ENG
095 SMITH:LowSpd *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.5 / 0.01 /step]
100 Int_conserve_I_K *ENG
101 Int_conserve_I_C *ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 0.0001 /step]
102 Int_conserve_I_M *ENG
103 Int_conserve_I_Y *ENG
110 ANC_ref_conserve_K *ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 0.0001 /step]
111 ANC_ref_conserve_C *ENG

System SP3xxx
112 ANC_ref_conserve_M *ENG
113 ANC_ref_conserve_Y *ENG
120 ANC_A3_K *ENG
121 ANC_A3_C *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.17 / 0.001 /step]
122 ANC_A3_M *ENG
123 ANC_A3_Y *ENG
124 ANC_A4_K *ENG
125 ANC_A4_C *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.17 / 0.001 /step]
126 ANC_A4_M *ENG
127 ANC_A4_Y *ENG
130 ANC_A3_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.44 / 0.001 /step]
131 ANCA4T_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 /step]
150 AWPNI_K *ENG
151 AWPNI_C *ENG

[-10 to 10 / 0.2 / 0.001 /step]
152 AWPNI_M *ENG
153 AWPNI_Y *ENG
154 PID *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
180 ANCLA_K *ENG
181 ANCLA_C *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.001 /step]
182 ANCLA_M *ENG
183 ANCLA_Y *ENG
184 ANCLB_K *ENG
185 ANCLB_C *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.31 / 0.001 /step]
186 ANCLB_M *ENG

System SP3xxx
187 ANCLB_Y *ENG
190 ANCLA_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.36 / 0.01 /step]
191 ANCLB_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.29 / 0.01 /step]
210 PIX_TBL_1 *ENG
211 PIX_TBL_2 *ENG
212 PIX_TBL_3 *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
213 PIX_TBL_4 *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
214 PIX_TBL_5 *ENG
215 PIX_TBL_6 *ENG
216 PIX_TBL_7 *ENG
217 PIX_TBL_8 *ENG
218 PIX_TBL_9 *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
219 PIX_TBL_10 *ENG
220 PIX_TBL_11 *ENG
221 PIX_TBL_12 *ENG
222 PIX_COR_K *ENG
223 PIX_COR_C *ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
224 PIX_COR_M *ENG
225 PIX_COR_Y *ENG
226 SEL_PIX_AVE *ENG [1 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
231 PID_I_LIM1_Std *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]
233 PID_I_LIM1_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.078 / 0.001 /step]
234 PID_I_LIM2_Std *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]
236 PID_I_LIM2_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0. 078 / 0.001 /step]

System SP3xxx
237 PID_P_LIM1_Std *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]
239 PID_P_LIM1_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0. 078 / 0.001 /step]
240 PID_P_LIM2_Std *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]
242 PID_P_LIM2_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0. 078 / 0.001 /step]
243 PID_I_STDtoLOW *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]
244 PID_I_LOWtoSTD *ENG [0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 /step]
[Toner Supply: Setting] DFU

3231
Adjusts the coefficient of the toner supply time for each color.
001 Conversion Coeff.:Bk *ENG
002 Conversion Coeff.:C *ENG

[0.5 to 9.99 / 3.33 / 0.01 /step]
003 Conversion Coeff.:M *ENG
004 Conversion Coeff.:K *ENG
3232 [T-Supply Coeff.: Setting] DFU
001 Vt Proportion: Bk *ENG
002 Vt Proportion: C *ENG

[0 to 2550 / 50 / 1 /step]
003 Vt Proportion: M *ENG
004 Vt Proportion: Y *ENG
005 Pixel Proportion: Bk *ENG
006 Pixel Proportion: C *ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0.47 / 0.01 /step]
007 Pixel Proportion: M *ENG
008 Pixel Proportion: Y *ENG
009 Vt Integral Control: Bk *ENG

[0 to 2550 / 500 / 1 /step]
010 Vt Integral Control: C *ENG

System SP3xxx
011 Vt Integral Control: M *ENG
012 Vt Integral Control: Y *ENG
013 Vt Sum Times: Bk *ENG
014 Vt Sum Times: C *ENG

[1 to 255 / 20 / 1 time/step]
015 Vt Sum Times: M *ENG
016 Vt Sum Times: Y *ENG
Appendix:
3233 [Pixel-Prop. Coeff.2:Set] DFU
SP Mode
Tables
001 Correction Coeff.:1 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
002 Correction Coeff.:2 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]
003 Correction Coeff.:3 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
3234 [Pixel-Prop. Coeff.3:Set] DFU
001 Correction Value 1 *ENG [-0.1 to 0 / -0.01 / 0.01 /step]
002 Correction Value 2 *ENG [0 to 0.1 / 0.01 / 0.01 /step]
3235 [Toner Supply Coeff.: Display] DFU
001 Pixel Proportion 2: Bk *ENG
002 Pixel Proportion 2: C *ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
003 Pixel Proportion 2: M *ENG
004 Pixel Proportion 2: Y *ENG
005 Pixel Proportion 3: Bk *ENG

[0.7 to 1.3 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
006 Pixel Proportion 3: C *ENG

System SP3xxx
007 Pixel Proportion 3: M *ENG
008 Pixel Proportion 3: Y *ENG
009 Vt Integral Value: Bk *ENG
010 Vt Integral Value: C *ENG

[-255 to 255 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
011 Vt Integral Value: M *ENG
012 Vt Integral Value: Y *ENG
[Toner Supply Consum.: Display]

3236
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: C *ENG

[0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1 mg/step]
003 Latest: M *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG
[Developer Agitation Setting]

3237
001 Agitation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
[Vt Target: Setting]

3238
Displays the Vt target value at developer initialization.
001 Bk *ENG
002 C *ENG
[0 to 5 / 2.7 / 0.01 V/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
[Vtref Correction: Setting]

3239
Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control.
001 (+)Consumption: Bk *ENG
002 (+)Consumption: C *ENG
003 (+)Consumption: M *ENG
004 (+)Consumption: Y *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.05 / 0.01 V/step]
Appendix:
005 (-)Consumption: Bk *ENG
SP Mode
Tables
006 (-)Consumption: C *ENG
007 (-)Consumption: M *ENG
008 (-)Consumption: Y *ENG
009-012 Threshold for development gamma rank.
009 P Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.15 / 0.01 /step]
010 P Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.05 / 0.1 /step]
011 P Rank 3 Threshold *ENG [-2 to 0 / -0.05 / 0.1 /step]
012 P Rank 4 Threshold *ENG [-2 to 0 / -0.15 / 0.01 /step]
013-014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt.
013 T Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
014 T Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 V/step]

System SP3xxx
3241 [Background Potential Setting]
001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the

charge bias referring to the development
bias at process control.
003 Coefficient: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]
004 Coefficient: Y *ENG 0.001 x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to -008
005 Offset: Bk *ENG These are additional values for calculating

the charge bias referring to the
006 Offset: C *ENG
development bias at process control.
007 Offset: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]
0.001 x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these
008 Offset: Y *ENG
values
[LD Power Setting]

3242
Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control.
001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 128 / 1 /step]
003 Coefficient: M *ENG
004 Coefficient: Y *ENG
005 Offset: Bk *ENG
006 Offset: C *ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 27 / 1 /step]
007 Offset: M *ENG
008 Offset: Y *ENG
017 Low Speed Coeff.:Bk *ENG
018 Low Speed Coeff.:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 128 / 1 /step]
019 Low Speed Coeff.:M *ENG

System SP3xxx
020 Low Speed Coeff.:Y *ENG
021 Low Speed Offset:Bk *ENG
022 Low Speed Offset:C *ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 58 / 1 /step]
023 Low Speed Offset:M *ENG
024 Low Speed Offset:Y *ENG
[DevBias_SpdCorrectSetting]
3243
Appendix:
Adjusts the coefficient or offset value for development bias correction for each
SP Mode
Tables
speed.
009 LowSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG
010 LowSpd:Coef:M *ENG

[0.5 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
011 LowSpd:Coef:C *ENG
012 LowSpd:Coef:Y *ENG
013 LowSpd:offset:Bk *ENG
014 LowSpd:offset:M *ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 V/step]
015 LowSpd:offset:C *ENG
016 LowSpd:offset:Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
[Coverage]
3251
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
001 Latest: Pixcel Bk *ENG
002 Latest: Pixcel C *ENG Displays the latest coverage for each
color.
003 Latest: Pixcel M *ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
004 Latest: Pixcel Y *ENG
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach
005 Average S: Bk *ENG
006 Average S: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]
007 Average S: M *ENG
008 Average S: Y *ENG
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach
009 Average M: Bk *ENG
010 Average M: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]
011 Average M: M *ENG
012 Average M: Y *ENG
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach
the number specified with SP3-251-019.
013 Average L: Bk *ENG
014 Average L: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]
015 Average L: M *ENG

System SP3xxx
016 Average L: Y *ENG
017 Total Page Setting: S *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
018 Total Page Setting: M *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
019 Total Page Setting: L *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
020 Total Page Setting: S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
021 Total Page Setting: M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
022 Total Page Setting: L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.
024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG
025 Latest Coverage: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
026 Latest Coverage: M *ENG
027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG
Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.
028 DevAgi. Theresh BF

*ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]
ProCon

System SP3xxx
[ID Sn Detection Value]

3311
Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
002 Voffset reg: C *ENG
003 Voffset reg: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
004 Voffset reg: Y *ENG
005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: C *ENG
006 Voffset dif: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG
008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG
009 Voffset TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
010 Voffset TM (Rear) *ENG
3321 [ID/TM Sensor All]
Execute the ID sensor initialization setting

010 P/TM Sensor All -
for all sensors
[Vsg Adjust. Result: Vsg]

3322
Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.
001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG
002 Vsg reg: C *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Vsg reg: M *ENG
004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
005 Vsg dif: C *ENG
006 Vsg dif: M *ENG
007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG
008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG
009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG
010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG
Appendix:
3323 [Vsg Adjust. Result: Ifsg]
SP Mode
Tables
001 Ifsg: Bk *ENG
002 Ifsg: C *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]
003 Ifsg: M *ENG
004 Ifsg: Y *ENG
005 Ifsg TM (Front) *ENG
006 Ifsg TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]
007 Ifsg TM (Rear) *ENG
3324 [Vsg Adjustment: Set]
003 Vsg Error Counter *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 0.1 time/step]
004 Vofset Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 V/step]
005 Vsg Upper Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 4.5 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Vsg Lower Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step]

System SP3xxx
[Vsg Adjustment Result]
Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

3325 The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front,
sensor for Bk, sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor
for Yellow and sensor for Rear).
001 Latest *ENG
002 Latest 1 *ENG
003 Latest 2 *ENG
004 Latest 3 *ENG

[111 to 999 / 999 / 1 /step]
005 Latest 4 *ENG 9: Unexpected error

3: Offset voltage error
006 Latest 5 *ENG 2: Vsg adjustment value error
007 Latest 6 *ENG 1: O.K
008 Latest 7 *ENG
009 Latest 8 *ENG
010 Latest 9 *ENG
3361 [ID Sn Sensitivity: Display] DFU
003 K2C (Latest) *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
004 K5C (Latest) *ENG [0 to 10 / 1.2 / 0.01 /step]
3362 [ID Sn Sensitivity: Display] DFU
003 K5: Upper *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.01 /step]
004 K5: Lower *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]
005 Kn: Upper *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01 /step]
006 Kn: Lower *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

System SP3xxx
007 K5 Edit Point *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.15 / 0.01 /step]
008 K5 Target Voltage *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.63 / 0.01 V/step]
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
009 K5 Approximate Method *ENG
0:Linear, 1: Curve
010 K2: U/L Limit Coeff. 1 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
K2: Upper Limit

011 *ENG [–0.2 to 0.4 / 0.07 / 0.01 /step]
Correction
K2: Lower Limit
Appendix:
012 *ENG [–0.2 to 0.4 / –0.07 / 0.01 /step]
SP Mode
Tables
Correction
013 Diffusion Correction *ENG [0.75 to 1.35 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
016 K2: Check *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.001 /step]
3363 [ID Pattern Timing Setting]
Adjusts the detection timing for the

001 Scan YCMBk *ENG process control pattern.
[-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Adjusts the timing when the paper

transfer unit is kept away from the image
002 Detection Delay Time *ENG
transfer belt.
[0 to 2500 / 400 / 1 msec/step]

003 Delay Time *ENG process control pattern.
[0 to 2500 / 1335 / 1 msec/step]

pattern that is used for the line position
004 MUSIC Delay Time *ENG
adjustment.
[-2500 to 2500 / 300 / 1 msec/step]

System SP3xxx
3371 [M/A Calculation] DFU
001 Correction Coeff.: Bk *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 0.99 / 0.01 /step]
002 Correction Coeff.: C *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
003 Correction Coeff.: M *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
004 Correction Coeff.: Y *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
005 Color Correct Coeff.:Bk *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
006 Color Correct Coeff.:C *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 0.95 / 0.01 /step]
007 Color Correct Coeff.:M *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]
008 Color Correct Coeff.:Y *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1.01 / 0.01 /step]
[Fixed Toner Supply Mode]

3401
Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode.
001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG
002 Fixed Rate: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step]

These SPs are used only when SP3-044
003 Fixed Rate: M *ENG is set to "1".
004 Fixed Rate: Y *ENG
[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

3411
Displays the current toner supply rate.
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: C *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Latest: M *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
3421 [Toner Supply Range]
001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG
002 Upper Limit: C *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during
printing.
003 Upper Limit: M *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG
005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG
Adjusts the minimum toner supply
Appendix:
006 Minimum Supply Time: C *ENG
SP Mode
Tables
time.
007 Minimum Supply Time: M *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
008 Minimum Supply Time: Y *ENG
3451 [T-Supply Carry Over: Display]
001 Bk *ENG
Displays the toner supply time carried
002 C *ENG over from a previous toner supply mode
003 M *ENG for each color.

[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
004 Y *ENG
3452 [T-Supply Carry Over: Display] DFU
001 Maximum: Bk *ENG
002 Maximum: C *ENG Adjusts the maximum time carried over

from a previous toner supply mode.
003 Maximum: M *ENG [0 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 msec/step]
004 Maximum: Y *ENG

System SP3xxx
[Process Control Target M/A]

3501
Adjusts the target M/A of the full coverage in single color printer mode.
001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
002 Maximum M/A: C *ENG
003 Maximum M/A: M *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.445 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG
[Image Adj. Counter:Display]

3510
Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.
001 Process Control: BW *ENG
002 Process Control: FC *ENG
003 Power ON: BW *ENG
004 Power ON: FC *ENG
005 MUSIC: BW *ENG

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
006 MUSIC: FC *ENG
007 Vsg Adj. *ENG
009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW *ENG
010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC *ENG

System SP3xxx
[Execution Interval: Setting]

3511
Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.
Appendix:
005 Initial: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
SP Mode
Tables
006 Initial: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
019 Envir.Correction:ON/OFF *ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
020 Gamma Correction: ON/OFF *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF),
1: Correct (ON)
021 Non-use Time Correct:ON/OFF *ENG
022 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 /step]
023 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
024 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]
025 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

026 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
BW

027 *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
BW

028 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]
FC

029 *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
FC

System SP3xxx

030 *ENG [0 to 99 / 2 / 1/step]
Threshold

031 *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Counter
[Image Adj.: Interval]
3512 Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position adjustment
during printing or copying.
001 During Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 page/step]
002 During Stand-by *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]
3513 Displays the last time that the PCU motors stopped.
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / 0 / 1/step]
[Environmental Displ: Job End]
3514 Displays the environmental conditions at the last job.

001 Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / 0 / 0.1°C/step]
002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm3/step]

System SP3xxx
[Execution Interval: Display]
3515 Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number
of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Refresh Mode]
While making prints with low coverage, the developer is agitated with less
3516 toner consumption and the toner carrier attraction tends to increase. This may
cause low image density or poor transfer (white dots). To prevent this, the
coagulated toner or overcharged toner has to be consumed by performing the
refresh mode.
001 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Bk *ENG
002 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: C *ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 0.1 m/step]
003 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: M *ENG
004 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Y *ENG
005 Rotation Threshold *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0.1 / 1 m/step]
006 Pixel Coverage Sum: Bk *ENG
007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C *ENG
008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M *ENG
009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y *ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
010 Required Area: Bk *ENG
011 Required Area: C *ENG
012 Required Area: M *ENG

System SP3xxx
013 Required Area: Y *ENG
014 Refresh Threshold: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 49 / 1 cm2/m/step]
015 Refresh Threshold: C *ENG
016 Refresh Threshold: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 25 / 1 cm2/m/step]
017 Refresh Threshold: Y *ENG
018 Pattern Number: Bk *ENG
019 Pattern Number: C *ENG
020 Pattern Number: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 time/step]
021 Pattern Number: Y *ENG
022 Pattern Number: Upper limit *ENG
[10 to 2550 / 280 / 10

023 Toner Consumption Pattern Area *ENG
cm2/step]
024 Supply Coefficient *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01/step]
025 Job End Area Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 25.5 / 1 / 0.1/step]
026 Job End Vb Coefficient *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1%/step]
027 Job End Length *ENG [0 to 100 / 19 / 1mm/step]
[0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001
028 Job End Supply Amt *ENG
mg/cm2/step]
029 Refresh:Page Thresh *ENG
030 Mode Counter:Bk *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
031 Mode Counter:FC *ENG

System SP3xxx
[Blade Damage Prevention]
Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the
3517 transfer belt cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this
value, toner is applied to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to
prevent the blade from flipping over.
001 Execution Temp. Thresh *ENG [0 to 50 / 40 / 1°C/step]
3518 [Image Adj. Execution Flag] DFU
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
001 Toner End Recovery: Bk *ENG
002 Toner End Recovery: C *ENG
003 Toner End Recovery: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
004 Toner End Recovery: Y *ENG 0: OFF. 1: ON
005 Vsg Adjustment *ENG
006 Developer Agitation *ENG
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
007 Process Control *ENG
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
008 MUSIC *ENG
009 Drum Phase Adj. *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON
011 Blade Damage Prevention *ENG

System SP3xxx
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Sets "1", when the following values
shows.
012 Vsg Average Error *ENG Vsg_reg_ave:
3.5 < Vsg_reg_ave < 4.5 or
Vsg_dif_ave:
0.0 < Vsg_dif_ave < 0.5
[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

3519
Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end.
001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner
002 MUSIC *ENG
end condition)
1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner
003 TC Adjustment *ENG
end condition)
3520 [ITB Idle Rotation]
001 Temperature: High *ENG
002 Temperature: Medium *ENG Specifies the idle rotation times of

the ITB after the process control.
003 Temperature: Low *ENG [0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
004 Temp.: L: Power ON *ENG
005 to Adjusts the threshold temperature for entering the ITB idle rotation after the
011 process control.
010 Temp. Thresh:High *ENG [0 or 50 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
011 Temp. Thresh:Low *ENG [0 or 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

System SP3xxx
[Initial Process Control Setting]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

control at power on is executed.
004 Relative Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
[0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]
Tables
005 Absolute Humidity Range *ENG
[Rapi Timer]
100 Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time-out time to get the Rapi timer.
[Non-use Time Process Control Setting]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

control at stand-by is executed.
Relative Humidity
003 *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
Change
Absolute Humidity
004 *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]
Change
Adjusts the maximum execution time for

Maximum Execution
005 *ENG the process control at stand-by.
Number
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]

System SP3xxx
3611 [Dev. Gamma: Display/Set]

001 Bk (Current) *ENG for Bk
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
002 C (Current) *ENG

003 M (Current) *ENG for C/M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
004 Y (Current) *ENG

005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG for Bk.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
006 C (Target Display) *ENG

007 M (Target Display) *ENG for C/M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
008 Y (Target Display) *ENG
Displays the standard target development

009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG gamma for each color.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
010 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG
011 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG
Turns on or off the environmental

correction for target development
013 Environmental Correction *ENG gamma.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct
014 K (Max Correction) *ENG
015 C (Max Correction) *ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.1 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/step]
016 M (Max Correction) *ENG
017 Y (Max Correction) *ENG

System SP3xxx
018 K (Max Abs Hum) *ENG
019 C (Max Abs Hum) *ENG

[1 to 99 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step]
020 M (Max Abs Hum) *ENG
021 Y (Max Abs Hum) *ENG
[Vk Display]
3612
Displays Vk for each color.
Appendix:
001 Bk *ENG
SP Mode
Tables
002 C *ENG
[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]
003 M *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Dev. DC Control:Display]
3621
Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each
line speed and color.

[0 to 700 / 550 / 1 -V/step]

System SP3xxx
[Development DC Control] DFU

3622
Adjusts the limit of VB.
001 VB Limit *ENG [0 to 500 / 50 / 1 V/step]

3631
Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line
speed and color.

[0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step]
3641 Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each
color.

[0 to 3 / 1.75 / 0.01 kV/step]

System SP3xxx
[LD Power Control: Display]
3651 Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.
Appendix:
SP Mode
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step]
Tables
[HST Controll Setting]

TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting
3710
Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory, which is in the
TD sensor.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 Control Selection *ENG
0: Not Use, 1: Use
[HST Control: Bk]

3711
Displays the factory settings of the black PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

System SP3xxx

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]
[HST Control: C]
3712
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

System SP3xxx
[HST Control: M]
3713
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
Appendix:
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]
SP Mode
Tables

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

System SP3xxx
[HST Control:Y]
3714
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]
[Toner Collection Bttl Full]

3800
Displays/ adjusts the PCDU toner collection bottle detection settings.
001 Displays the current condition of the PCDU toner collection bottle.
Not used
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]

System SP3xxx
Not used
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Not used
005 *CTL
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
008
Tables

@Remote.
NOTE:
If the PCDU toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine
detects used toner near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot
detect toner collection bottle near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the PCDU toner
the actuator in the PCDU toner collection bottle.
Displays the total amount from the

013 Total Collected Toner *ENG near full detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]

014 Full Detection Date *ENG detection for the PCDU toner
collection bottle.

System SP3xxx
3810 [ITB T-Collection Bttl Full]
001 Displays the current condition of the ITB toner collection bottle.
Not used
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]
Not used
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Not used
005 *CTL
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]

008

@Remote.
NOTE:
If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects
used toner near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect
toner collection bottle near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the IT toner
the actuator in the ITB toner collection bottle.

System SP3xxx
Displays the total amount from the near

013 Total Collected Toner *ENG full detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]

014 Full Detection Date *ENG detection fot the ITB toner collection
bottle.
[New Unit Detection]

3901
Turns new PCU detection on or off.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Manual New Unit Set]
3902 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant
parts of section 3 (Replacement and Adjustment).
001 Development Unit: Bk *ENG
002 Development Unit: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Development Unit: M *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
004 Development Unit: Y *ENG
005 Developer: Bk *ENG
006 Developer: C *ENG Not used

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Developer: M *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
008 Developer: Y *ENG
009 PCU: Bk *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
010 PCU: C *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
011 PCU: M *ENG

System SP3xxx
012 PCU: Y *ENG
013 ITB Unit *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
Do not use 3902-013 if you only change
015 Fusing Pad *ENG
the cleaning unit.
016 Fusing Belt *ENG 3902-017: This is for the image transfer
belt cleaning unit.
017 ITB Cleaning Unit *ENG
018 PTR Unit *ENG

019 *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Bottle
0: OFF, 1: ON
020 *ENG
Bottle

System SP3xxx
[Last Print Counter]
3903 Displays the rotation counter of the black development unit at five minutes
interval.
001 Counter 1 *ENG
002 Counter 2 *ENG
003 Counter 3 *ENG
004 Counter 4 *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
005 Counter 5 *ENG
006 Counter 6 *ENG

[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
007 Counter 7 *ENG
008 Counter 8 *ENG
009 Counter 9 *ENG
010 Counter 10 *ENG
011-
Counter 11 to 40 *ENG
040
Displays the time of the latest stored

101 Last Fixed Date *ENG
counter.
Last PM Counter Save Displays the counter number of the

102 *ENG
Destination latest stored counter.

System SP4xxx
3.4 SYSTEM SP4XXX
3.4.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)
[Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment]

4008
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
001 SScan Mag.Adjust *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]
4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in
the sub-scan direction.
001 LE Regist Adjust *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]
4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in
the main scan direction.
001 StoS Rgst Adjust *ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale] Scanner: Erase Margin: Scale
4012 Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by
the gap between the original and the scale.

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
007 ADF: Left

System SP4xxx
008 ADF: Right
[Scanner Free Run]
4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following
mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

*ENG
002 Lamp: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Scan]
4014
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.
001 HP Detection Enable - Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
Scanner free run without HP sensor

002 HP Detection Disable -
check.
4020 [Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/

off.
001 Detection: ON/OFF *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection: Level *ENG
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level

System SP4xxx
Selects the level of the sub scan line

correction when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
003 Correction Level *ENG
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest
[APS Operation Check]
4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original
sensors. (See "Input Check Table".)
001 APS Operation Check - -
[APS Min Size]
4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors
are all OFF.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No Original
001 APS Min. Size *ENG
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to
3)
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Detection (the machine detects
A4/LT size as A4 or LT, depending on the
4305 [8K/16K Detection] *ENG paper size setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K
001 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.

System SP4xxx
4308 [Scan Size Detection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
001 Detect: ON/OFF *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
4309 [Scan Size Detect Setting] DFU
001 Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit /step]
002 Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec /step]
003 Lamp ON:Delay Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec /step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Scan Size Detect Value]
4310
Displays the scanned data for the original width detection.
001 S1:R -
002 S1:G - [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step]
003 S1:B -
004 S2:R -
005 S2:G - [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step]
006 S2:B -
007 S3:R -
008 S3:G - [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step]
009 S3:B -

System SP4xxx
[Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG
4400 Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 ADF: Left
008 ADF: Right
[IPU Test Pattern]

4417
Selects the IPU test pattern.
001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A
14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gray Pattern (3)
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid pattern
19: Thin line pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
21: Scanned + Gray scale
9: UCR pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
12: Color patch 64

System SP4xxx
4429 [Illegal Copy Output]
001 Copy
002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
003 Fax
[Saturation Adjustment]
4440
Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: High
1: Lowest
001 - *ENG 2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest
4450 [Scan Image Path Selection]
Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
[Digital AE Set] DFU
4460 Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust
its level for each scanning method (platen, ADF).
001 Lower Limit *ENG [0 to 1023 / 364 / 4 digit/step]
002 Background Level *ENG [512 to 1532 / 932 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx
[ACC Target Density]

4501
Selects the ACC target.
001 Copy: Bk: Text *ENG
002 Copy: C: Text *ENG
003 Copy: M: Text *ENG
004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
005 Copy: Bk: Photo *ENG 10: Darkest density
006 Copy: C: Photo *ENG
007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG
008 Copy: Y: Photo *ENG
[ACC Correction:Bright]
4505
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG

System SP4xxx
[ACC Correction: Dark]

4506
Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
Appendix:
005 Photo:K *ENG
SP Mode
Tables
006 Photo:C *ENG
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
[Printer Vector Correction]
4540 This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors
[R, G, B, Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B Specifies the printer vector

*ENG correction value.
021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B
029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B

System SP4xxx
041-044 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
4550 [Scanner Appl.:Text/Chart] DFU
4551 [Scanner Appl.: Text] DFU
4552 [Scanner Appl.:Txt Dropout] DFU
4553 [Scanner Appl.:Text/Photo] DFU
4554 [Scanner Appl.: Photo] DFU
4565 [Scanner Appl.: GrayScale] DFU
4570 [Scan Appl.: Color: Text-Photo] DFU
4571 [Scan Appl.: Color: Glossy Photo] DFU
4572 [Scan Appl.: Color: AutoColor] DFU
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
-005

-006

-007

-008
I-Dot Erase :0 (x1) 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]
-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for
weaker effect.
0: Not activated

System SP4xxx
4580 [FAX Appl.: Text/Chart] DFU
4582 [FAX Appl.: Text/Photo] DFU
4583 [FAX Appl.: Photo] DFU
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
-005
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
-006

-007

-008
0: Not activated
Texture Erase:0 (Fix), 1-2 *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
-010 Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for
weaker effect. This SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580, 4582 and 4583.
0: Not activated

System SP4xxx
4581 [FAX Appl.: Text] DFU
4584 [FAX Appl.: Original 1] DFU
4585 [FAX Appl.: Original 2] DFU
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
-005

-006

-007

-008
0: Not activated
4600 [SBU Version Display]
[0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 /step]
001 SBU ID -
Displays the ID of the SBU.
002 GASBU-N ID - [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 /step]
003 VSP5100 ID - [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 /step]

System SP4xxx
4602 [Scanner Memory Access]
Enables the read and write check for the

001 Scanner Memory Access -
SBU registers.
4603 [AGC Execution]
001 HP Detection Enable - [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Executes the AGC.
002 HP Detection Disable - [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4604 [FGATE Open/Close] DFU
Opens or closes the FGATE signal. This

SP automatically returns to the default
001 - - status (close) after exiting this SP.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
4609 [Gray Balance Set: R] DFU
001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
4610 [Gray Balance Set: G] DFU
002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -20/ 1 digit/step]
4611 [Gray Balance Set: B] DFU
002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -28 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx
[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

4623
RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
Displays the black offset value (rough

adjustment) for the even red signal in the
001 Latest: RE Color -
CCD circuit board (color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

adjustment) for the odd red signal in the
002 Latest: RO Color -
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4624
GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

adjustment) for the even green signal in
001 Latest: GE Color - the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

adjustment) for the odd green signal in the
002 Latest: GO Color -
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4625
BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal

adjustment) for the even blue signal in the CCD
001 Latest: BE Color -
circuit board (color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the CCD
002 Latest: BO Color -
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx
[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

4628
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Latest: R Color - [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4629
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Latest: G Color - [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4630
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Latest: B Color - [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

4631
001 Latest: RE Color -

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: RO Color -

4632
001 Latest: GE Color -

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: GO Color -

System SP4xxx

4633
001 Latest: BE Color -

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: BO Color -
[Scan Adjust Error] DFU

4645
Displays the error value of the white level or black level adjustment.
001 White Level -

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Black Level -
[Scanner Hard Error]

4647
Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure
001 Power-ON -
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144
occurs.

4654

Last Correct Value: RE adjustment) for the even red signal in the
001 *ENG
Color CCD circuit board (color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: RO adjustment) for the odd red signal in the
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx

4655

adjustment) for the even green signal in
Last Correct Value: GE
001 *ENG the CCD circuit board (color printing
Color
speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: GO adjustment) for the odd green signal in the
002 *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4656

Last Correct Value: BE adjustment) for the even blue signal in the
001 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: BO adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4658
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4659
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx

4660
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4661
001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: RO Color *ENG

4662
001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: GO Color *ENG

4663
001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG

System SP4xxx

4673
Displays the factory setting values of the

black level adjustment for the even red
Factory Setting: RE
001 *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board (color
Color
printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

black level adjustment (rough adjustment)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Factory Setting: RO
Tables
002 *ENG for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit
Color
board (color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4674

Factory Setting: GE
001 *ENG for the even green signal in the CCD
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: GO
002 *ENG for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx

4675

Factory Setting: BE
001 *ENG for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: BO
002 *ENG for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4677
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4678
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx

4680
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG

4681
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG

4682
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG
[DF: Density Adjustment]
4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
001 - *ENG [50 to 150 / 107 / 1%/ step ]
[White Level Peak Read] DFU

4690
Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.
001 RE -
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 RO -

System SP4xxx

4691
001 GE -
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 GO -

4692
001 BE -
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 BO -
[Black Level Peak Read] DFU

4693
Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.
001 RE -
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 RO -

4694
001 GE -
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 GO -

4695
001 BE -
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 BO -

System SP4xxx
4802 [DF Shading FreeRun]
001 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading

movement with exposure lamp on or off.
-
002 Lamp ON Press "OFF" to stop this free run.
Otherwise, the free run lasts.
4804 [Home Position Opetation]
001 - - Executes the scanner HP detection.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4806 [Carriage Move]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home

position.
001 - - Dust may fall through the DF exposure
glass. Therefore, do this SP when you
transport the machine a long distance.
4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change]
- - [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Selects the SBU test pattern.

0: Normal output
001 1: Fixed value output
2: Main scan gradation

3: Sub scan gradation
4: Grid pattern
4808 [Factory Setting Input] DFU
002 Execution Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

System SP4xxx
[ACC Data Display]
4902 This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 G DATA1 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)
4904 [IPU Board Test]
Bit0: TAURUS register

Bit1: ORION register
Bit2: LUPUS register
001 Bit12: Ri20

Bit13 to 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error
Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the BCU board and displays
the result.
Bit0: Image path from SBU to TAURUS

Bit1: Image path from TAURUS to ORION
Bit2: Image path from ORION to TAURUS
Bit3: Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS
002 Test2 - Bit4 to 11: Not used
Bit12: Image path from LUPUS to Ri20
Bit13: Image path from Ri20 to GAVD
Bit14 and 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error

System SP4xxx
Performs an image path check on the BCU board and displays the result.
[Dither Selection] DFU

4905
Changes the parameters for error diffusion.
001 - *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4918 [Man Gamma Adj]
Adjusts the manual gamma for Copy/Photo
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
009 - - or Copy/Text with the soft keys on the
operation panel.
4948 [ACC History:Latest]
001 YY/MM/DD *ENG Displays the latest ACC execution date.
002 HH/MM/SS *ENG Displays the latest ACC execution time.
4949 [ACC History:Previous]
001 YY/MM/DD *ENG Displays the previous ACC execution date.
002 HH/MM/SS *ENG Displays the previous ACC execution time.
4954 [Read/Restore Standard]
001 Scan New Chart - Executes new chart scanning.
002 Recall Previous Chart - Recalls the previous scanned chart.
Restores a new chart data as a standard

004 Set Standard Chart -
chart data.

System SP4xxx
[IPU Image Path Selection ]
4991 Selects the image path.

Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
RGB Frame Memory - [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ]
0: Scanner input RGB images

1: Scanner I/F RGB images
2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3: Shading data
4: Inner pattern data: Gray scale
001 5: RGB images done by Line skipping correction
6: RGB images done by Digital AE

7: RGB images done by Vertical line correction
8: RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction
9: RGB image done by Filtering correction
10: RGB images done by Full color ADS
11: RGB image done by Color correction
4993 [High Light Correction]
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the range level of Highlight

correction.
002 Range Selection *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction

System SP4xxx
[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

4994
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Text priority
001 High Compression PDF *ENG
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
[White Paper Detect Level]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4996 Selects the threshold level of the original background density. Increasing this
threshold level machine easily judge that an original is white.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1 /step]
001 - *ENG 0: lightest
6: Darkest

System SP5xxx
3.5 SYSTEM SP5XXX
3.5.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
[mm/inch Display Selection]

5024
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL
1: inch (USA)
[Accounting Counter]
5045 Selects the counting method.

NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether
the counter value is negative or positive.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Counter Method *CTL 0: Developments
1: Prints
[Paper Display]
5047
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Backing Paper *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Toner Refill Detection Display]

5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
5051 1 - *CTL 0: ON
1: OFF

System SP5xxx
[Display IP Address]
5055
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF 1: ON
[Coverage Counter Display]

5056
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]

5061
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL

5062
Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.
001 PCU:Bk *CTL
002 PCU:M *CTL
003 PCU:C *CTL
004 PCU:Y *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
005 Development Unit:Bk *CTL
0: No Display, 1: Display
006 Development Unit:M *CTL
007 Development Unit:C *CTL
008 Development Unit:Y *CTL

System SP5xxx
012 PTR Unit *CTL

013 *CTL
Bottle
5063 [Small Tray]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
- *CTL
001 0: Normal Tray, 1: Envelope Feeder
Changes the tray setting.
5066 [Parts PM Menu Display Setting] Not used
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: No Display, 1: Display
5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.
If the user service is selected, PM alart is displayed on the LCD.
001 PCU:Bk *CTL
002 PCU:M *CTL

003 PCU:C *CTL
004 PCU:Y *CTL

008 Development Unit:Y *CTL
009 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]

System SP5xxx
012 PTR Unit *CTL

013 *CTL
Bottle
5071 [Set Bypass Paper Size]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Appendix:
- *CTL
SP Mode
Tables
0: Off, 1: On
001 Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up
prevents mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel

and an actual paper size on the by-pass tray.
5104 [A3/DLT Double Count] SSP
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: No
PCU:Bk *CTL
1: Yes
001 2: Yes except By-pass
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except from
the bypass tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice,
that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.

System SP5xxx
5113 [Optional Counter Type]
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
Default Optional Counter 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card
001 *CTL
Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external

counter type.
External Optional 0: None
002 *CTL
Counter Type 1: Expansion Device 1
5114 [Optional Counter I/F]
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

001 MF Key Card Extension *CTL
accounting)]
5118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
001 This program disables copying.
[Mode Clear Opt. [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but

5120 *CTL
Counter Removal] not used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install
001
or remove an optional counter, check the settings.
5121 [Counter Up Timing] *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]
This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to "paper
001
feed" and "paper exit" respectively.

System SP5xxx
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)
5126 [F Size Original Setting] *ENG
1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)
2: 8" x 13" (F)
001 Selects F size original setting.
5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
001 This program disables the APS.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5128 [Code Mode With Key/Card Option] *CTL -
001 DFU
DFU
5131 [Paper Size Type Selection] *ENG
[0: JP (Japan)/ 1: NA / 2: EU]
The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the
001
AB system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
5150 [By-Pass Length Setting] *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
001 Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is
limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.

System SP5xxx
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This
SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting
device.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Fax Printing Mode at
001 *CTL 0: Automatic printing
Optional Counter Off
1: No automatic printing
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with
this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
[Size Adjust]
5181
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.
[0 to 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

001 Tray 1:1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
002 Tray 1: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
003 Tray 1: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
004 Tray 1: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
005 Tray 2: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
006 Tray 2: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT

System SP5xxx
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
007 Tray 2: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
008 Tray 2: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
009 Tray 3: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
010 Tray 3: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
Appendix:
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
SP Mode
Tables
011 Tray 3: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
012 Tray 3: 4 *ENG
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
013 Tray 4: 1 *ENG
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
014 Tray 4: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
015 Tray 4: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
016 Tray 4: 4 *ENG
[RK 4 Disconnect Operation]
5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.
If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)",
the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable

System SP5xxx
[Copy NV Version]
5188
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.
001 - *CTL -
5195 [Limitless SW] DFU
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
- *CTL 0: Productivity priority
1: Tray priority
Selects the paper feed mode.

Productivity priority:
This changes the feeding tray as soon as the machine detects the priority tray
001 even the paper
still remains in the feeding tray.

Tray priority:
This changes the feeding tray after the paper in the tray where the machine
has been feeding
paper has been run out of.
This SP is activated only when a customer selects the "Auto Paper Selsct".
5196 [Copier Vendor Mode]
001 90 deg. Rotation *CTL Not used
Color and Tray

002 *CTL Not used
Selection

System SP5xxx
5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.]
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling.
If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum
number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing
job (over maximum number).
If this setting is "0: OFF", paper is fed out with stapling at the maximum
number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
job (over maximum number).
5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge.
A "+ value" moves the page number positions to the right edge.
003 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position

[–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
004 Duplex Printout High/Low Position
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
002 Time Difference *CTL# [-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]

System SP5xxx
5307 [Summer Time]
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
Setting -
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start) -
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
Rule Set (End) - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".

System SP5xxx
[Access Control]
5401 When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following
settings. DFU
Whenever a new login user is added to

the address book in external certification
mode (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the
default document ACL is updated
according to this SP setting.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
103 Default Document ACL *CTL 0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a
machine that is not using document
server.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec./step]
Authentication Time *CTL 0: 60 seconds
104 1 to 250 seconds
Specifies the timeout of the authentication.
Selects the log out type for the extend

authentication device.
Extend Certification
162 *CTL Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card
Detail
0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
200 SDK1 Unique ID *CTL
SDK1 Certification "SDK" is the "Software Development Kit".

201 *CTL
Method This data can be converted from SAS
210 SDK2 Unique ID *CTL (VAS) when installed or uninstalled.

(DFU)
SDK2 Certification
211 *CTL
Method

System SP5xxx
220 SDK3 Unique ID *CTL
SDK3 Certification
221 *CTL
Method
SDK certification device *CTL -
Bit 0: SDK authentication
230 0: Off (Default), 1: On (SDK authentication enabled)

Selects the SDK authentication setting.
Bit 2: Administrator log in setting
0: Off (Default), 1: On
Detail Option *CTL -
Enables or disables the log out confirmation option.

Bit 0: Log out confirmation option
240 0: Enable (default), 1: Disable

Selects the automatic log out time.
Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10 seconds,
10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds
5404 [User Code Counter Clear]
001 - *CTL Clears all counters for users.

System SP5xxx
5411 [LDAP Certification]
Determines whether easy LDAP

004 Easy Certification *CTL certification is done.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 1: On, 0: Off
This SP is referenced only when

SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On).
Password Null Not
005 *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Permit
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Determines whether LDAP option
(anonymous certification) is turned on or
006 Detail Option *CTL off.
Bit0
0: OFF, 1: ON

System SP5xxx
5413 [Lockout Setting]
Switches on/off the lock on the local

address book account.
001 Lockout On/Off *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts

002 Lockout Threshold *CTL for account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
Determines whether the system waits the

prescribed time for input of a correct user
ID and password after an account lockout
has occurred.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not
cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if
correct user ID and password are
entered.
Determines the length of time that the

system waits for correct input of the user
ID and password after a lockout has
004 Cancellation Time *CTL
occurred. This setting is used only if
SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min.]
005 Counter Clear Time *CTL Not Used

System SP5xxx
5414 [Access Mitigation]
Switches on/off masking of continuously

used IDs and passwords that are
identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: Off
1: On
Sets the length of time for excluding

continuous access for identical user IDs
Appendix:
SP Mode
002 Mitigation Time *CTL
Tables
and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min.]
5415 [Password Attack]
Sets the number of attempts to attack the

system with random passwords to gain
001 Permissible Number *CTL
illegal access to the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt]
Sets the time limit to stop a password

attack once such an attack has been
002 Detect Time *CTL
detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec.]

System SP5xxx
5416 [Access Information]
Limits the number of users used by the

access exclusion and password attack
001 Access User Max Num *CTL
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users]
Limits the number of passwords used by

Access Password Max the access exclusion and password
002 *CTL
Num attack detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 passwords]
Sets the processing time interval for

referencing user ID and password
003 Monitor Interval *CTL
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec.]
5417 [Access Attack]
Sets a limit on access attempts when an

Access Permissible excessive number of attempts are
001 *CTL
Number detected for MFP features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1]
Sets the length of time for monitoring the

002 Attack Detect Time *CTL frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec.]
Sets the wait time to slow down the

speed of certification when an excessive
003 Productivity Fall Wait *CTL number of access attempts have been
detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec.]

System SP5xxx
Sets a limit on the number of requests

received for certification in order to slow
down the certification speed when an
004 Attack Max Num *CTL
excessive number of access attempts
have been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 /1 attempt]
[User Authentication]
Appendix:
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.
SP Mode
5420
Tables
Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.

required before a user can use the copy
001 Copy *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
Color Security Setting *CTL -
Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the
user authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
002 Bit0: B/W mode

Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

System SP5xxx

required before a user can use the
011 Document Server *CTL document server.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

required before a user can use the fax
021 Fax *CTL application.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

required before a user can use the scan
031 Scanner *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

required before a user can use the printer
041 Printer *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off
051 SDK1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF

061 SDK2 *CTL
required before a user can use the SDK
071 SDK3 application.

System SP5xxx
5430 [Auth Dialog Message Change]
Turns on or off the displayed message

Message Change change for the authentication.
001 *CTL
On/Off [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Executes the message download for the

002 Message Text Download *CTL
authentication.
003 Message Text ID *CTL Inputs message text for the authentication.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5431 [External Auth Preset]
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Tag *CTL
010 0: Not permit, 1: Permit
Turns on or off the tag copy permission for the external authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Entry *CTL
0: Not permit, 1: Permit
011
Turns on or off the copy permission of the entry information for the external
authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Group *CTL
012
Turns on or off the copy permission of the group information for the external
authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Mail *CTL
020
Turns on or off the copy permission of the mail information for the external
authentication.

System SP5xxx
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Fax *CTL
030
Turns on or off the copy permission of the fax information for the external
authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
FaxSub *CTL
031
Turns on or off the copy permission of the fax additional information for the
external authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Folder *CTL
032
Turns on or off the copy permission of the folder information for the external
authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
ProtectCode *CTL
033
Turns on or off the copy permission of the protection code information for the
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
SmtpAuth *CTL
034
Turns on or off the copy permission of the SMTP information for the external
authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
LdapAuth *CTL
035
Turns on or off the copy permission of the LDAP information for the external
authentication.

System SP5xxx
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Smb Ftp Auth *CTL
036
Turns on or off the copy permission of the SMB/FTP information for the
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
AcntAcl *CTL
037
Turns on or off the copy permission of the account ACL information for the
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
DocumentAcl *CTL
038
Turns on or off the copy permission of the document ACL information for the
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
CertCrypt
040
Turns on or off the copy permission of the authentication information for the
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
UserLimitCount *CTL
050
Turns on or off the copy permission of the maximum number information for
the external authentication.

System SP5xxx
[Authentication Error Code]

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.

appears in the system log after a user
001 System Log Disp *CTL authentication failure occurs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On

appears on the operation panel after a
002 Panel Disp *CTL user authentication failure occurs.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: On, 0: Off
5490 [MF Key Card (Japan only)]
Sets up operation of the machine with a

keycard.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Job Permit Setting *CTL 0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a
user code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a
user code.
002 Count Mode Setting *CTL -

System SP5xxx
5501 [PM Alarm]
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Alarm off
001 PM Alarm Level *CTL
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1
to 9999) x 1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: No alarm sounds
002 Original Count Alarm *CTL 1: Alarm sounds after the number of
originals passing through the ARDF >
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
10,000
5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL -
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
001 0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.
5505 The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set
number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
001 - *CTL [0 to 255 / 20 / 100 copies /step]

System SP5xxx
[Supply Alarm] *CTL -

5507
Enables or disables the notifying a supply call via the @Remote.
001 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
002 Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
003 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via

the @Remote, when the following conditions
080 Toner Call Timing occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end
128 Interval :Others
132 Interval :A3
133 Interval :A4
134 Interval :A5
141 Interval :B4

[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step]
142 Interval :B5
160 Interval :DLT
164 Interval :LG
166 Interval :LT
172 Interval :HLT

System SP5xxx
5508* [CC Call] *CTL -
Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable

002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable

003*
Appendix:
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
SP Mode
Tables
Jam Detection: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an "unattended paper
jam".
Jam Detection: Continuous Count [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

012*
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call.
Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a
call.
[SC/Alarm Setting]
5515 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when
an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when
an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

0: Off
003 Service Parts End Call 1: On
004 User Call
006 Communication Test Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

System SP5xxx
007 Machine Information Notice 0: Off

1: On
008 Alarm Notice
009 Non Genuin Tonner Alarm
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Manegement Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
[Individual PM Part
*CTL -
Alarm Call]
5516
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call
when one of SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
send, 1: Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
5610 [Base Gamma Cntl P: Command]
Recall Factory Setting -

004
Recalls the factory settings of the base gamma control points.
Restore Factory Setting -
005 Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings of the base gamma
control points.
Restore Prev. Setting -

006
Recalls the previous settings of the base gamma control points.

System SP5xxx
5611 [Toner Color in 2C]
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-M *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]
G-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-Y *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-M *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-Y *ENG

System SP5xxx
5618 [Color Mode Display Selection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour,
- *CTL
001 Single colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White
Selects the color selection display on the LCD.
Memory Clear (SP5-801)

The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,
meter charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586)
are not cleared.
5730
Extended Function Setting
5731 [Counter Effect] JPN only
Change Mk1 Cnt [0 or 1 / 0 / -]

001 *CTL
(Paper->Combine) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
5801 [Memory Clear]
Resets all correction data for process control and

001 All Clear all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
002 Engine [ENG] Clears the engine settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System

003 SCS Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the IMH settings.
005 MCS Initializes the Mcs settings.
006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.

System SP5xxx
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax application settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
The following service settings:

Bit switches
Gamma settings (User & Service)
Toner Limit
The following user settings:
008 Printer application Tray Priority
Menu Protect
Appendix:
SP Mode
System Setting except for setting of Energy
Tables
Saver
I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
PCL Menu
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and

009 Scanner application
all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management

010 Web Service
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

011 NCS
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for

012 R-FAX
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)

014 Clear DCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control

015 Clear UCS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report

016 MIRS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and

017 CCS
Charge-control Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)

018 SRM Memory Clr
settings.

System SP5xxx
019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings.
020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings.
021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
5803 [Input Check] See "Input Check Table" in this section.
5804 [Output Check] See "Output Check Table" in this section.
5806 [RFID CONT.READING]
TIMES - [0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

001
Displays the counter for the RFID communication test.
NOT 0 - [0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

002
Displays the counter for the RFID communication failure.
RET. - [0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

003
Displays the counter for the RFID communication retry.
Execute the RFID communication test for

004 EXE.ALL -
all colors.

005 EXE.K -
balck.

006 EXE.M -
magenta.

007 EXE.C -
cyan.

008 EXE.Y -
yellow.

System SP5xxx
[SC Reset]
5810 Resets a type A service call condition.
Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset - -
5811 [Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number Display
Appendix:
002 Display *ENG Displays the machine serial number.
SP Mode
Tables
004 BCU - Inputs the serial number.
005 FRAM
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
Service *CTL -
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is
001 printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s "Counter"
menu.
be input).
Facsimile *CTL -
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
002 printed on the Counter List.

be input).
Supply *CTL -
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables.
Enter the number and press #.

System SP5xxx
Operation *CTL -
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the
number and press #.
5816 [Remote Service] *CTL -
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to "2".
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registor has been
completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification

System SP5xxx
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
Appendix:
SP Mode
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
Tables
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
011 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.

1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG – C Registed
021 This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed

System SP5xxx
RCG – C Regist Detail
This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation status.

022 0: RCG device not registered
1: RCG device registered

2: Device registered
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or
display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set
063 up Embedded RC Gate-N.
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.

System SP5xxx
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
Proxy User Name
Appendix:
SP Mode
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
Tables
065 The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character
report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066 The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.

System SP5xxx
CERT: Up State
067
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received

1
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified

2
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
4
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue

11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed

13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL

System SP5xxx
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
068 Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification

1
has expired.
An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
Appendix:
2
SP Mode
Tables
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

3
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firmware Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can

confirm the previous version of the firmware
before the firmware update execution. If the
085 Firm Up User Check option to confirm the previous version is
selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with
the firmware files from the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size

086 Firmware Size of the firmware data files during the firmware
update execution.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

087 CERT: Macro Ver.
certification.

System SP5xxx
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote

088 CERT: PAC Ver.
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification.

089 CERT: ID2 Code Asteriskes (*) indicate that no @Remote
Displays the common name of the @Remote

certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote
Displays serial number for the @Remote

091 CERT: Serial No. certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no
@Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the

@Remote certification. CN = the following 30
092 CERT: Issuer
bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote
certification exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the

093 CERT: Valid Start
Displays the end time of the period for which the

094 CERT: Valid End
Selection Country
150
Not used
Line Type Automatic Judgment

151
Not used
Line Type Judgment Result

152
Not used

System SP5xxx
Selection Dial/Push
153
Not used
Outside Line/Outgoing Number

154
Not used
Dial Up User Name

156
Not used
Dial Up Password
157
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Not used
Local Phone Number

161
Not used
Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming

162
Not used
Access Point
163
Not used
Line Connecting
164
Not used
173 Modem Serial Number Not used
Retransmission Limit
174
Not used
FAX TX Priority -
187
Not used
200 Manual Polling - Not used

System SP5xxx
Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device
cannot communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate
cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

202 Letter Number
Embedded RCG Gate.
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote

203 Confirm Execute
Gateway.
204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in
answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is
registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".

System SP5xxx
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
Appendix:
SP Mode
9: Registration executing
Tables
Error Code
208 Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error

Illegal Modem
-11002 Chat execution error
Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution

Operation Error,
-12003 of an inquiry and no previous
Incorrect Setting
registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited.

-12005 The device has an Embedded RC
Operation Error, gate-related problem.
Incorrect Setting A confirmation request was made after

-12006 the confirmation had been already
completed.

System SP5xxx
The request number used at registration

-12007 was different from the one used at
confirmation.
Update certification failed because

-12008
mainframe was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual

-12009
certification and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
Attempted dial up overseas without the

-2385 correct international prefix for the
telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center

Error Caused by
Response from GW -2389 Database out of service
URL
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG

Gate setup.
209 Instl Clear
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after
this setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.

System SP5xxx
5821 [Remote Service Address]
Sets the IP address of the RCG

(Remote Communication Gate)
002 RCG IP Address *CTL
destination for call processing at the
remote service center.
[NV-RAM Data Upload]
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
5824 number) from the NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see the "NVRAM Data
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Upload/Download" in the "System Maintenance Reference" of the Field
Service Manual.
001 - # -
[NV-RAM Data Download]
5825 Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For
details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "System
Maintenance Reference" of the Field Service Manual.
001 - # -
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL -
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

1284 Compatibility
050 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
(Centro)
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro)
This SP is activated only when

SP5-828-50 is set to "1".

System SP5xxx
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at

Job Spooling Clear: Start power on.
066
Time 0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function

for each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
069 Job Spooling (Protocol)
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on

the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the
Active IPv6 Link Local format:
145
Address "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"

System SP5xxx

147
Address 1

149 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
Address 2
Active IPv6 Stateless (802.11b) in the format:
151
Address 3 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
153 configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Address 4
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
155
Address 5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address

(802.11b) in the format:
156 IPv6 Manual Address
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced

on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The
158 IPv6 Gateway Address
IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
Enables or disables the automatic setting for

IPv6 Stateless Auto IPv6 stateless.
161
Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

System SP5xxx
Displays or does not display the Web system

items.
[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:
236 Web Item visible Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Displays or does not display the link to Net

RICOH on the top page and link page of the web
237 Web shopping link visible system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Displays or does not display the link to

Consumable Supplier on the top page and link
238 Web supplies Link visible page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on

239 Web Link1 Name the link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on

240 Web Link1 URL the link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on

the top page of the web system.
241 Web Link1 visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"

System SP5xxx
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL
001 HDD Formatting (ALL)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP
Appendix:
mode only if there is a hard disk error.
SP Mode
Tables
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a

009
Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836 [Capture Settings] *CTL
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
be initialized, displayed, or selected.
Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

002
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836-71 to 5836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents
sent to the document management server via the MLB.
071 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

System SP5xxx
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) ,

077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200
6: 2/3
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) ,

078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200
6: 2/3
5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB.
081 Format for Copy Color
model.
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
083 Format for Copy B&W Other
084 Format for Printer Color
model.
085 Format for Printer B&W
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ

System SP5xxx
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document
management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Sets the IP address for the primary capture server.

101 Primary srv IP address
102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Primary srv port

Appendix:
number
SP Mode
Tables
104 Primary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture

Secondary srv IP
111 server. This is basically adjusted by the remote
address
system.
112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Secondary srv port

number
Secondary srv URL

path
Default Reso Rate

Switch
Reso: Copy (Color) [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

System SP5xxx

Reso: Print (Color)
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
123 Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Reso: Print (Mono)
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
124 Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
This is basically adjusted by the

Reso: Fax (Color) remote system.
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
125
Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi

Reso: Fax (Mono) remote system.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
126
Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

Reso: Scan (Color) remote system.
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
127
Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.

System SP5xxx

Reso: Scan (Mono) remote system.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
128
Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
All Addr Info Switch
0: Off, 1: On
141
Appendix:
SP Mode
Turns on or off the all address information transmission for the captured
Tables
resources.
Stand-by Doc Max Number [10 to 10000 / 2000 / 1/step]
142 Selects the maximum number of captured documents to be transmitted to the
document server.

System SP5xxx
5840 [IEEE 802.11]
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel MAX *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU
[0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 – 55M Fix
0 x 10 – 48M Fix
0 x 0F – 36M Fix
0 x 0E – 18M Fix
0 x 0D – 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed *CTL
0 x 0B – 9M Fix
0 x 0A – 6M Fix
0 x 07 – 11M Fix
0 x 05 – 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 – 1M Fix
0 x 13 – 0 x FE (reserved)

System SP5xxx
Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
011 WEP key Select *CTL
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the

IEEE802.11 card.
042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Determines whether the CTS self

function is turned on or off.
043 11g CTS to Self *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044 11g Slot Time *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA

authentication application.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL
1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error

System SP5xxx
5841 [Supply Name Setting]
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta Specifies supply names. These

appear on the screen when the
007 OrgStamp *CTL
user presses the Inquiry button
011 Staple Std1 in the user tools screen.
012 Staple Std2
013 Staple Std3
014 Staple Std4
5842 [GWWS Analysis] DFU
Default: 00000000 – do not change

Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
001 Setting 1 *CTL
document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Adjusts the debug program modesetting.

Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
002 Setting 2 *CTL 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used

System SP5xxx
5844 [USB]
0x01: Full speed

Transfer Rate *CTL
001 0x04: Auto Change
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
Device Release Displays the development release
Appendix:
004 *CTL
SP Mode
Tables
Number version number. DFU
006 PnP Model Name *CTL Inputs the model name.
007 PnP Serial Number *CTL Inputs the serial number.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Notify Unsupport *CTL
100 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the unsupported USB display.
[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL -

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Primary)
255.255.255.255
002
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.

System SP5xxx
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is
displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile
application and an external device.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as
the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting
of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr Capability [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible

010
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
011 Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

System SP5xxx
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Server Scheme (Primary) DFU

013
This is used for the scan router program.
Server Port Number (Primary) DFU

014
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Server URL Path (Primary) DFU
015
Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU

016
Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU

017
Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU

018
Rapid Sending Control
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
022 error.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]

System SP5xxx
5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL -
Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
001 value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the
NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte
binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery
server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user
information managed by UCS.

System SP5xxx
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
020 WSD Maximum Entries
021 Folder Auth Change 0: Login User, 1: Destination
022 Initial Value of Upper Limit Count 500
Addr Book Migration (SD => HDD)

040
Appendix:
Not used in this machine.
SP Mode
Tables
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the
new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
041 Procedure

2. Install a new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the
system administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.

System SP5xxx
Displays the slot number where an address

book data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Clears the local address book information,

047 Initialize Local Addr Book
including the user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book

048
Book information, except the user code.
Clears the LDAP address book information,

049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
except the user code.
Clears all directory information managed by

050 Initialize All Addr Book
UCS, including all user codes.
Uploads all directory information to the SD

051 Backup All Addr Book
card.
Downloads all directory information from the

052 Restore All Addr Book
SD card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD

card in the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from
this machine.
This feature does not work if the card is
053 Clear Backup Info write-protected.
After you do this SP, go out of the SP

mode, and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the
Power LED stops flashing.

System SP5xxx
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit: Meaning
060 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
Complexity Option 1
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP does not normally require adjustment.

This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
063 Complexity Option 2 DFU
Specifies the FTP port for getting a

distribution server address book that is used
091 FTP Auth Port Setting
in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function

094 Encryption Stat
for the address book data.

System SP5xxx
[Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL -
SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data

transferred externally by the Net File page reference function.
5847 [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by
NetFile.
"Net files" are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and
the DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate for Copy Color

0: 1x
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text 1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
3: 1/4x
004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
005 Rate for Printer B&W
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
021 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]

System SP5xxx
[Web Service] *CTL -
SP5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
5848 Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control

Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Lower 4 bits)
0010: No writing control
Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr. Print

003
Appendix:
SP Mode
(Lower 4 bits)
Tables
Access Ctrl: user Directory
004
(only Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax

007
(Lower 4 bits)
Switches access control on and off.
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower
009 0000: No access control
4 bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Ctrl: Device
011
management (Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower

021
4 bits)
Access Ctrl: uadministration

022
(Lower 4bits)
Repository: Download Image

099 DFU
Setting
Specifies the max size of the image data that

Repository: Download Image
100 the machine can download.
Max. Size
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
210 Setting: LogType: Job1
211 Setting: LogType: Job2 DFU
212 Setting: LogType: Access

System SP5xxx
213 Setting: Primary Srv
214 Setting: Secondary Srv
215 Setting: Start Time
216 Setting: Interval Time
217 Setting: Timing
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed

5849 1 Display
to "Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is

printed on the printout for the total counter.
5849 2 Switch to Print [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
003 Total Counter -
5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL -
Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only
003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch
all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some
reason the G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
[Bluetooth Mode]
5851 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]

System SP5xxx
[Stamp Data Download]
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the
ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as
5853 required. This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard
disks.
This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
Appendix:
[Remote ROM Update]
SP Mode
Tables
5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284)
when updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Disable
1: Enable
5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL -
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the
conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can

be copied one by one to each SD Card.

System SP5xxx
Save to SD Card
006
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
[Debug Save When] *CTL -
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
5858 destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.

generated by copier engine errors.
001 Engine SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

generated by GW controller errors.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

System SP5xxx
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

004 Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL -
001 Key 1
Appendix:
002 Key 2
SP Mode
Tables
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log
005 Key 5 files for functions that use common memory on
006 Key 6 the controller board.

[–9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10

System SP5xxx
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / – ]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

0: No
1: Yes
022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From item switched.
025 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP

mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an

E-mail sent by S/MIME.
S/MIME: MIME Header [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
026 -
Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard

System SP5xxx
5866 [E-mail Report] Not Used
Enables or disables the e-mail alert.

001 Report Validity *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Adds or does not add the date field to

the header of the alert mail.
005 Add Date Field *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Not added, 1: Added
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5870 [Common Key Info Writing]
Rewrites the common certification used

001 Writing *CTL
for the @Remote.
Initialize *CTL -
Initializes the set certification.

When the GW controller board is replaced with a new one for repair, you must
003 execute the "Initiralize (-003)" and "Writing (-001)" just after the new board
replacement.
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after the "Initiralize (-003)" and
"Writing (-001)" have been done.
5873 [SD Card Appli Move]
This SP copies the application programs from the original

001 Move Exec
SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD

card in SD Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot
002 Undo Exec
1. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some
programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).

System SP5xxx
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
Enables or disables the automatic reboot

function when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC
001 Reboot Setting *CTL error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC
codes.
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878 [Option Setup]
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.

001 Data Overwrite Security - Press "EXECUTE" on the operation
panel. Then turn the machine off and on.
002 HDD Encryption - Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
001 - *ENG Deletes the fixed phrase.

System SP5xxx
[Plain 1/2 Setting]

5884
Select the paper type (plain 1 or plain 2) for each tray.
001 By-pass Table *ENG
002 Tray 1 *ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
003 Tray 2 *ENG 0: Plain Paper 1
1: Plain Paper 2
004 Tray 3 *ENG
Appendix:
005 Tray 4 *ENG
SP Mode
Tables
[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings
5885
Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)
Document Server ACC 2: Forbid print function (1)
020 *CTL
Ctrl 3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)
7: Reserved
Selects the display type for the document

box list.
050 DocSvr Format *CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details

System SP5xxx
Sets the number of documents to be

051 DocSvr Trans *CTL displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Signature for each e-mail
Set Signature *CTL
1: Signature for all e-mails
100 2: No signature
Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the
WIM when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
Determines whether the scanned

documents with the WIM are encrypted
101 Set Encryption *CTL when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak *CTL Not used
201 DocSur Timeout *CTL Not used
[SD Get Counter]

5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card

inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
The operation stores. The file is stored in
a folder created in the root directory of the
SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is
saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the
001 - *CTL number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2
(lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch
[EXECUTE].
3. Touch [Execute] in the message
when you are prompted.

System SP5xxx
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for
001 - *CTL
logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only
an administrator can see the logs)
Appendix:
[SDK Application Counter] *CTL -
SP Mode
Tables
5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
[External Counter Setting]

5894
-
001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
001 names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.

System SP5xxx
5913 [Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and
the operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can
gain control of the display.
5967 [Copy Server Set Function] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
001
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
[Cherry Server]
5974
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, "Lite" or "Full", is installed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
001 Cherry Server *CTL
0: Lite, 1: Full
[Device Setting]
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board
NIC" is limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT
authentication.
001 On Board NIC
Other network applications than NRS or

LDAP/NT authentication are not available
when this SP is set to "2". Even though
you can change the initial settings of those

System SP5xxx
network applications, the settings do not

work.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
5987 [Mech. Counter Protection]

001 0: OFF / 1: ON
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[SP print mode]
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All (Data List) -
002 SP (Mode Data List) -
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
005 Diagnostic Report -
006 Non-Default -
007 NIB Summary - -
008 Capture Log -
021 Copier User Program -
022 Scanner SP -
023 Scanner User Program -
024 SDK/J Summary -
025 SDK/J Application Info -

System SP5xxx
5997 [Fusing Cont mode]
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 fast/silent -
0: Silent, 1: Fast
Turns on or off the fusing unit preceding mode.

The machine turns on the fusing unit first by default after power-on or
recovery from the energy save mode.
If a customer does not want the fusing unit to rotate before sending a job to
the machine, change this setting to "0". In this case, the first print time or
recovery time may be little bit longer than before.

System SP6xxx
3.6 SYSTEM SP6XXX
3.6.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
001 S-to-S Registration 1st

[-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
002 S-to-S Registration 2nd *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
003 Leading Edge Registration [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and
rear sides.
005 Buckle: Duplex: 1st

*ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
006 Buckle: Duplex: 2nd
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
007 Trailing Edge Erase *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
[ADF INPUT Check]
6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only
Bit 0 is used for ADF input check ( p.3-396 "Input and Output Check
Tables").
[ADF OUTPUT Check]
6008 Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time
( p.3-396 "Input and Output Check Tables")
6009 [ADF Free Run]

System SP6xxx
Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.
002 Free Run Duplex Mode -
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

6010
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Original Size Detection Priority] Original Size Detection Priority
6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since
original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
*ENG 0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2
Setting 1 Setting 2
DLT SEF Folio SEF 11" x 15"
NA LG SEF Foolscap SEF

001 -
LT SEF US EXE 8" x 10"
LT LEF US EXE LEF
DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm

EU/
LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm
ASIA
LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

6017
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
001 - *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
6101 [Staple Position Adjustment]

System SP6xxx
Adjusts the staple position for finisher.

+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
001 - ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]

6102
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.
001 Leading Edge Adjustment ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.1mm/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Jogger Position Adjustment]
6103
Adjusts the jogger position
001 - ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]

6104
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.
001 Side-to-Side Adjustment ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]
[Finisher Input Check] Finisher (D429)
6120 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher.
[Finisher Output Check] Finisher (D429)
6121 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher.
[Extra Staples]
6830
Not used in this model

System SP7-xxx
3.7 SYSTEM SP7-XXX
3.7.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
[Total SC Counter]
7401
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
001 - *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]
[SC History]
7403 Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but
can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

System SP7-xxx
[SC991 History]
7404 Logs the SC991 detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC991 are not displayed on the screen, but can
be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
[Total Paper Jam Counter]

7502
Displays the total number of jams detected.
001 - * CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
[Total Original Jam Counter]

7503
Displays the total number of original jams.
001 - *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]

System SP7-xxx
[Paper Jam Location]

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were
detected.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
001 At Power On *CTL
003 Tray 1: On *CTL
004 Tray 2: On *CTL
005 Tray 3: On *CTL
006 Tray 4: On *CTL
008 Bypass: On *CTL
009 Duplex: On *CTL
011 Vertical Transport 1: On *CTL For details, the "Jam

Detection" in the Main
012 Vertical Transport 2: On *CTL Chapters
017 Registration: On *CTL
018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL
019 Fusing Exit: On *CTL
020 Paper Exit: On *CTL
024 Junction Gate Sensor: On *CTL
025 Duplex Exit: On *CTL
027 Duplex Entrance: ON (Out) *CTL
028 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor: On *CTL
029 Right Tray Exit Sensor: On *CTL For details, the "Jam
051 Vertical Transport 1: Off *CTL Chapters
052 Vertical Transport 2: Off *CTL

System SP7-xxx
053 Bank SEF Sensor 1: Off *CTL
057 Registration Sensor: Off *CTL
058 Fusing Entrance Sensor: Off *CTL
059 Fusing Exit Sensor: Off *CTL
060 Paper Exit: Off *CTL
065 Duplex Exit Sensor: Off *CTL
068 1-Bin Tray Exit: Off *CTL
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
069 Right Tray Exit Sensor: Off *CTL
230 FIN: Paper Exit Data Error *CTL
231 FIN: Command Error *CTL
240 FIN: Entrance: On *CTL
241 FIN: Entrance: Off *CTL
242 FIN: Feed Motor *CTL
243 FIN: Staler Motor *CTL
244 FIN: Jogger Motors *CTL
245 FIN: PU Roller Contact Motor *CTL
246 FIN: Stapler Movement Motor *CTL For details, the "Jam
247 FIN: Output Tray Motor *CTL Chapters
248 FIN: Belt Roller Solenoid *CTL
249 FIN: Front Fan *CTL
250 FIN: Punch Motor *CTL
251 FIN: Registration Motor *CTL
252 FIN: Stapling Error *CTL
253 FIN: Mainframe Set Incorrect *CTL

System SP7-xxx
[Original Jam Detection]

7505
Displays the total number of original jams by location.
001 At Power On
003 Registration Sensor: On
004 Registration Sensor: On
005 Original Exit Sensor: On *CTL -
053 Registration Sensor: Off
054 Registration Sensor: Off
055 Original Exit Sensor: Off
[Jam Count by Paper Size]

7506
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF

System SP7-xxx
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
[Plotter Jam History]

7507
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
Appendix:
003 Latest 2
SP Mode
Tables
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
[Original Jam History]

7508
Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest-1
003 Latest-2
004 Latest-3 *CTL -
005 Latest-4
006 Latest-5
007 Latest-6

System SP7-xxx
008 Latest-7
009 Latest-8
010 Latest-9
7624 [Parts PM Use Setting]
001 PCU:Bk *CTL
002 PCU:M *CTL
003 PCU:C *CTL
004 PCU:Y *CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: No (Not PM maintenance)
008 Development Unit:Y *CTL 1: Yes (PM maintenance)
012 PTR Unit *CTL

013 *CTL
Bottle
7801 [ROM No./Firmware Version]
Displays all versions and ROM numbers

255 - *CTL
in the machine.

System SP7-xxx
7803 [PM Counter Display]
(Page, Unit, [Color])
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets
printed. Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double
Count cannot be deactivated.
-001 to
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit
-021
is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the
PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 21) and is reset to "0".
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked
with SP7-906-1 to 21.
001 Paper
002 Page: PCU: Bk
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: M
005 Page: PCU: Y
014 Page: ITB Unit

System SP7-xxx
017 Page:Fusing Pad
019 Page:PTR Unit
027 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Bk
028 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: C
029 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: M
030 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Y
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current

maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
-031 to When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit
-048 is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the
PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-31 to 48) and is reset to "0". The total
number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-31 to 48.

System SP7-xxx
043 Rotation:ITB Unit
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
-049 to [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step ]

-050 Displays the total amount of each toner collection bottle.
049 Amount:ITB T-Collect Bottle
050 Amount:PCU T-Collect Bottle
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
(Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the
-061 to unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
-078 The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end
condition, even though the R% counter is still less than 100%.
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: C
063 Rotation (%): PCU: M
064 Rotation (%): PCU: Y
065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C

System SP7-xxx
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit:M
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: C
071 Rotation (%): Developer: M
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): ITB Unit
074 Rotation (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Fusing Pad
077 Rotation (%): Fusing Belt
078 Rotation (%):PTR Unit
-079 to [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

-080 Displays how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
079 Amt(%):ITB T-Collect Bottle
080 Amt(%):PCU T-Collect Bottle

(Current printouts ÷ Target printouts) × 100. This shows how much of the
unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
-091 to
The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of
-108
printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the
end condition, even though the Page% counter is still less than 100%.

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

System SP7-xxx
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
[PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

7804
(Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.

Press the Enter key after the machine asks "Execute?", which will store the
PM counter value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of
the current PM counter (SP7-803) to "0".
001 Paper
002 PCU: Bk
003 PCU: C
004 PCU: M
005 PCU: Y

System SP7-xxx
006 PCU: All
007 Development Unit: Bk
008 Development Unit: C
009 Development Unit: M
010 Development Unit: Y
011 Development Unit: All
012 Developer: Bk
013 Developer: C
014 Developer: M
015 Developer: Y
016 Developer: All
017 ITB Unit
018 ITB Cleaning Unit
019 Fusing Unit
020 Fusing Pad
021 Fusing Belt
022 PTR Unit
023 ITB T-Collect Bottle
024 PCU T-Collect Bottle
100 All
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

7807
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
001 - *CTL -

System SP7-xxx
7826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only
001 Error Total *CTL -
002 Error Staple *CTL -
7827 [MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only
- *CTL -
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]
Appendix:
SP Mode
7832
Tables
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
001 - *CTL -
7835 [ACC Counter]
001 Copy ACC - Displays the ACC exectuion times for
002 Printer ACC -- each mode.
Total Memory Size (CTL)

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
001 - *CTL -
[DF Glass Dust Check]
7852 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on
the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting
is done only if SP4-020-1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter *CTL

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection Clear Counter *CTL

System SP7-xxx
[Replacement Counter]
7853
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
001 PCU: Bk *CTL
002 PCU: C *CTL
003 PCU: M *CTL
004 PCU: Y *CTL
005 Development Unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development Unit: C *CTL
007 Development Unit: M *CTL
008 Development Unit: Y *CTL
009 Developer: Bk *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
010 Developer: C *CTL
011 Developer: M *CTL
012 Developer: Y *CTL
013 ITB Unit *CTL
016 Fusing Pad *CTL
018 PTR Unit *CTL
019 ITB T-Collect Bottle *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
020 PCU T-Collect Bottle *CTL

System SP7-xxx
[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.

Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
7855
The setting value of -002 must be set larger than the value of -001.
The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each
Appendix:
SP Mode
coverage range are displayed with the following SPs.
Tables
[Assert Info]
7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data
stored in this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
001 File Name
002 Number of Lines *CTL -
003 Location

System SP7-xxx
[Prev. Unit PM Counter]

7906
(Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit *ENG
-001 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
-020 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step ]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: Y
013 Page: ITB Unit
018 Page: PTR Unit

System SP7-xxx
027 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Bk
028 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: C
029 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: M
030 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Y
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous

-031 to
maintenance units.
-050
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

System SP7-xxx
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or
-061 to
toner cartridge.
-080
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: Bk
062 Rotation %: PCU: C
063 Rotation %: PCU: M
064 Rotation %: PCU: Y
065 Rotation %: Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation %: Development Unit: C
067 Rotation %: Development Unit: M
068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: C
071 Rotation %: Developer: M
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y
073 Rotation %: ITB Unit
074 Rotation %: ITB Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit
076 Rotation %: Fusing Pad
077 Rotation %: Fusing Belt
078 Rotation %: PTR Unit
079 Rotation %:ITB T-Collect Bottle
080 Rotation %:PCU T-Collect Bottle

System SP7-xxx

-091 to (Current count ÷ Yield count) x 100, where "Current count" is the current
-108 values in the counter for the part, and "Yield count" is the recommended yield.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit

System SP7-xxx
[Toner Bottle Bk]

7931
Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
003 Brand ID *EGN
004 Area ID *EGN
005 Product ID *EGN
006 Color ID *EGN

-
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
021 End Date *EGN

System SP7-xxx
[Toner Bottle M]
7932
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
003 Brand ID *EGN
004 Area ID *EGN
005 Product ID *EGN
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
006 Color ID *EGN
-
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
021 End Date

System SP7-xxx
[Toner Bottle C]
7933
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
003 Brand ID *EGN
004 Area ID *EGN
005 Product ID *EGN
006 Color ID *EGN

-
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
021 End Date *EGN

System SP7-xxx
[Toner Bottle Y]
7934
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
003 Brand ID *EGN
004 Area ID *EGN
005 Product ID *EGN

-
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
006 Color ID *EGN
010 Date *EGN
011 Serial No. *EGN
013 EDP Code *EGN
016 Attachment: Total Counter *EGN -
017 Attachment: Color Counter *EGN
021 End Date *EGN

System SP7-xxx
7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
005 Serial No.

*ENG
009 Serial No.

*ENG
013 Serial No.

*ENG
017 Serial No.

*ENG

System SP7-xxx
7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
005 Serial No.
Appendix:
006 Attachment Date
SP Mode
Tables
*ENG
009 Serial No.

*ENG
013 Serial No.

*ENG
017 Serial No.

*ENG

System SP7-xxx
7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
005 Serial No.

*ENG
009 Serial No.

*ENG
013 Serial No.

*ENG
017 Serial No.

*ENG

System SP7-xxx
7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
005 Serial No.
Appendix:
006 Attachment Date
SP Mode
Tables
*ENG
009 Serial No.

*ENG
013 Serial No.

*ENG
017 Serial No.

*ENG

System SP7-xxx
[Unit Replacement Date]

7950
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
001 ITB Unit *ENG
002 ITB Cleaning Unit *EGN
003 PTR Unit *EGN
004 Fusing Unit *EGN
005 Fusing Pad *EGN

-
006 Fusing Belt *EGN
013 PCU: Bk *EGN
014 PCU: C *EGN
015 PCU: M *EGN
016 PCU: Y *EGN
017 Development Unit:Bk *EGN
018 Development Unit:C *EGN
019 Development Unit:M *EGN
020 Development Unit:Y *EGN

-
021 Developer:Bk *EGN
022 Developer:C *EGN
023 Developer:M *EGN
024 Developer:Y *EGN

System SP7-xxx
[Remaining Day Counter] *ENG
7951 Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.

[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: Y
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
013 Page: ITB Unit
018 Page: PTR Unit

System SP7-xxx
048 Rotation:PTR Unit

System SP7-xxx
[PM Yield Setting]

7952
Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.
[0 to 999999999 / 23976000 / 1000

001 Rotation: ITB Unit *EGN
mm/step]
Rotation: ITB Cleaning

002 *EGN [0 to 999999999 / 59940000 / 1 mm/step]
Unit
003 Rotation: Fusing Unit *EGN
Appendix:
[0 to 999999999 / 17500000 / 1000
SP Mode
Tables
004 Rotation: Fusing Pad *EGN
mm/step]
005 Rotation: Fusing Belt *EGN
[0 to 999999999 / 23976000 / 1000

006 Rotation:PTR Unit *EGN
mm/step]
Amount:ITB T-Collect
007
Bottle [0 to 999999999 / 300000 / 1000
*EGN
Amount:PCU T-Collect mg/step]
008
Bottle
011 Page: ITB Unit *EGN [0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1000 sheet/step]
012 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit *EGN [0 to 999999 / 60000 / 1 sheet/step]
013 Page: Fusing Unit *EGN
014 Page: Fusing Pad *EGN [0 to 999999 / 150000 / 1 sheet/step]
015 Page: Fusing Belt *EGN
016 Page: PTR Unit *EGN [0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1 sheet/step]
Day Threshold: PCU: Adjusts the threshold day of the near end
021 *EGN
Bk for each PM unit.
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
022 Day Threshold: PCU: C *EGN These threshold days are used for
@Remote alarms.

System SP7-xxx
023 Day Threshold: PCU: M *EGN
024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y *EGN
Day Threshold:
025 *EGN
Development Unit: Bk
Day Threshold:
026 *EGN
Development Unit: C
Day Threshold:
027 *EGN
Development Unit: M
Day Threshold:
028 *EGN
Development Unit: Y
Day Threshold:
029 *EGN
Developer: Bk
Day Threshold:
030 *EGN
Developer: C
Day Threshold:
031 *EGN
Developer: M
Adjusts the threshold day of the near end
Day Threshold: for each PM unit.
032 *EGN
Developer: Y [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
033 Day Threshold: ITB Unit *EGN These threshold days are used for
@Remote alarms.
Day Threshold: ITB
034 *EGN
Cleaning Unit

035 *EGN
Unit

036 *EGN
Pad

System SP7-xxx

037 *EGN
Belt

*EGN
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Appendix:
042 *EGN
SP Mode
Tables
Unit: Bk
043 *EGN
Unit: C
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
044 *EGN
Unit: M
045 *EGN
Unit: Y

*EGN [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: C

*EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
052 Page: PCU: M
053 Page: PCU: Y

System SP7-xxx
Page: Development
054
Unit: Bk
Page: Development
055
Unit: C
*EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Page: Development
056
Unit: M
Page: Development
057
Unit: Y

*EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Day Threshold:PTR
062
Unit Adjusts the threshold day of the near end
for each PM unit.
Day Thresh:ITB
063 *EGN [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
T-Collect Bttl
Day Thresh:PCU @Remote alarms.
064
T-Collect Bttl

System SP7-xxx
7953 [Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]
Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.

T: Temperature (°C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
001 T<=0
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
004 T<=5: 70<=H<=100
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
005 5<T<15: 0<=H<30
*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
006 5<T<15: 30<=H<55
007 5<T<15: 55<=H<80
008 5<T<15: 80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25: 0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25: 30<=H<55
011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80
012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30
014 25<=T<30: 30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30: 55<=H<80

*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
016 25<=T<30: 80<=H<=100
017 30<=T: 0<=H<30
018 30<=T: 30<=H<55
019 30<=T: 55<=H<80
020 30<=T: 80<=H<=100

System SP7-xxx
[Operation Env. Log Clear]

7954
Clears the operation environment log.
001 -

System SP8-xxx
3.8 SYSTEM SP8-XXX
3.8.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as
sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in
combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8 211 to SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
SP8 401 to SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8 691 to SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.

System SP8-xxx
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications

T: Total: (Grand Total).
(C, F, P, etc.).
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.

The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
Local storage
L: another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
(document server)
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them
on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of
abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not
understand.

System SP8-xxx
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,

DesApl Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins

System SP8-xxx
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
GPC
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
ImgEdt
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

NRS machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows

print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
Palm 2
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.

PGS Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.

System SP8-xxx
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

R only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters

SMC
are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.

System SP8-xxx
T:Total Jobs *CTL

8 001
These SPs count the number of times each
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL application is used to do a job.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL Note: The L: counter is the total number of times
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL the other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL already on the document server is used.
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does
not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast
are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If
one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the
transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document
server, only the L: counter increments.

System SP8-xxx
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document
server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
increments.
8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
document server by each application, to reveal how
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL
Appendix:
SP Mode
local storage is being used for input.
Tables
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL
from within the document server mode screen at
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL the operation panel.
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you
enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
document server were stored on the
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL
document server originally.
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL
stored from within the document server mode
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL

System SP8-xxx
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the
document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P:
counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L:
counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the
S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then
the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2),
are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were

used to output documents from the
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
document server.
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
printed from within the document server
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL mode screen at the operation panel.
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image
Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.

System SP8-xxx
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that
stored files on the document server that
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
were later accessed for transmission over
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL the telephone line or over a network
(attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
I-Fax).
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
counted separately.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL scanned from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to
send files from the document server over
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
the telephone line or over a network
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by
I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending are
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
counted separately.
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
sent from within the document server mode
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL screen at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.

System SP8-xxx
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 063 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method
S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is
specified from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job

8 06x 1 Sort is set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L:
counter increments. (See SP8 066 1)

System SP8-xxx
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in

8 06x 4 Booklet
staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet

8 06x 5 Z-Fold
mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for

8 06x 6 Punch
a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on

System SP8-xxx
S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).

System SP8-xxx
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
8 111 fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
SP Mode
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
Tables
8 113
fax directly on a telephone line.
8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color
These counters count jobs, not pages.

This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including
documents stored on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job
started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where
both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also
increments.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

System SP8-xxx
T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
8 121 either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 123 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at
this time.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 131 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document
server was used or not.
S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 135 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

System SP8-xxx

If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color
or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what
stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC,
or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For
example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 14x 3 ACS

The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
"Color" job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

System SP8-xxx
T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 15x 3 ACS

If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
transmission jobs. A job is counted from when
it is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out
to the destination from the PC through the copier.

System SP8-xxx
8 171 T: Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by
WS.
8 175 S: Dvliv Jobs/WSD *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
x 1 B/W
x 2 Color
x 3 ACS
Appendix:
8 181 T: Scan to Media Jobs *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a
SP Mode
Tables
media by the scanner application.
8 185 S: Scan to Media Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
x 1 B/W
x 2 Color
x 3 ACS
8 191 T: Total Scan PGS *CTL
8 192 C: Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by
each application that uses the scanner to
8 193 F: Total Scan PGS *CTL
scan images.
8 195 S: Total Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 196 L: Total Scan PGS
SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust
color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.

System SP8-xxx
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S:
count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store
File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
8 201 scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax
transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
F: LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 203 fax transmission.
Tools display.
S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 205 scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
Tools display.
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned into the document server .
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
screen

System SP8-xxx
Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
8 221
SP Mode
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
Tables
back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
8 221 1 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by
which side the user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
8 221 2 Back scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
rear-side scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.

System SP8-xxx
Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be

8 231 1 Large Volume
loaded in the ADF at one time.
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through

8 231 2 SADF
the ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the

8 231 3 Mixed Size
operation panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the

8 231 5 Platen
original directly on the platen.
8 231 6 Mixed 1side/2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the
original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8 243 F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

System SP8-xxx
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax
jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 245 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
Appendix:
File button from within the Copy mode screen
SP Mode
Tables
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No - Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

System SP8-xxx
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
features have been selected at the operation
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
panel for each application. Some examples of
8 255 S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL these editing features are:
Erase> Border
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
Note: The count totals the number of times
the edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have
been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color
creation features have been selected at the
8 26x 3 Background operation panel.
8 26x 4 Other

System SP8-xxx
8 281 T:Scn PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used
for delivery functions.
8 285 S:Scn PGS/TWAIN *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
Appendix:
SP Mode
stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
Tables
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].

System SP8-xxx
S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP 8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
8 306 within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
8 30x 7 LG -
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
8 30x
Other (Standard)
254
8 30x
Other (Custom)
255

System SP8-xxx
T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 315 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.
Appendix:
8 31x 1 1200dpi <
SP Mode
Tables
8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi
8 31x 5 < 199dpi
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done
for the Fax application.
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
by the customer. The counter for the
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL
application used for storing the pages
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL increments.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
with the Store File button from within the Copy
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL mode screen go to the C: counter.

System SP8-xxx
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports,
etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL from the document server. The counter for the
application used to print the pages is
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs

8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.

System SP8-xxx
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
Appendix:
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
SP Mode
Tables
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.

System SP8-xxx
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to
improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4

System SP8-xxx
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel with the three
features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The

8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

8 43x 2 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were

8 43x 3 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.

System SP8-xxx
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5

System SP8-xxx
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
8 44x 254 Other (Standard)
8 44x 255 Other (Custom)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.

System SP8-xxx
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
8 461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 463 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special

System SP8-xxx
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 471
Appendix:
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
SP Mode
Tables
8 471 1 < 49%
8 471 2 50% to 99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101% to 200%
8 471 5 201% <
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing
magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the
document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying
are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned
a rate of 100%.

System SP8-xxx
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages
8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL printed in the Color Mode by each
application.
8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 2 Single Color
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color
8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL pages printed in the Color Mode
by the print application.
8 057 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 4 Single Color
8 50x 5 Two Color

System SP8-xxx
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 514 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8 514 1 RPCS
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 514 2 RPDL
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
8 514 5 R16
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C
8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other
8 514 15 IPDS
SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

System SP8-xxx
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
8 52x 8 Inside-Fold

System SP8-xxx
8 52x 9
8 52x 10
8 52x 11
8 52x 12
8 52x 13
8 52x 14
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by

8 531 Staples *CTL the machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
8 581 the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W

System SP8-xxx
8 581 8 Print: Color
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W
8 581 12 Full Color: A3
8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
8 581 14 Full Color Print
8 581 15 Mono Color Print
8 581 16 Full Color GPC
8 581 17 Twin Color Mode Print
8 581 18 Full Color Print (Twin)
8 581 19 Mono Color Print (Twin)
8 581 20 Full Color Total (CV)
8 581 21 Mono Color Total (CV)
8 581 22 Full Color Print (CV)
8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color

System SP8-xxx
8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Mono Color
8 584 3 Full Color
8 584 5 Two Color
8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color

System SP8-xxx
O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8 591 1 A3/DLT
-
8 591 2 Duplex
Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
pages for each printing mode.
8 601 1 B/W
8 601 2 Color
8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages
8 601 12 Color Printing Pages -
8 601 21 Coverage Counter 1
8 617 SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 617 1 SDK1
8 617 2 SDK2
8 617 3 SDK3 These SPs count the total printout pages for
8 617 4 SDK4 each SDK applicaion.
8 617 5 SDK5
8 617 6 SDK6

System SP8-xxx
T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 631 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 633 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted
separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and
SP8633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is
done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted
separately as B/W or Color.

System SP8-xxx
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and
SP8643 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is
done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 655 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for the Scan application only.
8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color
The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If
the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10
(the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the
document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page
document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted
separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is
10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100
destinations, for a total of 20.).

System SP8-xxx
T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 66x 2 Color
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the
Scan Router server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are
not done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan
Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color

System SP8-xxx
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent
by PC Fax. These SPs are provided for the
Fax application only, so the counts for SP8
8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL 681 and SP8 683 are the same.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the
copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages
are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B.
The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent
from the document server. The counter for
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL
the application that was used to store the
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL pages is incremented.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the
number of pages sent to each destination.

System SP8-xxx
TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 715
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 715 5 PDF/Comp
8 721 T: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL
8 725
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W
x 2 Color

System SP8-xxx
8 731 T: Scan PGS/Media *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: Scan PGS/Media *CTL
8 735 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by
each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W
x 2 Color
RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1
8 741 2 PSTN-2
8 741 3 PSTN-3
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 741 5 Network
Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y
8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C

System SP8-xxx
Toner Bottle Info. *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
8 781 1 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
8 781 2 Toner: Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
8 781 3 Toner: M The number of magenta-toner bottles
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 781 4 Toner: C The number of cyan-toner bottles
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL
storing documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
8 801 allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1%
steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only measure
in increments of 10 (10% steps).
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C

System SP8-xxx
Cov Cnt: 0-10% *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage
of each color is from 0% to 10%.
8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK
8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y
8 851 13 0 to 2%: M 8 851 33 5 to 7%: M
8 851 14 0 to 2%: C 8 851 34 5 to 7%: C
8 851 21 3 to 4%: BK 8 851 41 8 to 10%: BK
8 851 22 3 to 4%: Y 8 851 42 8 to 10%: Y
8 851 23 3 to 4%: M 8 851 43 8 to 10%: M
8 851 24 3 to 4%: C 8 851 44 8 to 10%: C
Cov Cnt: 11-20% *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 861 1 BK
8 861 2 Y
8 861 3 M
8 861 4 C
Cov Cnt: 21-30% *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 871 1 BK
8 871 2 Y

System SP8-xxx
8 871 3 M
8 871 4 C
Cov Cnt: 31%- *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of each color is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 BK
8 881 2 Y
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C
Page/Toner Bottle *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 891 These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each
color.
8 891 1 BK
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C
Page/Toner – Prev1 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 901 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each
color.
8 901 1 BK
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C

System SP8-xxx
Page/Toner – Prev2 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for
each color.
8 911 1 BK
8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C
Cov Cnt: Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
8 921 1 Coverage (%): BK
8 921 2 Coverage (%): Y
8 921 3 Coverage (%): M
8 921 4 Coverage (%): C
8 921 14 Coverage/P: BK
8 921 15 Coverage/P: Y
8 921 16 Coverage/P: M
8 921 17 Coverage/P: C
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
8 941 operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with
ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

8 941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).

System SP8-xxx
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller

8 941 2 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

8 941 3 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Includes time while machine is performing
Appendix:
SP Mode
8 941 5 Off Mode Time background printing. Does not include time machine
Tables
remains powered off with the power switches.
8 941 6 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying

8 941 7 PrtJam
during printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying

8 941 8 OrgJam
during scanning.
8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
AddBook Register *CTL
8 951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8 951 1 User Code/User ID User code registrations.
Mail address
8 951 2 Mail Address
registrations.
Fax destination [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 951 3 Fax Destination
registrations.
Group destination
8 951 4 Group
registrations.

System SP8-xxx
Fax relay destination

8 951 5 Transfer Request
registrations for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Copy application
registrations with the
8 951 7 Copy Program
Program (job settings)
feature.
Fax application
8 951 8 Fax Program
feature.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
Printer application
8 951 9 Printer Program
feature.
Scanner application
8 951 10 Scanner Program
feature.
Adomin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 999
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
8 999 1 Total
8 999 2 Copy: Full Color
8 999 3 Copy: BW
8 999 4 Copy: Single Color
8 999 5 Copy: Two Color
8 999 6 Printer Full Color

System SP8-xxx
8 999 7 Printer BW
8 999 8 Printer Single Color
8 999 9 Printer Two Color
8 999 10 Fax Print: BW
8 999 11 Fax Print: Single Color
8 999 12 A3/DLT
8 999 13 Duplex
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 999 14 Coverage: Color (%)
8 999 15 Coverage: BW (%)
8 999 16 Coverage: Color Print Page (%)
8 999 17 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
8 999 101 Transmission Total: Color
8 999 102 Transmission Total: BW
8 999 103 FAX Transmission
8 999 104 Scanner Transmission: Color
8 999 105 Scanner Transmission: BW

Input and Output Check Tables
3.9 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK TABLES
3.9.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Copier
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 1 C-Dev. Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 2 C-Drum Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 3 Bk-Drum/Dev. Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 4 ITB Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 5 Fusing/P-Exit Mtr:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 6 Electrical FAN:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 7 Fusing Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 8 Dev. Front Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 9 Dev. Rear Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 10 Fusing Exit Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 11 LD Unit FAN:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 12 Jun. Gate SOL Fan:LOCK Normal Lock
5803 13 Fusing:New Detection New Not new

5803 14 Fusing:Area Detection - -
5803 15 Zero Cross Not detected Detected
5803 16 Regist Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
Actuator not
5803 17 Drum Phase Sn:Bk Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 18 Drum Phase Sn:Color Actuator detected
detected
5803 19 Inverter Sensor Inverter gate open Inverter gate close
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5803 20 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
5803 21 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter HP Sn
5803 22 HP Not HP
(PTR Contact Sensor)
5803 23 HVPS:CB - -
5803 24 HVPS:T - -
5803 25 Right Door Open SW Door close Door open
5803 26 Right Lower Cover OP SW Cover close Cover open
5803 27 Mechanical Counter:Bk Not set Set
5803 28 Mechanical Counter:FC Not set Set
5803 29 Key Counter Set Sensor Set Not set
5803 30 Key Card Set Sensor Set Not set
5803 31 Toner End Sensor: K End Not end
5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C End Not end
5803 33 Toner End Sensor: M End Not end
5803 34 Toner End Sensor: Y End Not end
5803 35 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected

5803 36 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
5803 37 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
Not HP
5803 38 ITB Contact HP Sensor HP (Contact)
(not contact)
5803 39 ITB T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Set Not set
5803 40 PCU T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Set Not set
5803 41 PCU T-Collect Bttl Full Sn Full Not full
5803 46 Bypass Size Detection SW See "Table 2" below.
5803 47 Bypass Length Detection Sn Detected Not detect
5803 48 Bypass HP Sensor HP Not HP
5803 51 Bypass Paper End Sensor Not end End
5803 56 DIP SW - -
5803 57 BCU Version - -
5803 58 PCU T-Collect Motor Set Not set Set
5803 59 Reserve Fan:LOCK Lock Normal

No paper
5803 70 R-Tray Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
5803 71 R-Tray Set Sensor Set Not set
No paper
5803 72 1-Bin:Transport Sensor Paper detected
detected
No paper
5803 73 1-Bin:Paper Sensor Paper detected
detected
5803 74 1-Bin Set Detection Set Not set
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5803 75 Shift Tray:Half Turn Sn Not HP HP
5803 76 Shift Tray Set Detection Not set Set
5803 77 1T PFU:Size Sensors See "Table 4".
5803 78 1T PFU:Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 79 1T PFU:Paper Height Sn - -
5803 81 1T PFU:Set Detection Not set Set
5803 82 1T PFU:Paper End Sn Not end End
5803 83 2T PFU:Upper Size Sns

5803 84 2T PFU:Lower Size Sns
5803 85 2T PFU:Upper Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 86 2T PFU:Lower Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 87 2T PFU:Upper Paper Height Sn - -
5803 88 2T PFU:Lower Paper Height Sn - -
5803 90 2T PFU:Upper PE Sn Not end End
5803 91 2T PFU:Lower PE Sn Not end End

No paper
5803 92 2T PFU:V-Transport Sn Paper detected
detected
5803 94 LD OFF Check:Factory - -
5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close
Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1/ 2)

Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Bit
North America Europe/Asia 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 0 0
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 1 1 0
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

0 0 1
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
5-181-002 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-006 (Tray 2).
5-181-003 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-007 (Tray 2).

5-181-001 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-004 (Tray 1) or SP 5-181-008 (Tray 2).
Table 2: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

0: ON, 1: OFF
By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length
Appendix:
SP Mode
NA EU/ASIA
Tables
bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Sensor
1 1 0 0 1 HLT SEF B6 SEF
0 0 1 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
0 0 1 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 0 0 1 0 DLT SEF A3 SEF
1 0 0 1 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.

Table 3: APS Original Size Detection
Length
Original Size Width Sensor
Sensor SP4-301
Inch display
Metric version W1 W2 W3 L1 L2
version
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 00000011
B4 10" x 14" O O X O O 00000011
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x
13", or 8" x 13" 8.5" x 14" O X X O O 00000011
SP 5126 controls the
size that is detected
A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" O O O X X 00000000
B5 LEF - O O X X X 00000000
A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" O X X O X 00000010
B5 SEF - X X X O X 00000010
5.5" x 8.5",
A5 LEF/ SEF X X X X X 00000000
8.5" x 5.5"

Table 4: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3/ 4)

"Bit 0" is used for tray set detection. 0: Set, 1: Not set
0: Not Interrupted, 1: Interrupted
Models Bit
North America Europe/Asia 3 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 1 1 0
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
Appendix:
SP Mode
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2
Tables
1 1 1 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 0 0 0
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 0 1 1
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 0 0 0 0
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 1 0 1
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

1 0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 1 0 0
A5 SEF A5 SEF 1 1 0 1
5-181-010 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-014 (Tray 4).
5-181-011 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-015 (Tray 4).
5-181-009 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-013 (Tray 4).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-012 (Tray 3) or SP 5-181-016 (Tray 4).

ARDF (D366)
Reading
6007 Description
0 1
6007 1 Original Length Sn1 (B5 Sn) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 2 Original Length Sn2 (A4 Sn) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 3 Original Length Sn3 (LG Sn) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 4 Original Width Sn:S Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 5 Original Width Sn:M Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 6 Original Width Sn:L Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 7 Original Width Sn:LL Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 9 Original Set Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 10 Trailing Edge Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 11 Skew Correction Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 13 Registration Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 14 Exit Sn Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 15 Feed Cover SW ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 16 Lift Up Sn HP Not HP

Reading
6120 Description
0 1
6120 1 Staple Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
6120 2 Punch Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
6120 3 Staple HP Sensor Not HP HP
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
6120 4 Paper T-Edge Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 5 Pick Roller Lift Sensor Up Down
6120 6 Paper Detection Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 7 Belt Roller Lift Sensor Down Up
6120 8 Entrance Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 9 Rear Jogger HP Sensor HP Not HP
6120 10 Front Jogger HP Sensor HP Not HP
6120 11 Fan Lock Signal Normal Lock
6120 12 Finisher Open Switch Close Open

6120 17 Punch Position Sensor Not HP HP
6120 19 Paper Width Sensor:LD Paper not detected Paper detected

6120 22 Paper Width Sensor:16K Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 24 Punch Hopper Full Sensor Full Not full
6120 25 Tray Upper Sensor Upper Not upper
6120 26 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6120 27 Tray Lower Sensor Lower Not lower
6120 28 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
6120 29 Punch HP Sensor Not rear Rear Position
6120 30 Stapler Safety Sensor No staple Staple detected
6120 31 Staple Empty Sensor No staple Staple detected
6120 32 Punch Unit Sensor Not set Set
Table 5: Area Display

The bit 0 of these SPs shows the punch unit type.
2: 2 Holes, 2/3: 2/3 Holes, 4 (EU): 4 Holes Europe,
4 (Scan.): 4 Holes Scandinavia
SP 2 2/3 4 (EU) 4 (Scan.)

3.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE
Copier
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

5804 26 Regist M:60mm/s:Thick -
5804 49 Bk Drum M:120mm/s -
5804 50 Bk Drum M:60mm/s -

5804 55 Electrical FAN:H -
5804 56 Electrical FAN:L -
5804 57 Fusing Fan:H -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5804 58 Fusing Fan:L -
5804 59 Dev. Front FAN:H -
5804 60 Dev. Front FAN:L -
5804 61 Dev. Rear FAN:H -
5804 62 Dev. Rear FAN:L -
5804 63 Fusing Exit Fan:H -
5804 64 Fusing Exit Fan:L -
5804 65 LD Unit Fan:H -
5804 67 PSU Fan:H -
5804 69 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:H -
5804 70 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:L -
5804 71 Toner Supply M:Bk -
5804 72 Toner Supply M:C -
5804 73 Toner Supply M:M -
5804 74 Toner Supply M:Y -
5804 75 PCU T-Collect Motor -
5804 76 ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter Motor PTR Contact Motor

5804 77 ITB Contact Motor -
5804 78 Bk Dev. Clutch -
5804 80 PWM:Potential Sn:Bk -
5804 81 PWM:Potential Sn:C -
5804 82 PWM:Potential Sn:M -
5804 83 PWM:Potential Sn:Y -
5804 84 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:H -
5804 85 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:L -
5804 86 HVPS:Charge AC:C:H -
5804 87 HVPS:Charge AC:C:L -
5804 88 HVPS:Charge AC:M:H -
5804 89 HVPS:Charge AC:M:L -
5804 90 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:H -
5804 91 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:L -
5804 92 HVPS:Charge DC:Bk -
5804 93 HVPS:Charge DC:C -
5804 94 HVPS:Charge DC:M -
5804 95 HVPS:Charge DC:Y -
5804 96 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Bk -
5804 97 HVPS:Dev. Bias:C -
5804 98 HVPS:Dev. Bias:M -
5804 99 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Y -
5804 100 HVPS:PTR Bias:- PWM -

5804 101 HVPS:PTR Bias:+ PWM -
5804 106 MUSIC Sensor:R:PWM -
5804 107 MUSIC Sensor:C:PWM -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5804 108 MUSIC Sensor:F:PWM -
5804 109 Reserve Fan:H -
5804 110 Reserve Fan:LOCK -
5804 111 Toner End Sn Power -
5804 120 R-Tray M:280mm/s -
5804 121 R-Tray M:120mm/s -
5804 122 R-Tray SOL -
5804 123 Shift Motor -
5804 124 1T PFU:Tray Lift M -
5804 125 1T PFU:Paper Feed M -
5804 126 1T PFU:Paper Feed CL -
5804 127 2T PFU:Relay CL -
5804 128 2T PFU:Upper Feed CL -
5804 129 2T PFU:Lower Feed CL -
5804 130 2T PFU:P-Feed M:190mm/s -
5804 131 2T PFU:P-Feed M:120mm/s -
5804 132 2T PFU:P-Feed M:60mm/s -

5804 133 2T PFU:Upper Tray Lift M -
5804 134 2T PFU:Lower Tray Lift M -
5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: Bk -
5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: C -
5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: M -
5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: Y -
5804 196 RFID COM ON: Bk -
5804 197 RFID COM ON: C -
5804 198 RFID COM ON: M -
5804 199 RFID COM ON: Y -
5804 202 Scanner Lamp -
5804 210 Polygon Motor -
5804 216 LD1: Bk -
5804 218 LD1: M
5804 220 LD1: C -
5804 222 LD1: Y -

6121 Description Description
6121 1 Transport Motor -
6121 2 Front Jogger Motor -
6121 3 Rear Jogger Motor -
6121 4 Stapler Slide Motor -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
6121 5 Stuck Feed-out Motor -
6121 6 Pick Roller Lift Motor -
6121 7 Staple Motor -
6121 8 Tray Lift Motor -
6121 9 Paper Detection SOL -
6121 10 Paddle Rotation SOL -
6121 11 Belt Roller SOL -
6121 13 Fan Motor -
6120 14 Punch Motor -
6120 15 Punch Slide Motor -
6120 16 Inverter Roller SOL -

ARDF (D366)
6008 3 Feed Motor: Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation
6008 4 Feed Motor: Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation
6008 9 Feed Clutch -
6008 10 Pick-up Solenoid -
6008 11 Junction Gate Solenoid -
6008 12 Stamp Solenoid Stamp Solenoid

Test Pattern Printing
3.10 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing Test pattern: SP2-109

Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily
for design testing.
Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise,
an SC occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
Appendix:
SP Mode
3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test
Tables
pattern, select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan).
4. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with
SP2-109-006 to -009 for each color.
If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not
come up on a test pattern.
5. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test pattern for
printing.
6. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print
(paper size etc.).
If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If
you want to use color printing, touch "Full Colour" on the LCD.
7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
8. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode
display.
9. Reset all settings to the default values.
10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 11 Independent Pattern (1dot)
1 Vertical Line (1dot) 12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
2 Vertical Line (2dot) 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)

Test Pattern Printing
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 14 Ttrimming Area
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band (Horizontal)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band (Vertical)
7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checkered Flag Pattern
8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
9 Argyle Patter Small 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
10 Argyle Patter Large 23 Full Dot Pattern

Printer Service Mode
3.11 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
3.11.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE)
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot ( "Card

Save Function" in "System Maintenance" chapter of the Field Service
Manual).
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Normal

Collate Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")

will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
Appendix:
1001 Bit Switch
SP Mode
Tables
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS
print-side 0: Disable 1: Enable
reversal
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side
because of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce
printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -

1001 Bit Switch
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable
panel.
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0: Disable

1: Enable
mismatch occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device
can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs Disable Enable (1000)
to 1000 jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 Face-up output Disable Enable
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6 Method for determining the image 0: Disable 1: Enable

rotation for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only)

bit 0 and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are
always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths
increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without

Disable Enable
requiring User Code
Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if

usercode authentication is enabled.
Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

"Disabled "Enabled
submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately)" (10 seconds)"
1284).
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled Enabled

(Not (Cancelled)

cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might
result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation

0: Disable 1: Enable
(SEF/LEF)
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous
Appendix:
SP Mode
generations. It only takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" =
Tables
"Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the
bypass tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch,
the MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by
the MFP bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
bit 4 Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB

END) when printing multiple collated 0: Disable 1: Enable
copies.
This bitsw determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when
multiple collated copies are being printed.
0 (default): JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has
completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented after the
first copy and then again at the end of the job.
1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished
printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each
job.
Bit 5 DFU
- -
to 7

1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 1
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Summary
1004 1
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).

1005 [Display Version]
Disp. Version
1005 1
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
1006 1
Appendix:
When you select "1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy
SP Mode
Tables
Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b)
the previous setting, or c) the current setting.
1101 1 Factory
1101 2 Previous
*CTL
1101 3 Current
1101 4 ACC
[Resolution Setting]
1102
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text,

1102 1
1800x600, Text, 600x600 Text

[Test Page]
1103 Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
1103 2 Color Pattern
[Gamma Adjustment]
1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection"
menu.
1104 1 Black: Highlight
1104 2 Black: Shadow
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight
1104 22 Cyan: Shadow
1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax

[Save Tone Control Value]
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the
1105 current setting. Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves
the data currently stored as the "current setting" to the "previous setting"
memory storage location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
[Toner Limit]
Appendix:
SP Mode
1106
Tables
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]

Scanner SP Mode
3.12 SCANNER SP MODE
3.12.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS)
1001 [Scan Nv Version]
1001 5 - *CTL -
[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is
activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL
0: enable, 1: disable
[Non Display Clear [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

1010 *CTL
Light PDF] 0: Display, 1: No display

Scanner SP Mode
1011 [Org count Disp] *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Selects the original counter display.

1011 1 0: Displays remaining memory for the original scanning.
1: Displays original counter.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
1012 [UserInfo release] *CTL
0: No, 1: Yes
Clear the following settings:
Appendix:
1012 1
SP Mode
Tables
Address, Sender, Text / Subject, Filename
[Multimedia Function [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1013 *CTL
Setting] 0: OFF, 1: ON
1013 1 On or off multimedia function

Scanner SP Mode
3.12.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)
[Compression Level (Grayscale)]
2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the
three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2021 1 Comp 1: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp 2: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Comp 3: 5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2021 4 Comp 4: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp 5: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]
2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]

*CTL
2024 2 Compression Ratio (High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030
D331
D331 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New

None
1
PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 D331
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 1

1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER ............................................................................... 1
1.1.1 COVERS .............................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 FEED ROLLER .................................................................................... 2
1.2 DRIVE COMPONENTS ................................................................................ 3
1.2.1 UPPER FEED CLUTCH....................................................................... 3
1.2.2 LOWER FEED CLUTCH ...................................................................... 3
1.2.3 RELAY CLUTCH .................................................................................. 4
1.2.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR ........................................................................ 4
1.2.5 LIFT MOTORS ..................................................................................... 5
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..................................................................... 6
1.3.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR .................................................... 6
1.3.2 PAPER END SENSOR ........................................................................ 7
1.3.3 PAPER SIZE SENSORS ..................................................................... 7
1.3.4 TRAY MAIN BOARD ............................................................................ 8
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................... 9

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................... 9
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................. 9
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 10
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ................................... 10
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. 13
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM ...................................... 14
2.3 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM ......................................................................... 15
2.4 PAPER END DETECTION .......................................................................... 17
2.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION .................................................................... 18
2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ......................................................................... 19
2.7 SIDE AND END FENCES ........................................................................... 21
2.7.1 SIDE FENCES ................................................................................... 21
2.7.2 END FENCE ...................................................................................... 21
SM i D331
Read This First
Safety and Symbols
Replacement Procedure Safety
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the replacement procedures in this manual.
Symbols Used in this Manual

This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Covers and Roller
1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
the procedures in this section.
1.1.1 COVERS
Rear Cover
1. Hold brackets [A] ( x 1 each)
2. Rear cover [B] ( x 3)
Right Cover
1. Right side stopper [C] ( x 3)
2. Right cover [D] ( x , knob screw x 2)
SM 1 D331
Covers and Roller
1.1.2 FEED ROLLER
1. Pull out the tray [A].

2. Release the lock lever [B].
3. Feed roller [C]
D331 2 SM
Drive Components
1.2 DRIVE COMPONENTS
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
1.2.1 UPPER FEED CLUTCH
1. Rear cover ( "Covers")

2. Bracket [A] ( x 2)
3. Hold bracket [B] ( x 1, bushing x 1)
4. Upper feed clutch [C] ( x 1)
1.2.2 LOWER FEED CLUTCH

2. Lower feed clutch [A] ( x 1, = x 1, x 1)
SM 3 D331
Drive Components
1.2.3 RELAY CLUTCH

2. Relay clutch [A] (= x 1, x 1)
1.2.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR

2. Tray main board ( "Tray Main Board")
3. Gear [A] ( x 1)
4. Paper feed motor bracket [B] ( x 5)
5. Paper feed motor [C] ( x 2)
D331 4 SM
Drive Components
1.2.5 LIFT MOTORS

Upper Lift Motor
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
2. Spring [A] (snap ring x 1, spacer x 1)
3. Lift motor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1)
4. Upper lift motor [C] ( x 3)
Lower Lift Motor

2. Spring (snap ring x 1, spacer x 1)
3. Lift motor bracket ( x 4, x 1)
4. Lower lift motor ( x 3)
SM 5 D331
1.3.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR
1. Open the tray cover [A]

2. Guide plate [B] ( x 2)
3. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Vertical transport sensor [D] (hooks)
D331 6 SM
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
1. Pull out the tray [A]
2. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Paper end sensor [C] (hooks)
1.3.3 PAPER SIZE SENSORS
1. Pull out the two trays.

2. Sensor bracket cover [A] ( x 1)
4. Paper size sensors (hooks)
SM 7 D331
1.3.4 TRAY MAIN BOARD

2. Tray main board [A] ( x 4, all 's)
D331 8 SM
Component Layout
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
1. Upper paper feed roller
5. Lower tray
2. Lower paper feed roller
6. Upper tray
3. Lower bottom plate
7. Upper bottom plate
4. Optional tray heater
SM 9 D331
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Paper feed motor 12. Lower paper height 1 sensor

2. Upper lift sensor 13. Vertical transport sensor
3. Upper lift motor 14. Lower tray set switch
4. Upper tray set switch 15. Lower paper end sensor
5. Upper paper height 2 sensor 16. Upper paper end sensor
6. Upper paper height 1 sensor 17. Optional tray heater
7. Upper paper feed clutch 18. Lower lift motor
8. Relay clutch 19. Lower paper size sensors
9. Tray cover switch 20. Lower lift sensor
10. Lower paper feed clutch 21. Upper paper size sensors
11. Lower paper height 2 sensor 22. Tray main board
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Index
Symbol Name Function
No.
D331 10 SM
Component Layout
Motors
M1 Paper Feed Drives all rollers. 1
M2 Upper Lift Lifts the upper tray bottom plate. 3
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
M3 Lower Lift Lifts the lower tray bottom plate. 18
D331
Sensors
Detects when the paper in the upper tray is at

S1 Upper Lift 2
the correct feed height.
Detects when the paper in the lower tray is at

S2 Lower Lift 20
the correct feed height.
Informs the copier/printer when the upper tray

S3 Upper Paper End 16
runs out of paper.
Informs the copier/printer when the lower tray

S4 Lower Paper End 15
runs out of paper.
Vertical
S5 Detects misfeeds. 13
Transport
Upper Paper
S6 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray. 6
Height 1
Upper Paper
S7 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray. 5
Height 2
Lower Paper
S8 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray. 12
Height 1
Lower Paper
S9 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray. 11
Height 2
Upper Paper
S10 Determines what paper size is in the upper tray. 21
Size
S11 Lower Paper Determines what paper size is in the lower tray. 19
SM 11 D331
Component Layout
Size
Switches
SW1 Tray Cover Detects whether the tray cover is opened or not. 9
Detects whether the upper tray is opened or

SW2 Upper Tray Set 4
not.
SW3 Lower Tray Set Detects whether the lower tray is opened or not. 14
Magnetic Clutches
Upper Paper
MC1 Starts paper feed from the upper tray. 7
Feed
Lower Paper
MC2 Starts paper feed from the lower tray. 10
Feed
MC3 Relay Drives the relay rollers. 8
PCBs
Controls the paper tray unit and communicates

PCB1 Tray Main 22
with the copier/printer.
Others
Optional Tray
H1 Removes humidity from the paper in the trays. 17
Heater
D331 12 SM
Component Layout
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
1. Paper feed motor 5. Lower paper feed clutch
2. Drive belt 6. Upper paper feed roller
3. Upper paper feed clutch 7. Relay roller
4. Relay clutch 8. Lower paper feed roller
SM 13 D331
Paper Feed and Separation Mechanism
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
The paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper
from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed
at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].
D331 14 SM
Paper Lift Mechanism
2.3 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor pressure shaft
engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom plate lift shaft in the tray
engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The pin [E] on the rear of the tray
pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the bottom plate pressure lever.
The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the diagram. The main pressure
spring [H] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray bottom plate.
When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the plate any
more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F].
The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor reverses to
reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on the paper size. For
smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce the pressure more.
When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B, D], and
SM 15 D331
Paper Lift Mechanism
the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor rotates
backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D] to the original
position.
D331 16 SM
Paper End Detection
2.4 PAPER END DETECTION
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [A] and
the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the
tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end
feeler causes it to lift up.
SM 17 D331
Paper Height Detection
2.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals from two
paper height sensors [A] and [B].
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves the
actuator up.
The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.
Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2
Near End OFF ON
30% ON ON
70% ON OFF
100% OFF OFF
When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may become too
low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has decreased. The lift motor
rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of paper remaining in the
tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating the pressure generated by a full tray.
D331 18 SM
Paper Size Detection
2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
There are three paper size sensors [A] (SN1, SN2 and SN3) on the paper tray unit. Each
paper tray has its own actuator [B], with a unique combination of notches. This actuator is
moved when the paper end fence [C] is adjusted for the installed paper. To determine
which size has been installed, the CPU reads which paper size sensors the actuator has
switched off. Refer to the size detection lists as shown below.
EU/ AISA Size SN1 SN2 SN3 SP Setting
A6 SEF 148 x 105 OFF ON OFF A5 LEF
B5 LEF 182 x 257 ON OFF ON B6 SEF/ Exe LEF
LT LEF/ A5 SEF/ HLT

A4 LEF 210 x 297 ON ON OFF
SEF
B5 SEF 257 x 182 OFF OFF ON
LT SEF 279 x 216 OFF OFF OFF
A4 SEF 297 x 210 ON OFF OFF LG SEF
B4 SEF 364 x 257 ON ON ON
SM 19 D331
Paper Size Detection
A3 SEF 420 x 297 OFF ON ON DLT SEF
NA Size SN1 SN2 SN3 SP Setting
A6 SEF 148 x 105 OFF ON OFF A5 LEF
B5 LEF 182 x 257 ON OFF ON Exe LEF/ B6 SEF
A4 LEF/ A5 SEF/ HLT

LT LEF 210 x 297 ON ON OFF
SEF
B5 SEF 257 x 182 OFF OFF ON
LT SEF 279 x 216 OFF OFF OFF
A4 SEF 297 x 210 ON OFF OFF
LG SEF 364 x 257 ON ON ON
DLT SEF 420 x 297 OFF ON ON A3 SEF
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper
size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light.
D331 20 SM
Side and End Fences
2.7 SIDE AND END FENCES
Unit PB3030
Paper Tray
D331
2.7.1 SIDE FENCES
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This
may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this,
each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a
screw [B], for customers who do not want to change the paper size.
2.7.2 END FENCE

As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up gradually. The
end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray bottom plate rises, the end
fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper stack to keep it squared up.
SM 21 D331
ARDF DF3030
D366
D366 ARDF DF3030 REVISION HISTORY
None
ARDF DF3030 D366
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS AND TRAY .................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY .............................................. 1
1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS ............................................................ 2
1.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ........................................................................ 2
1.2.2 PICK-UP ROLLER ............................................................................... 2
1.2.3 FEED BELT ......................................................................................... 3
1.2.4 SEPARATION ROLLER....................................................................... 4
1.3.1 ARDF DRIVE BOARD AND DF POSITION SENSOR ......................... 5
1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR ..... 5
1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR .................................................................... 6
1.3.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR ... 6
1.3.5 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ......................... 7
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .............................................................................. 8
1.4.1 FEED MOTOR ..................................................................................... 8
1.4.2 PICK-UP SOLENOID ........................................................................... 8
1.4.3 INVERTER SOLENOID ....................................................................... 9
1.4.4 FEED CLUTCH .................................................................................. 10
1.4.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR....................................................................... 11
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .......................................................... 12

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................. 12
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................ 12
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 13
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. 16
2.2 BASIC OPERATION ................................................................................... 17
2.2.1 ORIGINAL SET AND SIZE DETECTION ........................................... 17
2.2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ......................................................... 18
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ............................................................ 20
SM i D366
2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION ....................................................................... 21
2.2.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ................................................. 22
2.2.6 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION .............................................. 23
3. SERVICE TABLES......................................................................... 25
3.1 DIP SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 25
D366 ii SM
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Covers and Tray
ARDF DF3030
D366
1.1 COVERS AND TRAY
1.1.1 REAR COVER
1. Open the left cover [A].

2. Open the original tray [B].
3. Rear cover [C] ( x 1, hook x 6)
1.1.2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY
1. Open the left cover.

2. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
3. Front cover [A] ( x 1)
Keep the original tray open when you remove the front cover.
4. Original tray [B] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 1 D366
Document Feed Components
1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS
1.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

2. Original feed unit [A].
1.2.2 PICK-UP ROLLER

2. Original feed unit ( "Original Feed Unit")
3. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
D366 2 SM
ARDF DF3030
1.2.3 FEED BELT
D366
2. Original feed unit ( "Original Feed Unit")
3. Feed belt cover [A] (spring x 1)
When reassembling the feed belt cover, make sure that the projection [B] of
the feed belt cover is on the guide plate rear [C].
4. Belt tension unit [D]
SM 3 D366
5. Feed belt [E]

1.2.4 SEPARATION ROLLER

2. Separation roller cover [A].
3. Separation roller [B] ( x 1)
D366 4 SM
ARDF DF3030
D366
1.3.1 ARDF DRIVE BOARD AND DF POSITION SENSOR
1. Rear cover (see "Rear Cover")

2. ARDF drive board [A] ( x 3, all s)
3. DF position sensor with bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
4. DF position sensor [C] (hook x 2)
1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE
SENSOR
1. Original Tray (see "Front Cover and Original Tray")

2. Tray cover [A] ( x 3)
SM 5 D366
3. Original trailing edge sensor [B] ( x 1)

4. Original length sensors [C] ( x 1 each)
1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

2. Original feed unit (see the "Original Feed Unit")
3. Original Tray (see the "Original Tray")
4. Original feed-in guide plate [A] ( x 3).
5. Original set sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
6. Original set sensor [C]
1.3.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION
SENSOR
1. Original feed-in guide plate (see "Original Set Sensor")

2. Original turn guide plate [A] (hook x 1).
3. Original width sensors [B] ( x 1 each) and skew correction sensor [C] with bracket
D366 6 SM
ARDF DF3030
( x 1, x 1)
D366
1.3.5 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
1. Open the ARDF.

2. Remove the left edge of the platen sheet.
3. Release the hook [A].
4. Open the original exit guide plate [B]
5. Stamp solenoid [C] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Original exit sensor [D] ( x 1, hook x 1)
SM 7 D366
Original Feed Drive
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
1.4.1 FEED MOTOR

2. Feed motor with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1)
3. Feed motor [B] ( x 2)
1.4.2 PICK-UP SOLENOID

2. Harness guide [A] (all s)
D366 8 SM
Original Feed Drive
ARDF DF3030
D366
3. Pick-up solenoid [B] ( x 2, x 1)
1.4.3 INVERTER SOLENOID

2. Harness guide (see "Pick-up Solenoid")
3. Inverter solenoid [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1, gear x 1, gear cover x 1)
SM 9 D366
Original Feed Drive
1.4.4 FEED CLUTCH

3. Bracket [A] ( x 2, x 3, x 1, bushing x 1, spring x 1)
4. Slide the bracket.

5. Feed clutch [B] ( x 1)
D366 10 SM
Original Feed Drive
ARDF DF3030
1.4.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR
D366
3. Left cover sensor with bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Transport motor with bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1)
5. Transport motor [C] ( x 2)
SM 11 D366
Component Layout
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Separation Roller 10. Junction Gate

2. Paper Feed Belt 11. Exit Roller
3. Pick-up Roller 12. Original Exit Sensor
4. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 13. Transport Roller
5. Original Tray 14. Registration Roller
6. Original Length Sensor 1 15. Registration Sensor
7. Original Length Sensor 2 16. Skew Correction Roller
8. Original Length Sensor 3 17. Skew Correction Sensor
9. Inverter Roller
D366 12 SM
Component Layout
ARDF DF3030
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
D366
Sensors
1. Original Width Sensor

2. Skew Correction Sensor
3. Registration Sensor
4. Cover Sensor
5. Original Set Sensor
6. Exit Sensor
7. Original Sensor
8. Original Length Sensor
9. DF Position Sensor
SM 13 D366
Component Layout
Drive Components
1. Transport Motor
2. Feed Clutch
3. Pick-up Solenoid
4. Inverter Solenoid
5. Feed Motor
6. Main Board
Electrical Component Descriptions

Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and

M1 Feed 5
reverse table rollers.
M2 Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers 1
Sensors
S9 DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not. 9
Detects the leading edge of the original to

S5 Skew Correction 2
turn off the DF feed and transport motors.
Detects the original exposure timing, and

S8 Registration 3
checks for original misfeeds.
Detects whether the feed-in cover is opened

S10 Cover Sensor 4
or not.
D366 14 SM
Component Layout
ARDF DF3030
Original Width
D366
S1 Detects the original width - S. 1
Sensor - S
Original Width
S2 Detects the original width - M. 1
Sensor - M
Original Width
S3 Detects the original width - L. 1
Sensor - L
Original Width
S4 Detects the original width - LL. 1
Sensor - LL
Original Length -
S14 Detects the original length - S. 8
S
Original Length -
S13 Detects the original length - M. 8
M
Original Length -
S12 Detects the original length - L. 8
L
S7 Original Set Detects if an original is on the feed table. 5
Detects the leading edge of the original to

turn on the junction gate solenoid and checks
for original misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn
S6 Original Exit 6
off the transport and feed motor and junction
gate solenoid.
In single-sided mode, used to detect original
misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the last original to

stop copy paper feed and to turn off the
S11 Original 7
transport motor, and checks for original
misfeeds.
Solenoids
Controls the up-down movement of the

SOL1 Pick-up 3
original table.
SOL2 Stamp Energizes the stamper to mark the original.
SOL3 Junction Gate Opens and closes the junction gate. 4
Magnetic Clutches
Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and

MC1 Feed 5
skew correction rollers
SM 15 D366
Component Layout
PCBs
Interfaces the sensor signals with the copier,

PCB1 Main and transfers the magnetic clutch, solenoid 6
and motor drive signals from the copier.
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Feed Motor
2. Pick-up Roller
3. Separation Roller
4. Feed Belt
5. Skew Correction Roller
6. Feed Clutch
7. Transport Motor
8. Exit Roller
9. Registration Roller
Feed Motor: Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and skew correction rollers.
Transport Motor: Drives the registration and exit rollers.
D366 16 SM
Basic Operation
ARDF DF3030
2.2 BASIC OPERATION
D366
2.2.1 ORIGINAL SET AND SIZE DETECTION
The original set sensor [A] detects if the original is set or not. The original sensor [B]
detects if the original is on the original tray or not (this lets the machine know as early as
possible, whether there is another original on the tray).
The original size detection mechanism consists of the four original width sensors ([F]: Width
Sensor S, [G]: Width Sensor M, [H] Width Sensor L, [I]: Width Sensor LL) and three original
length sensors ([C]: Length Sensor S, [D]: Length Sensor M, [E]: Length Sensor L). Based
on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensors, the machine can
detect the size of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table
below.
Width Sensor Length Sensor Area
Size
S M L LL S M L LT A/B
A3/SEF (297 x 420) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O O
B4/SEF (257 x 364) ON ON - - ON ON ON - O
A4/SEF (210 x 297) ON - - - ON ON - O O
A4/LEF (297 x 210) ON ON ON ON - - - O O
B5/SEF (182 x 257) - - - - ON - - - O
B5/LEF (257 x 182) ON ON - - - - - - O
A5/SEF (148 x 210) - - - - - - - - O
A5/LEF (210 x 148) ON - - - - - - - O
11" x 17"/SEF (DLT) ON ON ON - ON ON ON O1 O5
SM 17 D366
Basic Operation
1
11" x 15"/SEF ON ON ON - ON ON ON -
10" x 14"/SEF ON ON - - ON ON ON O -
8.5" x 14"/SEF (LG) ON - - - ON ON ON O2 -

2
8.5" x 13"/SEF (F4) ON - - - ON ON ON O
8.25" x 13"/SEF ON ON ON ON - -
8" x 13"/SEF (F) ON - - - ON ON ON - -
8.5" x 11"/SEF (LT) ON - - - ON - - O3 O6
8.5" x 11"/LEF (LT) ON ON ON - - - - O4 O7
7.25" x 10.5"/SEF (US

ON - - - ON - - O -
EXE)
10.5" x 7.25"/SEF (US 4

ON ON ON - - - - -
EXE)
3
10" x 8"/SEF ON - - - ON - - -
5.5" x 8.5"/SEF (HLT) - - - - - - - O -
5.5" x 8.5"/LEF (HLT) ON - - - - - - O -

5
267 mm x 390 mm ON ON ON - ON ON ON -
6
195 mm x 267 mm ON - - - ON - - -
7
267 mm x 195 mm ON ON ON - - - - -
Symbol
O: Yes (Default), : Yes (Can select this with SP mode), ON: Paper present, LT: North
America, A/B: Europe, Asia
For "O/ " mark, which has superscripted number, it is possible to change the
original detection size with SP6-016. For example, instead of LT (O3), the machine
3
can be set up to detect 10” x 8” ( ).
The F size can be selected with SP5-126. The default is 8.5" x 13"
The machine cannot detect more than one size of original in the same job.
2.2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE
This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size mode.
Because this ARDF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original document
width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but the document
length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed is slightly slower.
D366 18 SM
Basic Operation
ARDF DF3030
Document length detection
D366
From when the skew correction sensor switches on until it switches off, the CPU counts the
transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the image
cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the original’s length has
been accurately detected. The length must be determined before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
The originals follow this path:

1. Length detection Scanning glass Inverter table
2. Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table (restores the original order)
3. Inverter table Scanning glass (image scanned) Exit tray
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the reduction/enlargement ratio has
been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the scanned images,
a large area of memory (the detected original width x 432 mm length) is prepared. Next,
only the portion of the image up to the detected original length is read from memory and
printed.
SM 19 D366
Basic Operation
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator and the original
set sensor is activated.
After pressing the start button, the feed clutch is activated and the original feed unit [A]
moves down. At the same time, the pick-up solenoid is activated and the original table lifts
until the original comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pick-up roller then feeds
the top sheet of paper.
After being fed from feed belt [C], the topmost sheet is separated from the stack by the
separation roller [D] and sent to the skew correction roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [C] and separation
roller [D].
D366 20 SM
Basic Operation
ARDF DF3030
2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION
D366
When an original is fed into the feeder, the feed motor [B] rotates forwards. At this time, the
feed belt turns but the skew correction roller [C] does not. Because of this, when the
leading edge of the paper gets to the skew correction roller, skew in the original is removed.
A short time after the leading edge of the original turns on the skew correction sensor [A],
the feed motor [B] turns off for 40 ms and rotates in reverse. At this time, the skew
correction roller [C] and the feed belt both turn, and original feed continues.
The original is fed by the skew correction roller after the feed clutch [D] has turned off.
SM 21 D366
Basic Operation
2.2.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

Single-Sided Originals
The feed motor feeds the separated original to the skew correction roller [A] at maximum
speed. After skew correction, the feed and transport motors feed the original through the
scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area contains the original exposure guide [B]
and DF exposure glass [C]). After scanning, the original is fed out by the transport roller [D]
and exit roller [E].
Double-Sided Originals
After skew correction, the feed and transport motors drive the skew correction roller [A],
registration roller [B], transport roller [C] and the exit roller [D]. The front side of the original
is then scanned.
When the original exit sensor detects the leading edge of the original, the junction gate
solenoid is activated and the junction gate [E] opens. The original is then transported
D366 22 SM
Basic Operation
ARDF DF3030
towards the inverter table.
D366
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor, the junction gate solenoid
switches off and the junction gate [E] is closed. When the original has been fed onto the
inverter table, the feed motor switches on in reverse. The original is then fed by the inverter
roller [F], and then by the skew correction roller [A] and registration roller [B] to the
scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).
The original is then sent to the inverter table again to be turned over. This is done so that
the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in the exit tray [G] in the correct
order.
Original Sensor
During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the skew correction roller in advance (while
the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The original sensor monitors
the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has
been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of
copy paper.
2.2.6 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION
Jam Mode Detection Timing
When turning on the machine, the skew correction sensor, registration

sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
When the cover is closed or DF is down, the skew correction sensor,

Initial
registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
When the cover is opened or DF is lifted up, the skew correction

sensor, registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
SM 23 D366
Basic Operation
The skew correction sensor does not turn off even if the original was
fed by the maximum length of the original + 150 mm after the skew
correction sensor turned on.
Sensor stays
The registration sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by
on too long
its length x 1.5 after the registration sensor turned on.
The exit sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by its
length x 1.5 after the exit sensor turned on.
The skew correction sensor does not turn on even if the original was
fed by transport path length x 1.5.
Sensor does The registration sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by
not come on transport path length x 1.5 after the skew correction sensor turned on.
The exit sensor does not turn on even the original was fed by transport
path length x 1.5 after the skew correction sensor turned on.
D366 24 SM
Dip Switches
ARDF DF3030
D366
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
DIP-SW
Function
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode (Default)
0 0 0 1 Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 100% speed
0 0 1 0 Free run: With original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed
0 0 1 1 Free run: No original: One-sided mode: 100% speed
0 1 0 0 Free run: No original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed
1 0 1 1 Transport Motor On
1 1 0 0 Feed Motor On
1 1 0 1 Transport Motor On with random mode
1 1 1 0 Feed Motor On with random mode
1 1 1 1
SM 25 D366
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070
D425
D425 ONE BIN TRAY BN3070 REVISION HISTORY

None
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 D425
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER ............................................................................... 1
1.1.1 COVERS .............................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 FEED ROLLER .................................................................................... 1
1.2 MOTORS AND CLUTCH .............................................................................. 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR ........................................................................ 2
1.2.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR......................................................................... 3
1.2.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ....................................................................... 4
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD ...................................................................................... 4
1.3 SENSORS AND BOARD .............................................................................. 5
1.3.1 PAPER END SENSOR ........................................................................ 5
1.3.2 PAPER SIZE SENSORS ..................................................................... 5
1.3.3 TRAY MAIN BOARD ............................................................................ 6
SM i D425
Covers and Roller
1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER
Unit PB3070
Paper Feed
1.1.1 COVERS
D425
1. Securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each)
2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Rear right cover [C] ( x 1)
1.1.2 FEED ROLLER

2. Release the lock lever [B]
3. Feed roller [C]
SM 1 D425
Motors and Clutch
1.2 MOTORS AND CLUTCH
1.2.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR

1. Rear Cover ( Rear Cover)
2. Release the harness [B] (= x 2).

3. Paper feed motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, = x 2, x 1))
Note:
Move the lever [B] in the red circle as shown above when removing the paper feed
motor with the bracket.
D425 2 SM
Motors and Clutch
Unit PB3070
Paper Feed
D425
4. Paper feed motor bracket [A] ( x 3)
5. Paper feed motor [B]
1.2.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Pull out the Tray.
2. Rear cover ( Rear Cover)
3. Rear right cover ( Rear Right Cover)
4. Stay [A] ( x 2)
5. Rear right bracket [A] ( x 1)

6. Tray end cover [B] ( x 1, = x 1)
SM 3 D425
Motors and Clutch
7. Transport motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
1.2.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1. Rear Cover ( Rear Cover)
2. Rear right bracket ( Transport Motor)
3. Paper feed clutch [A] (= x 1, x 1, x 1)
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD

2. Main board [A] (All s, x 4)
D425 4 SM
Sensors and Board
1.3 SENSORS AND BOARD
Unit PB3070
Paper Feed
D425

3. Paper end sensor [C] (hooks)
1.3.2 PAPER SIZE SENSORS
1. Pull out the tray.

2. Sensor bracket cover [A] ( x 1)
4. Paper size sensor (hooks)
SM 5 D425
Sensors and Board
1.3.3 TRAY MAIN BOARD

2. Main board [A] (All s, x 4)
D425 6 SM
1 BIN TRAY BN3060
D426
D426 ONE BIN TRAY BN3060 REVISION HISTORY

None
1 BIN TRAY BN3060 D426
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1.1 1-BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER SENSOR .......................... 1
When reinstalling these sensors.............................................................. 2
1.1.2 1-BIN TRAY CONTROL BOARD ......................................................... 2
1.1.3 LED BOARD ........................................................................................ 3
SM i D426
1.1.1 1-BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER SENSOR

1. 1-Bin tray unit
2. 1-bin tray bottom cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, = x 2, x 2)

1 Bin Tray
BN3060
D426
SM 1 D426
4. Sensors;
[A]: Paper sensor ( x 1)
[B]: 1-bin tray exit sensor (hooks)
When reinstalling these sensors

Both sensors have a 3-pin connector. Be careful to connect the correct harnesses from the
1-bin tray control board to each sensor.
The blue connector from the 1-bin tray control board must be connected to the paper
sensor.
The white connector from the 1-bin tray control board must be connected to the 1-bin
tray exit sensor.
1.1.2 1-BIN TRAY CONTROL BOARD

1. 1-bin tray unit
2. 1-bin tray bottom cover ( 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor and Paper Sensor)
3. 1-bin tray control board [A] ( x 1, x 3)
D426 2 SM
1.1.3 LED BOARD

1. 1-bin tray unit
2. 1-bin tray bottom cover ( 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor and Paper Sensor)
3. LED board ( x 1, x 1)
1 Bin Tray
BN3060
D426
SM 3 D426
SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550
D427
D427 SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 REVISION HISTORY

None
SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 D427
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1.1 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR ................................................................. 1
1.1.2 SIDE TRAY MOTOR ............................................................................ 1
1.1.3 SIDE TRAY GATE SOLENOID ............................................................ 2
1.1.4 SIDE TRAY BOARD ............................................................................ 3
SM i D427
1.1.1 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR

1. Side tray paper exit unit
2. Sensor assembly [A] ( x 2, = x 3, x 1)
3. Side tray exit sensor [A] (hooks)]
1.1.2 SIDE TRAY MOTOR

Type C2550
Side Tray
D427
SM 1 D427
2. Side tray upper cover [A] ( x 2, tab [B])
Release the tab [B] with a flat-head screwdriver.
3. Side tray motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
1.1.3 SIDE TRAY GATE SOLENOID

2. Side tray upper cover ( Side Tray Motor)
D427 2 SM
3. Side tray gate solenoid assembly [A] (= x 2, x 1, x 1)
4. Side tray gate solenoid [A] ( x 2, spring x 1)
1.1.4 SIDE TRAY BOARD

2. Side tray upper cover ( Side Tray Motor)
3. Side tray board [A] ( x 1, x all)
Type C2550
Side Tray
D427
SM 3 D427
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030
D428
D428 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 REVISION HISTORY

None
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030
D428
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 TRAY COVER ............................................................................................... 1
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD ................................... 2
SM i D428
Tray Cover
1.1 TRAY COVER
1. Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of the
cover.
– When Attaching the Tray Cover –
The right side of the tray cover should be attached first.

1. Fit the pawls [C] on the shift tray.
2. Align the square [D] so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray cover and
does not interfere with the attachment of the cover.
3. Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls [B] into place.
Internal Shift
Tray SH3030
D428
SM 1 D428
Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD
1. Top cover ( Tray Cover)

2. Slip disc [A]
3. Tray motor [B] ( x 1)
4. Half turn sensor board [C] ( x 1).
D428 2 SM
INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550
D429
D429 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 REVISION HISTORY

None
INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550
D429
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR, LEFT REAR AND REAR INNER COVER ................................ 1
1.1.2 FRONT COVER ................................................................................... 2
1.1.3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER COVER ........................................................ 2
When installing the output tray lower cover ............................................. 2
1.1.4 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT .......................................................................... 3
1.2 MOTORS ...................................................................................................... 5
1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR............................................... 5
1.2.2 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MOTOR ............................................... 5
1.3 STAPLER UNIT ............................................................................................ 7
1.4 SENSORS .................................................................................................... 9
1.4.1 MAIN UNIT........................................................................................... 9
Relay Sensor ........................................................................................... 9
Belt Roller Position Sensor ...................................................................... 9
Stapler Safety Sensor ........................................................................... 10
Stapler Unit HP Sensor ......................................................................... 10
1.4.2 INVERTER UNIT ............................................................................... 11
Entrance Sensor.................................................................................... 11
1.5 FAN ............................................................................................................. 12
1.5.1 FRONT FAN ...................................................................................... 12
1.6 MAIN BOARD ............................................................................................. 13
1.7 PUNCH UNIT .............................................................................................. 14
1.7.1 PUNCH SLIDER UNIT ....................................................................... 14
SM i D429
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
=: Clamp
Common Procedures
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES
The finisher must be removed from the machine for these procedures except
"Output Tray Lower Cover" removal procedure. The following covers cannot be
removed while the finisher is attached to the machine.
1.1.1 REAR, LEFT REAR AND REAR INNER COVER
D429 Internal
Type C2550
Finisher
2. Left rear cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Rear inner cover [C] ( x 1)
SM 1 D429
Common Procedures
1.1.2 FRONT COVER
1. Remove the knob [A]

2. Front cover [B] ( x 2)
1.1.3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER COVER
1. Output tray lower cover [A] ( x 3)
When installing the output tray lower cover
1. The two projections [A] of the output tray lower cover (this plate is actually attached to
D429 2 SM
Common Procedures
the output tray lower cover) must be inserted along with two guide rails [B] inside the
output tray unit.
2. Push the slide plate [A] to check if the output tray lower cover is correctly installed. The
left side picture shows the correct result and right side picture shows the incorrect
result.
D429 Internal
Type C2550
1.1.4 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT
Finisher
1. Output tray lower cover ( Output Tray Lower Cover)
2. Rear cover ( Rear, Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover)
3. Left rear cover ( Rear, Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover)
4. Rear inner cover ( Rear, Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover)
SM 3 D429
Common Procedures
6. Disconnect the harness [A] (CN10), and make some slack in the cable.
7. Output tray unit [A]
D429 4 SM
Motors
1.2 MOTORS
1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR

1. Front cover ( Front Cover)
2. Loosen the harness guide [A] ( x 2)
D429 Internal
Type C2550
Finisher
3. Bracket with pick-up roller contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4. Pick-up roller contact motor [B] ( x 2)
1.2.2 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MOTOR

SM 5 D429
Motors
2. Bracket with stapler unit movement motor [A] ( x 2, spring x 1, belt)
3. Two gears [A] ( x 1)
4. Stapler unit movement motor [A] ( x 2)
D429 6 SM
Stapler Unit
1.3 STAPLER UNIT
2. White lever [A] (spring x 1, hook)

3. Black lever [B] (hook)
D429 Internal
Type C2550
Finisher
4. Shaft [A] ( x 1)
Remove the green stapler cartridge first, to make this step more easy.
5. Move the stapler unit [A] to the center.

6. Stand the internal finisher [B] as shown above.
7. Remove two screws.
SM 7 D429
Stapler Unit
Note:
Make sure that the end fences [A] are placed as shown above when replacing the
stapler unit.
8. Move the stapler unit to the rear side, and then remove the stapler unit [A] ( x 2).
D429 8 SM
Sensors
1.4 SENSORS
1.4.1 MAIN UNIT

Relay Sensor
D429 Internal
Type C2550
Finisher
1. Relay sensor [A] (hook, x 1)
Belt Roller Position Sensor

3. Top bracket [A] ( x 6)
SM 9 D429
Sensors
4. Belt roller position sensor with the bracket [A] ( x 1)

5. Belt roller position sensor [B] (hook, x 1)
Stapler Safety Sensor

1. Stapler unit ( Stapler Unit)
2. Stapler safety sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
Stapler Unit HP Sensor

2. Bracket with stapler unit HP sensor ( x 1)

3. Stapler unit HP sensor [A] (hook, x 1)
D429 10 SM
Sensors
1.4.2 INVERTER UNIT

Entrance Sensor
1. Bracket with entrance sensor ( x 1)

2. Entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
D429 Internal
Type C2550
Finisher
SM 11 D429
Fan
1.5 FAN
1.5.1 FRONT FAN
1. Front fan [A] ( x 2, = x 1, x 1)
D429 12 SM
Main Board
1.6 MAIN BOARD

2. Left rear cover ( Rear, Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover)
3. Main board ( x 2, clip x 2, x all)
D429 Internal
Type C2550
Finisher
SM 13 D429
Punch Unit
1.7 PUNCH UNIT
The punch unit must be removed from the internal finisher for this procedure.
1.7.1 PUNCH SLIDER UNIT
1. Brackets [A] and ground plate [B] at the right side of the punch unit ( x 1 each)
2. Brackets [A] at the left side of the punch unit ( x 1 each)
3. Harness bracket [A] ( x 4)

4. Wire guide cover [B] ( x 1)
D429 14 SM
Punch Unit
5. Positioning pins [A] ( x 3, spring)
D429 Internal
Type C2550
Finisher
6. Punch slider unit [A] ( x all)
SM 15 D429
D555
FAX OPTION TYPE C2551
None
D555 (FAX OPTION TYPE C2551)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................... 1

1.1 FAX OPTION (D555) INSTALLATION ...........................................................1
1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK .........................................................................1
1.1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................2
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS .....................................................................................7
1.2.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578) ........................................................................7
1.2.2 HANDSET (B433) .................................................................................7
Handset with the internal finisher ...........................................................11
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 12

2.1 FCU .............................................................................................................12
3. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 13

3.1 ERROR CODES ..........................................................................................13
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................35
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................38
3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION ....................................................................38
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name .................................................38
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway .............................................................39
Cannot send by Alias Fax number. ........................................................40
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION ..........................................................................42
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name. ...........................................42
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway. .........................................................43
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number. ....................................................44
4. SERVICE TABLE .......................................................................... 46

4.1 BEFOREHAND ............................................................................................46
4.2 SERVICE TABLES ......................................................................................47
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) ................................................................47
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA) .......................................................................48
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS) .......................................................49
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) .............................................................50
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING)....................................................................50
SM i D555
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ........................................................................51
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS) ..............................................................................53
4.3 BIT SWITCHES ...........................................................................................54
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES .........................................................................54
4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES ...............................................................................68
4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ........................................................................75
4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES .........................................................84
4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES ...................................................................................93
4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES...........................................................................103
4.4 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................112
4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ........................................127
4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ......................................................127
4.5.2 PARAMETERS .................................................................................127
Fax Parameters ....................................................................................127
E-mail Parameters ...............................................................................132
4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ...................................................................136
5. SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 145

5.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................145
5.1.1 FCU ..................................................................................................145
5.1.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ................................147
5.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................148
5.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................150
5.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION....................................................................151
D555 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST
Safety and Symbols
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
replacement procedures in this manual.

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
: Clamp
Fax Option (D555) Installation
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
1.1 FAX OPTION (D555) INSTALLATION

1 FCU 1
Data Display Decal Sheet

2 1
(18 languages: all destinations except NA)
3 Serial Number Decal 1
4 Fax Keytop 1
5 Ferrite Core 1
6 Screw: M3x6 2
7 G3 Decal 1
8 Handset Bracket (NA only) 1
9 Telephone Cord (NA only) 1
10 Clamp*1 1
111 FCC Decal (NA only) 1
*1: Item No. 10 is used only when the internal finisher (D429) is installed with NA models. (See
"Handset Installation” in the Fax Field Service Manual.)
SM 1 D555
1.1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Before installation, print out all data in the printer buffer.

Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is off, turn the main switch off, and then disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet.
1. For NA models, attach the FCC decal near the serial number decal of the mainframe.
D555 2 SM
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
3. Remove the controller bracket [A] ( x 2).
4. Remove the TEL/LINE jack cover [B] ( x 1).
5. Press down the circle area [A] on the MBU so that the MBU is firmly connected to the FCU
board.
Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly. If not, SC672 occurs.
6. Remove the jumper [B] (set to "OFF") and set it to "ON".
The machine may issue SC819 or SC820 if the jumper is not set to "ON" correctly.
(Sometimes these SC codes are not issued.)
SM 3 D555
7. Install the FCU [A] inserting the tabs [B] of the fax unit in the two support rails [C].
8. Firmly connect the board to board connector [A] of the relay board to the board to board
connector [B] of the controller board.
9. Fasten the fax unit [A] to the controller box ( x 2; M3x6).

10. Reinstall the controller bracket ( x 2).
11. Reinstall the rear cover ( x 8).
D555 4 SM
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
12. Attach the ferrite core to the telephone cord. Do not attach the ferrite core to the telephone
cord if the handset is to be installed in the machine (See the "Installation Procedure of the
Handset (B433)".
A telephone cord with the ferrite core must be used for RF interference
suppression.
13. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE" jack.
14. Remove dummy keytop [A] and replace it with the Fax keytop [B].
15. Attach a proper data display decal [C] to the operation panel if no decal is attached.
SM 5 D555
16. Attach the Super G3 decal [A].

17. Attach the serial number decal to the left side of the controller box.
18. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch.
After you turn the machine on, if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has
been formatted due to a problem with SRAM, turn the machine off and on again to
clear the message.
19. Enter the "User Tools" mode and set date and time.
20. Do SP3102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit.
21. Enter the correct country code with SP1101-016 (System SW 0F, Country/area code for
functional settings).
22. Exit the SP mode, and turn the machine off and on.
D555 6 SM
Fax Unit Options
Type C2551
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Fax Option
D555
1.2.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578)
1. Remove the FCU from the machine.
2. Install the memory option [A] on the FCU.

3. Reinstall the FCU in the machine.
1.2.2 HANDSET (B433)
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
SM 7 D555
Fax Unit Options
2. Remove the scanner left cover [C] ( x 2).
3. Make two holes [D] in the scanner left cover.
4. Attach the handset support bracket [E] inside the scanner left cover.
5. Secure the handset bracket [F] ( x 2: M3x6 in the accesories of the FCU option).
D555 8 SM
Fax Unit Options
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
6. Reattach the scanner left cover to the machine.
7. Remove the label [G] from the handset cradle [H].
8. Attach the cradle to the handset bracket ( x 2: M3x8).
SM 9 D555
Fax Unit Options
9. Set the handset on the handset bracket.

10. Set the telephone cable [I] as shown above.
11. Put the ferrite core [J] on the handset cord as shown. The length [K] must be 60 mm.
A telephone cord with the ferrite core must be used for RF interference
suppression.
12. Connect the handset cable to the "TEL" jack at the rear of the machine.
D555 10 SM
Fax Unit Options
Handset with the internal finisher
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Do steps from 1 to 9 in the "Handset (B433)" installation procedure.
1. Attach the clamp [A] to the scanner left cover.

2. Set the telephone cable [B] as shown above.
3. Put the ferrite core [C] on the handset cord as shown. The length [D] must be 60 mm.
4. Connect the handset cable to the "TEL" jack at the rear of the machine.
SM 11 D555
FCU
2.1 FCU
1. When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and
install it on the new FCU board.
2. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools > System Settings > Timer
Setting > Set Date/Time.
Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).

Do SP6101 to print the system parameters, and check the settings.
D555 12 SM
Error Codes
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the
problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display
and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.

The machine at the other end may be
DIS/NSF not detected incompatible.
0-00 within 40 s of Start being Replace the FCU.
pressed Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad
line.
The other party is out of paper or has a

DCN received jammed printer.
0-01
unexpectedly The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
Incompatible modem at the

0-03 The other terminal is incompatible.
other end

Try changing the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending
CFR or FTT not received to another machine.
0-04
after modem training If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may
be a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program
SM 13 D555
Error Codes
Mode

Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
Modem training fails even equalizer.
0-05 G3 shifts down to 2400 Replace the FCU.
bps. Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.

equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other terminal did not
0-06 The other end may be defective or
reply to DCS
incompatible; try sending to another machine.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference

Replace the FCU.
The other end may have jammed or run out of
No post-message paper.
0-07 response from the other The other end user may have disconnected
end after a page was sent the call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
D555 14 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Replace the FCU.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
The other end sent RTN or equalizer settings.
PIN after receiving a page, The other end may have a defective
0-08
because there were too modem/FCU; try sending to another machine.
many errors Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program
Mode
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try

sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
Non-standard post
0-14 message response code
equalizer settings.
received
Replace the FCU.
Cross reference
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the

following functions, or the other terminal's memory
The other terminal is not
is full.
0-15 capable of specific
Confidential rx
functions.
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
SM 15 D555
Error Codes

Replace the FCU.
CFR or FTT not detected equalizer settings.
after modem training in The other end may have disconnected, or it
0-16
confidential or transfer may be defective; try calling another machine.
mode If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a
line problem.
Cross reference

Replace the FCU.
Check for line problems.
Facsimile data not Try calling another fax machine.
0-20 received within 6 s of Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the
retraining first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Check the connections between the FCU and

line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
EOL signal (end-of-line)
Replace the FCU.
from the other end not
0-21 The remote machine may be defective or may
received within 5 s of the
have disconnected.
previous EOL signal
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
D555 16 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Replace the FCU.
The signal from the other Defective remote terminal.
end was interrupted for Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-22 more than the acceptable Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier
modem carrier drop time drop time.
(default: 200 ms) Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1

Replace the FCU.
Defective remote terminal
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Too many errors during
0-23 Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting
reception
and/or rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1

The other terminal did not
equalizer settings.
0-30 reply to NSS(A) in AI short
The other terminal may not be compatible.
protocol mode
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
The other terminal sent a

Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained
0-32 Ask the other party to contact the
functions that the receiving
manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.
SM 17 D555
Error Codes
The data reception (not Check the line connection.

0-33 ECM) is not completed The other terminal may have a defective
within 10 minutes. modem/FCU.
Polarity changed during Check the line connection.

0-52
communication Retry communication.
FCU does not detect the FCU firmware or board defective.

0-55
SG3. SG3 firmware or board defective.
The stored message data

0-56 exceeds the capacity of the SG3 firmware or board defective.
mailbox in the SG3.
The other terminal did not have a compatible

The communication mode communication mode (e.g., the other terminal
specified in CM/JM was was a V.34 data modem and not a fax
0-70 not available modem.)
(V.8 calling and called A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal) terminal when polling rx was initiated from the
calling terminal.
The calling terminal could not detect ANSam

The calling terminal fell
due to noise, etc.
back to T.30 mode,
0-74 ANSam was too short to detect.
because it could not detect
Check the line connection and condition.
ANSam after sending CI.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The called terminal fell

back to T.30 mode, The terminal could not detect ANSam.
0-75 because it could not detect Check the line connection and condition.
a CM in response to Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
ANSam (ANSam timeout).
D555 18 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
The calling terminal fell
The called terminal could not detect a CM due
back to T.30 mode,
to noise, etc.
0-76 because it could not detect
a JM in response to CM
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
The calling terminal could not detect a JM due

The called terminal fell
to noise, etc.
back to T.30 mode,
A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
0-77 because it could not detect
pass JM to the other end.
a CJ in response to JM
(JM timeout).
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
The called terminal Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-79 detected CI while waiting If this error occurs, the called terminal falls
for a V.21 signal. back to T.30 mode.
The line was disconnected

0-80 due to a timeout in V.34 The guard timer expired while starting these
phase 2 – line probing. phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or

low signal level can cause these errors.
The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 Try making a call at a later time.
0-81
phase 3 – equalizer Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
training. dedicated tx parameters.
The line was disconnected Try increasing the tx level.
due to a timeout in the V.34 Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
0-82
phase 4 – control channel If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
start-up. Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
Try increasing the tx level.
The line was disconnected Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
due to a timeout in the V.34 error is frequent when receiving from multiple
0-83
control channel restart senders.
sequence.
SM 19 D555
Error Codes

The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling
0-84 Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
in V.34 phase 4 – control
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.

The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling
in V.34 control channel
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
restart.

because the other terminal
The other terminal was incompatible.
requested a data rate
0-86 Ask the other party to contact the
using MPh that was not
manufacturer.
available in the currently
selected symbol rate.
The receiving terminal restarted the control

The control channel started channel because data reception in the primary
0-87 after an unsuccessful channel was not successful.
primary channel. This does not result in an error
communication.

because PPR was
Try using a lower data rate at the start.
0-88 transmitted/received 9
Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
Only one V.21 connection

2-11 Replace the FCU.
flag was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

2-13 Modem initialization error Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
D555 20 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
2-24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
JBIG data reconstruction

2-25
error (BIH error)

2-26 JBIG data error
error (Float marker error)
Check the sender's JBIG function.
JBIG data reconstruction Update the MBU ROM.
2-27
error (End marker error)

2-28
error (Timeout)
JBIG trailing edge maker FCU defective

2-29
error Check the destination device.
The machine resets itself

If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
2-50 for a fatal FCU system
the FCU.
error
The machine resets itself

If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
2-51 because of a fatal
the FCU.
communication error
Snd msg() in the manual

task is an error because The user did the same operation many times,
2-53
the mailbox for the and this gave too much load to the machine.
operation task is full.
Check the line connector.

4-01 Line current was cut Check for line problems.
Replace the FCU.
SM 21 D555
Error Codes
Communication failed
because of an ID Code
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
mismatch (Closed
programmed correctly, then resend.
4-10 Network) or Tel. No./CSI
The machine at the other end may be
mismatch (Protection
defective.
against Wrong
Connections)
5-10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU.
Storage impossible
5-20 because of a lack of Temporary memory shortage.
memory Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow
Print data error when

Test the SAF memory.
5-23 printing a substitute rx or
Ask the other end to resend the message.
confidential rx message
Replace an SD card or HDD.

5-25 SAF file access error
Replace the FCU.
G3 ECM - T1 time out

6-00 during reception of
facsimile data
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
G3 ECM - EOR was

6-02
received

G3 ECM - RTC not Check for a bad line or defective remote
6-04
detected terminal.
Replace the FCU.
D555 22 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Check for a bad line or defective remote
G3 ECM - facsimile data
terminal.
frame not received within
18 s of CFR, but there was
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
no line fail
Cross reference
G3 ECM - coding/decoding Defective FCU.

6-06
error The other terminal may be defective.
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN The other end pressed Stop during

6-08 received in reply to communication.
PPS.NULL The other terminal may be defective.
Check for a noisy line.

Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received
machines.
See code 6-05.
Check for line noise.

G3 ECM - error frames still
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or
received at the other end
6-10 the dedicated tx parameter for that address).
after all communication
attempts at 2400 bps
Defective remote terminal.
V.21 flag detected during

The other terminal may be defective or
6-21 high speed modem
incompatible.
communication
The machine resets the Check for line noise.

sequence because of an If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
6-22
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel Defective remote terminal.
V.21 signal not stopped

within 6 s
SM 23 D555
Error Codes
Double registration of the SIP user name.

SIP user name registration
13-17 Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
error
server is not sufficient.
Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.

13-18 SIP server access error
Defective SIP server.
Registered password in the device does not

13-24 SIP authentication error
match the password in the SIP server.
IPV4 is not active in the active protocol setting.

13-25 Network I/F setting error
IP address of the device is not registered.
Active protocol setting does not match the I/F

Network I/F setting error at
13-26 setting for SIP server.
power on
IP address of the device is not registered.
13-27 IP address setting error IP address of the device is not registered.
Error occurred during sending to the SMTP

server. Occurs for any error other than 14-01
14-00 SMTP Send Error
to 16. For example, the mail address of the
system administrator is not registered.
Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)

because the server could not be found.
The PC is not ready to transfer files.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed SMTP server not functioning correctly.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Destination folder selection not correct.
D555 24 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the
destination for direct SMTP sending is not
correct.
Contact the system administrator and check
No Service by SMTP
14-02 that the SMTP server has the correct settings
Service (421)
and operates correctly.
Contact the system administrator for direct
SMTP sending and check the sending
destination.
Failed to access the SMTP server because the

access is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact
the system administrator to determine if there
is a problem with the SMTP server and to
check that the SMTP server settings are
correct.
Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact
Access to SMTP Server
14-03 the system administrator to determine that the
Denied (450)
SMTP server settings and path to the server
are correct.
Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the
user name and password settings are correct.
Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem at the destination at that the settings
at the destination are correct.
Access to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly

14-04
Denied (550) Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly
SM 25 D555
Error Codes

HDD on the server is full.
Insufficient free space on the HDD of the
SMTP server. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the SMTP server HDD.
Insufficient free space on the HDD where the
SMTP Server HDD Full destination folder is located. Contact the
14-05
(452) system administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the HDD where the target
folder is located.
Insufficient free space on the HDD at the
target destination for SMTP direct sending.
Contact the system administrator and check
the amount of space remaining on the target
HDD.
The designated user does not exist.

The designated user does not exist on the
User Not Found on SMTP
14-06 SMTP server.
Server (551)
The designated address is not for use with
direct SMTP sending.

transmission failed.
PC not operating correctly.
Data Send to SMTP Server
14-07 SMTP server operating incorrectly
Failed (4XX)
Destination folder setting incorrect.
Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
D555 26 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
transmission failed.
Data Send to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly
14-08
Failed (5XX) Destination folder setting incorrect.
Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
Software application error.
POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization

Authorization Failed for
14-09 failed.
Sending to SMTP Server
Incorrect setting for file transfer
Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the

14-10 Addresses Exceeded
limit for the SMTP server.
The send buffer is full so the transmission

could not be completed. Buffer is full due to
14-11 Buffer Full
using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being
used send mail at the same time.
Transmission was cancelled because the

14-12 Data Size Too Large
detected size of the file was too large.
Processing is interrupted because the user

14-13 Send Cancelled
pressed Stop.
Update the software because of the defective

14-14 Security Locked File Error
software.
The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS

due to the incorrect data.
14-15 Mail Data Error
software.
SM 27 D555
Error Codes
When a mail is divided for the mail

transmission and the division number of a mail
Maximum Division Number are more than the specified number, the mail
14-16
Error transmission is interrupted.
software.

14-17 Incorrect Ticket
software.
The access to MCS file is denied due to the no

permission of access.
14-18 Access to MCS File Error
software.
Failed to create the MCS file because:

The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed
exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
UFS file could not be created:

Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
Cancelled the Mail Due to Error detected with NFAX and send was
14-32
Error Detected by NFAX cancelled due to a software error.
Neither the mail address of the machine nor

No Mail Address For the
14-33 the mail address of the network administrator
Machine
is registered.
D555 28 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Operational error in normal mail sending or
Address designated in the direct SMTP sending.
14-34 domain for SMTP sending Check the address selected in the address
does not exist book for SMTP sending.
Check the domain selection.
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was

cancelled:
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Address book was being edited during
creation of the notification mail.
Software error.
Not even one return notification can be

downloaded:
UCS Destination The address book was being edited.
14-51
Download Error The number for the specified destination does
not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job
was created).
The cancel operation by the user failed to

14-60 Send Cancel Failed
cancel the send operation.
Notification Mail Send

14-61 All addresses for return notification mail failed.
Failed for All Destinations
Transmission Error due to When the 0 line page exists in received pages
14-62 the existence of zero line with G3 communication, the transmission is
page interrupted.
At startup, the system detected that the IP

POP3/IMAP4 Server Not
15-01 address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not
Registered
been registered in the machine.
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
15-02
Information Not Registered registered.
Mail Address Not

15-03 The mail address has not been registered.
Registered
SM 29 D555
Error Codes
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be

found:
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4
15-11 Connection Error
server is not stored in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
15-12 Authorization Error Access was attempted by another device,
such as the PC.
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
Occurs only during manual reception.

Transmission cannot be received due to
15-13 Receive Buffer Full
insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being
used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
The mail header is not standard format. For

15-14 Mail Header Format Error
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
The e-mail is not in standard format. There is

15-15 Mail Divide Error no boundary between parts of the e-mail,
including the header.
The mail cannot be received because it is too

15-16 Mail Size Receive Error
large.
May occur during manual receiving only

15-17 Receive Timeout
because the network is not operating correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.
Final Destination for

The format of the final destination for the
15-31 Transfer Request
transfer request was incorrect.
Reception Format Error
D555 30 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
destination:
Send/Delivery Destination
15-39 Destination file format is incorrect.
Error
Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
Reception rejected because the transaction

15-41 SMTP Receive Error exceeded the limit for the "Auth. E-mail RX"
setting.
The delivery destination address was

15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error
specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
Format error in the address of the Off Ramp

15-43 Address Format Error
Gateway.
The number of addresses for the Off Ramp

15-44 Addresses Over
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
Attachment File Format

15-61 The attached file is not TIFF format.
Error
Could not receive transmission due to:

Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi
without extended memory.
TIFF File Compatibility Resolution is not supported.
15-62
Error Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH, MR,
or MMR.
SM 31 D555
Error Codes
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be

received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error
supported.
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
The file received as an attachment caused the

TIFF decompression error:
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The TIFF format of the attachment is
corrupted.
Software error.
The file could not be received because the

15-71 Not Binary Image Data
attachment was not binary image data.
Could not find the Disposition line in the

15-73 MDN Status Error header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.
Could not find the Original Message ID line in

15-74 MDN Message ID Error the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.
Could not receive the transmission because

the destination buffer is full and the destination
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error could not be created (this error may occur
when receiving a transfer request or a request
for notification of reception).
Could not repeat receive the transmission

because the destination buffer is full and the
Repeated Destination
15-81 destination could not be created (this error
Registration Error
may occur when receiving a transfer request
or a request for notification of reception).
D555 32 SM
Error Codes
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
The format of the final destination or the
15-91 Send Registration Error
transfer destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
Transmission could not be received because

15-92 Memory Overflow
memory overflowed during the transaction.
Transaction could not complete due to a

15-93 Memory Access Error
malfunction of SAF memory.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for

transfer request, because the ID code in the
15-94 Incorrect ID Code
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for

15-95 Transfer Station Function transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
Divide the original into more than one page.

Original length exceeded Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
22-00
the maximum scan length the scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.

Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an
Memory overflow while
22-01 another fax machine, if the machine's printer is
receiving
busy or out of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard
disk.
SM 33 D555
Error Codes
The job started normally but did not finish

Tx or rx job stalled due to
normally; data may or may not have been
22-02 line disconnection at the
received fully.
other end
Restart the machine.
The machine cannot store Update the ROM

22-04
received data in the SAF Replace the FCU.
No G3 parameter
22-05 Defective FCU board or firmware.
confirmation answer
Data read timeout during Restart the machine.

23-00
construction Replace the FCU.
The machine software

resets itself after a fatal Update the ROM
25-00
transmission error Replace the FCU.
occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.
Update the SG3 modem ROM.

Replace the SG3 board.
F6-xx SG3 modem error
Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
D555 34 SM
IFAX Troubleshooting
Type C2551
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Option
D555
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network
is causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route
Check that the LAN cable is connected to

1. Connection with
the machine.
the LAN
General LAN Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
Check that other devices connected to the

2. LAN activity
LAN can communicate through the LAN.
Check the network settings on the PC.

[Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP
1. Network settings
properties in the network setup correct?
on the PC
Check the IP address with the administrator
of the network.]
Use the "ping" command on the PC to

2. Check that PC
contact the machine.
Between IFAX and can connect with
[At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP
PC the machine
address of the machine, then press Enter.]
Check the LAN parameters

Check if there is an IP address conflict
3. LAN settings in with other PCs.
the machine [Use the "Network" function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
Check the LAN parameters

Check if there is an IP address conflict
Between machine 1. LAN settings in with other PCs.
and e-mail server the machine [Use the "Network" function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
SM 35 D555
Communication
Route
Make sure that the machine can log into

the e-mail server.
2. E-mail account Check that the account and password
on the server stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
Make sure that the client devices which

have an account in the server can
send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
3. E-mail server
Send a test e-mail with the machine's own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]
Make sure that the PC can log into the

e-mail server.
1. E-mail account Check that the account and password
on the Server stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
Make sure that the client devices which

have an account in the server can
Between e-mail send/receive e-mail.
server and internet [Ask the administrator to check.
2. E-mail server
Send a test e-mail with the machine's own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]
Make sure that the e-mail address is

3. Destination actually used.
e-mail address Check that the e-mail address contains
no incorrect characters such as spaces.
D555 36 SM
Communication
Type C2551
Fax Option
Route
D555
Use the "ping" command to contact the
router.
4. Router settings Check that other devices connected to
the router can sent data over the router.
[Ask the administrator of the server to check.]
Check whether e-mail can be sent to

5. Error message by
another address on the same network,
e-mail from the
using the application e-mail software.
network of the
Check the error e-mail message.
destination.
[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]
SM 37 D555
IP-Fax Troubleshooting
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point Action
1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.
2 Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name.
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by

3 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)
4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.
5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.
Remote terminal port number setting other

6 Send by specifying the port number.
than 1720?
Confirm the port number of the remote

7 Specified port number correct?
fax.
DNS server registered when host name

8 Contact the network administrator.
specified?
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
Check that the remote fax is switched

10 Remote fax switched off or busy?
on.
Request the network administrator to

increase the bandwidth.
11 Network bandwidth too narrow? Raise the delay level.

IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the
D555 38 SM
DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
Type C2551
Fax Option
1.
D555
Check whether the remote fax
12 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
cancelled the transmission.
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway
Check Point Action
2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
Is the IP address/host name of the

5 Check the IP address/host name.
specified Gateway correct?
6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.

7 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)
9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
DNS registered when host name

specified?
11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.
13 Remote G3 fax turned on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
SM 39 D555

Raise the network delay level.

14 Network bandwidth too narrow? IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.
Check Point Action
Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.

2 Number of specified Alias fax correct?
Error Code: 13-14

3 Firewall/NAT installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)
5 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
6 Gatekeeper power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper

7 Check the IP address/host name.
correct?
DNS server registered when Gatekeeper

host name specified?
Check the settings.

9 Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.
D555 40 SM
Register the Alias number of the local
Type C2551
Fax Option
11 Alias number of local fax registered?
fax.
D555
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.
Request the system administrator to

Raise the delay level.

15 Network bandwidth too narrow? IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
Lower the modem transmission baud

rate.
IPFAX SW 05
Check whether the remote fax

cancelled the transmission.
SM 41 D555
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name.
Check Point Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using

2 Firewall/NAT is installed?
another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port
4
fax (if required)? number.
Specified port number correct (if Request the sender to check the port
5
required)? number.
Contact the network administrator.

6 The sender machine displays this
specified on sender side?
error code if the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.

7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud
rate on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.
D555 42 SM
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Check Point Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Request the

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
5
Gateway correct on sender's side? address/host name.

specified on sender side?

7 Network bandwidth too narrow?
8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.
9 G3 fax power switched on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
SM 43 D555
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.
Check Point Action
Cannot the breach firewall. Request the

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 Gatekeeper installed correctly? The sender machine displays this

error code when the sender fax is
a Ricoh model.
4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on? The sender machine displays this

a Ricoh model.
Request the sender to check the IP

address/host name.
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper
5
correct on the sender's side? The sender machine displays this
a Ricoh model.

DNS server registered when
6 Gatekeeper host name specified on The sender machine displays this
sender's side? error code when the sender fax is
a Ricoh model.
D555 44 SM
Type C2551
Fax Option
Request the sender to check the settings.
D555
User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
7 Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
Only if the remote sender fax is a
Ricoh fax.
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.
9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.

10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate
on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.
12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper? The sender machine displays this

a Ricoh model.
SM 45 D555
Beforehand
4. SERVICE TABLE
4.1 BEFOREHAND
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the
power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while
the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the
machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
D555 46 SM
Service Tables
Type C2551
4.2 SERVICE TABLES
Fax Option
D555
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)
Bit Switches
1 Mode No. Function
System Switch
101 Change the bit switches for system settings for the
001 – 032 00 – 1F fax option.
"Bit Switches"
Ifax Switch
102 Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for
001 – 016 00 – 0F the fax option.
"Bit Switches"
Printer Switch
103 Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax
001 – 016 00 – 0F option.
"Bit Switches"
Communication Switch
104 Change the bit switches for communication settings

001 – 032 00 – 1F for the fax option.
"Bit Switches"
G3-1 Switch
105 Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of

001 – 016 00 – 0F the standard G3 board.
"Bit Switches"
SM 47 D555
Service Tables
IP fax Switch
111 Change the bit switches for optional IP fax

001 – 016 00 – 0F parameters.
"Bit Switches"
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA)
2 Mode No. Function
RAM Read/Write
101 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.

001
"Service RAM Addresses"
Memory Dump
102 G3-1 Memory Print out RAM data for the fax board.
001
Dump "Service RAM Addresses"
G3-1 NCU Parameters
103 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
board. "NCU Parameters"
D555 48 SM
Service Tables
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS)
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
3 Mode No. Function
Service Station
101
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
Serial Number
102
000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.
PSTN-1 Port Settings
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If

001 Select Line the machine is installed on a PABX line, select
"PABX", "PABX(GND)" or "PABX(FLASH)".
103
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the
002
Number G3-1 line.
Memory Lock
003 Not used
Disabled
IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port Sets the H323 port number.
002 SIP Port Sets the SIP port number.
003 RAS Port Sets the RAS port number.
107 004 Gatekeeper port Sets the Gatekeeper port number.
005 T.38 Port Sets the T.38 port number.
006 SIP Server Port Sets the SIP port number.
IPFAX Protocol
007 Select "H323" or "SIP".
Priority
FAX SW
201
001 – 032 00 – 1F
SM 49 D555
Service Tables
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)
4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING)
5 Mode No. Function
Initialize SRAM (except Secure)
101 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in
000
the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.
Erase All Files

102
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Reset Bit Switches (except Secure)

103
000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
Factory setting
104 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the
000
SRAM and files in the SAF memory.
Initialize All Bit Switches

105
000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings.
D555 50 SM
Service Tables
Type C2551
Fax Option
Initialize Security Bit Switches
D555
106 Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select
000 automatic output/display for the user parameter switches, the
security settings are initialized.
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)
6 Mode No. Function
System Parameter List
101 Touch the "ON" button to print the system

000 -
parameter list.
Service Monitor Report
102 Touch the "ON" button to print the service

000 -
monitor report.
G3 Protocol Dump List
G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all

001
Communications communications for all G3 lines.
103 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all

002
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last

003
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
All Files print out
Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory,

including confidential messages.
105
000 -
Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
SM 51 D555
Service Tables
files stored using the memory lock

feature.
Journal Print out
The machine prints all the communication

001 All Journals
106 records on the report.
The machine prints all communication records

002 Specified Date
after the specified date.
Log List Print out
001 All log files
002 Printer
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
107 These log print out functions are for designer
007 Reconstruction
use only.
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
IP Protocol Dump List
Prints the protocol dump list of all

001 All Communications
108 communications for the IP fax line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last

002 1 Communication
communication for the IP fax line.
D555 52 SM
Service Tables
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
SM 53 D555
Bit Switches
4.3 BIT SWITCHES
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by
local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System
Parameter List printed by the machine.
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES
System Switch 00 [SP No. 1-101-001]
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated

Dedicated transmission
transmission parameters.
0 parameter programming
This setting is automatically reset to "0" after
turning off and on.
1 Not used Do not change
Technical data printout on the

1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
Journal
2 are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled
communication.
1: Enabled
e.g. 0000 (1) // 32 (2) V34 (3) // 288 (4) // 264 (5) // L0100 (6) 03 (7) 04 (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
D555 54 SM
Bit Switches
EQM and rx level are fixed at "FFFF" in tx mode.
Type C2551
Fax Option
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at "00" for transmission records
D555
and ECM reception records.
Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 // 32 V34 // 288/264 // L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N
by -16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3 Not used Do not change this setting.
When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed

Line error mark print on the printout if a line error occurs during
4
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) reception.
This shows an error position in ECM off mode.
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key

G3 communication parameter
parameters (see "G3 Communication Parameters"
display
5 below this table). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled
because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
This is only used for communication

troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
Protocol dump list output after
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
each communication
6 reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
0: Off
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at "1", the list is only
1: On
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM 55 D555
Bit Switches
0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.
Force after transmission stall With this setting on, the machine resets itself
2 0: Off automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to
1: On complete the job.
3 Not used Do not change these settings.
File retention time

0: Depends on User 1: A file that had a communication error will not be
4
Parameter 24 [18(H)] erased unless the communication is successful.
1: No limit (until the year 2126)
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.

Memory read/write by RDS
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0
out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to
Always disabled
allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1
automatically be locked out again after a certain
6-7 User selectable
time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0
that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not
User selectable
switch off until this time limit has expired.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
Always enabled
machine.
D555 56 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).

temporarily switched on when This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
0-7
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch Switch 02 are set to "User selectable".
02 are set to "User selectable" The default setting is 24 hours.
Printing dedicated tx
parameters on Quick/Speed
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
3 Dial Lists
printed with the dedicated tx parameters.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Addition of image data from

If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on
0 page of confidential messages will be printed on
the transmission result report
transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
SM 57 D555
Bit Switches
Print timing of communication

reports on the Journal when
no image data was
0: Journal is printed only when image data is sent.
1 exchanged.
1: Journal is printed when any data is sent.
0: After DCS/NSS
communication (default),
1: After polling
0: Error reports will not be printed.

Automatic error report printout
2 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
Printing of the error code on 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
3 the error report This can be used for detecting an error which
0: No 1: Yes rarely occurs.
1: A power failure report will be automatically

printed after the power is switched on if a fax
message disappeared from the memory when the
Power failure report
5 power was turned off last.
NOTE: If "0" is selected, no reports are printed
and no one may recognize that fax data is gone
due to a power failure.
This switch becomes effective only when system

Conditions for printing the
switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
protocol dump list
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
6 0: Print for all communications
dump list only for communications with errors.
1: Print only when there is a
NOTE: The memory size is limited. Use this bit
communication error
switch only when some log reports are necessary.
Priority given to various types

of remote terminal ID when This bit determines which set of priorities the
printing reports machine uses when listing remote terminal names
7 0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel. on reports.
Number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
1: Dial label > Tel. number > Quick/Speed Dial number.
RTI > CSI
D555 58 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
System Switch 0A [SP No. 1-101-011]
D555
When "1" is selected, a suitable port is

automatically selected if the selected port is not
Automatic port selection
0 used.
NOTE: This bit is useful if all communication lines
at a customer site are not same quality.
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the

external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting
Dialing on the ten-key pad
when the external telephone is not by the
when the external telephone is
4 machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected
off-hook
as an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
On hook dial
5 0: On hook dial is disabled.
6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E [SP No. 1-101-015]
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
Enable/disable for direct Direct sending cannot operate when the capture
2 sending selection function is on during sending. Setting this switch to
0: Direct sending off "1" enables direct sending without capture.
SM 59 D555
Bit Switches
1: Direct sending on Setting this switch to "0" masks the direct sending
function on the operation panel so direct sending
with ScanRouter cannot be selected.
0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external

Action when the external handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
handset goes off-hook possible.
0: Manual tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when
3
1: Memory tx and rx operation the external handset is used, so that other people
(the display remains the can use the machine for memory tx operation.
same) Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with
this setting.
System Switch 0F [SP No. 1-101-016]
Country/area code for functional

settings (Hex)
This country/area code determines the
00: France 11: USA
factory settings of bit switches and RAM
01: Germany 12: Asia addresses. However, it has no effect on the
NCU parameter settings and
02: UK 12: Asia
communication parameter RAM addresses.
0-7
03: Italy 13: Japan Cross reference
NCU country code:
04: Austria 14: Hong Kong
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
05: Belgium 15: South Africa SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
06: Denmark 16: Australia
07: Finland 17: New Zealand
08: Ireland 18: Singapore
09: Norway 19: Malaysia
0A: 1A: China
D555 60 SM
Bit Switches
Sweden
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
0B:
1B: Formosa
Switzerland
0C:
1C: Korea
Portugal
0D:
20: Turkey
Netherland
0E: Spain 21: Greece
0F: Israel 22: Hungary
10: --- 23: Czech
11: USA 24: Poland
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB

Threshold memory level for
0-7 N can be between 00 - FF(H)
parallel memory transmission
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
SM 61 D555
Bit Switches
TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints

0: Superimposed on the page information that the customer considers to be
0 data important (G3 transmissions).
1: Printed before the data NOTE: If "1" is selected, it is possible that sent
leading edge data is printed on two sheets of paper.
1 Not used Japan Only
2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
TTI printing type

3 0: Address unit TTI printing unit can be selected.
1: File unit
4-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
7 Not used Japan Only
D555 62 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
TTI printing position in the the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
0-7
main scan direction moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On
an A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than
50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver

mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
Going into the Energy Saver active even in the Energy Saver mode.
mode automatically The LED of the operation switch is flashing instead
1
0: Enabled of entering Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled Use this setting if an external telephone has to be
used when the machine is in the Energy Saver
mode.
Interval for preventing the If there is a file waiting for transmission, the
machine from entering Energy machine does not go to Energy Saver mode
4-5 Saver mode if there is a during the selected period.
pending transmission file. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 for transmission, the machine goes to the Energy
SM 63 D555
Bit Switches
1 min Saver mode.

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1
30 min1
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0
1 hour
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1
24 hours
6-7 Not used Do not change
1: The machine sends messages simultaneously

Parallel Broadcasting using all available ports during broadcasting.
0 0: Disabled NOTE: If a customer wants to keep a line available
1: Enabled for fax reception or other reasons, select "0"
(Disable).
Priority setting for the G3 line. This function allows the user to select the default
1 0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3 G3 line type. The optional SG3 units are required
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1 to use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.
D555 64 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a

Special Original mode form or letterhead which has a colored or printed
7 0: Disabled background, change this bit to "1". "Original 1" and
1: Enabled "Original 2" can be selected in addition to the "Text",
"Text/Photo" and "Photo" modes.
System Switch 1A [SP No. 1-101-027]
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
Sets a value of 4K.

If the amount of memory remaining falls below 4K,
documents received in memory are printed to
LS RX memory remaining create more space in memory.
0-7
refresh value setting Initial value: 0x80 (512K)
00-FF (0-1020 KB: Hex)
NOTE: If a customer wants available memory size
larger, decrease this threshold.
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D [SP No. 1-101-030]
RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top
0 0: ON line of the LCD panel during communication.
1: OFF 1: Codes are switched off (no display)
SM 65 D555
Bit Switches
System Switch 1E [SP No. 1-101-031]
0: When this switch is on and the journal history

becomes full, the next report prints. If the journal
history is not deleted, the next transmission cannot
be received. This prevents overwriting
Communication after the communication records before the machine can
Journal data storage area has print them.
0 become full 1: If the buffer memory of the communication
0: Impossible records for the Journal is full, fax communications
1: Possible are still possible. But the machine will overwrite
the oldest communication records.
Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic
Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot
print the report (e.g., no paper).
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during

scanning at the memory transmission, the
Action when the SAF memory
successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
has become full during
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during
1 scanning
scanning at the memory transmission, the file is
0: The current page is erased.
erased and no pages are transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is

RTI/CSI display priority
2 displayed on the LCD while the machine is
0: RTI 1: CSI
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.

File No. printing
NOTE: The file numbers may not be printed in the
3 0: Enabled
sequential order. If a customer does not like this
1: Disabled
numbering, select "0".
Action when authorized If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
reception is enabled but stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
4
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not machine will not be able to receive any fax
yet programmed messages.
D555 66 SM
Bit Switches
0: All fax reception is disabled If the customer wishes to receive messages from
Type C2551
Fax Option
1: Faxes can be received if the any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to
D555
sender has an RTI or CSI block messages from senders that do not include
an RTI or CSI, change this bit to "1", then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at "0 (default setting)".
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings
System Switch 1F [SP No. 1-101-032]
Report printout after an 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory

original jam during SAF overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
storage or if the SAF memory Change this bit to "1" if the customer does not
1
fills up want to have a report in these cases.
0: Enabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
1: Disabled Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after
(G3 reception) the machine receives it.
3
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after
1: After receiving all pages the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other

than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit
Action when a fax SC has
automatically resets itself.
occurred
7 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
0: Automatic reset
fax unit stops.
1: Fax unit stops
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See "Troubleshooting"
SM 67 D555
Bit Switches
4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-102-001]
FUNCTION COMMENTS
No This setting sets the maximum size of the original

Original Width of TX
that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
Attachment File
reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4
0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)
1 B4
If more than one of these three bits is set to "1",
2 A3 the larger size has priority. For example, if both Bit
2 and Bit 1 are set to "1" then the maximum size is
3-6 Reserved
"A3" (Bit 2).
7 Not used
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width
selected with this switch is used as the RX machine's original width setting, and the
original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can
accept, the machine detects this and this causes an error.
FUNCTION COMMENTS
No Original Line Resolution of TX These settings set the maximum resolution of the
Attachment File original that the destination can receive.
0 200x100 Standard
0: Not selected
1 200x200 Detail 1: Selected

If more than one of these three bits is set to "1",
2 200x400 Fine the higher resolution has priority. For example, if
3 300 x 300 Reserve both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to "1" then the
D555 68 SM
Bit Switches
4 400 x 400 Super Fine resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
5 600 x 600 Reserve
6 Reserve
mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to "1"), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to
determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch
selection is determined by the sender fax.
7 When this switch is Off (0):

Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
0 1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the "From" address and
"Subject" address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
SM 69 D555
Bit Switches
Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs.
1 This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended
destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms
the transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: "Dispatched"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "dispatched" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The "dispatched" string is included in the Subject string.
01: "Displayed"
2-3
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "displayed" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The "displayed" string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to "00"
(for "dispatched") received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than "displayed" (01) causes a problem, change the setting to "01" to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
4 0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail,
which contains the media accept feature field.
D555 70 SM
Bit Switches
5-6 Not Used
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.

0: 200 x 200
7 1: 400 x 400
The "1" setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have
enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400
resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings) [ SP No. 1-102-004]
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the
RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
0 or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to
determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Subject corresponding to mail post database

0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following
three cases:
1 1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending, delivery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done.
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up
for memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when
SM 71 D555
Bit Switches
operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving

transmissions).
2-7 Not Used
Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive

transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
0 For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a
broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
I-Fax Automatic Re-dial

Setting Determines whether the I-fax automatically redials
1
0: OFF when an error occurs.
1: ON
2-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-007]
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-008]
D555 72 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF
stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and
also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF
0-7 memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received
mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the

amount of memory.
This setting determines the number of retries

when connection and transmission fails due to
4-7 Restrict TX Retries
errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-011]
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-012]
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-013]
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-014]
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-015]
I-fax Switch 0F [SP No. 1-102-016]
SM 73 D555
Bit Switches
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
0 output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
Signature for the SMTP
1 This setting determines whether a signature is put on an e-mail via SMTP.

0: No signature
1: Signature
This setting determines whether an e-mail via SMTP is encrypted.

2 0: Not encrypted
1: Encrypted
3-7 Not used
D555 74 SM
Bit Switches
4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Printer Switch 00 [SP No. 1-103-001]
0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed

in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only
a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd
page.
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two
pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom
Select page separation marks
right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed
0 0: Off
in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
1: On
This helps the user to identify pages that

have been split because the size of the
paper is smaller than the size of the
document received. (When A5 is used to
print an A4 size document, for example.)
Repetition of data when the 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the

received page is longer than previous page are repeated at the top of the next
1 the printer paper page.
0: Off 0: The next page continues from where the
1: On previous page stopped without any repeated text.
This switch is only effective when user parameter

Prints the date and time on 02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages received fax messages) is enabled.
2
0: Disabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed
1: Enabled date and time at the bottom of each received
page.
SM 75 D555
Bit Switches
Maximum print width used in

the setup protocol
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = Not used These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
3-4
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = A3 switch 01 is "1".
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = B4
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1 = A4
0: The machine informs the transmitting machine

of the print width depending on the paper size
Received message width available from the paper feed stations.
restriction in the protocol Refer to the table on the next page for how the
7 signal to the sender machine chooses the paper width used in the
0: Disabled setup protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: Enabled 1: The machine informs the transmitting machine
of the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3
and 4 above.
D555 76 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
1st paper feed station usage

for fax printing
0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
2nd paper feed station usage messages and reports.
for fax printing 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
1
0: Enabled for printing fax messages and reports.
1: Disabled
3rd paper feed station usage Do not disable usage for a paper feed
for fax printing station which has been specified by User

2 Parameter Switch 0F (15), or which is
0: Enabled
1: Disabled used for the Specified Cassette Selection
feature.
4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
3
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
SM 77 D555
Bit Switches
0: Incoming pages are printed without length

reduction.
Length reduction of received
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits
data
0 4 to 7)
0: Disabled
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
1: Enabled
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
Page separation threshold (with reduction

disabled with switch 03-0 above).
Page separation setting when For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is
sub scan compression is the selected paper size:
4-7 forbidden If the received document is 10 mm or less longer
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page
Default: 6 mm prints.
If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4,
then the document is split into 2 pages.
D555 78 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
Printer Switch 04
D555
SP No. 1-103-005
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0
above.
<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
"N" is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0-4
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
place.
Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = 4 mm
5-6
Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = 10 mm
Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = 15 mm
Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Not used
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 79 D555
Bit Switches
Printing while a paper cassette

is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is
enabled.
Cross reference
0 0: Printing will not start
Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper
size selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.
List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report
for broadcasting 1: Only destinations where communication failure
4 0: All destinations occurred are printed on the Communication
1: Only destinations where Failure Report.
communication failure
occurred
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
D555 80 SM
Bit Switches
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 81 D555
Bit Switches
Printer Switch 0E [SP No. 1-103-015]
0: A paper size that has the same width as the

Paper size selection priority
received data is selected first.
0 0: Width
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
1: Length
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
Paper size selected for

This switch determines which paper size is selected
printing A4 width fax data
1 for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine
0: 8.5" x 11" size
has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page

separation to print a received fax message, the
Page separation
machine does not print the message (Substitute
2 0: Enabled
Reception is used).
1: Disabled
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
Printing the sample image on

reports
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0
"Same size" means the sample image is printed at
= The upper half only
100%, even if page separation occurs.
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set
3-4 = 50% reduction in sub-scan
to "0" to enable this switch.
only
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0
this feature.
= Same size
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1
= Not used
D555 82 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
D555
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
7 (Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F [SP No. 1-103-016]
Smoothing feature
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = Disabled (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
0-1 Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = Disabled receives halftone images from other
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = Enabled manufacturers fax machines frequently.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = Not used
Duplex printing
1: The machine always prints received fax
2 0: Disabled
messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
Binding direction for Duplex

printing 0: Sets the binding for the left edge of the stack.
3
0: Left binding 1: Sets the binding for the top of the stack.
1: Top binding
SM 83 D555
Bit Switches
4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES
Communication Switch 00 [SP No. 1-104-001]
Compression modes available

in receive mode
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = MH only These bits determine the compression capabilities
0-1 Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = MH/MR/MMR T.30 protocol.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1
= MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Compression modes available

in transmit mode
Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 0 = MH only These bits determine the compression capabilities
2-3 Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR to be used in the transmission and to be declared
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 0 = MH/MR/MMR in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 1
= MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
JBIG compression method:

Reception
Change the setting when communication
5 0: Only basic supported
problems occur using JBIG compression.
1: Basic and optional both
supported
JBIG compression method:

Transmission Change the setting when communication
6
0: Basic mode priority problems occur using JBIG compression.
1: Optional mode priority
D555 84 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

ECM communications.
0
0: Off 1: On In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression
are switched off automatically.
(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without

sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
dialed telephone number. This does not work
when manually dialed.
Wrong connection prevention
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the
method
last 4 digits are compared.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None
2-3 (1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 8 digit CSI
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = 4 digit CSI
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = CSI/RTI
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will
always go ahead.
This function does not work when dialing

is done from the external telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
Maximum printable page

length available
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 0 = No limit
6-7 the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 1 = B4 (364 mm)
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 0 = A4 (297 mm)
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 1 = Not used
SM 85 D555
Bit Switches
If there are more consecutive error lines in the

received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response. The Low and High
threshold values depend on the sub-scan
resolution, and are as follows.
G3 Burst error threshold
0
0: Low 1: High 100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)
200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)
300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)
400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)
Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
1
0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
Treatment of pages received

with errors during G3
reception
2 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is

Hang-up decision when a
received.
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
3 received during G3 immediate
receives RTN or PIN.
transmission
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
ECM is being used.
D555 86 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.

0-7 retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Adjusts the interval of the I-fax dialing.

The interval of I-fax dialing is calculated by
0-7 IP-Fax dial interval setting following formula.
[Interval time = specified value with this switch x
0.2 msec]
Communication Switch 0A [SP No. 1-104-011]
Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
1: From page 1 normal memory transmission.
SM 87 D555
Bit Switches
Communication Switch 0B [SP No. 1-104-012]
Print setting when receiving a 0: The machine does not print fax data.
4
request to forward a fax 1: The machine prints fax data.
Communication Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0D [SP No. 1-104-014]
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes

(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The available memory The machine refers to this setting before each fax
threshold, below which ringing reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
0-7 detection (and therefore below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
reception into memory) is any fax messages.
disabled If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E [SP No. 1-104-015]
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
Minimum interval between (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
0-7
automatic dialing attempts This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
D555 88 SM
Bit Switches
Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Memory transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
0-7 01 – FE (Hex) times
attempts to the same
destination
Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
Memory transmission: Interval

0-7 between dialing attempts to 01 – FF (Hex) minutes
the same destination
Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch

format are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
Inch-to-mm conversion during
conversion.
0 transmission
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or
stored data in the SAF memory to the format
SM 89 D555
Bit Switches
which was specified in the set-up protocol

(DIS/NSF) before transmission.
Available unit of resolution in

which fax messages are
For the best performance, do not change the
received
factory settings.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = mm
6-7 The setting determined by these bits is informed to
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = inch
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = mm and inch
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
(default)
Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)
SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker's

0 0: Disabled machine using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal
1: Enabled is disabled.
SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker's

1 0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
PWD reception
0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
2 0: Disabled
signal reception.
1: Enabled
D555 90 SM
Bit Switches
1: The machine sets multiple PSTN dial-in number
Type C2551
Fax Option
PSTN dial-in routing setting
in the PSTN dial-in lien and transfers received
D555
5 0: OFF
data of each PSTN dial-in number to each
1: ON
address.
Action when there is no box

with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
7 Change this setting when the customer requires.
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
IP-Fax dial-in routing selection 1: Transfers receiving data to each IP-Fax dial-in
5 0: Off number.
1: On IP-Fax dial-in number is 4 digit-number.
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B [SP No. 1-104-028]
Extension access code (0 to 7) If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to "1" to disable V.8.
0-7 0: On Example: If "0" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1: Off to 1. When the machine detects "0" as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
SM 91 D555
Bit Switches
protocol. (Alternatively, if "3" is the PSTN access

code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C [SP No. 1-104-029]
Refer to communication switch 1B.

Extension access code (8 and Example: If "8" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off to 1. When the machine detects "8" as the first
0-1
0: On dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
1: Off protocol. (If "9" is the PSTN access code, use bit
1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
D555 92 SM
Bit Switches
4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
G3 Switch 00 [SP No. 1-105-001]
Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Disabled (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Up to Phase the T.30 protocol.
1
B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Not used reset these bits after testing.
Monitor speaker during

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
2 memory transmission
transmission.
G3 mode selection for direct

line 1: G3 communication through the direct line is
6
0: Off enabled.
1:On
G3 Switch 01 [SP No. 1-105-002]
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
DIS frame length not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
4
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
SM 93 D555
Bit Switches
Forbid CED/AMsam output Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless
6 0: Off communication problem is caused by a CED or
1: On (Forbid output) ANSam transmission.
G3 Switch 02 [SP No. 1-105-003]
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can

G3 protocol mode used only communicate with machines that send
0 0: Standard and non-standard T.30-standard frames only.
1: Standard only 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile

7
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
G3 Switch 03 [SP No. 1-105-004]
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same

DIS detection number
DIS frame twice.
(Echo countermeasure)
0 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
0: 1
the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
1: 2
line.
1 Not Used Do not change the settings.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

V.8 protocol Note:
2 0: Disabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
1: Enabled bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4
kbps or lower.
D555 94 SM
Bit Switches
ECM frame size
Type C2551
Fax Option
3 0: 256 bytes Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.
D555
1: 64 bytes
When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

CTC transmission conditions
mode at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps;
0: After one PPR signal
0: The machine sends a CTC to drop back the
4 received
modem rate after receiving a PPR.
1: After four PPR signals
1:The machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received (ITU-T standard)
modem rate after receiving four PPRs.
Modem rate used for the next

1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall back
page after receiving a negative
5 before sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN)
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 Not Used Do not change the settings
This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in

Select detection of reverse
ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
polarity in ringing
7 ringing). Do not change this setting
0: Off
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)
G3 Switch 04 [SP No. 1-105-005]
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
Training error detection If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
0-3
threshold below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
SM 95 D555
Bit Switches
G3 Switch 05 [SP No. 1-105-006]
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps
0 0 0 1 2.4k
0 0 1 0 4.8k
0 0 1 1 7.2k
0 1 0 0 9.6k
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
0 1 0 1 12.0k
transmission.
0 1 1 0 14.4k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if
you need to change this for specific receivers.
0-3 0 1 1 1 16.8k
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected,
1 0 0 0 19.2k V.8 protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6k
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0k
1 0 1 1 26.4k
1 1 0 0 28.8k
1 1 0 1 31.2k
1 1 1 0 33.6k
Other settings - Not used
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or

7.2 kbps.
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29
4-5 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17
speeds.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V.34
D555 96 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
G3 Switch 06 [SP No. 1-105-007]
Initial Rx modem rate
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps
0 0 0 1 2.4k
0 0 1 0 4.8k
0 0 1 1 7.2k
0 1 0 0 9.6k
These bits set the initial starting
0 1 0 1 12.0k modem rate for reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds
0 1 1 0 14.4k
pose problems during reception.
0-3 0 1 1 1 16.8k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
selected, V.8 protocol should be
1 0 0 0 19.2k
disabled manually.
1 0 0 1 21.6k Cross reference:
1 0 1 0 24.0k
1 0 1 1 26.4k
1 1 0 0 28.8k
1 1 0 1 31.2k
1 1 1 0 33.6k
SM 97 D555
Bit Switches
Modem types available for reception
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
V.27ter, The setting of these bits is used to

0 0 1 0 inform the transmitting terminal of the
V.29
available modem type for the machine
V.27ter, in receive mode.
4-7 0 0 1 1
V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol
V.27ter, must be disabled manually.

0 1 0 0 Cross reference:
V.29, V.17
V.27ter,
0 1 0 1 V.29, V.17,
V.34
G3 Switch 07 [SP No. 1-105-008]
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher

frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
PSTN cable equalizer Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
(tx mode: Internal) specific receivers.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium Communication error
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = High Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.
D555 98 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
D555
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
PSTN cable equalizer
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
(rx mode: Internal)
the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None
2-3 Communication error with error codes such as
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Low
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Medium
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = High
This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.
PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at "1".

(rx mode: External)
4
0: Disabled This setting is not effective in V.34
1: Enabled communications.
0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone
Parameter selection for dial
detection.
tone
1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with
6 detection
SRAM (69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the
0: Normal parameter
dial tone cannot be detected when the "Normal
1: Specific parameter
parameter: 0" is selected.
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 99 D555
Bit Switches
G3 Switch 0A [SP No. 1-105-011]
Maximum allowable carrier

drop during image data
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier
reception
drop time at the non ECM mode.
0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 (ms)
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 400 (ms)
frequent.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 800 (ms)
Select cancellation of
high-speed RX if carrier signal This switch setting determines if high-speed
2 lost while receiving receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when
0: Off receiving during non-ECM mode
1: On
3 Not used Do not change the settings
This bit set the maximum interval between EOL

Maximum allowable frame
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
interval during image data
4 between ECM frames from the other end.
reception.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a

computer, there may be a delay in receiving
page data after the local machine accepts
set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the
Reconstruction time for the first
T.30 recommendation. But, if this delay occurs,
6 line in receive mode
set this bit to 1 to give the sending machine
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line
should come within 6 s of CFR.
D555 100 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
G3 Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E [SP No 1-105-015]
Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the
3-second CNG interval.
3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms
0-7
High order bit 3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) < N < FF (2250
ms)
3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
Low order bit
3000 + 50 x Nms 00 (3000 ms) < N < 0E (3700 ms)
G3 Switch 0F [SP No. 1-105-016]
Alarm when an error occurred

in Phase C or later If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
0
0: Disabled error communication, change this bit to "1".
1: Enabled
Alarm when the handset is

off-hook at the end of If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
1 communication handset is off-hook at the end of fax
0: Disabled communication, change this bit to "1".
1: Enabled
4 Sidaa manual calibration 1: manually calibrates for communication with a
SM 101 D555
Bit Switches
setting line, whose current change occurs such as an

0: Off optical fiber line.
1: On
D555 102 SM
Bit Switches
4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
IP Fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-111-001]
IP Fax Transport
1 Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection

2 Selects single data port.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data

3 port) selection Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax Gatekeeper Enables/disables the communication via the

4
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse

5 Reverses the T30 bit signal.
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does

IP Fax max bit rate setting not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
0: Not affected, 1: Affected When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects
the value of the DIS/DCS.
When "0" is selected, fax data is received

without checking the telephone number.
IP Fax received telephone number When "1" is selected, fax data is received
confirmation only when confirming that the telephone
7
0: No confirmation, 1: number from the sender matches the
Confirmation registered telephone number in this
machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is
disconnected.
IP-Fax Switch 01
SM 103 D555
Bit Switches
Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting
if too many transmission errors are occurring
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Setting
on the network.
0 0 0 0 Level 0 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise
this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing
0 0 0 1 Level 1
0-3 the delay time allows the recovery of more
0 0 1 0 Level 2 lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number
0 0 1 1 Level 3
of redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary
4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting switch combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).
D555 104 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse

method is decided by the maker code.
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
0 0: Maker code setting
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
1: Internal bit switch setting
When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
IP Fax transmission speed setting

Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
1 0: Modem speed
communication.
1: No limitation
This bit switch sets the transport that has

SIP transport setting
priority for receiving IP Fax data.
2 0: TCP
This function is activated only when the
1: UDP
sender has both TCP and UDP.
CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection

3 0: No CCM connection call message with H.323 or no tunneled
1: CCM connection H.245 is transmitted via CCM.
0: This answers the INVITE message from

Message reception selection from the SIP server not registered for the
non-registered SIP server machine.
4
0: Answer 1: This does not receive the INVITE
1: Not answer message from the SIP server not registered
for the machine and send a refusal message.
0: This does not limit the type of the image

compression with ECM communication.
ECM communication setting
1: When the other end machine is Ciscco,
5 0: No limit for image compression
this permits the image compression other
1: Limit for image compression
than JBIG or MMR with ECM
communication.
SM 105 D555
Bit Switches
Effective field limitation for G3

Limits the effective field for standard G3
0 standard function information
function information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
Switching between G3 standard

and G3 non standard Enables/disables switching between G3
1
0: Enable switching standard and G3 non-standard.
1: G3 standard only
2 Not used. Do not change this setting.
ECM frame size selection at

3 transmitting Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
DIS detection times for echo

Sets the number of times for DIS to detect
4 prevention
echoes.
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
When "0" is selected, the transmission

CTC transmission selection
condition is decided by error frame numbers.
5 0: PPRx1
When "1" is selected, the transmission
1: PPRx4
condition is based on the ITU-T method.
Shift down setting at receiving

Selects whether to shift down when negative
6 negative code
codes are received.
0: OFF, 1: ON
D555 106 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
1 Sets the TCF error threshold level.

TCF error threshold [00 to 0f]
2 The default is "1111" (0fH).
Modem bit rate setting for transmission

Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0-3 0 0 1 1 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps
0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps
Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V29
4-5
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V17
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V34*
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
SM 107 D555
Bit Switches
Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 0 4800 bps
0-3
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps
0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
0 0 0 1 V27ter
0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29
4-7 V27ter, V29, V33

0 0 1 1
(invalid)
0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17
V27ter, V29, V17,

0 1 0 1
V34*
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
D555 108 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to

0
0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S).
DCN transmission setting at T1

Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
1 timeout
timeout.
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
Hang up setting at DIS reception

disabled Sets whether the machine disconnects after
3
0: No hang up DIS reception.
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done
4
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times at the same bit rate.
Space CSI transmission setting at When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
5 no CSI registration When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted all spaces.
T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 35 sec -
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 40 sec
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 50 sec
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 60 sec
T4 timer adjustment
2-3 Adjust the T4 timer. -
SM 109 D555
Bit Switches
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 3 sec

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 3.5 sec
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = 4 sec
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = 5 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the

T0 timer adjustment
interval between "setup" data transmission
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = 75 sec
and T.38 phase decision. If your destination
4-5 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = 120 sec
return is late on the network or G3 fax return
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = 180 sec
is late, adjust the longer interval timer.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = 240 sec
D555 110 SM
Bit Switches
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Network I/F setting for SIP

connection Selects the connection type (IPV4 or IPV6)
0
0: IPv4 to connect to the SIP server.
1: IPv6.
0: The I/F setting for fax communication

Network I/F setting for Fax
follows the setting for SIP server connection.
communication
1: The negotiation between the SIP server
1 0: Same setting as SIP server
and the device decides whether IPv4 or IPv6
connection
is used for the I/F setting for fax
1: Automatic setting
communication.
0: Disables the record-route function of the

Record-route setting
SIP server.
2 0: Disable
1: Enables the record-route function of the
1: Enable
SIP server.
re-INVITE transmission delay

timer setting
Bit 4 Bit 3
This changes the interval for transmit
3-4 0 0 No delay re-INVITE after receiving the ACK message
0 1 1 sec transmitted by T.38 device.
1 0 2 sec
1 1 3 sec
5-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.
SM 111 D555
NCU Parameters
4.4 NCU PARAMETERS
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each
country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-101), but some
can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104
and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in
hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.

Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for the
first optional G3 interface unit and from “5” to “7” (e.g. 680700) for the settings for the
second optional G3 interface unit.
Address Function
Country/Area code for NCU parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country Country
Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
/Area /Area
France 00 00 USA 17 11
Germany 01 01 Asia 18 12
680500 UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14
Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15
Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16
Belgium 05 05 New Zealand 26 17
Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18
Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19
Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A
D555 112 SM
NCU Parameters
Address Function
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B
Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C
Switzerland 11 0B Brazil 29 1D
Portugal 12 0C Turkey 32 20
Holland 13 0D Greece 33 21
Spain 14 0E Hungary 34 22
Israel 15 0F Czech 35 23
Poland 36 24
Address Function Unit Remarks
680501 Line current detection time Line current detection is

disabled.
680502 Line current wait time
20 ms Line current is not
detected if 680501
680503 Line current drop detect time
contains FF.
PSTN dial tone frequency upper

680504 If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PSTN dial tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680505
limit (low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680507
limit (low byte)
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time If 680508 contains

FF(H), the machine
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) 20 ms
pauses for the pause
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) time (address 68050D /
SM 113 D555
NCU Parameters
PSTN dial tone continuous tone 68050E).

68050B
time Italy: See Note 2.
PSTN dial tone permissible drop

68050C
time
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)

-
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ring-back tone detection Detection is disabled if

68050F 20 ms
time this contains FF.
PSTN ring-back tone off detection

680510 20 ms -
time
PSTN detection time for silent

680511 period after ring-back tone 20 ms -
detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent

680512 period after ring-back tone 20 ms -
detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680514
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680516
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680518
limit (low byte)
D555 114 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
PABX dial tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
68051A
limit (low byte)
68051B PABX dial tone detection time
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)

If 68051B contains FF,
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
the machine pauses for
PABX dial tone continuous tone the pause time (680520 /
68051E
time 20 ms 680521).
PABX dial tone permissible drop

68051F
time
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)

-
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses
PABX ringback tone off detection contain FF(H), tone

680523 20 ms detection is disabled.
time
PABX detection time for silent

680524 period after ringback tone 20 ms
detected (LOW) If both addresses
contain FF(H), tone
PABX detection time for silent detection is disabled.
680525 period after ringback tone 20 ms
detected (HIGH)
PABX busy tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680527
limit (low byte)
680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses
SM 115 D555
NCU Parameters
limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone

detection is disabled.
PABX busy tone frequency lower
680529
limit (low byte)
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2 20 ms
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

-
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4 20 ms
Busy tone continuous tone

680532
detection time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or
OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
680533 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
International dial tone frequency

upper limit (high byte)
International dial tone frequency detection is disabled.
680535
upper limit (low byte)
International dial tone frequency If both addresses

680536 Hz (BCD)
lower limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
D555 116 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
International dial tone frequency detection is disabled.
680537
lower limit (low byte)
International dial tone detection

680538
time
International dial tone reset time

680539
(LOW) If 680538 contains FF,
the machine pauses for
International dial tone reset time
68053A the pause time (68053D
(HIGH)
/ 68053E).
International dial tone continuous Belgium: See Note 2.
68053B 20 ms
tone time
International dial tone permissible

68053C
drop time
International dial wait interval

68053D
(LOW)
-
International dial wait interval
68053E
(HIGH)
Country dial tone upper frequency

68053F If both addresses
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone
Country dial tone upper frequency detection is disabled.
680540
limit (LOW)
Hz (BCD)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone
Country dial tone lower frequency detection is disabled.
680542
limit (LOW)
680543 Country dial tone detection time

If 680543 contains FF,
Country dial tone reset time the machine pauses for
680544 20 ms
(LOW) the pause time (680548 /
680549).
680545 Country dial tone reset time
SM 117 D555
NCU Parameters
(HIGH)
Country dial tone continuous tone

680546 - -
time
Country dial tone permissible drop

680547
time
20 ms -
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
See Notes 3.
68054A DFU 1 ms SP2-103-012
(parameter 11).
See Note 3.
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-013
(parameter 12).
See Note 3.
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-014
(parameter 13).
See Notes 3.
SP2-103-015
68054D DFU 1 ms (parameter 14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
See Note 3.
Minimum pause between dialed
68054E SP2-103-016
digits (pulse dial mode)
20 ms (parameter 15).
Time waited when a pause is SP2-103-017

68054F
entered at the operation panel (parameter 16)
SP2-103-018
680550 DTMF tone on time
1 ms (parameter 17).
680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019
D555 118 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
(parameter 18).
SP2-103-020
680552 DTMF signal TX level -0.5 dBm (parameter 19).
See Note 5.
SP2-103-021
(parameter 20).
Tone attenuation value difference
The setting must be less
between high frequency tone and
680553 -0.5 dBm than –5dBm, and should
low frequency tone in DTMF
not exceed the setting at
signals
680552h above.
See Note 5.
SP2-103-022
DFU -N x 0.5
680554 (parameter 21). See
DFU parameter 22 –3.5 dBm
Note 5.
Do not change the

680556 Not used -
settings.
Time between 68054Dh (NCU This parameter takes

680557 parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU 1 ms effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.
Do not change the

680558 Not used -
setting.
Grounding time (ground start The Gs relay is closed

680559 20 ms
mode) for this interval.
The OHDI relay is open

68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms
for this interval.
International dial access code

68055B For a code of 100:
(High)
BCD 68055B - F1
International dial access code 68055C - 00
68055C
(Low)
SM 119 D555
NCU Parameters
This time is waited for

each pause input after
the PSTN access code.
If this address contains
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms FF[H], the pause time
stored in address
68054F is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm
Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm
68055E
cadence detection enable flags Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.
68055F
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
680564
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:

680565 – FF
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680566 - FF
680567
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680571
Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-003

680572
frequency: range 1, upper limit (parameter 02).
Acceptable ringing signal 1000/ N SP2-103-004

680573
frequency: range 1, lower limit (Hz). (parameter 03).

680574
frequency: range 2, upper limit (parameter 04).
D555 120 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
680575
frequency: range 2, lower limit (parameter 05).
SP2-103-007
Number of rings until a call is (parameter 06).
680576 1
detected The setting must not be
zero.
See Note 4.
Minimum required length of the
680577 20 ms SP2-103-008
first ring
(parameter 07).
Minimum required length of the SP2-103-009

680578 20 ms
second and subsequent rings (parameter 08).
Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-010

680579
(LOW) (parameter 09).
20 ms
Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011 (parameter
68057A
(HIGH) 10).
68057B
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680580
Interval between dialing the last

digit and switching the Oh relay
680581 over to the external telephone 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
when dialing from the operation
panel in handset mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
680582 -
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
SM 121 D555
NCU Parameters
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used
680583
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
6805A0
Acceptable CED detection

6805A1 If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte)
BCD (Hz) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
6805A2
frequency upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CED detection

frequency lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
6805A4
frequency lower limit (low byte)
20 ms ± 20
6805A5 CED detection time Factory setting: 200 ms
ms
Acceptable CNG detection

frequency upper limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection detection is disabled.
6805A7
frequency upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CNG detection

frequency lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection detection is disabled.
6805A9
frequency lower limit (low byte)
Do not change the

6805AA Not used -
setting.
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms
D555 122 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
The data is coded in the
Number of CNG cycles required
6805AD - same way as address
for detection
680533.
Do not change the

6805AE Not used -
settings.
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805AF (800Hz) detection frequency
upper limit (high byte) If both addresses
Acceptable AI short protocol tone detection is disabled.
6805B0 (800Hz) detection frequency
upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805B1 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte) If both addresses
Hz(BCD) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable AI short protocol tone detection is disabled.
6805B2 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short

6805B3 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
SP2-103-002
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -dBm
(parameter 01).
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

6805B5
level See Note 7.
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

6805B6
level See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission

6805B8 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level
SM 123 D555
NCU Parameters
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission

6805B9 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N

6805BD
signal detection level) (dBm)
6805BE to Do not change the

Not used -
6805C6 settings.
Bits 0 to 3 – Not used

6805C7 Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6805C8 to Do not change the

Not used -
6805D9 settings.
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
1: Maximum wait time

for post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can
6805E0 bit Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s be changed to 30 s.
3 message 1: 30 s Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
D555 124 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
0 RT=0 (Low)
Bit 1
Bit 1 sets the level 1 RT=1 (High)
of the call signal, Bit
6805E4 0 RZ=0 (High) -
3 sets the call
signal impedance Bit 3 RZ=1
1
(Composite)
0 Auto
Bit 0 sets the ring
Bit 0
detection method, 1 Fixed
Bit 1 sets the ring
detection method 0 Use RDTP
Bit 1
when fixed. 1 Use RDTN
Here is a summary of the voltages for the

If any setting is changed,
detection of off-hook for DP detection.
select a setting that is
6805E5
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 - higher than the default
setting.
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2.75 V
0 0 1 0 5.5 V
1 0 0 0 22 V
1 1 1 1 41.25 V
SM 125 D555
NCU Parameters
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is
used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this
parameter.
5. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol)
refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the
setting at 6805B6h.
D555 126 SM
Dedicated Transmission Parameters
Type C2551
4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Fax Option
D555
There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters
allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that
terminal's fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that
number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key Operator>
Address Book Management).
3. Select the address book that you want to program.
4. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then
press "Start". Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.
5. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to
change.
6. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
7. Select the next switch: press "Next" or Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct
switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6.
8. After the setting is changed, press "OK".
9. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
4.5.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
SM 127 D555
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
Tx level
Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

If communication with a particular
0 0 0 0 0 0 remote terminal often contains

errors, the signal level may be
0 0 0 0 1 –1
inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 1 0 –2 communications with that terminal

0-4 until the results are better.
0 0 0 1 1 –3 If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU
0 0 1 0 0 –4 parameter 01 setting is used.
Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
0 1 1 1 1 –15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
Use a higher setting if there is signal

loss at higher frequencies because
of the length of wire between the
Cable equalizer modem and the telephone exchange
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None when calling the number stored in
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low this Quick/Speed Dial.
5-7
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium Also, try using the cable equalizer if
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High one or more of the following
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error
codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs
D555 128 SM
frequently.
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Do not use settings other
than listed on the left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit
switch setting is used.
Switch 02
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2400
0 0 1 0 4800
If training with a particular remote terminal
0 0 1 1 7200
always takes too long, the initial modem rate
0 1 0 0 9600 may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx
modem rate using these bits.
0 1 0 1 12000
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch
0-3 0 1 1 0 14400 04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
0 1 1 1 16800
Do not use settings other than listed
1 0 0 0 19200 on the left. If the setting is
"Disabled", the bit switch setting is
1 0 0 1 21600
used.
1 0 1 0 24000
1 0 1 1 26400
1 1 0 0 28800
1 1 0 1 31200
1 1 1 0 33600
SM 129 D555
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used
Switch 03
Inch-mm conversion before tx

The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0
scanning. If "inch only" is selected, the printed
= Inch-mm conversion
copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if
0-1 available
that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Disabled
DIS/NSF detection method

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
= First DIS or NSF
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
= Second DIS or NSF
used.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = Disabled
If transmissions to a specific destination always

end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
V.8 protocol
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
4 0: Off
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
1: Disabled
used.
Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are
in transmit mode informed to the other terminal during transmission.
5
0: MH only If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
D555 130 SM
Type C2551
Fax Option
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
D555
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
ECM during transmission the (0, 0) setting.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off
6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 = Disabled disabled.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch
setting is used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 131 D555
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
MH Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MH compression on and off for files
0
0: Off attached to e-mails for sending.
1: On
MR Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MR compression on and off for files
1
1: On
MMR Compression mode

for e-mail attachments Switches MMR compression on and off for files
2
1: On
Designates the bits to

reference for
The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
compression method of
7 Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
e-mail attachments
selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.
D555 132 SM
Type C2551
Fax Option
Switch 01
D555
Original width of e-mail

attachment: A4 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
0
0: Off A4.
1: On

attachment: B4 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
1
0: Off B4.
1: On

attachment: A3 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
2
0: Off A3.
1: On

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7 of e-mail attachments Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
SM 133 D555
Switch 02
Line resolution of e-mail

attachment: 200 x 100 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
0
0: Off 200 x100.
1: On

1
0: Off 200 x 200.
1: On

2
0: Off 200 x 400.
1: On
3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4
0: Off 400 x 400.
1: On

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7 of e-mail attachments Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.
D555 134 SM
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
Switch 04
If the other ends have the addresses, which have

Full mode address the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine
selection determines them as full mode standard machines.
0 0: Full mode address This machine attaches the "demand of reception
1: No full mode (simple confirmation" to a message when transmitting.
mode) This machine updates the reception capability to
the address book when receiving.
Switch 05
Directr transmission
selection to SMTP server Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to
0
0: ON SMTP server.
1: OFF
SM 135 D555
Service RAM Addresses
4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Do not change the settings which are marked as "Not used" or "Read only".
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine's serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
D555 136 SM
Bit 1: Not used
Type C2551
Fax Option
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
D555
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender's name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end,
toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used
Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On
SM 137 D555
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.

Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off,
1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive)
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well
log) – up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is
pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Not used
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
D555 138 SM
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Type C2551
Fax Option
Other settings Not used
D555
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not
available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the "Add" button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for
broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press "Start" key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external
telephone,
0: displays "Cannot detect original size". 1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Japan only
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter
list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch
0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
SM 139 D555
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0:
Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when
error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used
Bit 0: Not used
D555 140 SM
Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)
Type C2551
Fax Option
Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first
D555
Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)
Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not
used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C)
Xxxxx
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D)
xxxxxx
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not
used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address,
4. Folder
1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax
number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station's fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) – Not used
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
SM 141 D555
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a
stop code (00[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) – Hour
680385(H) – Minute
680386(H) – Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
680406 to 68040A – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
D555 142 SM
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
Type C2551
Fax Option
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
D555
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)
6805DE
68918E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68920E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68928E(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68930E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68938E(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68940E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
68AFCA(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
68AFCCH) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
68AFCE(H) - RAS port number
68AFD0(H) - Gatekeeper port number
68AFD2(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
68AFD4(H) - Port number of SIP server
68AFD6(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
68AFD7(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SM 143 D555
68AFD8(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

68AFD9(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H) - Not used
69ED6A(H) to 69ED92(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69ED6A(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED72(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED7A(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED82(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED8A(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED92(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6BEBFE(H) - 6BEC1E (H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8,
0x00]
6BEBFE(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6BEBFF(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper Limit (Low)
6BEC00(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (High)
6BEC01(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (Low)
6BEC02(H) –Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6BEC03 to 6BEC04 – Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults
Area 6BEC03 6BEC04
NA F4 01
EU F4 01
ASIA F4 01
6BEC05(H) – Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32
6BEC06(H) – Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11
D555 144 SM
5. SPECIFICATIONS
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
5.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1.1 FCU
Type: Desktop type transceiver
PSTN
Circuit:
PABX
Connection: Direct couple
Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(Single-sided document)
Original Size:
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
G3:
8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 x 7.7 lines/mm, 200 x 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 x 15.4 lines/mm (Fine character: optional),
Resolution:
16 x 15.4 lines/mm, 400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine character:
optional)
Optional Expansion Memory required
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for

Transmission Time: an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard
resolution
SM 145 D555
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
V.34, V.17 (TCM), V.29, V.17 (QAM),

Modulation:
V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FSK)
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate: 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
With ECM: 0 ms/line

I/O Rate:
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB
Memory Capacity:
Page Memory
Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 8 MB (Print 4 MB + Scanner:
4 MB)
D555 146 SM
5.1.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
Type C2551
Fax Option
D555
The following table shows the capabilities of each programmable items.
Item Max.
Total Destinations in Address Book 2000
Groups 100
Destination per Group 500
Destinations for All Files 500
Programs 100
Special Senders 30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the
Expansion Memory are installed.
Without the Expansion With the Expansion

Memory Memory
Memory Transmission file 400 400
Memory capacity for memory

transmission 320 2240
(See the Note below)
Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution, auto
image density mode, and Text mode.
SM 147 D555
IFAX Specifications
5.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Local area network

Connectivity: Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
IEEE802.11a/g, g (wireless LAN), 1000 Base-T
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi

Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
Resolution:
To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 4 must be set to "1".
1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Transmission Time:
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Document Size:
To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2
(A3) must be set to "1".
Single/multi-part
E-mail File Format: MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Transmission:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Protocol:
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
Data Rate:
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Authentication SMTP-AUTH
D555 148 SM
IFAX Specifications
Method: POP before SMTP
Type C2551
Fax Option
A-POP
D555
Remark: The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation.
Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also
be e-mail clients, or some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).
SM 149 D555
IP-FAX Specifications
5.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Local Area Network

Network: Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX
IEEE802.11a/g, g (wireless LAN), 1000 Base-T
8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200x100dpi (standard character),

8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200x200dpi (detail character),
8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion memory
Scan line density:
required),
16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine character: optional
expansion memory required)
Original size: Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)
Maximum scanning Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm

size: Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm
Transmission Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP

protocol: communication
Compatible
IP-Fax compatible machines
machines:
Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax

IP-Fax transmission through a network.
function: Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the
public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.
Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a

IP-Fax reception network.
function: Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public
telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.
D555 150 SM
Fax Unit Configuration
Type C2551
5.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
Fax Option
D555
Component Code No. Remarks
MBU 3
GWFCU D555 2 Included with the fax unit
Speaker 1
Expansion Memory G578 4 Optional for D555
Handset Type 1018 B433 - NA only. Also used with DI-C1
SM 151 D555

SERVICE MANUAL RICOH MPC2051 - MPC255 MS - v01

Uploaded by

SERVICE MANUAL RICOH MPC2051 - MPC255 MS - v01

Uploaded by

D104/D106

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

© 2011 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Ricoh Americas Corporation

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

D104/D06 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES

ARDF DF3030 (D366)

PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 (D425)

1 BIN TRAY BN3060 (D426)

SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 (D427)

INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 (D428)

INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 (D429)

FAX OPTION TYPE C2551 (D555)

BIN TRAY BN3060 (D426)

SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 (D427)

INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 (D428)

Important Safety Notices

Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer

Reference Material for Maintenance

Before Installation, Maintenance

Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments

 After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the

 Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.

 Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)

Power Plug and Power Cord

 Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.

Points to Confirm with Operators

Handling and Storing Toner

 Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable.

Safety Instructions for this Machine

Health Safety Conditions

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

 The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

 Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

See "Appendices" for the following information:

1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

1.2.1 MACHINE D104/D106

Mainframe D104/D106 [1] D104: C1.5a, D106: C1.5c

Platen cover G329 [2] One from the two;

ARDF D366 [3] [3] is standard.

Side tray D427 [4] -

1-bin tray D426 [12]

Punch unit: 2/3

Envelope This option can be installed only in the tray 1 of

Item Machine code Remark

USB2.0/SD Slot Type G D556 -

Card Reader Bracket D547 -

Fax Option Type C2551 D555 -

For NA model only: Requires the Fax

Gigabit Ethernet Type B D377-21 -

IEEE 1284 B679

File Format Converter D377-04

Optional Counter Interface

Key Counter Bracket A674 -

Postscript3 Unit Type

D556-12, -13, You can only install one of these in SD

Camera Direct Print Card

Browser Unit Type E D430-05, 06, 07 In SD card slot 2

1.3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.3.2 PAPER PATH

6. By-pass tray path

1. DF path 5. By-pass tray path

1.3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Scanner motor 10. Paper feed motor: T1

1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH

Machine D104/D106 is a successor model to Machine D038/D041. If you have experience

Security Card Standard Optional

VM Card Standard Optional

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

 Do not leave the toner bottle in a place directly exposed to sunlight.

2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS

After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the

Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.

Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)

Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.

Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable.

The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

Do not leave the toner bottle in a place directly exposed to sunlight.

Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.